CUPRA Formentor Owner's Manual

Inglés 5FF012720BH (06.21)

5FF012720BH

CUPRA FORMENTOR Inglés (06.21) OWNER’S MANUAL CUPRA FORMENTOR Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys Model: The following items were delivered YES NO with the vehicle: Vehicle Registration: On-board documentation Vehicle identification number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key or vehicle delivery: Correct working order of all keys was checked SEAT Official Service/CUPRA authorised service: Location:

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no Date: right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Signature of owner: Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. Service advisor: All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. Telephone: ❀ © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.06.21 Introduction

Thank you for your trust choosing a CUPRA WARNING vehicle. Read and always observe safety infor- With your new CUPRA, you will be able to en- mation concerning the passenger's joy a vehicle with state-of-the-art technolo- front airbag ››› page 33, Fitting and us- gy and top quality features. ing child seats. We recommend reading this Instruction Manual carefully to learn more about your vehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily driving. Information about handling is complemen- ted with instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we want to give you valuable advice and tips to drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting the environment. We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring. CUPRA The direction indicators (left, right, for- WARNING About this manual wards, backwards) in this manual refer to the travel direction of the vehicle unless other- Texts after this symbol contain informa- This instruction manual is valid for all variants wise stated. tion about safety and warn you about and versions of your CUPRA model. It de- possible accident or injury risks. scribes all equipment and models without This instruction manual has been written for specifying whether they are optional equip- left-hand drive vehicles. In right-hand drive CAUTION ment or model variants. As a result, equip- vehicles, the arrangement of the controls ment not fitted to your vehicle or only availa- differs partly from that shown in the illustra- Texts after this symbol indicate possible ble in certain countries may be described. tions or described in the texts. damage to the vehicle. Find out about your vehicle's equipment in Technical modifications to the vehicle or the documentation supplied with it and safety-critical issues that have arisen since For the sake of the environment please contact your CUPRA Specialised the time of going to press will be included in Service or SEAT Official SEAT Service if you Texts after this symbol contain informa- a supplement to the on-board documenta- require more detailed information. tion about the protection of the envi- tion. ronment. All information provided in instruction manual corresponds to the information available ® Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab- at the time of going to press. As the vehicle is sence of this symbol does not guaran- Note tee that the term is not a trademark. under continuous development, it may have Texts after this symbol contain addition- differences to the data included in this man-  It indicates that the section continues al information. ual. For this reason, no claims can be made on the next page. in the event of mismatching data, illustrations and descriptions. You can access the information in this manual using: Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times if you sell it or ● Thematic table of contents that follows the lend it to third parties. In addition, CUPRA manual’s general chapter structure. recommends resetting the infotainment sys- ● Visual table of contents that uses graphics tem to factory settings to delete all personal to indicate the pages containing “essential” data. information, which is detailed in the corre- Some details on the drawings may vary from sponding chapters. its vehicle and must be interpreted as a ● Alphabetical index with many terms and standard representation. synonyms to help you find information. Digital instruction manual Valid for the Dutch market The digital version of the manual can be Only CUPRA Specialized Services can repair found on the official CUPRA website: CUPRA vehicles and provide services under warranty.

Fig. 1 CUPRA website

● scan the QR code Fig. 1 ››› ● OR enter the following address in the navi- gator website:

http://www.cupraofficial.com/owners/cupra- car-model-manuals.html and select your vehicle.

Table of Contents

Jump start ...... 52 Seats and headrests ...... 128 Table of Contents Tow start and towing ...... 53 Adjusting seats ...... 128 Fuses and bulbs ...... 58 Headrest ...... 130 General views of the vehicle ...... 7 Fuses ...... 58 Seat functions ...... 131 Exterior view ...... 7 Changing bulbs ...... 61 Transport and practical equipment ...... 134 Exterior view ...... 8 Storing objects ...... 134 Overview (left hand drive) ...... 9 Operation ...... 63 Luggage compartment ...... 136 Overview (right hand drive) ...... 10 Controls and displays ...... 63 Roof carrier ...... 140 Interior view ...... 11 Interior view ...... 63 Storage compartment ...... 142 Instruments and warning/control Safety ...... 12 Power sockets ...... 145 lamps ...... 64 Safe driving ...... 12 Air conditioning ...... 147 Instrument panel ...... 64 Advice about driving ...... 12 Heating, ventilation and cooling ...... 147 Using the instrument panel ...... 80 Correct sitting position of vehicle occu- auxiliary heating (additional heating) ...... 156 Control lamps ...... 82 pants ...... 13 Stationary air conditioning ...... 159 Infotainment system ...... 85 Pedal area ...... 16 Multifunction steering wheel ...... 91 Infotainment system ...... 162 Seat belts ...... 16 Opening and closing ...... 92 Introduction ...... 162 The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . 16 Set of vehicle keys ...... 92 First steps ...... 162 How to properly adjust your seat belt ...... 19 Central locking ...... 95 Overview and controls ...... 166 Seat belt tensioners ...... 21 Anti-theft alarm system ...... 101 General instructions for use ...... 167 PreCrash system ...... 22 Doors ...... 104 Data transfer ...... 173 Airbag system ...... 23 Rear lid ...... 105 CUPRA CONNECT ...... 173 Brief introduction ...... 23 Window controls ...... 110 Full Link ...... 178 Operation of the airbags ...... 25 Sunroof ...... 112 WLAN access point ...... 182 Transporting children safely ...... 31 Lights ...... 114 Infotainment operation ...... 184 Child safety ...... 31 Vehicle lighting ...... 114 voice control ...... 184 Emergencies ...... 42 Interior lights ...... 121 Radio mode ...... 186 Self-help ...... 42 Visibility ...... 123 Media Mode ...... 190 Information, assistance and emergency Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper Navigation ...... 193 call service ...... 42 systems ...... 123 Telephone interface ...... 200 Emergency equipment ...... 43 Mirrors ...... 125 Multimedia ...... 206 Tyre repairs ...... 44 Sun protection ...... 128 Driving ...... 207 Changing a wheel ...... 46 Start and driving ...... 207 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 50 Starting and stopping the engine ...... 207 Driving with electric drive ...... 211 5 Table of Contents

Operating mode selection ...... 213 Peripheral view system (Top View Cam- Maintenance ...... 350 Start-Stop system ...... 214 era) ...... 286 Service ...... 350 Manual gearbox ...... 217 Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera) ...... 288 Service intervals ...... 350 DSG automatic transmission ...... 218 Towing bracket device ...... 291 Additional service offers ...... 352 Gear-change recommendation ...... 224 Trailer mode ...... 291 Warranty ...... 353 Hill Descent Control (HDC) ...... 225 Electrically unlocking trailer hook ...... 298 Vehicle maintenance ...... 353 Steering ...... 225 Retrofitting a towing bracket ...... 300 Maintenance and cleaning ...... 353 Driving modes (Drive Profile) ...... 226 Battery ...... 302 Accessories and modifications to the ve- Driving tips ...... 229 hicle ...... 359 High-voltage battery ...... 302 Driver assistance systems ...... 232 Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . 359 Safety instructions ...... 302 General notes ...... 232 Conservation of the high-voltage bat- ...... 361 Driver assistance sensors and cameras . . . . 233 Information for the user tery ...... 304 Cruise control system (CCS) ...... 236 Information for the user ...... 361 Charging settings in the infotainment sys- Speed limiter ...... 238 Information stored by the control units . . . . 361 tem ...... 305 emergency brake assistance system (Front Other important information ...... 361 Charging the high-voltage battery ...... 306 Assist) ...... 240 Information about the EU Directive Charging cable ...... 311 ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control ...... 244 2014/53/EU ...... 362 Proactive speed adjustment ...... 250 Practical tips ...... 315 Technical data ...... 367 Lane Assist ...... 252 Checking and refilling levels ...... 315 Indications about the technical data . . . . 367 Driving Assist (Travel Assist) ...... 254 Refuelling ...... 315 Important information ...... 367 Emergency Assist ...... 256 Fuel types ...... 317 Lane departure warning (Side Assist) with AdBlue® ...... 318 Index ...... 373 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) and door Engine management and emissions con- opening warning (Exit Assist) ...... 258 trol system ...... 320 Braking and parking ...... 264 Engine compartment ...... 322 Braking system ...... 264 Engine oil ...... 326 Stabilisation and brake assistance sys- Cooling system ...... 329 tems ...... 269 Brake fluid ...... 331 Parking ...... 273 Windscreen washer reservoir ...... 332 Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 274 12-volt battery ...... 333 Assisted parking system (Park Assist) ...... 274 Energy management ...... 337 Parking aid parking and manoeuvring Wheels ...... 339 (ParkPilot) ...... 281 Wheels and tyres ...... 339 Parking System Plus ...... 282 Tyre pressure monitor system ...... 346 Rear parking aid ...... 285 Spare wheel ...... 347 6 General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

Driving assistance sensors ››› page 232 A Levels control – Tow-start ››› page 54 1 Front multifunction camera – Oil page 326 ››› D Charging socket (hybrid vehicles) 2 Rear-view cameras “Area View” – Brake fluid page 331 ››› – Charging process display ››› page 309 3 Front camera “Area View” – Battery page 333 ››› – Emergency unlocking ››› page 311 4 Front radar B Bonnet 5 Park distance control sensors – Unlocking lever ››› page 324 6 Park assist sensor – Open/close ››› page 324

C Towing the vehicle – Towline anchorage page 56 ›››

7 General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

Driving assistance sensors ››› page 232 A Rear lid D Fuel tank 1 Rear view camera – Opening from outside ››› page 106 – Fuel capacity ››› page 367 2 Park distance control sensors – Emergency opening ››› page 110 – Open/Close cap ››› page 315 3 Rear radars B Towing the vehicle E Action in the event of a puncture 4 Park assist sensor – Towline anchorage ››› page 56 – Anti-puncture kit ››› page 44 – Tow-start ››› page 54 – Wheel change ››› page 46

C Opening and closing

– Doors ››› page 104

– Central locking ››› page 95 – Emergency lock ››› page 104 8 General views of the vehicle

Overview (left hand drive)

1 Electric windows ››› page 110 8 Infotainment system ››› page 85 , page 162 2 Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 125 ››› 3 Control for lighting and demisting win- 9 Open bonnet lever ››› page 324 dows ››› page 115 10 Fuses ››› page 58 4 Turn signal and main beam lever 11 Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 15 page 116 ››› 12 Hazard warning lights ››› page 120 5 Warning lamps page 82 ››› 13 ESC start ››› page 207 stop button 6 Wipers and rear window wiper ››› page 272 page 123 ››› 14 Electronic parking brake ››› page 266 7 Driver information system page 80 ››› 15 Central locking ››› page 95

9 General views of the vehicle

Overview (right hand drive)

1 Infotainment system ››› page 85 , 5 Driver information system ››› page 80 10 ESC start ››› page 207 stop button ››› page 162 6 Control for lighting and demisting win- ››› page 272 2 Turn signal and main beam lever dows ››› page 115 11 Central locking ››› page 95 page 116 ››› 7 Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 125 12 Electronic parking brake ››› page 266 3 Warning lamps page 82 ››› 8 Electric windows ››› page 110 13 Hazard warning lights ››› page 120 4 Wipers and rear window wiper 9 Open bonnet lever ››› page 324 14 Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 15 ››› page 123 15 Fuses ››› page 58

10 General views of the vehicle

Interior view

1 Armrest ››› page 140 7 Electronic parking brake ››› page 266 2 Isofix anchors ››› page 34 8 Seat adjustment ››› page 128 3 Seat belts ››› page 16 4 Panoramic roof ››› page 112 5 Interior mirror ››› page 125 6 Disconnecting the front passenger front airbag ››› page 27

11 Safety

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and – Always pay attention to traffic and do not Safety good view of the surroundings. get distracted by passengers or telephone calls. – Make sure all luggage is secured Safe driving ››› page 134. – Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs). – Make sure that no objects can interfere Advice about driving with the pedals. – Observe traffic laws and speed limits. – Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrors – Always reduce your speed as appropriate Safety first! properly according to your size. for road, traffic and weather conditions.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rear – When travelling long distances, take breaks WARNING seats always have the headrests in the in- regularly - at least every two hours. ● This manual contains important informa- use position ››› page 130 . tion about the operation of the vehicle, – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired both for the driver and the passengers. The – Instruct passengers to adjust the headrests or stressed. other sections of the on-board documen- according to their height. WARNING tation also contain further information that – Protect children with appropriate child you should be aware of for your own safety seats and properly applied seat belts Driving under the influence of alcohol, and for the safety of your passengers. ››› page 31. drugs, medication or narcotics may result ● Ensure that the on-board documentation in severe accidents and even loss of life. – Assume the correct sitting position. In- is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es- ● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics struct your passengers also to assume a pecially important when lending or selling may significantly alter perception, affect proper sitting position page 13 . the vehicle to another person. ››› reaction times and safety while driving, – Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct which could result in the loss of control of your passengers also to fasten their seat the vehicle. Before driving belts properly ››› page 16 .

For your own safety and the safety of your Safety equipment passengers, always note the following points Factors influencing safety before every trip: Never put your safety or the safety of your – Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn As a driver, you are responsible for yourself passengers in danger. In the event of an ac- signals are working properly. and your passengers. cident, the safety equipment may reduce the risk of injury. The following points cover – Check tyre pressure.

12 Safe driving part of the safety equipment in your CU- and your passengers are sitting in a correct PRA1): position and use this equipment properly.

● three-point seat belts, Safety is everyone's business! ● belt tension limiters for the front and rear side seats, ● belt tensioners for the front and rear side Correct sitting position of seats, vehicle occupants ● front airbags, ● knee and central driver airbags Correct position on the seat Fig. 3 Correct belt web and headrest posi- ● side airbags in the front seat backrests, tions ● side airbags in the rear seat backrests, The correct sitting positions for the driver ● head-protection airbags, and passengers are shown below. ● “ISOFIX” anchor points on the front pas- If your physical constitution prevents you senger seat and on the rear seats for child from maintaining the correct sitting position, seats with the “ISOFIX” system, contact a specialised workshop for help with 2) ● height-adjustable front head restraints , any special devices. The seat belt and airbag ● rear headrests with in-use position and can only provide optimum protection if a non-use position, correct sitting position is adopted. CUPRA ● adjustable steering column. recommends taking your car in for technical Fig. 2 The correct distance between the service. The safety equipment mentioned above driver and the steering wheel must be at works together to provide you and your pas- least 25 cm (10 inches). For your own safety and to reduce the risk of sengers with the best possible protection in injury in the event of an accident or sudden the event of an accident. However, these braking or manoeuvre, CUPRA recommends safety systems can only be effective if you the following positions: »

1) Depending on the version/market. 2) The front seats with built-in headrests do not require adjustment. 13 Safety

Valid for all vehicle occupants: bent and with a distance between the knees the event of sudden braking or manoeu- ● Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge and the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in- vring, in case of collision or accident and if is at the same level as the top of your head, ches) ››› Fig. 2 . the airbags deploy. or as close as possible to the same level as ● Adjust the height of the seat so that you ● Before starting the car, all passengers the top of your head and under no circum- can reach the top of the steering wheel. must be sitting in a correct position and stances below eye level. Keep the back of ● Always keep both feet in the footwell so stay like that for the entire journey. This al- your neck as close as possible to the head- that you have the vehicle under control at all so applies to a correct use of the seat belt. rest ››› Fig. 3 . times. ● The maximum amount of people in the ● Short people must lower the headrest vehicle is the same as the amount of seats completely, even if your head is below its up- For the passenger, the following applies: with seat belts. ● per edge. ● Move the seat backrest to an almost up- For children, always use a certified protection system, certified and suited for ● Tall people must raise the headrest com- right position so that your back rests com- their weight and height page 31 . pletely. pletely against it. ››› ● While driving, always keep your feet in ● Always keep your feet in the footwell while ● Move the seat as far back as possible (mini- the footwell. Never place them over the the vehicle is in motion. mum 25 cm between the chest and the seat or the dashboard, for example, or out- ● Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly dashboard check translation). If you are sit- side the window. Otherwise the airbag and ››› page 19. ting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system seat belt may offer insufficient protection cannot protect you properly. and also increase the risk of injury in the The following also applies to the driver: event of an accident. ● Move the seat backrest to an almost upright position so that your back rests com- Number of seats pletely against it. Risks of sitting in an incorrect po- The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 in sition ● Move the steering wheel so it is at least the rear. All seats are equipped with a safety 25 cm (10 inches) away from the ster- belt. num››› Fig. 2 and you can hold it with both If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, hands on both sides, on the outer part, with In some versions, your vehicle is approved the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases. your arms slightly bent. only for 4 seats. 2 front seats and 2 rear Seat belts can provide optimal protection seats. only if the belt web is properly worn. Incor- ● The steering wheel must always point to- rect sitting positions substantially reduce the wards the chest and never towards the face. WARNING protective function of seat belts and, there- ● Move the seat in such a way that you can Sitting in an incorrect position may in- fore, increase the risk of severe or even le- step on the pedals with your knees slightly crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries in thal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal 14 Safe driving injuries is especially heightened when a de- WARNING Adjust the steering wheel before your trip ploying airbag strikes a vehicle occupant and only when the vehicle is stationary. who has assumed an incorrect sitting posi- Sitting in an incorrect position increases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the tion. The driver is responsible for all people, ● Pull the ››› Fig. 4 1 lever down, move the event of accidents and sudden braking or particularly children, inside the vehicle. steering wheel to the desired position and lift manoeuvres. the lever back up until it locks. The following list contains examples of in- ● All occupants must sit correctly during correct sitting positions that could be dan- the journey and wear the seat belt correct- WARNING gerous for all vehicle occupants. ly. Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust- ● Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit- ment function and an incorrect adjustment When the vehicle is in motion: ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or of the steering wheel can result in severe or ● Never stand in the vehicle. are not at a proper distance of the airbag fatal injury. risk suffering very serious or lethal injuries, ● Never stand on the seats. ● After adjusting the steering column, push especially if the airbags deploy and strike the lever Fig. 4 1 firmly upwards to en- ● Never kneel on the seats. them. ››› sure the steering wheel does not acciden- ● Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the tally change position while driving. rear. ● Never adjust the steering wheel while the ● Never lean against the dash panel. Steering wheel position adjust- vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust ● Never lie on the rear seats. ment the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion, stop safely and make the proper ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat. adjustment. ● Never sit sideways. ● The adjusted steering wheel should be ● Never lean out of a window. facing your chest and not your face so as not to hinder the driver's front airbag pro- ● Never put your feet out of a window. tection in the event of an accident. ● Never put your feet on the dash panel. ● When driving, always hold the steering ● Never place your feet on the bench or on wheel with both hands on the outside of the backrest of the seat. the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi- ● Never travel in a footwell. tions to reduce injuries when the driver's front airbag deploys. ● Never sit on the armrests. Fig. 4 Lever in the lower left side of the ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 ● Never travel without wearing the seat belt. steering column. o'clock position or in any other manner ● Never travel in the luggage compartment. (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys, » 15 Safety

you may sustain injuries to your arms, WARNING Seat belts hands and head. ● Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving. The whys and wherefores ● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor Pedal area coverings over the original floor mats. This of seat belts would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident. Control lamps Pedals ● Never place objects in the driver footwell. An object could move into the pedal area – Ensure that you can always press the accel-  It lights up red and impair pedal operation. erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired The driver or one of the passengers have not fastened to the floor. their seat belts. – Ensure that the pedals can return unim-  paired to their initial positions. The control lamp lights up to remind the driver to fasten their seat belt. – Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip and do not obstruct Before starting the vehicle: the pedals ››› . ● Fasten your seat belt securely. Only use floor mats which leave the pedals ● Instruct your passengers to fasten their clear and which are secured to prevent them seat belts properly before driving off. from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor ● Protect children by using a child seat ac- mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten- cording to the child's height and weight ers for floor mats are fitted in the footwells. ››› page 31. If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop exceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the the vehicle. seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened while driving, a warning sound will be heard Wear suitable footwear for a few seconds. The warning light will also Always wear shoes which support your feet flash . properly and give you a good feeling for the The lamp  goes out when the ignition is on pedals. and all occupants have fastened their seat belts. 16 Seat belts

Rear seat belts fastened display If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened while passive safety features (such as the airbag driving in some of the rear seats, the seat system) are designed to absorb the kinetic belt status is displayed for approximately 60 energy released in a collision. Taken togeth- seconds. er, all these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of injury. This is why it is so important to fasten The protective function of seat seat belts before every trip, even when "just driving around the corner". belts Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and Fig. 5 Instrument panel: left rear seat oc- improving the chances of survival when in- cupied and corresponding seat belt fas- volved in a serious accident. Furthermore, tened display. properly worn seat belts improve the protection provided by airbags in the event of an Depending on the model version, when the accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt ignition is switched on, the seat belt status is required by law in most countries. display ››› Fig. 5 on the instrument panel informs the driver whether the passengers in Although your vehicle is equipped with air- the rear seats have fastened their seat belts. Fig. 6 Drivers with properly worn seat bags, the seat belts must be fastened and belts will not be thrown forward in the worn. The front airbags, for example, are on- event of sudden braking.  It indicates that the corresponding seat ly triggered in some cases of head-on colli- is empty. sion. The front airbags will not be triggered Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants during minor frontal or side collisions, rear-  Indicates that the seat is occupied and in the proper position. They also help pre- end collisions, overturns or accidents in the occupant is wearing the seat belt. vent uncontrolled movements that may re- which the airbag trigger threshold value in sult in serious injury and reduce the risk of The seat belt status symbol will light up for a the control unit is not exceeded. being thrown out of the vehicle in case of an maximum of 60 seconds when a seat belt in accident. the rear seats is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An audible warning will also be Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts heard if the vehicle is travelling at over correctly benefit greatly from the ability of 25 km/h (15 mph). the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the front part of your vehicle and other

17 Safety

Important safety instructions for ● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings Head-on collisions and the laws the use of seat belts or similar items to alter the position of the of physics belt webbing. – Always wear the seat belt as described in ● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to this section. the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in – Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened the event of an accident. Therefore, you at all times and are not damaged. must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals. WARNING ● Seat belts which have been worn in an ac- ● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at cident and have been stretched must be re- all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The placed by a specialised workshop. Renewal optimal protection from seat belts can be may be necessary even if there is no appa- achieved only if you use them properly. rent damage. The belt anchorage should Fig. 7 A driver not wearing a seat belt is also be checked. ● Never allow two passengers (even chil- thrown forward violently. dren) to share the same seat belt. ● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve- belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. moved or modified in any way. ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or ● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, the retractors may not work properly. etc.) because this can cause injuries. ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect position. ● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the Fig. 8 The unbelted passenger in the rear proper fit and function of the seat belts, re- seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the ducing their capacity to protect. driver who is wearing a seat belt. ● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not The effects of the laws of physics in the case be blocked with paper or other objects, as of a head-on collision are easy to explain: this can prevent the latch plate from en- the moment a vehicle starts moving, a type gaging securely. of energy called “kinetic energy” starts 18 Seat belts acting on both the vehicle and its passen- possible to brace oneself with one's hands. How to properly adjust your gers. In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact seat belt The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind- the speed of the vehicle and on the weight screen or whatever else is in the way of the vehicle and of its passengers. The Fastening and unfastening the Fig. 7. higher they are, the more energy there is to ››› seat belt be “absorbed” in the event of an accident. It is also important for rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could oth- The most significant factor, however, is the erwise be thrown forward violently through speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles the vehicle interior in an accident. Passen- from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), gers in the rear seats who do not use seat for example, the corresponding kinetic en- belts endanger not only themselves but also ergy is multiplied by four. the front occupants ››› Fig. 8 . Given that the passengers of the vehicle in our example do not have their seat belts fastened, in the event of a collision the entire amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will be only absorbed by the mentioned impact. Fig. 9 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to into the buckle. 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bodies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher. Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehicle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions. Fig. 10 Release the seat belt's buckle. » Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not

19 Safety

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc- WARNING cupants in the position that most protects them in the event of an accident or sudden ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection unless the seat backrest is in an upright braking . ››› position and the seat belt is worn correctly, according to your size. Fastening the seat belt ● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi- Fasten your seat belt before each trip. cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden ● Adjust the front seat and headrest correct- braking. ly ››› page 13 . ● The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt, ● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in can cause severe injuries if the belt moves an upright position . ››› from hard areas of the body to soft areas Fig. 12 Position of seat belt during preg- ● Pull the latch plate and place the belt web- (e.g. the stomach). nancy. bing evenly across your chest and lap. Do not twist the seat belt when doing so ››› . Seat belts offer their maximum protection in ● Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the Correct seat belt position the event of an accident and reduce the risk corresponding seat ››› Fig. 9 . of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when they are properly positioned. Further- ● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is more, if the webbing is correctly positioned, securely engaged in the buckle. the seat belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the optimum position to ensure the airbag Releasing the seat belt provides the maximum protection. The seat Only unfasten the seat belt when the vehicle belt must therefore always be worn and the has come to a standstill ››› . webbing correctly positioned.

● Press the red button on the buckle Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe ››› Fig. 10. The latch plate is released from or even fatal injuries ››› page 13, Correct sit- the buckle. ting position of vehicle occupants. Fig. 11 Correct seat belt and headrest po- ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls ● sitions, viewed from front and the side. The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie up easily and the trim will not be damaged. on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind the shoulder.

20 Seat belts

● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across pelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding” the The belt tensioners are activated by sensors, the pelvis, never across the stomach. stomach ››› Fig. 12 . although only in severe head-on, lateral and rear-end collisions, or in the event of the ve- ● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- ● Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas- hicle overturning in the plug-in hybrid ver- bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up tened. sion of the vehicle. any slack. ● Once the seat belt is positioned correctly, don't pull it away from your body with your This retracts and tightens the seat belts, re- In the case of pregnant women, the seat hand. ducing the forward motion of the occupants. belt must lie evenly across the chest and as low as possible over the pelvis, never across ● Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or The belt pre-tensioners work in combination the stomach and must be worn properly at fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys. with the airbag system. The belt pre-tension- all times during the pregnancy ››› Fig. 12 . ● Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings ers activate in combination with some of the or similar instruments to alter the position airbags, depending on the collision type. Adapting the position of the belt webbing of the belt webbing. to your size Note The position of the seat belt can be adapted Note ● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a by adjusting the height of the front seats. If your physical constitution prevents you fine dust is produced. This is normal and it from maintaining the correct position of is not an indication of fire in the vehicle. WARNING the belt webbing, contact a specialised ● The relevant safety requirements must be workshop for help with any special devices observed when the vehicle or components An incorrectly worn seat belt web can to ensure the optimum protection of the of the system are scrapped. Specialised cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of seat belt and airbag. CUPRA recommends workshops are familiar with these regula- an accident. taking your car in for technical service. tions, which are also available to you. ● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. Maintenance and disposal of seat ● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort- Seat belt tensioners ably on the torso belt tensioners ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie How the seat belt tensioner The belt tensioners are components of the across the pelvis, never across the stomach. works The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- seat belts that are installed in the seats of bly on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if neces- your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension- The seat belts for the front seats and the side sary to take up any slack. ers or remove and install parts of the system rear seats are equipped with belt tensioners. when performing other repair work, the seat ● For pregnant women, the lap part of the belt may be damaged. The consequence » seat belt must lie as low as possible over the 21 Safety

may be that, in the event of an accident, the PreCrash system Depending on how critical the driving situa- belt tensioners function incorrectly or may tion is, the belts are either tightened individ- not function at all. ually, or both belts at the same time. How it works So that the effectiveness of the seat belt In addition to Front Assist tensioner is not reduced and that removed The PreCrash system is an assistance system parts do not cause any injuries or environ- that actives a series of measures to protect In vehicles with Front Assist ››› page 240 , mental pollution, regulations, which are the occupants of the vehicles in potentially within the limits of the system, information is known to the specialised workshops, must risky situations, but which cannot prevent a assessed on the risk of collision with the ve- be observed. collision. hicle in front. The functions of the PreCrash system may also be activated if there is a high It only works completely if no special driving WARNING likelihood of a rear-end collision, or during profile is selected and if there are no operat- the activation of Front Assist. ● Improper use or repairs not carried out by ing anomalies. qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- In addition to the Emergency Assist system vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners Basic features may fail to trigger or may trigger in the In vehicles with emergency assist, driver sta- Depending on the legal provisions of the wrong circumstances. tus information is assessed within the limita- country and the features of the vehicle, in ● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au- tions of this system. The following PreCrash critical situations (e.g. in certain cases of tomatic retractor cannot be repaired. systems may be activated if a lack of activity emergency braking or loss of control of the ● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat is detected: vehicle by the driver) the following functions belts, including the removal and refitting of can be activated separately or at the same ● system parts in conjunction with other re- Reversible seat belt tensioning of the driv- time when the vehicle is travelling faster than pair work, must be performed by a special- er's seat belt. approximately 30 km/h (20 mph). ised workshop only. ● Automatic closing of the windows until ● The belt tensioners will only provide pro- ● Reversible tensioning of front seat belts they are just cracked open and, depending tection for one accident and must be that are fastened. on the equipment, of the sunroof. changed if they have been activated. ● Operation of the hazard warning lights. Activation of the PreCrash system ● Automatic closing of the windows until For the sake of the environment The PreCrash system can be partially deacti- they are just cracked open and, depending vated by deactivating the traction and / or Airbag modules and belt tensioners may on the equipment, of the sunroof. contain perchlorate. Observe the legal re- stability control, depending on the equip- ● In the event of overturning, depending on quirements for their disposal. ment. When these vehicle safety controls the equipment, activation of the belt ten- are switched on (by default, every time the sioners.

22 Airbag system ignition is turned on), the system is fully acti- WARNING Airbag system vated. The PreCrash system cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only Driving profile selection settings Brief introduction works within the limits of the system. Risks In vehicles with driving profile selection, that compromise safety are never justified PreCrash adapts to suit the special vehicle by the use of this system. The system is not Why is it so important to wear a configuration of the corresponding profile a replacement for driver awareness and seat belt and to sit correctly? ››› page 226. cannot prevent a collision. ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to For the inflating airbags to achieve the best Limited operation the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit protection, the seat belt must always be the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- worn properly and the correct sitting posi- The PreCrash system is not available or only ditions. tion must be assumed. has limited availability in the following situations: ● The system is not always able to recognise The airbag system is not a substitute for seat objects. belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's ● When the TCS and/or the ESC are discon- ● The system may not react to people or overall passive safety system. Please bear in nected. animals or objects that cross length-wise or mind that the airbag system can only work ● When driving in reverse. that are hard to detect. effectively when the vehicle occupants are ● When the airbag control unit is not operat- ● Metallic objects (e.g. fences) or other el- wearing their seat belts correctly and have ing properly. ements of the public road or adverse adjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, weather conditions can hinder its opera- it is most important to properly wear the seat ● When there is a fault in the system itself, in tion and thus its ability to detect collision belts at all times, not only because this is re- the ESC or in the Front Assist. risk. quired by law in most countries, but also for ● Never ignore the warning lamps that light your safety ››› page 16, The whys and Problems and solutions up or the messages shown on the dash- wherefores of seat belts. If the PreCrash is not working correctly, the board. The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so message System unavailable or System if you are not properly seated when the air- with limited features is shown perma- WARNING bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- nently on the dashboard display. Go to a ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle specialized CUPRA Service or Official SEAT Distracting the driver in any way can lead to occupants assume a correct sitting position Service and ask for the system to be an accident and cause injuries. while travelling. checked. ● Never change settings on the Infotain- ment System while driving. Sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be »

23 Safety

thrown forward into the area of the deploy- gered. Children up to 12 years old should al- The airbag system operation is monitored ing airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag ways travel on the rear seat. Never trans- electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the oc- port children in the vehicle if they are not luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- cupant. This also applies to children. restrained or the restraint system is not ap- nition is switched on (self-diagnosis). propriate for their age, size or weight. Always maintain the greatest possible dis- There is a fault in the system if the control tance between yourself and the front airbag. ● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat- lamp : This way, the front airbags can completely ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop- deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- erly ››› page 16 . ● does not light up when the ignition is mum protection. switched on ››› page 25 , The most important factors for triggering the ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition airbag are the type of accident, the angle of Description of the airbag system is switched on, impact and the vehicle speed. ● turns off and then lights up again after the The airbag system offers additional protec- ignition is switched on, Whether or not the airbags are activated de- tion for the occupants in combination with pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration the seat belts. ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is rate resulting from the collision and detected moving. by the control unit. If the vehicle decelera- The airbag system comprises the following tion occurring during the collision and meas- modules (as per vehicle equipment): The airbag system is not triggered if: ured by the control unit remains below the ● Electronic control unit ● the ignition is switched off specified reference values, the front, side ● there is a minor frontal collision and/or head-protection airbags will not be ● Front airbags for driver and passenger triggered. Take into account that the visible ● Knee airbag for the driver ● there is a minor side collision damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, ● Side airbags ● there is a rear-end collision no matter how serious, is not a determining ● Central airbag for the driver factor for the airbags to have been activated. WARNING ● Head airbag ● WARNING The seat belts and airbags can only pro- ● Airbag control lamp  on the instrument vide maximum protection if the occupants ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as- panel ››› page 25 are seated correctly ››› page 13 . suming an incorrect sitting position can ● Key-operated switch for front passenger ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys- lead to critical or fatal injuries. airbag tem, have the system checked immediately ● All vehicle occupants, including children, ● Control lamp for disabled/enabled status by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there who are not properly belted can sustain of the front passenger airbag. critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-

24 Airbag system

is a danger that during a collision, the sys- Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- In an accident with airbag activation: tem may fail to trigger, or not trigger cor- vation. ● the interior lights switch on (if the interior rectly. The control unit analyses the collision trajec- light switch is in the courtesy light position); tory and activates the respective restraint ● the hazard warning lights switch on; system. ● all doors are unlocked; Airbag activation If the deceleration rate is below the prede- ● the fuel supply to the engine is cut; fined reference value in the control unit the The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within ● in hybrid vehicles, the high voltage system airbags will not be triggered, even though thousands of a second, to provide additional is switched off; the accident may cause extensive damage to protection in the event of an accident. A fine the car. ● an emergency call is started. dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of The following airbags are triggered in seri- fire in the vehicle. ous head-on collisions: Operation of the airbags The airbag system is only ready to function ● Driver airbag. when the ignition is on. ● Front passenger front airbag Airbag system control lamps In special accidents instances, several air- ● Knee airbag for the driver. bags may activate at the same time. ● Head airbags (depending on the severity of  It lights up on the combi-instrument Airbags do not activate in the event of mi- the crash). nor head-on and side collisions or rear-end Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners . collisions. Airbags only activate if the vehicle Have the system checked immediately by a specialised In the event of serious side collisions, workshop. overturns in the hybrid plug-in version of the some (or all) of the following airbags can vehicle. be activated (depending on the severity of   It lights up on the roof console the collision): Activation factors ● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- Front passenger front airbag deactivated. Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated The conditions that lead to the airbag system cident. activating in each situation cannot be gener- ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci- alised. Some factors play an important role,   It lights up on the roof console such as the properties of the object the ve- dent. hicle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehi- ● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci- Front passenger front airbag activated. The control lamp turns off automatically 60 seconds cle speed, etc. dent. after the ignition is switched on » ● Central airbag.

25 Safety

Several warning and control lamps light up ● Do not mount a child seat in the front for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- passenger seat or remove the mounted ed on, signalling that the function is being child seat! The front passenger front airbag verified. They will switch off after a few sec- may deploy during an accident in spite of onds. the fault. If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system control lamp  remains on or flashes, it indi- CAUTION cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat Always pay attention to any lit control belt tensioner system ››› . Have the system lamps and to the corresponding descrip- checked immediately by a specialised work- tions and instructions to avoid damage to shop. the vehicle or harm to the occupants. Fig. 14 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel. If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, the warning lamp      re- The driver's front airbag is housed in the mains lit on the dash panel to remind you Front airbags steering wheel and that of the front passen- that the airbag is deactivated. If, with the ger, on the dash panel. Airbags are identified front passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp by the word “AIRBAG”. does not remain lit or if it is lit along with the control lamp  on the instrument panel, When the driver and front passenger airbags there is a fault in the airbag system ››› . If are deployed, the covers remain attached to the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the steering wheel and dashboard, respec- the disabling of the airbag system ››› . Have tively ››› Fig. 13 ››› Fig. 14 . the system checked immediately by a speci- In conjunction with the seat belts, the front alised workshop. airbag system gives the front occupants additional protection for the head and chest in WARNING the event of a severe frontal collision ››› . In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat Fig. 13 Driver airbag located in steering Their special design allows the controlled es- wheel. belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat cape of the propellant gas when an occu- belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly. head and chest are protected by the airbag. ● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus- After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi- taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the ciently to allow visibility. system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. 26 Airbag system

WARNING ››› Fig. 15. About 3/4 of the key should enter; this is as far as it will go. ● The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any ● Turn the key gently to change its position case be occupied by other passenger, pets to  (deactivate) or to  (activate). If you and objects. have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go. ● The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have ● Close the front passenger door. deployed. ● When deactivating the airbag, switch the ● It is also important not to attach any ob- ignition on and check that the control lamp jects such as cup holders or telephone   remains lit where it says    mountings to the surfaces covering the air- Fig. 16 On the roof console: control lamp for the deactivation of the front passenger in the roof console ››› Fig. 16 . bag units. front airbag. ● When reactivating the airbag, check that when the ignition is switched on, the   Deactivate the front passenger front airbag control lamp does not light up and the   Activate and deactivate front only if you have to use a rear-facing child lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then turns passenger front airbag seat in the front passenger seat. off. CUPRA recommends fitting the child seat in the rear seat to avoid having to deactivate WARNING the front passenger airbag. ● The driver of the vehicle is responsible for disabling or switching on the airbag. When the front passenger airbag is deactivated, this means that only the front passen- ● Always switch off the ignition before disa- ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to airbags in the vehicle remain activated. do so could result in a fault in the airbag deactivation system. Deactivate and activate the front passen- ● Never leave the key in the airbag disa- ger front airbag bling switch as it could get damaged or enable or disable the airbag during driving. ● Switch the ignition off. Fig. 15 Switch for activating and deactivat- ● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated, ing the front passenger airbag. ● Open the door on the front passenger reactivate it as soon as possible so that it side. can fulfil its protective function. ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front passenger airbag

27 Safety

Knee airbag it is deployed. Objects should never be placed or mounted in this area.

WARNING ● The knee airbag is deployed in front of the driver's knees. Always keep the deployment areas of the knee airbags free. ● Never not fix objects to the cover or in the deployment area of the knee airbag. ● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be- Fig. 20 Fully inflated central airbag (de- tween your knees and the location of the ployment zone). Fig. 17 On the driver side: location of the this airbag. If your physical constitution knee airbag prevents you from meeting these require- The central airbag is installed for the front ments, make sure you contact a specialised seats and is located in the inner padding of workshop. the driver's seat backrest. The location of the central airbag is indicated by the inscription “AIRBAG” ››› Fig. 19 . Central airbag When triggered, the central airbag fills the marked zone (deployment zone) ››› Fig. 20 . For this reason, never place or fix objects in this zone ››› . The central airbag triggers in the case of a side collision or if the vehicle overturns, re- Fig. 18 On the driver side: airbag action ducing the risk of vehicle occupants suffer- radius for the knees. ing injuries.

The knee airbag is located on the driver side WARNING below the dash panel ››› Fig. 17 . Airbags are When triggered, the airbag inflates at high identified by the word “AIRBAG”. Fig. 19 In the inner padding of the driver's speed in milliseconds. The framed area (deployment area) seat backrest: central airbag. ● Always keep the central airbag deploy- ››› Fig. 18 is covered by the knee airbag when ment zone clear.

28 Airbag system

● Never attach objects to the central airbag Side airbags Its location is marked with the word “AIR- cover or the deployment zone. BAG” on the upper part of the back of the seats or on the lower coverings with the word ● Do not allow other people, animals or ob- AIRBAG in relief. jects to get between the occupants of the front seats and the airbag deployment In conjunction with the seat belts, the side zone. Make sure that all vehicle occupants, airbag system provides additional protection including children, follow this rule. for the upper body in the event of a severe ● Never use upholstery or seat covers that side collision ››› . have not been explicitly authorised for the In a side collision, the side airbags reduce seats of the vehicle. Otherwise, the side the risk of injury to passengers to the areas airbag will not be able to deploy if triggered. of the body facing the impact. In addition to their normal protection, the seat belts also hold the passengers in the event of a side WARNING Fig. 21 Side airbag in driver's seat. collision; this is how these airbags provide Improper manipulation of the driver and maximum protection. front passenger seats can prevent the central airbag from operating correctly and WARNING cause serious injuries. ● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean ● Never remove the front seats from the forward, or are not seated correctly while vehicle or modify their components. the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater ● If the backrest side bolsters are subjected risk of injury if the side airbag system is trig- to a lot of force, the central airbag may not gered in an accident. trigger correctly,it may not trigger at all or ● In order for the side airbags to provide if may trigger unexpectedly. their maximum protection, the prescribed ● Have a specialised repair shop immedi- sitting position must always be maintained ately repair any damage to the original seat Fig. 22 Illustration of completely inflated with seat belts fastened while travelling. upholstery or seams in the area of the cen- side airbags on the left side of the vehicle. ● In a side-on collision the side airbags will tral airbag module. not work if the sensors do not correctly The side airbags are located in the backrests measure the pressure increase on the inte- of the front seats and in the sides of the rear rior of the doors, due to air escaping seat, depending on the vehicle's configura- through the areas with holes or openings in tion ››› Fig. 21 , ››› Fig. 22 . the door panel. »

29 Safety

● Never drive if the interior door panels struct the side airbag, seriously reducing The head-protection airbags are located on have been removed or if the panels have the airbag's effectiveness. both sides in the interior above the doors Fig. 23 and are identified with the text not been correctly fitted. ● Any damage to the original seat uphols- ››› “AIRBAG”. ● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak- tery or around the seams of the side airbag ers in the door panels have been removed, units must be repaired immediately by a In combination with the seat belts, the head- unless the holes left by the loudspeakers specialised workshop. protection airbag system gives the vehicle have been closed properly. ● The airbags provide protection for just occupants additional protection for the up- ● Always check that the openings are one accident; replace them once they have per body in the event of a severe side colli- closed or covered if loudspeakers or other deployed. sion or the vehicle overturning ››› . equipment are fitted inside the door pan- ● Any work on the side airbag system or re- The framed area is covered by the head-pro- els. moval and installation of the airbag compo- tection airbag when it is deployed (deploy- ● Occupants of the outer seats must never nents for other repairs (such as removal of ment area) ››› Fig. 23 . Therefore, objects carry any objects or pets in the deployment the front seat) should only be performed by should never be placed or mounted in this space between them and the airbags, or al- a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults area . low children or other passengers to travel in may occur during the airbag system opera- ››› this position. It is also important not to at- tion. In the event of a side collision the head-pro- tach any accessories (such as cup holders) tection airbag is triggered on the impact side to the doors. This would impair the protec- of the vehicle. tion offered by the side airbags. Head-protection airbags The head-protection airbags reduce the risk ● The built-in coat hooks should be used of injury to passengers in the front and rear only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave side seats facing the impact. any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. WARNING ● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- ● In order for the head-protection airbags ster because the system may be damaged. to provide their maximum protection, the In this case, the side airbags would not be prescribed sitting position must always be triggered. maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling. ● Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats with side air- ● For safety reasons, the head-protection bags unless the covers have been approved airbag must be disabled in those vehicles for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag Fig. 23 Location of head-protection air- fitted with a screen dividing the interior of bags. deploys from the side of the backrest, the the vehicle. See your technical service to use of conventional seat covers would ob- make this adjustment. 30 Transporting children safely

● There must be no other persons, animals door must be done in a specialised work- Transporting children or objects between the occupants of the shop. outer seats and the deployment space of safely the head-protection airbags so that the head-protection airbag can deploy completely without restriction and provide the Child safety greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly Introduction approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows. For safety reasons, as we have learned from ● The built-in coat hooks should be used accident statistics, we recommend that chil- only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the seats. Depending on their age, height and pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on weight, children travelling in rear seats must coat hangers. use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- ● The airbags provide protection for just sons, the child seat should be installed in the one accident; replace them once they have rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or deployed. in the centre back seat. ● Any work on the head-protection airbag The physical laws involved and the forces system or removal and installation of the acting in a collision apply also to children airbag components for other repairs (such ››› page 18. But unlike adults, children do not as removal of the roof lining) should only be have fully developed muscle and bone struc- performed by a specialised workshop. Oth- tures. This means that children are subject to erwise, faults may occur during the airbag a greater risk of injury. system operation. ● The side and head airbags are managed To reduce the risk of injuries, children must through sensors located in the interior of always use special child restraint systems the front doors. To ensure the correct op- when travelling in the vehicle. eration of the side and head-protection We recommend the use of child safety prod- airbags neither the doors nor the door pan- ucts from the Original Accessories Pro- els should be modified in any way (e.g. fit- gramme, which includes systems for all ages ting loudspeakers). If the front door is dam- made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see aged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front www.seat.com). »

31 Safety

These systems have been especially de- Child seats group classification Child seats that have been tested and ap- signed and approved, complying with the proved under the ECE R44 or ECE-R129 ECE-R44. regulation. standards bear the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129 test marks on the seat (the letter E in a circle CUPRA recommends securing the child with the test number below it). seats shown on the website as described below: Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- ● Child seats in the opposite direction of stalling and using child seats. travel (group 0+): ISOFIX and support peg (ROMER BABY SAFE PLUS SHR II + ISOFIX We recommend you to always include the BASE / PEKE G0 I-SIZE + I-SIZE BASE). manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation. ● Child seats in the direction of travel (group 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (ROMER DUO Fig. 24 Examples of child seats. CUPRA recommends you use child seats PLUS + TOP TETHER / PEKE G1 TRIFIX I- from the Original Accessories Catalogue. SIZE). Use only child seats that are officially ap- These child seats have been designed and proved and suitable for the child. ● Child seats directed towards the front of tested for use in our vehicles. You can find the vehicle (group 2): safety belt and ISOFIX These seats are subject to the ECE-R44 or the right child seat for your model and age (ROMER BRITAX KIDFIX2 S). ECE-R129 standards. ECE-R stands for: Eco- group at our dealers. ● Child seats directed towards the front of nomic Commission for Europe Regulation. Child seats by approval category the vehicle (group 3): safety belt (TAKATA MAXI). Child seats by weight group Child seats may have the approval category The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific Follow the manufacturer's instructions and ries: (all according to the ECE-R44 standard) or i- observe any statutory requirements when in- Size (according to the ECE-R129 standard). stalling and using child seats. Always read Age group Weight of the child and note ››› page 33 . ● Universal: child seats with universal appro- Group 0 Up to 10 kg val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no We recommend you always carry the manu- need to consult any list of models. In the facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- Group 0+ Up to 13 kg case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the gether with the on-board documentation. Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg child seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether belt. Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg ● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg in addition to the standard requirements of

32 Transporting children safely universal approval, requires safety devices to ● To correctly use a child seat in the back, lock the child seat, which require additional the front backrest must be adjusted so that testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap- there is no contact with the child seat in the proval include a list of vehicle models for back in the case that it goes opposite to the which they can be installed. direction of the car. In the case of front fac- ● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval ing restraint systems, the front backrest must requires a dynamic test of the child seat for be adjusted so that there is no contact with each vehicle model separately. Child seats the child's feet. with vehicle-specific approval also include a ● For a correct assembly of the child's seat list of vehicle models for which they can be on the rear seats, adjust or dismount the installed. headrest, in order to prevent contact with ● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must the seat. Fig. 26 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of meet the requirements prescribed in the the passenger side door ● If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal- ECE-R 129 standard in relation to installation led, in which the method of attachment to and safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell Warnings about fitting a child seat the car is through the seat belt and support you which seats have i-Size approval for this bracket, it should never be installed in the Take the following general warnings into ac- vehicle. central rear seat as the ground clearance is count if you are going to fit a child seat. They lower than in other places and the support are valid for all child seats regardless of their bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi- attachment system. Fitting and using child seats ciently stable. ● Please read and follow the child seat man- ● When fitting a child seat on the front pas- ufacturer's operating instructions. senger seat, the seat must be moved back- ● The child seat should preferably be fitted wards as far as possible and placed in the » to the rear seat behind the front passenger seat so that the child can exit the vehicle on the pavement side. ● Set the height of the seat belt such that it adapts to the child seat naturally, without twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt Fig. 25 Airbag sticker: on the passenger’s height regulator must be used with rear-fac- sun visor ing child seats.

33 Safety

highest position. The backrest must also be abled with a key-operated switch ››› page 27 . when an adult wants to sit in the front pas- 1) put in a vertical position . When transporting children, use a child seat senger seat. suitable for the age and size of each child ● Never allow a child to be transported in a page 32. Important information about the front ››› vehicle without being properly secured, or passenger front airbag to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel- WARNING A sticker with important information about ling. In an accident, the child could be flung the passenger airbag is located on the pas- ● If a child seat is secured to the front pas- through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- injuries to themselves and to the other ve- side door frame ››› Fig. 25 . ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an hicle occupants. accident increases. ● Never leave a child alone in the child seat Read and always observe the safety informa- ● An inflating front passenger airbag can or in the vehicle. tion included in the following chapters: strike the rear-facing child seat and project ● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall ● Safety distance with respect to the passen- it with great force against the door, the roof must not wear a normal seat belt without a ger airbag ››› page 23 . or the backrest. child seat, as this could cause injuries to the ● Never install a child seat facing back- abdominal and neck areas during a sudden ● Objects between the passenger and the wards on the front passenger seat unless braking manoeuvre or in an accident. passenger side airbag in Front airbags ››› the front passenger front airbag has been on page 27. ● When a child seat is mounted in the rear disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to seats, the door child-proof lock should be The passenger side front airbag, when ena- the child! However, if necessary, the front activated ››› page 105 . bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing passenger front airbag must be deactivated page 27. If the passenger seat has a backward since the airbag can strike the seat ››› height adjustment option, move it to the with such force that it can cause serious or highest, most upright position. If you have a Attachment systems fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old fixed seat, do not install any child restraint should always travel on the rear seat. system in this location. Depending on the country, different attachment systems are used for safely installing Therefore we strongly recommend you to ● For those vehicles that do not include a transport children on the rear seats. This is key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the child seats. the safest location in the vehicle. Alterna- vehicle must be taken to a technical serv- tively, the front passenger airbag can be dis- ice. Do not forget to reconnect the airbag

1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. 34 Transporting children safely

Attachment systems overview Additional attachment: Recommended systems for attaching child ● seats ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach- ● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided ment system allowing quick and safe attach- over the back of the rear seat and attached CUPRA recommends attaching child seats as ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at- to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor follows: tachment establishes a rigid connection be- points are located at the back of the rear tween the child seat and the car body. ● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo- seat backrest on the boot side ››› page 38 . site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, The rings for retaining the Top Tether belt bracket or i-Size. are marked with an anchor symbol. called connectors. These connectors are fit- ● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO- ● ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found Support bracket: some child seats rest on FIX and Top Tether. between the seat cushion and the backrest the floor of the vehicle with a support brack- of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO- et. The support bracket prevents the child WARNING FIX attachment systems are used mainly in seat from tipping forward in the event of im- Europe ››› page 36 . If necessary, ISOFIX at- pact. Child seats fitted with a support brack- Incorrect use of the support bracket can cause serious or fatal injury. tachment may have to be supplemented et should only be used in the passenger seat with a Top Tether belt or a support bracket. and side rear seats ››› . For the assembly of ● Make sure the support bracket is correct- this type of seat you should also consult the ly and safely installed. ● Automatic three-point seat belt. When- list of approved vehicles for this assembly, ever possible, it is preferable to attach the available in the instructions for child restraint child seats with the ISOFIX system rather systems. than attaching them with an automatic three-point seat belt ››› page 40 .

35 Safety

Fit a child seat with the ISOFIX / i-Size and Top Tether system

Fig. 27 Rear seat: die cut slots to access Fig. 28 Front passenger seat: ISOFIX/i- the ISOFIX / iSize securing rings. Size securing rings.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily rings are secured to the seat frame and, in (behind the backrest or in the luggage com- and safely on the rear side seats with the others, they are secured to the rear floor. partment) ››› page 38 . “ISOFIX” and Top Tether system. The “ISOFIX” rings are located between the To understand the compatibility of the “ISO- rear seat backrest and the seat cushioning Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on FIX” systems in the vehicle, check the table Fig. 27. The Top Tether rings are located each rear side seat. In some vehicles, the ››› below. on the rear part of the rear seat backrests

36 Transporting children safely

Vehicle ISOFIX positions

Electrical Front passenger seat Weight group Size classa) Rear side seat Rear central seat equipment airbag enabled airbag disabled

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X IL IL X

E ISO/R1 X IL IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg D ISO/R2 X IL IL X

C ISO/R3 X IL IL X

D ISO/R2 X IL IL X

C ISO/R3 X IL IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X

B1 ISO/F2X X IL, IUF IL, IUF X

A ISO/F3 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X

Group II 15 to 25 kg B2/B3 ISO/B2/B3b) X IL IL X

Group III 22 to 36 kg B2/B3 ISO/B2/B3b) X IL IL X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group. IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list into account. X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class. a) The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the class according to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat. b) The headrest must be removed and the backrest reclined to install it on front seats. »

37 Safety

Vehicle i-Size positions Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat airbag enabled airbag disabled

X i-U i-U X

i-U: Position suitable for forward- or rear-facing i-Size child restraint systems with universal certification. X: Position not suitable for i-Size child restraint systems.

Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX/i- WARNING Top Tether securing belts Size” system The securing rings are designed only for You must follow the child seat manufactur- use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether system er's instructions. child seats.

● Open the cut-out section behind the ● Never secure other child seats that do marked grooves to access the retaining rings not have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether system, or safety belts or any other objects to Fig. 27. ››› the securing rings – as this can result in po- ● Press the child seat onto the “ISO- tentially fatal injuries to the child. FIX/iSize” retaining rings until it is heard to ● Ensure that the child seat is correctly se- engage securely. If the child seat is equipped cured to the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether se- with Top Tether anchor points, secure it to curing rings. the correspondent ring ››› page 38 . Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. ● Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether attachment system are available from Tech- nical Services.

Fig. 29 Rear seats: adjustment and assembly according to the Top Tether belt.

38 Transporting children safely

cle anchor point, located at the back of the ● Slide the strap and secure it properly with rear seat backrest and provide greater re- the anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 29 , straint. ››› Fig. 30 . The objective of this strap is to reduce for- ● Firmly tighten the strap following the man- ward movements of the child seat in a crash, ufacturer's instructions. to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from hitting the inside of the vehicle. Releasing the retaining strap ● Loosen the strap following the manufac- Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun- turer's instructions. ted seats ● Push the lock and release it from the an- Currently, there are very few rear-facing choring support. child safety seats that have Top Tether. Please carefully read and follow the seat WARNING manufacturer instructions to learn the prop- An undue installation of the safety seat will er way to install the Top Tether strap. increase the risk of injury in the event of a crash. Securing the retainer strap ● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in ● Follow the manufacturer's instructions to the luggage compartment. deploy the child seat Top Tether retaining ● Never secure or tie luggage or other Fig. 30 Front passenger seat: adjustment strap. items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or and assembly according to the Top Tether ● Position the belt under the headrest (de- the upper ones (Top Tether). belt. pending on the instructions of the seat itself, lift or remove the headrest if necessary) Child seats with the Top Tether system come Fig. 29 /, Fig. 30 /. with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi- ››› ›››

39 Safety

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt

If you want to fit a universal approval category (U) child seat in your vehicle, you must check that the seat is approved for your vehicle. You will find any necessary information on the child seat’s orange ECE approval label. The following table shows the different fitting options.

Fig. 31 On the rear seats: installing the child seat.

Front passenger seata) Weight group Rear side seat Rear central seatb) Airbag enabled airbag disabledc)

Group 0 to 10 kg X U U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF UF UF

X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration. U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group. UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat. c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

40 Transporting children safely

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt ● Set the height of the seat belt such that it adapts to the child seat naturally, without twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt height regulator must be used with rear-facing child seats. ● Put the seat belt in place and pass it through the child seat according to the instructions of the child seat manufacturer. ● Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted. ● Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle until you hear the engagement click.

WARNING When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable for age, weight and size. ● Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats ››› page 33.

41 Emergencies Emergencies ● information call  Assistance call1) ● assistance call With the assistance call you can directly re- ● emergency call service. quest specialised help in the event of a Self-help breakdown. A built-in control unit establishes the con- Parallel to the voice call, some vehicle data is nection. Information, assistance and transmitted, e.g. your current location. When a voice service is activated, a connec- emergency call service tion is established with a phone line.  Emergency call service1) If an emergency call is conducted manually How it works Control lamp or activated automatically in the event of an The control has a warning lamp ››› Fig. 32 accident with an airbag triggering, informa- (arrow). It shows the following statuses: tion relevant to the emergency is broadcast, e.g. the current location of the vehicle ● Off: the eCall service is not available. ››› page 361. ● Flashes red, approx. 20 seconds after If the call is public, the person on the other switching on the ignition: the eCall service end of the line uses the language of the is off. country in which you are located. ● Lights up red: system failure. The eCall service is available with certain restrictions. If the call is private, the person on the other CUPRA suggests going to a specialised work- end of the line will assist you in the language shop. you have configured in the Infotainment sys- Fig. 32 On the roof console: voice service tem. If the configured language is not availa- ● Lights up green: the eCall service is availa- controls ble, English will be used. ble. The system works correctly. Depending on the equipment, there is a ● Flashes green: There is an ongoing voice Diversion to 112 emergency number control on the roof console. connection. In some situations where the emergency call    By pressing the buttons , and service is limited or cannot be carried out, an Information call1) ››› Fig. 32, you can run the following voice  emergency call is made to 112. services: With the information call, a call is made to SEAT, S.A. customer service.

1) Only available in certain countries. 42 Self-help

The following conditions may cause the Emergency equipment Some of the items listed are only provided in emergency call service to function in a limi- certain model versions, or are optional ex- ted manner or the call to be diverted to the tras. 112 emergency number: Vehicle tool kit WARNING ● The emergency call is made from an area with weak or no mobile and GPS signal, as When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set and spare wheel are loose in the interior well as e.g. tunnels, between very tall build- they can be violently thrown in case of a ings, garages, underground walkways, moun- sudden manoeuvre or braking and espe- tains and valleys. cially in accidents, causing serious injury. ● In areas with sufficient mobile telephone ● Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre and GPS coverage, the mobile telephone mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo- network of the telecommunications opera- rary spare wheel are safely secured in the tor in question may not be available. luggage compartment. ● In some countries, the emergency call Fig. 33 Underneath the floor panel of the service may not be available due to legal rea- luggage compartment: vehicle tool kit. WARNING sons. There is no valid license for the use of the emergency call service. Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can The vehicle tool kit is located under the floor cause injury or accidents. ● The components of the vehicle required panel in the luggage compartment. To ac- ● Never work with inappropriate or dam- for the emergency phone call are damaged cess the vehicle tools page 136 . ››› aged tools. or do not get enough power. The tool kit includes: ● In some countries, the emergency call Note service may not be available and depending 1 Adapter for the anti-theft bolt The jack does not generally require any on the location of the vehicle, the control 2 Towing eye, removable lamp LEDs, and even the operation of the maintenance. If required, it should be 3 Wheel spanner different types of calls, could have a specific greased using universal type grease. behaviour. 4 Crank handle for jack 5 Jack Note 6 Hook for extracting the central wheel Breakdown service and information calls trims can incur an additional cost on your tele- 7 Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps phone bill.

43 Emergencies

Tyre repairs WARNING parking lock button P it fitted with an automatic gear box, to reduce the risk of invol- Using the tyre mobility system can be dan- untary movement of the vehicle . TMS (Tyre Mobility System) gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the roadside. Please observe the following The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal rules to minimise the risk of injury: WARNING punctures caused by the penetration of a ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- A tyre filled with sealant does not have the foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diame- ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur- same performance properties as a conven- ter. Do not remove foreign objects, e.g. rounding traffic to fill the tyre. tional tyre. screws or nails, from the tyre. ● Ensure the ground on which you park is ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, flat and solid. (50 mph). you must again check the tyre pressure ● All passengers and particularly children ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking about 10 minutes after starting the engine. must keep a safe distance from the work and fast cornering. area. You should only use the tyre mobility set if ● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check familiar with the procedure and you have the other road users. the tyre. necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you ● Use the tyre mobility system only if you should seek professional assistance. are familiar with the necessary procedures. For the sake of the environment Otherwise, you should seek professional Dispose of used or expired sealant observ- Do not use the tyre sealant in the following assistance. ing any legal requirements. cases: ● The tyre mobility set is intended for temporary emergency use only until you can ● If the wheel rim has been damaged. reach the nearest specialised workshop. Note ● In outside temperatures below -20°C ● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre You can purchase a new bottle of tyre seal- (-4°F). mobility set as soon as possible. ant in specialised CUPRA dealers or any ● In the event of cuts or perforations in the ● The sealant is a health hazard and must SEAT dealership. tyre greater than 4 mm. be cleaned immediately if it comes into ● If you have been driving with very low pres- contact with the skin. Note sure or a completely flat tyre. ● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of Take into account the separate instruction the reach of small children. ● If the sealant bottle has passed its use by manual of the tyre mobility system’s manu- date. ● Always stop the engine, apply the elec- facturer. tronic parking brake and put it in gear if fitted with a manual gearbox, or press the

44 Self-help

Anti-puncture kit contents 6 Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated ● With the bottle upside down, empty all of in the inflator tube). the contents into the tyre. 7 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- ● Remove the bottle from the valve. toring system (it can also be integrated in ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- the inflator tube). ing the tool ››› Fig. 34 1 . 8 Tube for inflating tyres 9 12 volt connector Inflating the tyre

10 Bottle of sealant ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube Fig. 34 8 into the tyre valve. 11 Spare tyre valve ››› ● Check that the air bleed screw is closed The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the ››› Fig. 34 6 . lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert ● Start the engine and leave it running. can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also applies to its replacement part ● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 34 9 into the Fig. 34 Standard representation: anti- 11 . vehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 145 . puncture kit contents. ● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF switch Fig. 34 5 . The anti-puncture kit is located underneath ››› the floor covering in the luggage compart- Sealing and inflating a tyre ● Keep the air compressor running until it ment. It includes the following components reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar ››› Fig. 34: Sealing the tyre (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 ● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use minutes. 1 Valve insert remover the ››› Fig. 34 1 tool to remove the insert. ● Disconnect the air compressor. 2 A sticker to be adhered to the instrument Place it on a clean surface. ● If it does not reach the pressure indicated, cluster, within the driver's visual field, to ● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. remind that the maximum advisable ››› Fig. 34 10 . speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is ● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 34 3 into distributed throughout the tyre. 3 Filler tube with cap the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the 4 Air compressor (depending on the ver- automatically. valve. sion, the model may vary). ● Remove the lid from the filling tube ● Repeat the inflation process. 5 ON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 34 3 and screw the open end of the ● tube into the tyre valve. If the indicated pressure still cannot be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop » 45 Emergencies

and request assistance from an authorised overheating! Before switching on the air Changing a wheel technician. compressor again, let it cool for several mi- ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew nutes. What to do first the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and ● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding Check after 10 minutes of driving and in a safe place as far away from traffic as 80 km/h (50 mph). possible. Screw the inflator tube Fig. 34 5 again ● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 34 2 to the in- ››› ● Apply the electronic parking brake. and check the pressure on the gauge 6 . strument cluster, within the driver's visual ● Switch on the hazard warning lights. field. 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: ● Manual transmission: engage 1st gear. ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes ● Automatic transmission: switch on the ››› page 46. ● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. parking lock by pressing button P. WARNING ● You should obtain professional assistance ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle. When inflating the wheel, the air compres- ››› . sor and the inflator tube may become hot. ● Make sure that the vehicle tool kit 1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: page 43 and the spare wheel page 347 ● Protect hands and skin from hot parts. ››› ››› ● are ready. ● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube Set the tyre pressure to the correct value or hot air compressor on flammable mate- again. ● Observe the applicable legislation for each rial. ● Carefully resume your journey until you country (reflective vest, warning triangles, etc.). ● Allow them to cool before storing the de- reach the nearest specialised workshop vice. without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and ● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at ● Have the damaged tyre replaced. wait in a safe place (for instance behind the least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is roadside crash barrier). too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a WARNING good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- WARNING Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance. and can cause accidents and serious injury. ● Always observe the above steps and protect yourself and other road users. ● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres- CAUTION sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. ● If you change the wheel on a slope, block the wheel on the opposite side of the car Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- ● Seek specialist assistance. with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi- mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid cle from moving. 46 Self-help

Wheel bolt caps Anti-theft wheel nuts Loosening wheel nuts

Fig. 35 Wheel: wheel nuts with caps. Fig. 36 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and Fig. 37 Wheel change: loosen the wheel adapter. nuts. Removal Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the ● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools››› Fig. 33 ) car to loosen the wheel nuts. over the cap until it clicks into place ● Remove the wheel cover or the cap. ››› Fig. 35. ● Insert the special adapter ››› Fig. 36 1 (ve- Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turn ● Remove the cap with the plastic clip. hicle tools ››› page 43 ) onto the anti-theft before raising the vehicle with the jack. wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go. If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push The caps protect the wheel nuts and should ● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto on the end of the wheel wrench with your be remounted after changing the tyre. the adapter as far as it will go. foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a ● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 47 . take care not to slip during this operation. special cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking bolts and is not for use with standard Note Loosening wheel nuts wheel nuts. Make a note of the code number of the an- ● Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe ››› Fig. 37. place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a ● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the new adapter, you can obtain it from the bolt approximately one turn anticlock- specialised CUPRA service or the SEAT Of- wise ››› . » ficial Service, indicating the code number.

47 Emergencies

Important information about wheel nuts have been tightened to the prescribed tor- Factory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe- que, they could come loose while driving. cially matched during construction. There- ● Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct rims with bolted ring trims. wheel nuts with the right length and heads ● If wheel nuts are tightened below the must be used. This ensures that wheels are prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could fitted securely and that the brake system come loose while driving. If tightening tor- functions correctly. que is too high, the wheel nuts or threads In certain circumstances, you should not can be damaged. even use wheel nuts from vehicles of the Fig. 39 Cross member: positioning the same model. jack on the vehicle. Raise the vehicle WARNING ● Rest the jack (vehicles tools) on firm If the wheel nuts are not properly tight- ground. If necessary use a large, strong ened, they could come loose while driving board or similar support. If the surface is slip- and cause an accident, serious injury and pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a loss of vehicle control. rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip- ● Use only wheel nuts which correspond to ping ››› . the rim in question. ● Find the support point on the strut (sunken ● Never use different wheel nuts. area) closest to the wheel to be changed ● Wheel nuts and threads should be clean, ››› Fig. 38. free of oil and grease, and it should be pos- ● Turn the jack crank handle, located below sible to screw them easily. the strut support point, to raise it until the Fig. 38 Jack position points. ● To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, only tab 1 ››› Fig. 39 is below the housing provi- use the wheel wrench that came with the ded. car from the factory. ● Align the jack so that tab 1 “grips” onto ● The wheel nuts should only be loosened the housing provided on the strut and the slightly (about one turn) before raising the mobile base 2 is resting on the ground. The vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident! base plate 2 should fall vertically with re- ● Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or spect to the support point 1 . to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts ● Continue turning the jack until the wheel is slightly lifted off the ground. 48 Self-help

WARNING CAUTION ● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack. ● The factory-supplied jack is only designed The vehicle must not be raised on the Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of the for changing wheels on this model. On no crossbar. Place the jack only at the support wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di- account attempt to use it for lifting heavier points provided on the strut and align it. agonal pairs (not in a circle). vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury. Otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged. ● Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on. ● Make sure the jack remains stable. If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack could The wheel nuts should be clean and turn easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect slip or sink, respectively, with the conse- Removing and installing a wheel quent risk of causing injuries. the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These surfaces must be clean before ● Lift the vehicle using only the jack sup- Change the wheel after loosening the wheel fitting the wheel. plied from the factory. Other jacks, even nuts and raising the vehicle with the jack. those approved for other CUPRA models could slip, with the consequent risk of in- When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim Tightening torque of the wheel nuts may hit and damage the brake disc. For this jury. The prescribed tightening torque for wheel reason, please take care and get a second ● Place the jack only at the support points nuts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. Af- person to assist you. provided on the strut and align it. Other- ter changing a wheel, have the tightening wise, the jack could slip because it does not torque checked immediately with a torque have sufficient grip on the vehicle: risk of Taking off the wheel wrench that is working perfectly. injury! ● Unscrew the wheel nuts using the box Before checking tightening torque, have ● spanner and place them on a clean surface. You should never place a body limb such any rusty wheel nuts that are difficult to as an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that ● Take off the wheel. screw replaced and clean the wheel hub is solely supported by the jack. threads. ● If you have to work underneath the vehi- Putting on the spare wheel cle, you must use suitable stands addition- Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to Check the direction of rotation of the tyre ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have accident!. ››› page 50. been tightened to the prescribed torque, they could come loose while driving. ● Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one ● Place the spare wheel or temporary spare side or the engine is running. wheel into position. ● Never start the engine when the vehicle is ● Screw on the wheel nuts in position and raised. The vehicle may come loose from tighten them loosely with a box spanner. the jack due to the engine vibrations. ● To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel nuts use the corresponding adaptor.

49 Emergencies

Tyres with directional tread pat- ● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi- ● Close the bonnet ››› page 322 . tern cator, adjust the pressure and store it in ● Switch the ignition on and off. memory ››› page 346 . ● Press the windscreen wiper lever down- Tyres with directional tread pattern have ● Have the tightening torque of the wheel wards briefly ››› page 123 4 . been designed to operate best when rotat- nuts checked as soon as possible with a toring in only one direction. An arrow on the que wrench ››› page 49 . Meanwhile, drive Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rota- carefully. Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind- tion on tyres with directional tread. Always ● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as screen wiper arms return to their initial posi- observe the indicated direction of rotation in possible. tion. order to guarantee optimum grip and help avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and Note wear. ● The windscreen wiper arms can be If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direc- Changing the windscreen moved to the service position only when tion of rotation, drive with extreme caution, wiper blades the bonnet is properly closed. as the tyre is no longer being used correctly. ● You can also use the service position, for This is of particular importance when the Wiper service position example, if you want to fix a cover over the road surface is wet. Change the tyre as soon windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of as possible or remount it with the correct di- ice. rection of rotation.

Works after changing a wheel

● Replace the wheel bolt caps. ● Return all tools to their proper storing location. ● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the spare wheel housing, store it safely in the Fig. 40 Wipers in service position. luggage compartment ››› page 134 . Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen. ● Check the tyre pressure of the newly mounted tyre as soon as possible. The wiper arms can be raised when the wipers are in service position ››› Fig. 40 .

50 Self-help

Changing the wiper rear wiper Damaged windscreen wiper blades should Changing the rear window wiper blade blades be replaced immediately. These are available ● Separate the wiper arm from the rear win- from qualified workshops. dow. ● Remove the blade from the holder below Raising and lowering windscreen wiper the centre. During this operation, hold the arms wiper arm firmly. ● Place the windscreen wipers in the service ● Fit the new blade (of the same length and position page 50 . ››› type) into the housing of the wipe arm by ● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fas- pressing it in place. When doing so, hold the tening point. wiper arm by the upper end. ● Fold the wiper arm and rest it on the win- Cleaning windscreen wiper blades dow. ● Raise the wiper arms. Fig. 41 Changing the windscreen wiper blades ● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt WARNING from the windscreen wiper blades. Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re- The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as ● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or duce visibility and increase the risk of acci- standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is damp cloth may be used ››› . dent and serious injury. responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si- ● Always replace damaged or worn wind- lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the Changing the windscreen wiper blades screen wiper blades or blades that no lon- noise of the water as it is wiped across the ger clean the windscreen properly. windscreen will be louder. ● Lift and unfold the wiper arms. ● Press and hold release button Fig. 41 1 Check the condition of the wiper blades reg- ››› CAUTION and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di- ularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, rection of the arrow. ● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers they should be changed if they are damaged, could scratch the glass. or cleaned if they are dirty ››› . ● Fit a new wiper blade of the same length and design on to the wiper arm and hook it ● If products containing solvents, rough If this does not produce the desired results, into place. sponges or sharp objects are used to clean the setting angle of the windscreen wiper the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- ● arms might be incorrect. They should be Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind- aged. screen. checked by a specialised workshop and cor- ● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, rected if necessary. paint thinner or similar products to clean the windows. »

51 Emergencies

● In icy conditions, always check that the Note 2. Connect one end of the red jump lead wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- to the positive + terminal of the vehicle ● The vehicles must not touch each other, fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it with the flat battery A . otherwise electricity could flow as soon as may help to leave the vehicle parked with the positive terminals are connected. 3. Connect the other end of the red jump the wipers in service position ››› page 50 . lead to the positive terminal + in the ● The discharged battery must be properly vehicle providing assistance B . connected to the on-board network. CAUTION 4. Connect one end of the black jump lead ● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the C to a suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of metal in the engine block, wiper arms, only leave them in the service Jump start: description position. or to the engine block itself. ● Before driving, always lower the wiper 5. Connect the other end of the black arms. jump lead D to a solid metal component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect it Jump start to a point near the battery. 6. Position the leads in such a way that Jump leads they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compart- The jump lead must have a sufficient wire ment. cross section. If the engine fails to start because of a dis- Starting charged battery, the battery can be connec- 7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the ted to the battery of another vehicle to start boosting battery and let it run at idling the engine. speed. Jump leads must comply with standard DIN 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- Fig. 42 Diagram of connections for vehi- flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes tions). The wire cross section must be at cles with Start-Stop system. until the engine is running. least 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least 35 mm2 for diesel engines. Jump lead terminal connections 1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles ››› . 52 Self-help

Removing the jump leads acid could leak and cause chemical burns. Tow start and towing 9. Before you remove the jump leads, If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. switch off the dipped beam headlights if ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga- Introduction they are switched on. rettes away from batteries, danger of ex- 10. Turn on the heater blower and heated plosion. Failure to comply could result in an Tow-starting means starting the engine of rear window in the vehicle with the flat explosion. the vehicle while another pulls it. ● Observe the instructions provided by the battery. This helps minimise voltage Towing means one vehicle pulling another manufacturer of the jump leads. peaks which are generated when the that is not roadworthy. leads are disconnected. ● Do not connect the negative cable from Always consider the legal provisions relating 11. When the engine is running, disconnect the other vehicle directly to the negative to tow-starting and towing. the leads in reverse order to the details terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. given above. For technical reasons, towing a vehicle Danger of explosion. with a discharged battery is not allowed. Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient ● Never attach the negative cable to fuel The jump start should be used instead metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter- system components or the brake lines in ››› page 52. minals. the other vehicle. If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access ● The non-insulated parts of the battery If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- system, towing is only allowed with the igni- clamps must not be allowed to touch. The onds, switch off the starter and try again af- tion on! ter about 1 minute. jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is vehicle, this can cause a short circuit. WARNING towed with the engine switched off and the ● Position the leads in such a way that they ignition connected. Depending on the bat- ● Please note the safety warnings referring cannot come into contact with any moving tery charge status, the drop in voltage may to working in the engine compartment parts in the engine compartment. be so large, even after just a few minutes, ››› page 322. ● Do not lean on the batteries. This could that no electrical device in the vehicle may ● The battery providing assistance must result in chemical burns. work e.g. the hazard warning lights. In vehi- have the same voltage as the flat battery cles with the Keyless Access system, the (12V) and approximately the same capacity steering wheel could lock . (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply Note ››› could result in an explosion. The vehicles must not touch each other, WARNING ● Never use jump leads when one of the otherwise electricity could flow as soon as batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! the positive terminals are connected. A vehicle with no power should never be Even after the battery has thawed, battery towed. »

53 Emergencies

● During towing, never switch off the igni- – Brake earlier than usual and more If despite everything it is necessary to tow tion using the start button. Otherwise, the smoothly. start the vehicle (only if fitted with a man- electronic lock of the steering column ual gearbox): could suddenly become blocked and it CAUTION ● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear. would be impossible to steer the vehicle. ● This could cause an accident, serious injury ● To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam- Keep the clutch depressed. and loss of control of the vehicle. ple the paint, remove and replace the lid ● Switch on the ignition and the hazard ● If during towing the vehicle runs out of and towing eye carefully. warning lights of both vehicles. power, stop towing immediately and re- ● Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic ● When both vehicles are in motion, release quest the assistance of specialist person- converter and damage it during towing. the clutch. nel. ● As soon as the engine starts, depress the clutch and disengage the gear to avoid col- WARNING Instructions for tow-starting liding with the towing vehicle. Vehicle handling and braking capacity change considerably during towing. Please Vehicle's should not generally be tow-star- CAUTION ted. The jump start should be used instead observe the following instructions to mini- ● When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could page 52. mise the risk of serious accidents and in- ››› enter the catalytic converter and damage jury: For technical reasons, towing the following it. ● As the driver of the vehicle being towed: vehicles is not allowed: ● The distance to be towed to start the en- – You should depress the brake much gine must not exceed 50 m, otherwise ● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox. harder as the brake servo does not op- there is a risk of damaging the catalytic erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid ● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- converter. crashing into the towing vehicle. cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access – More strength is required at the steer- locking and ignition system the steering re- Note ing wheel as the power steering does mains locked and the electronic parking The vehicle can only be jump-started if the not operate when the engine is switch- brake cannot be deactivated nor can the electronic parking brake and, if appropri- ed off. electronic lock of the steering column be released if they are activated. ate, the electronic lock of the steering col- ● As the driver of the towing vehicle: umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has no – Accelerate with particular care and ● If the battery is flat, it is possible that the power supply or there is an electric system caution. engine control units may not operate cor- fault, the engine must be jump-started to rectly. deactivate the electronic parking brake and – Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. the electronic lock of the steering column.

54 Self-help

Towing instructions ● You should depress the brake much harder When the vehicle has to be towed: as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid Check whether the vehicle may be towed Towing requires some expertise and experi- hitting the towing vehicle. ››› page 56, Cases where towing the vehi- ence, especially when using a tow rope. Both ● Bear in mind the information and instruc- cle is not permitted. drivers should be familiar with the difficulties tions in the manual of the vehicle to be tow- The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or involved in towing. For this reason, inexper- ed. ienced drivers should abstain from towing. tow rope in the normal way, with all four wheels on the road; it can also be towed with Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle During towing, it should be ensured that no either the front or rear wheels lifted off the impermissible tractive forces or shocks are ● Accelerate with particular care and cau- road. generated. When towing on an unpaved tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres. road, there is always a risk of overloading and ● Switch the ignition on. ● Brake earlier than usual and smoothly. damaging the anchorage points. ● Move the selector lever to the N ● Bear in mind the information and instruc- page 218 position. During towing, the towing vehicle can signal tions in the manual of the towed vehicle. ››› the change of direction even with the hazard ● Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at warning lights turned on. To do so, at the Tow rope or tow bar speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph). same time, the turn signal lever must be op- ● The vehicle must not be towed further erated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a than 50 km (30 miles). the hazard warning lights will go off. When tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A the turn signal lever is returned to the rest tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is ● If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with position, the hazard warning lights will be au- not available. automatic transmission are only allowed to be towed with the front wheels suspended. tomatically reactivated. A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or (4Drive) ● Leave the ignition on, so that the steering similarly elastic material. Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can be is not blocked, and the electronic parking Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to towed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the ve- brake may be deactivated and the turn sig- the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket. nals and wash/wipe operated. hicle is towed with the front or rear axle sus- If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de- pended, the engine must be switched off, ● More strength is required at the steering vice, towing with a tow bar is only permitted otherwise the transmission may be dam- wheel as the power steering does not oper- if it has been specially designed to be instal- aged. » ate when the engine is switched off. led on a tow hitch ››› page 291 .

55 Emergencies

Cases where towing the vehicle is not per- lock of the steering column are deactiva- mitted ted. If the vehicle has no power supply or ● If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri- there is an electric system fault, the engine cant. must be jump-started ››› page 52 to deactivate the electronic parking brake and the ● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- electronic lock of the steering column. cause the steering remains locked and, if appropriate, the electronic parking brake cannot be deactivated or the electronic lock of the steering column released. Front towline anchorage ● If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav- Fig. 44 Right side of the front bumper: elled. towline anchorage in position. ● When, for example, after an accident, the smooth rotation of the wheels or the steer- The housing of the screw towing eye is on ing operation cannot be guaranteed. the right side of the front bumper behind a lid ››› Fig. 43 . When the vehicle is to tow another vehi- The towing eye should always be kept in the cle: vehicle. ● Observe legal requirements. Bear in mind the instructions for towing ● Keep in mind the instructions in the man- ››› page 55. ual on towing vehicles. Fig. 43 On the right side of the front bumper: remove the cover. Fitting the towline anchorage CAUTION ● Remove the towing eye from the vehicle If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri- tool kit in the luggage compartment cant in the automatic transmission the car ››› page 43. may only be towed with the driven wheels ● lifted clear of the road, or transported on a Remove the cover by pressing down on its special car transporter or trailer. base and leave it hanging from the vehicle ››› Fig. 43. Note ● Screw the towing eye in the housing by turning it as far as it will go anticlock- The vehicle can only be towed if the elec- wise ››› Fig. 44 ››› . Use a suitable object tronic parking brake and the electronic

56 Self-help that can completely and securely tighten the ● Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve- towing eye in its housing. hicle. ● After towing, unscrew the towing eye ● Screw the towing eye in the housing by clockwise with a suitable object. turning it to the maximum anticlockwise ● Replace the cover and tighten on its right ››› Fig. 46 ››› . Use a suitable object that side until the tab snaps into the bumper. can completely and securely tighten the towing eye in its housing. ● Clean the towing eye if necessary and then store it in the luggage compartment along ● After towing, unscrew the towing eye with the other vehicle tools. clockwise with a suitable object. ● Replace the cover and press until the tab Fig. 46 On the right side of the rear CAUTION bumper: towline anchorage in position. snaps into the bumper. The towing eye must always be completely ● Clean the towing eye if necessary and then and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be The housing of the screw towing eye is on store it in the luggage compartment along released while towing and tow-starting. the right side of the rear bumper behind a lid with the other vehicle tools. ››› Fig. 45. CAUTION Vehicles equipped as standard with a towing Rear towline anchorage bracket do not have any housing for the ● The towing eye must always be complete- screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case, ly and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could the tow hitch needs to be extracted or instal- be released while towing and tow-starting. led and used for towing ››› page 291 , ››› . ● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow with Bear in mind the instructions for towing a tow bar if this has been specially designed page 55. ››› to be installed with a tow hitch. If an unsuitable tow bar is used, both the tow hitch and Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with- the vehicle may be damaged. Instead, a tow out a factory-equipped towing bracket) rope should be used. ● Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment Fig. 45 On the right side of the rear bump- ››› page 43. er: remove the cover. ● Press the upper side of the lid ››› Fig. 45 to unclip it.

57 Emergencies

Fuses and bulbs perage (same colour and markings) and Fuses inside the vehicle size. ● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta- Fuses ple or similar.

Introduction CAUTION In general, a fuse can be assigned to various ● To prevent damage to the vehicle’s elec- electrical components. Likewise, an electri- trical system, before replacing a fuse always cal component can be protected by several turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec- fuses. trical elements. ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- Only replace fuses when the cause of the vent the entry of dust or humidity as they problem has been solved. If a newly inserted Fig. 47 On the driver's side dashboard: can damage the electrical system. fuse blows after a short time, you must have fuse box cover. the electrical system checked by a special- Opening and closing the fuse box situated ised workshop as soon as possible. Note below the dash panel ● One component may have more than one WARNING fuse. ● Open: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 47 . The high voltages in the electrical system ● Several components may run on a single ● Close: push back the cover it in until it can give serious electrical shocks, causing fuse. clicks into place. burns and even death! ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the those indicated in this chapter. Identifying fuses below the dashboard by ignition system. colours ● Take care not to cause short circuits in Colour Amp rating the electrical system. Light brown 5

WARNING Brown 7.5

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or Red 10 bridging a current circuit without fuses can cause a fire and serious injury. Blue 15

● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only Yellow 20 replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

58 Fuses and bulbs

Colour Amp rating To open the engine compartment fuse box Recognise a blown fuse ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 322 . A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured White or transparent 25 ● Press the locking tabs to release the fuse ››› Fig. 49. Green 30 box cover Fig. 48 . ››› ● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has Orange 40 ● Then lift the cover out. blown. ● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. CAUTION Push the locking tabs down until they click To replace a fuse ● Always carefully remove the fuse box audibly into place. ● Remove the fuse. covers and refit them correctly to avoid ● Replace the blown fuse by one with an problems with your vehicle. identical amperage rating (same colour and ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to Replace a blown fuse markings) and identical size. avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and ● Replace the cover again or close the fuse humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam- box lid. age to the electrical system.

Fuse placement Fuses in the engine compartment Fuses in the vehicle interior No. Consumers/Amps

3 Trailer 25

Fig. 49 Image of a blown fuse. 4 SCR, Adblue 20

Preparations 5 Automatic gearbox lever 25 ● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri- 6 Interior light 30 cal equipment. 8 Sunroof 20 ● Open the corresponding fuse box Fig. 48 In the engine compartment: fuse 7 Heated seats 30 box cover. ››› page 58, ››› page 59 . 9 Left door 30

11 Trailer 15 » 59 Emergencies

No. Consumers/Amps No. Consumers/Amps No. Consumers/Amps

12 Right lights 40 37 Electric rear lid 30 66 Rear window wiper 15

13 Central locking 40 39 Heated steering wheel 10 67 Heated rear window 30

14 Beats Audio CAN and MOST. 30 40 Alarm horn 7.5 In-line fuse/Amps 16 Airbag 7.5 41 Gateway 7.5 230 V rear power sockets 30 17 SCR, engine relay, 1.5 10 42 Automatic gearbox lever 7.5 Electric driver's seat 15 18 KESSY 7.5 Air conditioning and heating control 43 panel, rear window heating, AA com- 10 Fuse arrangement in engine compartment 19 Instrument panel 7.5 pressor No. Consumers/Amps 20 Connectivity Box 7.5 Diagnosis, handbrake switch, light 44 switch, reverse light, interior lighting, 7.5 2 Engine control unit 7.5 21 Rear camera 7.5 lit-up door sill Fuel pump control unit, CNG 7.5/10/20 24 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15 45 Steering column 7.5 3 Version VZ5: Ignition coils 30 25 RGS+EBSS front seat belts 25 46 Radio display 7.5 4 Left headlight 15 26 Right door 30 47 Driving mode. 10 5 Right headlight 15 27 RGS+EBSS front seat belts 25 48 USB 7.5 7 Automatic gearbox pump 30 PHEV. Switching off the high voltage 52 12V socket 20 28 system for rescue tasks. Identified by 10 8 Brake servo 40 a yellow label Parking sensors, park distance con- 58 7.5 trol unit, front camera, radar 9 Horn 15 29 Trailer 15 Reverse switch, clima sensor, elec- 10 Front windscreen washer 30 59 7.5 30 Radio 30 trochromic mirror 11 PHEV Climate 7.5 31 Trailer 25 Diagnosis, headlight control unit, 60 7.5 headlight adjuster Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30 34 230V socket 30 12 Version VZ5: Automatic gearbox 61 Starter motor; clutch sensor 7.5 10 35 Left lights 40 control unit 65 Sound amplifier 10 36 Air conditioner fan 40 13 ESP control unit 25 60 Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumers/Amps No. Consumers/Amps Full-LED headlights are designed to last the lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be 14 Standheizung 20 Version VZ5: Injection valve for 31 10 replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to cylinders 1-4 an authorised workshop to have it replaced. 15 ESP control unit 40 33 PTC 40 16 PHEV, Automatic gearbox unit Fog lights, rear lights, license plate light, side turn signals and additional brake light 17 PTC 40 Note Taking into account that they use LED bulbs, ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than 18 PTC 40 they should be replaced at a technical serv- those indicated in this chapter. These 20 Front electronic differential 15 should only be changed by a specialised ice centre. workshop. 21 Engine control unit 7.5 ● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- 22 Starter motor 30 pear in the following tables. Engine control unit (diesel/pet- ● Some of the equipment listed in the ta- 23 15 rol) bles below pertain only to certain versions of the model or are optional extras. Engine sensors 7.5/10 ● Please note that the above lists, while 24 Version VZ5: Engine relay, elec- correct at the time of printing, are subject 7.5 tric fan to change.

Engine sensors 7.5/10 25 Version VZ5: Engine sensors 15 Changing bulbs Engine power supply 7.5/10

26 Version VZ5: Engine power sup- 7.5 Changing bulbs ply Full-LED headlights 27 Lambda probe 10/15 Full-LED headlights handle all light functions 28 Engine 10/20 (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam 29 Fuel pump control unit 15/20/30 and route light) with light emitting diodes (LEDs) as a light source. 30 Pressure pump 1.0 10

61 Operation

Fig. 50 Instruments and controls.

62 Controls and displays

Operation – On-board computer ...... 70 Note 8 Infotainment system ...... 162 ● Some of the equipment listed in this sec- 9 Glove compartment ...... 143 tion is only fitted on certain models or are Controls and displays optional extras. 10 Front passenger airbag ...... 26 ● The arrangement of controls on right- 11 Front passenger airbag switch . . . . . 27 Interior view hand drive models may be slightly different 12 Hazard warning lights ...... 120 from the layout shown in ››› page 62 . How- 13 USB type-C ports ...... 206 ever, the symbols used to identify the con- Overview trols are the same. 14 Connectivity Box ...... 204

1 Door handle 15 Depending on the equipment: 2 Air vents ...... 152 – Manual gearbox ...... 217 3 Control lever for: – DSG automatic transmission . . . . . 218

– Turn signals and main beam 16 Central locking switch ...... 97 headlights ...... 116 17 Electronic parking brake switch . . . . 266 4 Switches for: 18 Auto Hold switch ...... 268 – Driver assistance systems ...... 81 19 Starter button ...... 207 – On-board computer ...... 80 20 Adjustable steering column...... 15 – Controls for radio, telephone, 21 Fuse box ...... 58 navigation and voice control system ...... 91 22 Bonnet lock release ...... 324 5 Steering wheel with horn and 23 Control for lighting and demisting windows ...... 114 – Driver airbag ...... 26 24 Button to open rear lid ...... 107 – Paddle levers for tiptronic gearshift (automatic gearbox) ...... 220 25 Control for the electric adjustment of the exterior mirrors ...... 126 6 Instrument panel ...... 64 26 Electric windows ...... 110 7 Control lever for: – Windscreen wipers and washer ...... 123 – Wipe and wash system ...... 123 63 Operation

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Instrument panel

Introduction

After switching the engine on with a 12-volt battery that is heavily discharged or newly changed some system settings (such as the time, the date, the personalised comfort settings and the programming) might be altered or deleted. Check and correct these settings once the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. ● Do not operate the instrument panel controls when driving. ● To reduce the risk of accident and injury, only make adjustments to the instructions on the screen of the instrument panel and to the instructions on the screen of the In- fotainment system when the vehicle is stationary.

64 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Digital instrument panel (Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 51 Digital Cockpit on the instrument panel (classic view).

Details of the instruments: screen. It has a 5 views accessible using the ● CUPRA button  of the multifunction steering 1 Control and warning lamps ››› page 82 wheel. By selecting different information All views will display information on the 2 Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi- profiles, indications other than the classic screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi- nute the engine is running page 76 . 1) 1) ››› circular instruments can be displayed, such cle status, navigation and driving aids . 3 Gear engaged or selector lever posi- as navigation data, multimedia information tion or travel data. Information profiles 4 Screen display ››› page 67 The  /  buttons on the multifunction The 6 views are: steering wheel can be used to browse 5 Speedometer ● Classic through the different Digital Cockpit infor- 6 Digital speed display ● Dynamic mation. 7 Information Profile page 65 . ››› ● Assistance systems Information on the vehicle status, travel data The Digital Cockpit is a digital instrument ● Navigation and assistants will be displayed on the left panel with a high-resolution TFT colour side. » ● Night

1) Depending on the version. 65 Operation

On the right side information will be dis- Classic View Information that may be displayed in the played on: audio, telephone, compass, navi- The revolutions per minute and speedome- central area of the Digital Cockpit rev gation manoeuvres and the G-force meter. ter needles appear in full length by a long counter Depending on the view in the central area of press on the button  on the multifunction ● Consumption and average consumption. the Digital Cockpit information about the steering wheel, regardless of the menu dis- By pressing the arrow on the left of the mul- following will be displayed: played in the central area ››› Fig. 51 . tifunction steering wheel, you can switch between the different memories of the travel With another long press on the button , ● Classic View and Dynamic View: Initial da- data. ta, date, distance travelled and autonomy. the display will returns to the previous view. ● Autonomy (fuel tank level). Turning the right thumbwheel on the multi- Or looking in the instrument panel menu for ● function steering wheel: navigation map, the  Close option using the right hand Lubricating oil and coolant temperature road signs, driving data (clicking on  thumbwheel on the multifunction steering ● Average speed. By pressing the arrow on switches between the different memories). wheel, and then press . the left of the multifunction steering wheel, ● Assists View: This is accessed by pressing you can switch between the different memo- the button  or the button  on the multi- Information that may be displayed in the ries of the travel data. function steering wheel. Turning the right central area of the Digital Cockpit speed- ● Other travel data: km travelled and driving thumbwheel on the multifunction steering ometer time. By pressing the arrow on the left of the wheel displays the list of assistants. Press  ● Audio multifunction steering wheel, you can switch to turn the desired assistant on/off. between the different memories of the travel ● Telephone ● Navigation View: By pressing the button  data. ● Compass on the multifunction steering wheel and ● Assist systems. ● Navigation indications (the most recent then turning the thumbwheel you can view ● Engine power and torque. the map in a larger or smaller view. If you destinations are displayed by pressing the ar- ●   pressed the button  again, the map returns row on the right of the multifunction steering > (close classic view). to automatic scale. wheel) CUPRA view ● Night View: The speed is displayed in digital ● G-force meter. format. ●  >  (close classic view). Turning the right hand thumbwheel on the multi-function steering wheel scrolls through ● CUPRA view: The revolutions tube is dis- the following information displayed in the played in the centre. middle of the rev counter:

● Speed and gears. ● Lap timer.

66 Instruments and warning/control lamps

The following information is displayed out- ● Right-hand area: G-force meter. ● Left-hand area: engine power and torque. side the rev counter circle:

Digital instrument panel (Digital Cockpit) 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles

Fig. 52 Digital Cockpit on the instrument panel (classic view).

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 52 : 7 Information Profile ››› page 65 . ● Warning and information messages 1 Control and warning lamps ››› page 82 ● Odometer 2 Rev counter and Powermeter. Revolu- ● Time ››› page 76 Status display tions per minute the engine is running ● Indications of the radio and navigation sys- ››› page 77. Possible indications on the instrument tem 3 Gear engaged or selector lever posi- panel display ● Indications of the phone tion Different pieces of information can be dis- ● Outside temperature 4 Screen display ››› page 67 played on the screen of the instrument pan- ● Indications of the compass 5 Speedometer el, depending on the features of the vehicle. ● Selector lever positions » 6 Digital speed display ● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open

67 Operation

● Gear recommendation (Triptonic mode) vary according to the type of instrument Gear-change recommendation ››› page 224 panel fitted. While driving, the instrument panel of cer- ● Combined range (hybrid vehicles) tain vehicles may indicate a gear recommen- ››› page 68 Selector control positions (DSG® dual dation for saving fuel ››› page 224 . clutch gearbox) ● Display of travel data (multifunction display) and menus for different settings The current position of the selector control Odometer ››› page 69 is shown on the side of the control and on The odometer registers the total distance the instrument cluster display. When the ● Service interval display page 79 travelled by the car. ››› control is in the D/S position or in the Tip- ● Speed warning ››› page 70 tronic position, in some cases, the gear en- The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis- ● Speed warning for winter tyres gaged in each case is shown on the instru- tance travelled since the last time it was reset to zero. ● Start-Stop system status display ment cluster display . ››› page 214 To reset the trip odometer (trip ) to 0: Outside temperature indicator ● Signs detected by the road signs detection ● When in Travel data select trip. system and warning that the maximum per- If the outside temperature is lower than ap- ●  mitted speed has been exceeded proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystal Press and hold the button of the multi- ››› page 73 symbol”  on the outside temperature dis- function steering wheel for approximately 2 play also lights up. This symbol remains lit seconds. ● Indication of active cylinder management until the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C status (ACT®) ››› page 230 (+43 °F) ››› . Combined operating range display  (hy- ● Low consumption driving  brid vehicles) When the vehicle is stationary, when the ● Identifying letters on engine (LDM) auxiliary heater is switched on or when driv- The value shown is calculated and updated ● Driver assistance system display ing at very low speeds, the outside tempera- according to the driving style. Therefore, the ››› page 232 ture indicated may be higher than the actual range can vary even when the fuel tank is full and the high-voltage battery is fully charged. ● Copyright temperature due to the heat produced by the engine. Range can be increased by reducing or Doors, bonnet and rear lid open The margin of measurement ranges from switching off comfort consumers, e.g. air When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv- -45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F). conditioning or seat heating. ing, the instrument panel display shows if any of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are opened and, in some cases, it is also indicated by an audible warning. The display may

68 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Speed warning for winter tyres ● At outside temperatures above +4 °C Instrument panel menus If the maximum set speed is exceeded, this is (+39 °F), there may be ice even when the displayed on the instrument cluster display “ice crystal symbol” is not on. The number of menus and information items available will depend on the vehicle’s elec- ››› page 69. ● The outside temperature sensor takes a guideline measurement. tronics and features. The speed warning can be set in the infotainment system using the function button  > Some menu options can only be read when Vehicle > Exterior > Tyres ››› page 89 . Note the vehicle is stationary. ● There are different instrument panels ■ Driving data ››› page 70 Low consumption driving  and therefore the versions and instructions ■ Assist systems. on the display may vary. In the case of dis- Depending on the equipment, when the ve- ■ Front Assist On/Off ››› page 240  plays without warning or information texts, hicle is moving is displayed on the instru- ■ ACC (only display) ››› page 244 ment cluster display when the vehicle is in an faults are indicated exclusively by the control warning lamps. ■ Lane Assist On/Off page 252 economical consumption status due to ac- ››› ■ tive cylinder management (ACT®) ● Some indications on the instrument pan- Side Assist On/Off ››› page 258 ››› page 230. el screen may be concealed by a sudden ■ Navigation. event, e.g. an incoming call. ■ Audio. Identifying letters on engine (LDM) ● Depending on the equipment, some set- ■ Telephone. tings and instructions can be carried out or ● See Service menu page 69 . ■ Vehicle status page 71 ››› displayed on the infotainment system as ››› well. Copyright ● If there are several warnings at the same Legal text about the property rights and time, the symbols will be displayed one af- Service Menu copyrights of the instrument cluster. ter the other for a few seconds. The symbols will stay on until you remove the cause. In the Service menu various settings can be adjusted depending on the features. WARNING ● If when switching on the ignition warn- Even when the outside temperature is ings are shown about existing faults, it Open the Service menu higher than freezing temperature, some might not be possible to change the set- roads and bridges could be frozen. tings or show the information as described. ● While in Classic View, go to the Initial In this case, go to a specialised workshop  ● The “ice crystal symbol” indicates that Data screen, press the button on the mul- and request a repair. there may be a risk of freezing. tifunction steering wheel for about 5 seconds and release it. ● Next, the Configuration list menu is displayed, where you can choose between » 69 Operation

the Service menu or the View selection Next Service or 9999.9 km. When one of these val- from where the instrument cluster views can This specifies when the next workshop in- ues is exceeded (varies depending on be switched on and off. spection is scheduled. the version of the instrument panel), the memory is deleted. Restart the service interval display Delete journey data presets Select the Service menu and follow the in- Driving data indicator (multifunc- structions on the screen of the instrument tion display) ● When in Travel data select desired memo- panel. ry. The display of the travel data (multifunction ● Keep the  button on the multi-function Restart the oil service display) shows different values about the steering wheel pressed for approximately 2 Select the Restore Oil service menu and journey and the consumption. seconds. follow the instructions on the instrument panel display. Change from one display to another Select the instructions ● Turn the right thumbwheel of the multi- On the instrument cluster, it is selected Reset driving data (vehicles with an ana- function steering wheel ››› page 81 . manually using the  button on the multi- logue instrument cluster) function steering wheel. To access the con- Select the Reset trip menu and follow the Changing memory tents of the tube, rotate the right hand instructions on the instrument panel display thumbwheel up/down. to reset the value. ● Depending on the view, select Trip data and press the left arrow or the  button on – Current consumption: The current fuel consumption display operates Identifying letters on engine (LDM) the multifunction steering wheel. throughout the journey, in litres/100 Select the menu Engine code. The identify- – Since start: The memory is deleted if km; and with the engine running and ing letters of the engine will be shown on the the journey is interrupted for more than the vehicle stopped, in litres/hour. instrument cluster display at the bottom left. 2 hours. – Average consumption: The average – Since refuelling: Display and stor- fuel consumption is displayed after driv- Setting the clock age of the journey data and the con- ing for approximately 300 metres. sumption values collected. When refu- Select the Time menu and set the correct – Travelling time: This indicates the elling, the memory is deleted. time by turning the right thumbwheel of the hours (h) and minutes (min) since the multifunction steering wheel. – Long-term: This memory contains ignition was switched on. travel data up to a maximum of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km 70 Instruments and warning/control lamps

– Range: Approximate distance in km Warning and information mes- ble. If necessary, seek professional assis- that can still be travelled if the same sages (Vehicle status) tance. driving style is maintained. – AdBlue range or : Approximate The system runs a check on certain compo- Information message distance in km that can still be travelled nents and functions when the ignition is It provides information about processes in with the current level of the AdBlue® switched on and while the vehicle is moving. the vehicle. tank with the same driving style. The in- Faults are displayed on the instrument clus- dication appears from a range of less ter display as red and yellow warning symbols Accessing warnings and information than 2,400 km and cannot be deactiva- accompanied with messages and, as appli- ● In the infotainment system, press  >  ted.1) cable, even an audible signal page 82 . ››› Vehicle data > Vehicle status. – Distance: Distance covered in km (m) The representation of the messages and after switching on the ignition. symbols may vary depending on the version of the instrument panel. – Average speed: The average speed Driver alert system (break recom- Existing faults can also be checked manually. will be shown after driving for approxi- mendation) mately 100 metres. To do so, open the menu Vehicle info page 88. – Boost/Torque: Indicates the power ››› and torque of the combustion engine (does not indicate electric mode). Priority 1 warning (red) – FAS: Reduced assistant indication. The symbol lights up or flashes (in part accompanied by audible warnings).  Stop Oil and coolant temperature indication driving! Danger! Check the fault and eliminate the cause. If necessary, seek professio- The engine reaches its operating tempera- nal assistance. ture when, under normal driving conditions, the oil temperature is between 80°C (176°F) Priority 2 warning (yellow) and 120°C (248°F). If a great effort is required from the engine and the outside tempera- The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac- Fig. 53 On the instrument panel display: driver alert system symbol. ture is high, the engine oil temperature may companied by audible warnings). Operating » increase. This does not present any problem faults or the lack of operating fluids can as long as the warning lamps  or  cause damage to the vehicle or a fault. ››› page 327 do not appear on the display. Check the faulty function as soon as possi-

1) Not available in all countries. 71 Operation

The Fatigue detection informs the driver alerts > Fatigue detection ››› page 89 . A WARNING when their driving behaviour shows signs of mark indicates that the adjustment has been fatigue. activated. Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati- gue detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, Function and operation System limitations sufficient in length when making long jour- Fatigue detection determines the driving be- The Fatigue detection has certain limitations neys. haviour of the driver when starting a journey, inherent to the system. The following condi- ● The driver always assumes the responsi- making a calculation of tiredness. This is tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- bility of driving to their full capacity. constantly compared with the current driv- vent it from functioning. ● Never drive if you are tired. ing behaviour. If the system detects that the driver is tired, an audible warning is given ● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) ● The system does not detect the tiredness with a sound and an optic warning is shown ● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) of the driver in all circumstances. Consult the information in the section page 72, with a symbol and complementary message ››› ● When cornering System limitations. on the instrument panel display ››› Fig. 53 . ● On roads in poor condition The message on the instrument panel dis- ● In some situations, the system may incor- play is shown for approximately 5 seconds, ● In unfavourable weather conditions rectly interpret an intended driving manoeuvre as driver tiredness. and depending on the case, is repeated. The ● When a sporty driving style is employed system stores the last message displayed. ● No warning is given in the event of the ef- ● In the event of a serious distraction to the fect called microsleep! The message on the instrument panel dis- driver ● Please observe the indications on the in- play can be switched off by pressing the  strument panel and act as is necessary. button on the multi-function steering wheel Fatigue detection will be restored when the ››› page 80. vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, when the ignition is switched off or when the Note driver has unbuckled their seat belt and Conditions of operation ● Fatigue detection has been developed for opened the door. Driving behaviour is only calculated on driving on motorways and well paved roads speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to In the event of slow driving during a long pe- only. around 200 km/h (125 mph). riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the ● If there is a fault in the system, have it system automatically re-establishes the checked by a specialised workshop. Switching on and off tiredness calculation. When driving at a faster speed the driving behaviour will be recal- Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti- culated. vated in the infotainment system using the function button  > Assistants > Driver

72 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Road signs detection system1) The traffic sign detection system does not Speed warning currently unavailable work in all countries. Keep this in mind when ● The speed warning function of the road travelling abroad. sign detection system is faulty. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop. Shown on the display Dynamic Road Sign Display: please The traffic signs detected by the system are clean the windscreen. displayed on the dash panel display ››› Fig. 54 and, depending on the navigation ● The windscreen is dirty in the camera area. system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain- Clean the windscreen. ment system as well ››› page 85 . Dynamic Road Sign Display currently Fig. 54 On the instrument panel display: In Germany, on motorways and vehicle restricted. examples of recognised signals. roads, besides speed limits and overtaking ● The navigation system is not transmitting provisions the system also displays the end of The traffic signal detection system is activa- data. Check if the navigation system has up- prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the ted whenever the vehicle ignition is switched dated maps. time in other countries is always shown. on. ● OR: the vehicle is in a region not included Hazard warning signs are not displayed in the on the navigation system's map. The system records the standard traffic signs infotainment system. in front of the vehicle with a camera located No data available on the base of the interior mirror and pro- Road sign detection system messages: ● The traffic sign detection system does not vides information about speed limits, hazard work in the current country. warnings and overtaking prohibitions. There are no traffic signs available ● The system is in its start-up phase. Within its limitations, the system also displays Display of traffic signs additional signals, such as time-specific pro- ● OR: the camera has not recognized any When the traffic sign detection system is hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers mandatory or prohibitive sign. connected, a camera located on the base of page 291 or limitations that only apply in ››› the interior rear-view mirror records the traf- the event of rain. Even on journeys without Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display fic signs in front of the vehicle. After check- signs, the system may display any applicable ● There is a fault in the system. Have the sys- ing and evaluating the information from the speed limits. tem checked by a specialised workshop. camera, the navigation system and the current vehicle data, up to two valid road signs »

1) System available depending on the country. 73 Operation

are displayed, with their corresponding addi- of specific traffic signs for vehicles with trail- system to operate with limitations or not at tional signs: er, such as speed limits or overtaking prohib- all: itions. It can be activated or deactivated in ● First position. The sign that is currently the infotainment system using the button  ● In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow, valid for the driver is shown in the screen. For > Assistants > Driver alerts > Road signs de- rain, fog or intense mist. example, a maximum speed limit of 130 tect. > Consider trailer ››› page 89 . ● In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head- km/h (100 mph) ››› Fig. 54 . on traffic or by the sun. For trailer mode, the display of speed limits ● Second position. A second traffic sign may applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal ● When driving at high speeds. be displayed in the second position, such as provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad- ● If the camera is covered or dirty. a hazard warning sign, an overtaking prohibi- justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a tion or an alternative speed limit. ● If the traffic signs are out of the camera's range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and field of vision. Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper is 130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a ● If the traffic signs are partially or totally working while you are driving, the signal with speed greater than that which is permitted in covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other ve- the additional rain sign will be shown first, on the country in question for driving with a hicles. the left, as it is the one that is applicable at trailer, the system automatically displays the the time. usual speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h ● In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil (50 mph). the regulations. A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g. no ● In the case of damaged or bent traffic overtaking at certain times, may be dis- If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti- signs. played. vated, the system displays the speed limits as if there were no trailer hitched. ● In the case of variable messages on over- Speed warning (depending on the instru- head or gantry signs (LED-based variable ment panel) No entry sign traffic signs or other lighting units). If the system detects that the permitted The traffic sign recognition system warns ● If the maps on the navigation system are speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver acoustically and visually in the instrument not up-to-date. with a “gong” and visually with a message on panel when a no entry sign is crossed on a ● In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles the dash panel display. one-way road or an entrance to a motorway that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on or highway. lorries. Trailer mode Limited operation In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket WARNING device from the factory and a trailer that is The traffic sign detection system has certain The technology in the traffic sign detection electrically connected to the vehicle, it is limitations. The following cases may lead the system cannot change the limits imposed possible to activate or deactivate the display by the laws of physics and only works within

74 Instruments and warning/control lamps the system's limits. Do not let the extra ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity Eco-efficient driving assistance convenience afforded by the traffic sign and in a safe place. detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. The system is not a re- Note placement for driver awareness. ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit To avoid affecting the correct operation of visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- the system, take the following points into tions. consideration: ● ● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and Regularly clean the area of vision of the fog may lead to the system failing to display camera and keep it in a clean state, without traffic signs or not displaying them correct- snow or ice. ly. ● Do not cover the field of vision of the ● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov- camera. Fig. 55 Eco-efficient driving assistance in- ered or damaged, system operation may be ● Always replace damaged or worn blades dication (schematic representation). impaired. when required to avoid lines on the camera's field of vision. Eco-efficient driving assistance helps you drive with care and with low energy con- WARNING ● Check that the windscreen is not damaged in the area of the camera's field of vi- sumption by following instructions superim- The driving recommendations and traffic sion. posed in the digital cockpit, depending on indications shown on the traffic sign detec- the situation. ● tion system may differ from the actual cur- The use of outdated maps on the naviga- rent traffic situation. tion system may cause the system to show When you approach places such as a junc- traffic signs incorrectly. tion, a roundabout or a section of road with a ● The system may not detect or correctly ● speed limit, the symbol  is displayed along show all the traffic signs. In the waypoints mode of the navigation system, the traffic sign detection system is with an event in the digital cockpit ››› Fig. 55 . ● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have only partly available. priority over the recommendations and dis- ● WARNING plays provided by the system. Failure to heed the control lamps and corresponding text messages when they The system is not a replacement for driver light up may result in damage to the vehi- awareness. WARNING cle. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all If messages are ignored, the vehicle may times to suit visibility, weather, road and stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- traffic conditions. vere injuries. ● Traffic signs on the road and traffic regu- ● Never ignore the messages displayed. lations have priority over eco-driving notes. » 75 Operation

Note Revolution counter The engine speed limiter is released as soon as the engine reaches normal operating ● The appearance of the symbols may vary The rev counter indicates the number of en- temperature and the takes his/her foot off slightly depending on the equipment and gine revolutions per minute. the accelerator. model. System updates may modify or ex- pand the symbols. Together with the gear-change indicator, If the engine speed limitation is caused by an ● When the system is switched on, eco-ef- the rev counter offers you the possibility of engine management fault, the  indicator ficient driving assistance can also increase using the engine of your vehicle at a suitable light also lights up. Make sure the displayed recuperation without any indication being speed. RPM is not exceeded (for example, by reduc- displayed. This can occur in situations such ing it). Go immediately to a specialised work- The beginning of the red zone of the rev as when the accelerator pedal is released shop to have the fault repaired. counter indicates the maximum speed in any when a vehicle is driving in front. In this gear after running-in and with the engine case, energy recuperation is adapted Flashing indicator1)2) match the speed of the vehicle in front hot. However, it is advisable to move the se- The flashing indicator warns the driver that without any indication being displayed. lector lever to D or lift your foot off the accelerator before the needle reaches the red the engine RPM limit has been reached. zone ››› . The flashing indication is displayed in the up- Time We recommend that you avoid high revs and per areas of the rev counter by green, yellow that you follow the recommendations on the and red areas. Setting the time on the infotainment sys- gear-change indicator. Consult the addition- When the RPM approaches the limit, the tem al information in ››› page 224, Selecting the flashing indicator flashes red. Shift up a gear optimal gear. ● Press Settings. at the right time.

● Select the menu option Time and date to 1) Speed limiter CAUTION set the time ››› page 85 . If the indicator light  turns on, the engine ● To prevent damage to the engine, the rev will be automatically limited to the speed counter needle should only remain in the shown on the instrument cluster. This pro- red zone for a short period of time. tects the engine components in situations such as a cold start or against overheating.

1) Depending on version. 2) Only in the CUPRA view on the instrument cluster 76 Instruments and warning/control lamps

● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs The following displays can be seen on the and heavy acceleration and do not make Power meter: the engine work hard. ››› Fig. 56, ››› Fig. 57 A The vehicle recovers electrical energy. For the sake of the environment B e-Mode electric driving. Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise emissions and en- C The combustion engine must be run- gine noise. ning. With the Boost function, the vehicle drives for a short period of time with maximum power from both the electric motor and the combustion engine. Power meter Fig. 57 Digital instrument panel: Power- 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles meter (Cupra view) Battery level indicator The lower left hand side of the rev counter 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles has two colour coded areas:

Green Charge: Energy recovery zone. Blue Power %: Electric traction zone. Indi- cates the percentage of power used and the maximum amount of power currently available.

The power meter shows the usage level of Fig. 58 Digital instrument panel: battery the electric drive. The power meter bar level indicator. shows the current usage level. A finer coloured border indicates how much The small arrow next to the battery symbol Fig. 56 Digital instrument panel: Power- the propulsion can currently be used. De- on the fuel gauge indicates which side of the meter (classic view) pending on the selected driving program and vehicle the charging cover is on. the current availability of electrical power, the boundaries of the different colours can Note vary. ● Never drive with the tank completely empty. Under certain circumstances, the »

77 Operation

energy stored in the high-voltage battery The display only works when the ignition is Note may not be sufficient to reach the nearest switched on. The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to service station. The fuel range is displayed on the instrument the fuel pump symbol points out towards ● When the outside temperature is very panel. the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank low, and therefore the high-voltage battery flap. is very cold, difficulties may arise in starting You can consult the tank capacity of your ve- the internal combustion engine and the hicle in the ››› page 367 section. range in the electric driving mode may be reduced. WARNING Coolant temperature indicator. When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may The coolant temperature view can be selec- stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- ted in the corresponding menu ››› page 66 . Fuel gauge vere injuries. ● If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could Control and warning lamp reach the engine irregularly, particularly when driving up or down slopes.  It lights up red ● The steering system and the driver assis-  tance systems and brakes do not work Do not carry on driving! Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature too when the engine is running irregularly or high. switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregular supply thereof.  Flashes red Fig. 59 Fuel gauge located in different po- ● Always refuel when there is only one sitions depending on the view. quarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehi- Fault in the engine coolant system. cle to stop due to lack of fuel. Control lamps ● Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and  It lights up yellow CAUTION let it cool down. ● Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An Check the engine coolant level Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has ››› page 329. been reached ››› . Refuel as soon as you have the irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring opportunity. and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust ● If the warning lamp does not switch off system. The catalytic converter or the par- even if the coolant level is correct, request ticulate filter may get damaged!  It lights up yellow assistance from specialised personnel.

Presence of water in diesel. Turn off the engine and seek professional assistance.

78 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Control and warning lamps (valid for hy- also depends on the outside temperature. In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- brid vehicles) If necessary, use the engine oil tempera- vals are determined individually. Thanks to ture ››› page 71 as a guide. technological progress, maintenance work  It lights up red has been greatly reduced. Because of the ● Additional lights and other accessories in  Do not carry on driving! front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef- technology used by CUPRA, with this service Engine or high-voltage system coolant level too low, fect of the coolant. At high outside temper- you only need to change the oil when the ve- engine or high-voltage system coolant temperature atures and high engine loads, there is a risk hicle so requires. To calculate this variation too high. of the engine overheating. (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use and individual driving styles are considered. ● The front spoiler also ensures proper dis- The advance warning first appears 20 days  and  Flashes red tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this before the date established for the corre-  Do not carry on driving! can reduce the cooling effect, which could sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re- Failure in the high-voltage cooling circuit. Disconnect cause the engine to overheat. Seek special- maining until the next service are always the drive system and seek professional assistance. ist assistance. rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and the time is given in complete days. The ● Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and current service message cannot be viewed let it cool down. until 500 km after the last service. Prior to ● Check the engine coolant level Service intervals this, only lines are visible on the display. ››› page 329. The service interval display appears on the Inspection reminder ● Check the coolant level in the high-voltage instrument cluster screen and in the info- cooling circuit ››› page 330 . If the level is too tainment system. If a service or an inspection has to be carried low DO NOT add coolant. Seek specialist as- out soon, a service reminder will be dis- There are different versions of instrument sistance immediately. played when the ignition is switched on. panels and infotainment systems, so the ver- ● If the warning lamp does not switch off sions and instructions on the screens may The figure displayed are the kilometres that even if the coolant level is correct, request vary. can still be travelled or the time until the next assistance from specialised personnel. service. CUPRA distinguishes between services with CAUTION engine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) Service due and services without engine oil change (e.g. ● To ensure a long useful life for the engine, When the time for a service or an inspec- avoid high revs, driving at high speed and Inspection). tion comes, an audible warning will be emit- making the engine work hard for approxi- In vehicles with Services established by ted when the ignition is switched on and the » mately the first 15 minutes when the engine time or mileage, the service intervals are al- is cold. The phase until the engine is warm ready pre-defined.

79 Operation

fixed key symbol  may appear on the in- ● The service interval display can only be re- Using the instrument panel strument panel for a few seconds, along with set through the Service menu ››› page 69 . one of the following messages: Do not restart the indicator between the Introduction ● Service now! service intervals, otherwise the information With the ignition switched on, it is possible to ● Please have your vehicle inspec- displayed will be incorrect. read the different functions of the display by ted. If the oil change service is reset manually, scrolling through the menus. ● Oil change service due! the service interval display changes to a fixed service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible The multifunction display can only be con- ● Oil change service and inspection oil change service. trolled from the buttons on the multi-func- due! tion steering wheel. Note Consult a service notification Some menu options can only be read when ● The service message disappears after a the vehicle is at a standstill. With the ignition switched on, the engine off few seconds, when the engine is started or and the vehicle at a standstill, the current when the  button is pressed on the multi- WARNING service notification can be read: function steering wheel. Distracting the driver in any way can lead to Check the date of the current service on the ● In vehicles with the LongLife system in an accident and cause injuries. which the battery has been disconnected infotainment system ● Never use the menus on the instrument for a long period of time, it is not possible to ● Press Settings. panel display while the vehicle is in motion. calculate the date of the next service. ● Select the Data connection menu option Therefore the service interval display may to display information about services. not be correct. In this case, bear in mind Note the maximum service intervals permitted After loading or changing the 12-volt bat- Checking the date on the digital instrument page 350. ››› tery, check the system settings. If the pow- panel ● If you reset the display manually, the next er supply is interrupted, the system settings ● The date of the service can only be read service interval will be indicated as in vehi- might be incorrect or deleted. through the Service menu ››› page 69 . cles with fixed service intervals. For this reason we recommend that the service in- Resetting service interval display terval display be reset by an authorised dealer. If the service was not carried out by a specialised CUPRA dealer or any dealer in the SEAT network, the display can be reset as follows:

80 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Operation using the multifunc- a few seconds until the menu or the informa- Button for the driver assistance tion steering wheel tive display opens automatically. systems

Changing menu settings ● In the menu displayed, turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunction steering wheel ››› Fig. 60 until the desired option of the menu is highlighted. The option appears framed. ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 60 to make the required modifications. A mark indicates that the system or function is activated.

Fig. 60 Right side of the multifunction Back to menu selection Fig. 61 On the turn signal and main beam steering wheel: buttons for using the in- lever: button for driver assistance systems strument cluster’s menus and information Press the button  or  ››› Fig. 60 . (depending on versions). displays (depending on versions).

As long as a priority 1 ››› page 71 warning is active, it will not be possible to access any menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden with the button  of the multifunction steering wheel ››› Fig. 60 .

Select a menu or an informative display ● Switch the ignition on. ● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, press the button  ››› Fig. 60 ; if necessary, Fig. 62 Left side of the multifunction several times. steering wheel: button for driver assistance systems (depending on versions). » ● To change menus, use buttons  or  ››› Fig. 60. ● To open the menu or the information displayed, press the button  ››› Fig. 60 or wait 81 Operation

With the turn signal and main beam head- tem, in the menu Vehicle settings  Fault in the brake system ››› page 264 . light lever button, you can activate or deacti- ››› page 89. vate the driver assistance systems displayed  Fault in the steering system ››› page 226 . in the Assistance systems menu .  Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt ››› page 16 . Activating or deactivating a driver assis- Control lamps tance system using the turn signal lever  Engine or high voltage system coolant (hy- and main beam headlight Control and warning lamps brid vehicles) ››› page 78 . ● Briefly press the Fig. 61 1 button to  Engine oil pressure page 327 . ››› The control and warning lamps are indicators ››› open the Assistants menu. of warnings ››› , faults or certain functions.  Anomaly in the alternator ››› page 334 . ● Select the driver assistance system and ac- Some control and warning lamps come on tivate or deactivate it ››› page 80 . A mark in- when the ignition is switched on, and switch  Press the foot brake ››› page 244 . dicates that driver assistance system is off when the engine starts running, or while AdBlue level too low, OR fault in the SCR switched on.  driving. system ››› page 319 . ● Next, confirm the selection by pressing Depending on the model, additional text   Drive system ››› page 212 ,››› page 310 the button on the multi-function steering messages may be viewed on the instrument wheel. panel display. These may be purely informative or they may be advising of the need for Yellow warning lamps Activating or deactivating a driver assis- action ››› page 64, Instrument panel . Notification central lamp: additional infor- tance system using the multifunction  mation on the instrument panel display steering wheel Depending upon the equipment fitted in the vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- ● Press the button  Fig. 62 to open the  Front brake pads worn ››› page 264 . ››› times a symbol may be displayed on the in- Aids menu. strument panel. Fault in the ESC or the system caused it to ● Select the driver assistance system and ac- switch off; OR ESC or TCS operating When certain control and warning lamps are  tivate or deactivate it. A mark indicates that page 269. lit, an audible warning is also heard. ››› driver assistance system is switched on. TCS switched off manually; OR ESC in Sport ● Next, confirm the selection by pressing Red warning lamps mode; OR ESC switched off manually the  button on the multifunction steering  ››› page 269. wheel. Notification central lamp: additional infor-  mation on the instrument panel display Fault in the ABS page 269 . The driver assistance systems can also be  ››› switched on and off in the infotainment sys-  Parking brake on ››› page 264 .  Electronic parking brake faulty. 82 Instruments and warning/control lamps

 Rear fog light switched on ››› page 114 .  Defective cruise control system (GRA)  Auto Hold active (lights green), or Auto ››› page 238. Hold paused (lights white) ››› page 268 . Fault in the emission control system   Charging system ››› page 308 ››› page 321.   Defective speed limiter ››› page 239  Press the foot brake ››› page 218 . Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR fault in  Defective active cruise control (ACC)  the management of the diesel engine ››› page 249  Cruise control system (GRA) ››› page 236 . ››› page 321.  Lane Assist (lane keeping system)  Speed limiter ››› page 238  Fault in the petrol engine management ››› page 252. ››› page 321.  Adaptive cruise control (ACC) ››› page 245 . Error in the lane assist warning system  Lane assist active (Lane Assist) warning Particulate filter blocked page 321 .  page 252.   ››› ››› ››› page 252.  Fault in the steering system ››› page 226 .  Travel Assist active ››› page 255 .  Lane Assist switched off ››› page 252 .   Tyre pressure monitor system ››› page 346 .  Auxiliary heater ››› page 156 .  Travel Assist error ››› page 256 .  Drive system ››› page 212 Blue indicator lamps  Fault in the lighting of the vehicle  Vehicle sound ››› page 212 ››› page 114.  Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 114 .

 Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 78 .  Low engine oil level ››› page 327 . Other warning lamps  Adblue level low, OR fault in the SCR system  Fault in the gearbox ››› page 223 .  Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not ››› page 319. properly closed ››› page 68 .  Engine speed limitation ››› page 76 . Fault in airbag system and seat belt tension-  Main beam assist (Light Assist) page 114 .  ››› ers ››› page 25 . Green indicator lamps  Hill descent control (HDC) ››› page 225 . Front passenger front airbag is disa-  Turn lights or emergency lights on  Service interval display ››› page 79 .  bled page 25 .  ››› ››› page 114.  Mobile phone connected by Bluetooth® . The front passenger front airbag is activated   Trailer turn signals ››› page 114 .  ››› page 25.  Mobile telephone battery charge status. »

83 Operation

 Risk of freezing ››› page 68 .  Start-Stop system activated ››› page 214 . . Start-Stop system unavailable ››› page 214 .

WARNING If the warning lamps and messages are ignored, faults may occur in the vehicle, it may stall in traffic, or accidents and serious injuries may occur. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages. ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. ● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of accident for the driver and for other road users. If necessary, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put out the warning triangle to advise other drivers. ● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the engine and allow it to cool. ● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a hazardous area and could cause severe injuries ››› page 322 .

84 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Infotainment system How to move through the different menus ple, long lists of settings. Press on the scroll and select them bar and pull up or down. ● Switch the ignition on. Introduction Tutorial ● If the infotainment system is off, switch it The infotainment system brings together im- on. The first time you connect the Infotainment portant vehicle functions and systems into a system, a system tutorial will open with a ● The different menus are selected directly single central control unit, e.g. air condition- brief description of the main functions and on the touch screen using texts, icons or ing, menu settings, radio equipment and the how to use it. buttons. navigation system.  Help The actual number of menus available and If the box is checked , the function is acti- the name of the various options will depend vated. In the Help menu can be found more infor- on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment. Pressing the menu button  will always take mation and tips for using the infotainment you to the last menu used. system. General operating information Any changes made using the settings menus WARNING General information on the operation of the are automatically saved on closing those Any distraction may lead to an accident, infotainment system, as well as on the warn- menus. ing and safety instructions that must be tak- with the risk of injury. Operating the Info- en into account, is found in ››› page 162 . Scroll bar: Some menus and functions show tainment system while driving could dis- more content above or below those distract you from traffic. played on the screen at that time, for exam-

85 Operation

Explanation of the function buttons

Fig. 63 Schematic representation: Overview of the possible function buttons on the screen

Top part of the screen Bottom part of the screen E Direct accesses to the functions of the Infotainment system (up to 10 functions, The following information is always visible, D Main menu display mode: 5 + 5, customisable by the user). The even when the infotainment system is turned : main menu with the 6 main functions off››› Fig. 63 : functions in question can be edited by divided into 2 screens (3 + 3, customisa- pressing and holding the icon (replace A Time, Incoming call or pre-air condi- ble by the user by pressing on the func- icons, delete icons or change their or- tioning on/off. tion). der). B Climabar page 149 . : main menu in mosaic mode (all func- ››› F Direct access to the Assistants, Driving C Status bar. System customisation based tions of the Infotainment system) profiles, background lighting and vehicle on user and notifications. settings ››› page 89 .

86 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 64 Schematic representation: Initial configuration wizard

The initial configuration wizard will help you Function button: Function Function button: Function to set up your Infotainment system the first time you switch it on. A Press to set day and time. Press to select your home address us- E ing your current position or by man- Whenever you switch on the infotainment Press to search and store to memory ually entering an address. system, the initial setup screen will be dis- B the radio stations that have the best played ››› Fig. 64 if any parameters have not reception at that moment. Disables the possibility of changing the settings of the Infotainment sys- been set (marked with “”) or if the Don't Press to go to the Online Media set- C Don't show tem. If you want to run the initial con- show again function button has not been tings. again figuration, it can be accessed through pressed.  Settings > Initial configuration Press to link your mobile phone to the D wizard. Infotainment system. Function button: Function Start Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

 Closes the Configuration Wizard. Once one or more settings have been End applied, press to finalise the setup in the main menu of the wizard.

87 Operation

Vehicle information

Fig. 65 Schematic representation: Vehicle information and status

Pressing on  Vehicle info in the main menu opens the Vehicle info menu with the following submenus:

– Driving data: The average consumption, average speed, distance travelled, trip duration and autonomy are shown. It has 3 memories: “Since start”, “Long- term” and “Since refuel” ››› page 70 . – Vehicle status: The warnings regarding faults, incidents, memorisation of the tyre pressure or information of the next inspection service are displayed. – e-Info: shows the electric range and power flow ››› page 213 .

88 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Assist systems and vehicle settings

Fig. 66 Schematic representation: Assist systems and vehicle settings

Press  ››› Fig. 66 A , or Vehicle settings in ■ Activate / deactivate ESC, stabilisation ■ Traffic sign recognition ››› page 73 . the main menu to open the assistants and systems and brake assist ››› page 269 . ■ Lane assist ››› page 258 . vehicle settings menu. Next, clicking on any ■ Activate / deactivate the Start-Stop ■ Drive Profile ››› page 226 of the menus located in the left area B , dis- system ››› page 214 . ■ Background lighting page 122 plays the settings menu or the selected as- ■ Adaptive cruise control (ACC) ››› ■ sist systems on the display. ››› page 244. Vehicle ■ The number of assist systems and settings ■ Lane Assist (lane keeping system) Instrument panel ››› page 67 . depend on the version and the country in ››› page 252. ■ Lighting ››› page 121 . question. ■ Emergency brake assistance system ■ Rear view mirrors ››› page 125 . ■ Assistance systems (Front Assist) ››› page 240 . ■ Closing ››› page 92 . ■ Parking ■ Driving Assist (Travel Assist) ■ Lights ››› page 114 . page 254 ■ Automatic parking brake activation ››› ■ Windows ››› page 110 . ››› page 266. ■ Emergency Assist ››› page 256 . ■ Tyres ››› page 346 . ■ Park assist ››› page 274 . ■ Speed limiter. ■ Comfort light ››› page 121 ■ Smart Assistants ■ Driver alerts ■ Windscreen wipers ››› page 123 » ■ Fatigue detection ››› page 71 . 89 Operation

■ Electric drive (PHEV hybrid vehicles) . ■ Seats ››› page 128 ››› page 211

Farewell screen

Fig. 67 Schematic representation: farewell screen.

When the ignition is switched off, the Fare- well Display gives you relevant information before you leave the vehicle.

››› Fig. 67 A Change the order of the warnings. B Closes the farewell screen.

90 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Multifunction steering The steering wheel includes multifunction Symbol Function modules from where it is possible to control wheel the audio, telephone, navigation, voice con- Connect/disconnect the Cruise control and assist functions without the driver  trol system ››› page 236 / ACC needing to be distracted from the road. ››› page 244 / Speed limiter Functions ››› page 238 Buttons available depending on the version : Activate ACC / Cruise control sys- Symbol Function tem / Limiter   : Reset programmed ACC speed or Turn: Turn volume up/down cruise control system 1 Press: Mute volume   : Increase programmed speed Turn: Search in the instrument panel : Decrease programmed speed menu. In Navigation mode, turn to Switching Travel Assist on and off zoom in/out of the map in the Digital 2  page 254 Cockpit ››› Press: Select the highlighted option in Open the drive assist menu in the in- the instrument panel  strument panel

Radio: Search for the previous/next  Modify the programmed ACC distance Fig. 68 Controls on the steering wheel.   station. Media: Short press: previous/next  Driving profile selection ››› page 226 track; long press: fast forward/rewind   Activate phone menu (answer call, end  Starting and stopping the engine call)  ››› page 207 Switch between media and radio sour-  ces

Change the instrument panel menu   (previous/next)

 Enable/disable voice control  Digital Cockpit: Change digital panel views ››› page 65 Fig. 69 Controls on the steering wheel.  Activate or deactivate steering wheel heating ››› page 154 91 Operation

Opening and closing 2 Lock the vehicle held down for a longer period it will flash sev- 3 Unlock only the rear lid. Press the button eral times, such as for convenience opening. until all the turn signals on the vehicle If the vehicle key control lamp does not light Set of vehicle keys flash briefly. You have 2 minutes to open up when the button is pressed, replace the the rear lid. Once this time has passed, it key's battery ››› page 94 . Vehicle key will lock again. In addition, the lamp on the key flashes. Key socket 4 Control lamp There is a key socket near the start button 5 Alarm button. Only press in the event of ››› Fig. 71 . Warning! Do not confuse with the an emergency! When the alarm button is location for the emergency start pressed, the vehicle's sounds and the ››› page 210. turn signals light up for a short time. Press again to disconnect. Spare key

With the vehicle key the vehicle may be To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, locked or unlocked remotely ››› page 95 . the vehicle ID number is required. The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat- Each new key contains a microchip which Fig. 70 Vehicle key tery. The receiver is in the interior of the ve- must be coded with the data from the vehi- hicle. The range of the vehicle key with re- cle electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will mote control and new battery is several me- not work if it does not contain a microchip or tres around the vehicle. the microchip has not been encoded. This is also true for keys which are specially cut for If it is not possible to open or close the vehi- the vehicle. cle using the remote control key, this should be re-synchronised ››› page 94 or the bat- The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be tery changed ››› page 94 . obtained from a specialised CUPRA dealer or SEAT Official Service, a specialised workshop Different keys belonging to the vehicle may or an approved key service qualified to cre- be used. ate this kind of key. Fig. 71 Centre console: vehicle key socket. Control lamp on the vehicle key New keys or spare keys must be synchronised before use ››› page 94 . Key to ››› Fig. 70 When a button on the vehicle key is briefly 1 Unlock the vehicle pressed, the indicator lamp flashes 4 ››› Fig. 70 once briefly, but if the button is 92 Opening and closing

WARNING also possible even when you are outside the Pull out the key blade radius of action. ● Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they ● Key operation can be greatly influenced may not be able to leave the vehicle or by overlapping radio signals close to the ve- manage on their own. hicle working in the same range of frequencies, for example, radio transmitters or mo- ● An uncontrolled use of the key could bile telephones. start the engine or activate any electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing ● Obstacles between the remote control risk of accident. The doors can be locked and the vehicle, bad weather conditions using the remote control key. This could and discharged batteries can considerably become an obstacle for assistance in an reduce the range of the remote control. emergency situation. ● If the buttons of the vehicle key are ● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. pressed or one of the central locking but- Fig. 72 Vehicle key: remove the key blade. An unauthorised use of your vehicle could tons ››› page 97 is pressed repeatedly in result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore short succession, the central locking briefly The central locking remote control has the always take the key with you when you leave disconnects as protection against over- key blade inside it for use in case of emer- the vehicle. loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock gency locking/unlocking of the driver's door it if necessary. ● Never remove the key from the ignition if ››› page 104. the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the ● Spare remote control keys are available at ● If you press button Fig. 72 1 once the steering could suddenly block and it would your Technical Service, where they must be ››› key blade is unlocked and a ring appears as a be impossible to steer the vehicle. matched to the locking system. key ring. ● Up to five remote control keys can be ● Press and hold the button 1 and at the CAUTION used. same time pull on the ring in the direction of All of the vehicle keys contain electronic arrow ››› Fig. 72 2 to completely remove the components. Protect them from damage, key blade. impacts and humidity.

Note ● Only use the key button when you require the corresponding function. Pushing the button unnecessarily could accidentally unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is

93 Operation

To change the battery Changing the battery ● When fitting the battery, check that the ● Remove the key blade from the vehicle key polarity is correct. ››› page 93. ● Insert the key blade into the slot ››› Fig. 73 , For the sake of the environment press it in the direction of arrow 1 and de- Please dispose of your used batteries cor- tach the cover by levering it 2 . rectly and with respect for the environ- ● Extract the battery from the compartment ment. using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 74 . ● Insert the new battery and press it into the battery compartment ››› . Synchronize the vehicle key ● Place the cover and press it into the vehi-  Fig. 73 Vehicle key: opening the battery cle key housing until it clicks into place. If the button is pressed frequently outside compartment cover. of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve- WARNING hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked using the key. In this case, the key must be Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame- resynchronised as described below: ter or any other button battery can cause serious and even fatal injuries within a very ● Remove the key blade from the vehicle key short time. ››› page 92. ● Keep the vehicle key and key fobs with ● Press the  button on the vehicle key. For batteries out of reach of children. this, it must remain with the vehicle. ● If you suspect that someone may have ● Open the vehicle within one minute using swallowed a battery, seek immediate medi- the key blade. The key has been synchron- cal attention. ised. Fig. 74 Vehicle key: removing the battery. ● If necessary, fit the cap. CAUTION CUPRA recommends you ask a specialised ● If the battery is not changed correctly, workshop to replace the battery. the vehicle key may be damaged. The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- ● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage cle key, under a cover. the vehicle key. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications.

94 Opening and closing

Central locking ● Never leave individuals locked in a closed Self-locking system to prevent involuntary and locked vehicle. In case of emergency, unlocking Introduction they may not be able to exit the vehicle by It is an anti-theft system and prevents the themselves or get help. unintentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the Central locking functions correctly when all vehicle is unlocked and none of the doors the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. (including the boot) are opened within 30 If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot Description seconds, it re-locks automatically. be locked with the key. Central locking allows all doors, the rear lid Unlocking one side of the vehicle only WARNING and the tank flap to be unlocked centrally: When you lock the vehicle with the key, the doors and the rear lid are locked. When you The incorrect use of the central locking ● From outside, using the vehicle key open the door, you can either unlock only system may cause serious injuries. ››› page 96. ● the driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To The central locking system will lock all ● From outside with the Keyless Access doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can select the required option, use the Infotain- page 98 system, prevent any non-authorised individual ››› ment system setting ››› page 96 . from opening the doors and accessing the ● From inside, by pushing the central locking vehicle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency button ››› page 97 . Automatic locking (Auto Lock) or accident, locked doors will complicate The Auto Lock function locks the doors and access to the vehicle interior to help the Various functions are available to improve the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a passengers. the vehicle safety: speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph). ● Never leave children or disabled people ● Security system “Safe” ››› page 101 alone in the vehicle. The central locking The vehicle can be unlocked via the central ● button can be used to lock all the doors Self-locking system to prevent involuntary locking switch or by pulling one of the door from within. Therefore, passengers will be unlocking handles. locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked ● Selective unlocking system In the event of an accident in which the air- in the vehicle can be exposed to very high ● Automatic speed dependent locking and bags inflate, the doors will be automatically or very low temperatures. unlocking system (Auto Lock) unlocked to facilitate access and assistance. ● Depending on the time of the year, tem- ● Emergency unlocking system peratures inside a locked and closed vehi- Turn signals cle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or The turn signals will flash twice when the ve- even death, particularly for young children. hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle is locked. »

95 Operation

If it does not flash, this indicates that one of Central locking settings Unlock and lock from the outside the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not closed correctly. Central locking settings can be changed in the Infotainment system. Accidental lock-out The central locking system prevents you Unlocking doors from being locked out of the vehicle in the ● Press the function button  > Vehicle > following situations: Exterior > Central locking > Door unlocking. ● If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the central locking switch You can choose to unlock all the doors or ››› page 97. only the driver door when you unlock the vehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap is Fig. 75 Remote control key: buttons. Lock the vehicle with the remote control key, also unlocked. when all the doors and the rear lid have been ● Lock: press the  Fig. 75 button. closed. This prevents the accidental locking With the Driver setting, when you press the ››› of the vehicle.  button on the remote control key once, ● Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se- only the driver door is unlocked. If that but- curity system: push the  button again and Note ton is pressed twice, the rest of the doors hold for 2 seconds. and the rear lid will be unlocked. ●  ● Never leave any valuable items in the ve- Unlock: press the button. hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is If the  button is pressed, all the vehicle ● Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the  not a safe. doors are locked. At the same time, a confir- button for at least 1 second. ● If the LED on the driver door sill lights up mation signal is heard. The vehicle will be locked again automatical- for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is locked, the central locking system or anti- ly if you do not open one of the doors or the theft alarm is not working properly. You rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the should have the fault repaired at a special- car. This function prevents the vehicle from ised CUPRA dealer, SEAT Official Service or remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is specialised workshop. pressed by mistake. This does not apply if  ● Vehicle interior monitoring by the anti- you press the button for at least one sec- theft alarm system will only function as in- ond. tended if the windows and sunroof are closed.

96 Opening and closing

Selective unlocking system ● Other functions of the remote control ● You can open the doors individually from The selective unlocking system allows you to key ››› page 111, Convenience open/close the inside by pulling the inside door handle. only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank function. ● In the event of an accident in which the flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain airbags inflate, doors locked from the inside locked. will be automatically unlocked to facilitate Unlocking and locking from the access and assistance. Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap: inside ● Press (once) the  button on the remote WARNING control key or turn the key once in the open- ● The central locking switch also works ing direction. with the ignition switched off, except when the “safe” system is activated. Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the ● The central locking switch does not oper- tank flap simultaneously: ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside ● Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the  but- and the security system is switched on. ton on the remote control key, or turn the ● Locked doors could delay assistance in an key twice within 5 seconds in the opening di- emergency. Do not leave anyone, especial- rection. ly children, in the vehicle. The Safe security system and the anti-theft alarm deactivate immediately when only the Fig. 76 In the centre console: central lock- Note driver door is opened. ing switch Your vehicle will lock automatically when it In vehicles with Infotainment system, you can ● Lock: press the  ››› Fig. 76 button. reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph) programme the security central locking sys- (Auto Lock) ››› page 95 . You can unlock the ● Unlock: Press the  button again tem directly ››› page 96 . vehicle again using the  button on the ››› Fig. 76. central locking switch.

WARNING Please note the following when using the Observe the safety warnings ››› in Lock- central locking switch to lock your vehicle: ing system “Safe” on page 101. ● It is not possible to open the doors or the rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons, Note e.g. when stopped at traffic lights). ● Do not use the remote control key until ● The LED in the central locking switch lights the vehicle is visible. up when all the doors are closed and locked.

97 Operation

Unlock and lock the vehicle with Depending on the equipment, the vehicle If the vehicle is not unlocked for an extended Keyless Access may have the Keyless Access system. period, the function is deactivated. The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via Configure the Keyless Access system the front doors only. When doing so, the re- The behaviour of the Keyless Access system mote control key must be no further than can be adjusted in the Vehicle settings approx. 1.5 m away from the door handle. menu of the Infotainment system. It does not matter where you carry the key, If the Keyless Access function is disabled, its e.g. in your jacket pocket. operation is limited. Once the doors have been locked, they can- Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- not be opened again immediately. This will tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle enable you to check that the doors are prop- without actively using its key. For this, it is on- erly closed. ly necessary that there is a valid vehicle key in Fig. 77 Keyless Access: proximity zones. If you wish you may unlock only the corre- the detection area corresponding to the at- sponding door or the entire vehicle. The tempted access to the vehicle. necessary adjustments can be performed in vehicles with a driver information system Unlock the vehicle ››› page 89. ● Touch the surface of the sensor located inside the handle A . All turn signals will flash General information twice. If a valid key is in the proximity of the car If the sensor surface is touched twice, the ››› Fig. 77, the Keyless Access locking and entire vehicle will unlock. starting system gives the key entry as soon as one of the sensor surfaces on the front door handles is touched. Fig. 78 Door handle: sensor surfaces Automatic vehicle unlock The vehicle can be unlocked automatically. The following features are then available ››› Fig. 78 To do this, the function must be activated in without having to use the vehicle key active- A Unlocking sensor surface on the inside the Infotainment system and the vehicle key ly: of the door handle. must be in the proximity zone of the vehicle. ● Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle using B Locking sensor surface on the outside If the key is in the proximity zone, the vehicle the handles of the front doors or the soft- of the door handle. is automatically unlocked. touch/handle on the rear lid.

98 Opening and closing

● Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using the ››› Fig. 78 A (arrow) of the handle and the Unlocking and locking the boot hatch sensor of the driver or passenger door han- vehicle unlocks. When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto- dle. ● Open the door. matically unlocks on opening if there is a val- ● Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving id vehicle key in the proximity zone one foot below the rear bumper On vehicles with selective opening or info- ››› Fig. 77. ››› page 109. tainment system configuration, pulling the door handle twice will unlock all doors. Open or close the rear lid normally. ● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine with the starter button ››› page 207 . After closing, the hatch locks automatically. In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys- If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear The central locking and locking systems op- tem: closing and locking the doors lid will not lock automatically after closing it. erate in the same way as a normal locking (Keyless-Exit) and unlocking system. Only the controls ● Switch the ignition off. What happens when locking the vehicle change. ● Close the driver's door. with a second key Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a ● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and it is locked from the outside with a second double flash of the indicator lights; locking ››› Fig. 78 B (arrow) on one of the front door by a single flash. handles. The door that is used must be vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked for engine ignition page 207 . In If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and closed. ››› order to enable engine ignition, press the  the rear lid are closed leaving the last key button on the key inside the vehicle. used inside the vehicle and none outside, In vehicles with the “Safe” security system: the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the closing and locking the doors (Keyless- Automatically disabling sensors vehicle's indicator lights will flash four times. Exit) The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if ● Switch the ignition off. If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a you do not open any door or the rear lid. long period of time, the proximity sensors on ● Close the driver's door. the passenger doors are automatically disa- The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- ● Touch (once) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 78 bled. onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to B (arrow) on one of the front door handles. If one of the sensor surfaces on the door open any door or boot hatch. The vehicle locks with the “Safe” security handles is often activated in an unusual man- system ››› page 101 . The door that is used ner with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the Unlocking and opening the doors must be closed. (Keyless-Entry) branches of a bush rubbing against it), all ● Touch (twice) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 78 proximity sensors are disabled for a certain ● Grip one of the front door handles. When B (arrow) of one of the front door handles period of time. you do this, you touch the sensor surface to lock the vehicle without activating the “Safelock” security system ››› page 101 . Sensors will again be enabled: » 99 Operation

● After a time. The next time the door is locked/unlocked, Note ● Keyless Access will be active again. OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- ● If the vehicle battery has little or no ton  on the key. charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost Keyless Access permanent disconnection ● OR: if the boot is opened. or entirely out of charge, you will probably function not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with You can deactivate the vehicle unlock with with the Keyless Access system. The vehicle the key. Keyless Access permanently in the infotain- can be unlocked or locked manually ment system so that others cannot unlock or ››› page 104. Keyless Access temporary disconnection start the vehicle. ● To control the proper locking of the vehi- function cle, the release function is disabled for ap- You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Convenience functions prox. 2 seconds. Access unlocking for one locking and un- To close all the electric windows and the ● If the message Keyless access system locking cycle. sunroof using the comfort function, keep a faulty is displayed on the screen of the dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the ● Move the gear lever to position P since finger for a few seconds on the locking sen- operation of the Keyless Access system. otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked. sor surface ››› Fig. 78 B (arrow) of the door handle until the windows and roof have Contact a specialised workshop. To do so, ● Close the door. CUPRA recommends going to a specialised closed. ● Push the central locking button  on the CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership. remote control and touch the locking sensor How the doors open when touching the ● Depending on the function set on the in- surface of the driver door handle sensor surface on the door handle will de- fotainment system for the mirrors, the ex- pend on the settings that have been activa- ››› Fig. 78 B within the following 5 seconds. terior mirrors will unfold and the surround Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise the ted in the infotainment system, using the lighting will come on when unlocking the vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also function button  > Vehicle > Exterior > vehicle using the sensor surface on the possible if the vehicle is locked through the Central locking. driver and passenger door handles driver’s door lock. ››› page 125. CAUTION ● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle ● To check that the function has been deac- or the system fails to detect one, a warning tivated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull The sensor surfaces on the door handles will display on the dash panel screen. This on the door handle. The door should not could engage if hit with a water jet or high could happen if any other radio frequency open. pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity. If at least one of the elec- signal interferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mobile device accessory) or if the The next time the door can only be unlocked tric windows is open and the sensor surface key is covered by another object (e.g. an via the remote control or the lock cylinder. ››› Fig. 78 B (arrow) on one of the handles is activated continuously, all windows will aluminium case). close. 100 Opening and closing

● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe” WARNING layer of salt, the correct functioning of the security system. Do not leave anyone (especially children) in sensors on the door handles may be affec- ● Press the locking button  once on the ve- the vehicle if it is locked from the outside ted. In this case, clean the vehicle. hicle key. and the “Safe” security system is activated, ● If the vehicle is fitted with an automatic as the doors and windows cannot then be gearbox, the vehicle can only be locked by Lock the vehicle without activating the opened from the inside. Locked doors pressing the parking lock button P. “Safe” system. could delay assistance in an emergency. ● To improve the safety of your vehicle, the ● Press the locking  button on the vehicle remote control of the system is equipped key twice. with a position sensor. If this remote control does not detect movement for a cer- ● OR: touch the sensor surface on the out- Anti-theft alarm system tain length of time, the system will con- side of the door handle twice ››› Fig. 78 B. clude that the vehicle cannot be opened Description (e.g. on a night table) so it will be disabled. When the “Safe” security system is disa- ● If, when trying to block the vehicle, the bled, the following needs to be taken into The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult last used key is still inside, all the turn sig- account: to break into the vehicle or steal it. The sys- nals will flash 4 times. ● The vehicle can be unlocked and opened tem will initiate acoustic and optical warning from the inside using an door handle. signals when your vehicle is tried to be ● The anti-theft alarm is activated. forced. 1) Locking system “Safe” ● The vehicle interior monitoring system and The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned the anti-tow system are disabled. on when the vehicle is locked with the key. When the vehicle is blocked, the “Safe” se- The system is immediately activated and the curity system puts the door handles out of “Safe” status turn signal light located on the driver door operation and prevents unauthorised per- will flash along with the turn signals, indicat- The flashing frequency of the diode in the sons for entering. The doors cannot be ing that the alarm and the locking security door sill immediately confirms the process. opened from inside ››› . system (double lock) have been turned on. Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence Depending on the vehicle, when switching for a brief period, then it stops for approxi- If any of the doors or the bonnet are open, the ignition off, a warning may be displayed mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues they will not be included in the protection on the control panel screen stating that the flashing slowly. zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con- “Safe” security system is activated. nected. If the door or the bonnet are »

1) Available depending on market and version. 101 Operation

subsequently closed, they will be automati- ● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles Note cally included in the protection areas of the with interior monitoring ››› page 103 ). vehicle and the turn signals will flash accord- ● After 28 days, the indicator light will be ● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with switched off to prevent the battery from ingly when the doors close. anti-tow system ››› page 103 ). exhausting if the vehicle has been left ● The turn signal light will flash twice on ● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with parked for a long period of time. The alarm opening and deactivating the alarm. anti-tow system ››› page 103 ). system remains activated. ● The turn signal light will flash once on clos- ● When the vehicle is transported on a ferry ● If, after the audible warning goes off, another monitored area is accessed (e.g. the ing and activating the alarm. or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or vehicle interior monitoring ››› page 103 ). rear lid is opened after a door has been opened), the alarm is triggered again. When does the system trigger an alarm? ● When a trailer connected to the anti-theft ● The anti-theft alarm is not activated alarm system is disconnected. The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered when the vehicle is locked from within us- for about 30 seconds alongside a sound and ing the central locking button . optical (flashing) warning signals and will be How to turn OFF the alarm ● If the driver door is unlocked mechani- repeated about ten times when the vehicle is ● Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button cally with the key, only the driver door is locked and the following unauthorised ac-  of the key. unlocked, the rest of the doors remain tions are attempted: ● OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key. locked. Only when the ignition has been turned on will the other doors be available - ● Opening a door that is mechanically un- If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanically but not unlocked - and the central locking locked using the vehicle key without switch- using the key, the ignition must be turned on button will be activated. ing on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in within 15 seconds of opening the door. ● certain markets, such as the Netherlands, If the vehicle battery is run down or flat then the anti-theft alarm will not operate there is no 15 second waiting time and the Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec. correctly. alarm is activated immediately on opening and the ignition will be blocked. the door). ● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or not working ● CAUTION A door is opened. for any reason. If the anti-theft security system is switched ● Opening the bonnet. ● off, the vehicle interior monitoring and the The alarm is triggered immediately if one ● The rear lid is opened. tow-away protection are automatically dis- of the battery cables is disconnected while the alarm system is active. ● When the ignition is switched on with a connected. non-authorised key. ● Undue manipulation of the alarm. ● Disconnection of the vehicle battery.

102 Opening and closing

Interior monitoring and the anti- The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- The following cases may cause a false tow system tow system are automatically switched on alarm: again next time the vehicle is locked. ● Open windows (partially or fully). It is a monitoring or control function incor- If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior ● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially porated in the anti-theft alarm which detects monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must or completely). unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ul- be done each time that the vehicle is locked; ● Movement of objects inside the vehicle, trasound. if not, they will be automatically switched on. such as loose papers, items hanging from The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc. sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- tow system should be switched off if animals ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, Note on. In order to activate it, all the doors and their movements will trigger the alarm) or ● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is the rear lid must be closed. when, for example, the vehicle is transported activated without the volumetric sensor If the “Safe” ››› page 101 security system is or has to be towed with only one axle on the function, relocking will activate the alarm switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring ground. with all its functions, except the volumetric and the tow-away protection are automati- sensor. This function is reactivated when cally disconnected. Deactivation through the infotainment the alarm is switched on again, unless it is system deliberately switched off. Activation ● Turn off the ignition and press the function ● If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by ● It is automatically switched on when the button  > Vehicle > Exterior > Central a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver anti-theft alarm is activated. locking > Interior monitoring. door when the vehicle is opened. The flash ● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehi- is different to the flash indicating the alarm Deactivation cle interior monitoring and the tow-away is activated. protection are switched off until the next ● Open the vehicle with the key, either me- ● The vibration of a mobile phone left in- time the door is opened. chanically or by pressing the  button on the side the vehicle may cause the vehicle inte- remote control. The time period from when rior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both the door is opened until the ignition is False alarms sensors react to movements and shakes in- turned on should not exceed 15 seconds, Interior monitoring will only operate correct- side the vehicle. otherwise the alarm will be triggered. ly if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ● If on activating the alarm, any door or the ● Press the  button on the remote control observe related legal requirements. rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti- twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensors vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and will be deactivated. The alarm system re- the anti-tow system will only be activated » mains activated. 103 Operation

once all the doors are closed (including the ● Open and close the doors and the rear lid door opens. Please observe the instructions rear lid). only when there is nobody in the way. relating to the anti-theft alarm system ››› page 101.

CAUTION ● Remove the key blade from the vehicle key Doors When opening and closing in an emergen- ››› page 92. cy, carefully disassemble components and ● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder then reassemble them carefully to avoid to unlock or lock the vehicle. Introduction damage to the vehicle. The doors and rear lid can be locked man- Special characteristics ually and partially opened, for example if the ● The anti-theft alarm will remain active key or the central locking is damaged. Emergency unlocking or locking when vehicles are unlocked. However, the of the driver’s door alarm will not be triggered ››› page 101 . WARNING ● After the driver door is opened, you have Opening and closing doors carelessly can 15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once cause serious injury. this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. ● If the vehicle is locked from outside, the ● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im- doors and windows cannot be opened from mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and the inside. deactivates the anti-theft alarm system. ● Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in Note the car in an emergency and will not be The anti-theft alarm is not activated when able to get themselves to safety. the vehicle is locked manually using the key ● Depending on the time of the year, tem- shaft ››› page 95 . peratures inside a locked and closed vehi- Fig. 79 Driver door handle: locking cylin- cle can be extremely high or extremely low der. resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children. If the central locking system should fail to operate, the driver door can still be locked and unlocked by turning the key in the lock. WARNING As a general rule, when the driver door is Getting in the way of the doors and the rear locked manually all other doors are locked. lid is dangerous and can lead to serious in- When it is unlocked manually, only the driver jury. 104 Opening and closing

Emergency lock of doors without Childproof locks anti-clockwise for the right hand side lock cylinders doors.

Deactivating the childproof lock – Unlock the vehicle and open the door whose childproof lock you want to deactivate.

– With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 81 and clockwise for the right hand side doors. Fig. 81 Childproof lock on the left hand side door. Fig. 80 Locking the door manually. Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the outside. The childproof lock prevents the rear doors If the central locking system should fail to from being opened from the inside. This sys- work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder tem prevents minors from opening a door will have to be locked separately. accidentally while the vehicle is running. Rear lid The emergency lock is located on the front This function is independent of the vehicle of the front passenger's door and the rear electronic opening and locking systems. It Introduction doors. It can only be seen if the door is open. only affects rear doors. It can only be activa- ● Pull the cap out of the opening. ted and deactivated manually, as described The rear lid unlocks and locks together with below: the doors. ● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to the right as far as it will go (if the door is on On vehicles with Keyless Access, the rear lid the right side) or to the left (if the door is on Activating the childproof lock unlocks automatically when it is opened the left side). – Unlock the vehicle and open the door in ››› page 98. ● Replace the cap. which you wish to activate the childproof lock. WARNING Once the door has been closed it can no – With the door open, rotate the groove in Careless and unsuitable locking, opening longer be opened from the outside. Pull the the door using the ignition key, clockwise and closing of the rear lid can cause acci- interior door handle once to unlock and for the left hand side doors Fig. 81 and dents and serious injury. » open the door. ››› 105 Operation

● The rear lid must not be opened when Note Opening and closing the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This Before closing the rear lid, make sure that ● To open: place slight pressure on the han- may damage the tail lights. the key has not been left inside the luggage dle. The rear lid opens automatically. ● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it compartment. ● To close: hold one of the handles on the down with your hand on the rear window. inner trim and close it by moving it down- The glass could smash. Risk of injury! wards, or press the button on the rear lid ● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing Opening and closing the rear lid ››› Fig. 83. it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driving. If the doors are locked, the rear lid is also ● Closing the rear lid without observing and locked. ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the rear lid. ● Never drive with the rear lid open or half- closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning! ● Never leave the vehicle unattended or allow children to play inside or next to it, es- Fig. 82 Rear lid: opening from outside. pecially if the rear lid is open. Children could enter the luggage compartment, The rear lid opening system operates electri- close the rear lid and become trapped. A cally. It is activated by exerting slight pressure locked vehicle can reach extremely high on the handle Fig. 82 . and low temperatures, depending on the ››› time of year, thus causing serious injuries, To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the  or illness or even death.  buttons of the vehicle key. A warning appears on the instrument panel CAUTION display if the rear lid is open or not properly Before opening or closing the rear lid, make closed. An audible warning is also given if it is sure that there is enough space to open or opened while the vehicle is moving faster close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a ga- than 6 km/h (4 mph). rage.

106 Opening and closing

Rear lid with electric opening and locked if an authorised key is recognised in ● OR: manually move the rear lid in the di- closing the proximity of the vehicle. rection of closing until it closes automatical- ● OR: depending on the features, pull the  ly. button on the driver door upwards ● The rear lid goes down automatically to the ››› Fig. 84. The button also works when the final position and also closes automatically ignition is switched off. ››› in Introduction on page 105. ● OR: press and hold the  button of the vehicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehi- Interrupting opening or closing cle is locked, only the rear lid is unlocked (the After beginning to open or close the rear lid, doors remain locked). the action can be halted by pressing one of ● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access and the  buttons. sensor-controlled opening you can open the If you press one of the  buttons again, the rear lid by moving one foot in the area of the rear lid will move again in the original direc- Fig. 83 Rear lid: button to close the rear lid. sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy tion. Open ››› page 109 ). The rear lid will be automatically opened. If the rear lid is met with resistance or an obstacle during the automatic opening or clos- Closing the rear lid ing, opening or closing will be interrupted immediately. For the closing process, the ●  Briefly press the button on the rear lid rear lid opens again slightly. ››› Fig. 83 ››› in Introduction on page 105. ● OR: depending on the features, pull the  ● Check why it has not been possible to button on the driver door upwards open or close the rear lid. ››› Fig. 84. ● Try to open or close the rear lid again. ● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, press ● If necessary, the rear lid can be opened or Fig. 84 On the driver’s door: button to and hold the  vehicle key button until the closed by hand using reasonable force. open and close the rear lid. rear lid is closed, or move one foot into the area of the sensors located below the rear Particular features if towing a trailer Opening the rear lid bumper (Easy Open) page 109 . The vehi- ››› If the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri- ● cle key must be in the Keyless Access system Unlock the vehicle ››› page 95 and briefly cally connected to a trailer page 291 , the detection zone at the rear outside the vehi- ››› press the handle of the rear lid. On vehicles electric rear lid can only be opened or closed cle. with Keyless Access you can directly press with the buttons on the rear lid itself or by the handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is un- using the Easy Open function. » 107 Operation

Acoustic warnings ● Release the rear lid and open it to the or, after opening, it may lower by itself due Throughout the process of opening or clos- memorised height. to the extra weight and cause serious in- ing the rear lid, acoustic warnings can be ● Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. To jury. heard. Exception: when the rear lid is do this, some force will have to be used. ● Do not open the rear lid when there is a opened manually using the handle or the ● Press the  button ››› Fig. 83 on the rear lot of snow on it or when carrying a load Easy Open function with the movement of lid for at least 3 seconds. (e.g. on a rack). the foot or closed using the button on the ● This resets and memorises the factory-set ● Before opening the rear lid, remove the rear lid itself Fig. 83 . ››› opening angle. Memorisation is indicated by snow or the load. blinking of the hazard warning lights and an Modifying and memorising the opening audible warning. angle If the space behind or above the vehicle is Automatic protection against overheating less than the travel area of the rear lid, you If the system is operated repeatedly in a can change the opening angle of the rear lid. short space of time, it automatically switches To memorise a new opening angle, the rear off to prevent overheating. lid must be open at least halfway. Once the system is cool again, the function ● Interrupt the opening process in the de- can be reused. Until then, the rear lid can sired position. only be opened and closed by hand using reasonable force. ● Press the  button ››› Fig. 83 on the rear lid for at least 3 seconds. If with the rear lid open the vehicle battery is disconnected ››› page 333 or the corre- The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa- sponding fuse burns out ››› page 58 , the sys- tion is indicated by blinking of the hazard tem will have to be reset. This requires clos- warning lights and an audible warning. ing the rear lid completely once.

Resetting and memorising the opening Emergency unlocking angle ››› page 110 For the rear lid to reopen completely, the opening angle must be reset and memorised WARNING again. If a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or it is heavily loaded, the rear lid may not open

108 Opening and closing

Rear lid with sensor-controlled ● Switch the ignition off. ● If the rear bumper is very dirty. opening and closing (Easy Open) ● Stand in front of the rear bumper, in the ● If the rear bumper is wet with salt water, middle. e.g. after having driven on gritted roads. ● With a brisk movement, bring your foot ● If the vehicle has been equipped at a later and lower leg as close as you can to the time with a tow bracket. bumper. The lower part of the leg needs to be close to the upper sensor area and your In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open foot must be close to the lower sensor area feature may take a little longer to open the ››› Fig. 85 1 . boot or may deactivate automatically, to avoid the boot opening by accident, e.g. be- ● Quickly remove your foot and lower leg cause of the running water. from the sensor areas ››› Fig. 85 2 . The rear lid will be automatically opened. The Easy Open function can be connected and disconnected permanently in the info- ● If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the pro- Fig. 85 Rear lid with sensor-controlled tainment system using the button  > Vehi- cedure after a few seconds. The detection opening (Easy Open). cle > Exterior > Central locking. zone of the lower sensor may not have been reached››› Fig. 86 . WARNING The rear lid can be closed with another foot If there is a valid key in the proximity of the movement similar to the opening one (provi- rear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func- ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of tion may be accidentally activated and the the rear lid). rear lid will open, for example, when sweeping under the rear bumper, when di- When closed, the rear lid automatically locks recting a water jet or high pressure steam to if the vehicle has been locked beforehand the area or when carrying out maintenance and there is no valid key inside. work or repairs in that area. If accidentally While the rear lid is in motion (either open- opened, the rear lid could injure somebody Fig. 86 Lower sensor detection area. ing or closing), it can be stopped with anoth- situated in its area of operation or cause er foot movement similar to the opening one material damage. If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity (provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximi- ● Therefore, always make sure that there is of the rear lid, it is possible to unlock and ty of the rear lid). no unsupervised valid key in the area near open or close it moving one foot in the area the rear lid. The Easy Open feature is not available or on- of the sensors located under the rear bump- ● ly has limited availability in the following sit- Before carrying out any maintenance or er. repair work on the vehicle, always disable » uations (examples): 109 Operation

the Easy Open feature via the infotainment Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug- ● Closing the window: pull the button . system. gage compartment Buttons on the driver door ● Before washing the vehicle, always disa- ● Using the key blade, break the pre- ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain- punched sheet push it out towards the inside 1 Window on the front left door ment system. of the luggage compartment. 2 Window on the front right door ● Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trail- ● Insert the key blade into the slot and move 3 Window on the rear left door er, ››› page 291 , always disable the Easy the key in the direction of the arrow until the Open feature via the infotainment system. lock unlocks ››› Fig. 87 . 4 Window on the rear right door 5 Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear doors. Emergency unlocking of the rear Window controls The front and rear electric windows can be lid operated by using the controls on the driver Electrically opening and closing door. The other doors each have a switch for their own window. the windows Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended ››› . You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door have been opened.

Safety switch  Fig. 87 Detail of the luggage compart- The safety control ››› Fig. 88 5 on the driver ment: emergency unlocking door can be used to disable the electric window buttons on the rear doors. The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in the event of an emergency (e.g. no battery). Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated. There is a groove in the luggage compart- Fig. 88 Detail of the driver's door: window ment allowing access to the emergency controls. Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors opening mechanism. are deactivated. ● Opening the window: press the button .

110 Opening and closing

The safety control symbol  lights up in yel- During convenience closing, first the win- ● Release the button and pull upwards and low if the buttons on the rear doors are dows and then the sliding sunroof will be hold again. The one-touch function is now switched off. closed. ready for operation. In the infotainment system different settings Convenience open/close function The automatic one-touch electric windows can be adjusted using the function button  can be reinitialised individually or several at a The electric windows can be opened or > Vehicle > Exterior > Windows > Conven- time. closed from outside using the vehicle key: ience opening. WARNING Convenience opening: One-touch opening and closing ● Press and hold the  button on the remote Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- The one-touch automatic opening and clos- duction on page 104. control key until all the windows and the sun- ing is used to open or close the windows roof have reached the desired position. ● Incorrect use of the electric windows can completely. It will not be necessary to hold result in injury. ● OR: First unlock the vehicle using the  the button of the corresponding electric ● Never close the rear lid without observing button on the remote control key and then window. keep the key in the driver door lock until all and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third the windows and the sunroof have reached For the automatic raising function: pull the parties. Make sure that no one is in the path the required position. button for the corresponding window upwards until it reaches the second position. of a window. ● Convenience closing: For the automatic lowering function: push If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be activated with risk of ● Press and hold button  on the remote the button for the corresponding window injury, for example, in the electric windows. control key until all the windows and the sun- upwards until it reaches the second position. roof are closed ››› . ● The doors can be locked using the re- Stop automatic movement: push or pull on mote control key. This could become an ● OR: Keep the key in the driver door in the the button of the corresponding window. obstacle for assistance in an emergency sit- "lock" position until all the windows and the uation. sunroof are closed. Resetting one-touch opening and closing ● Therefore always take the key with you ● OR using the Keyless Access system (only The one-touch opening and closing function when you leave the vehicle. locking): Press and hold the locking sensor is not active after the vehicle battery has ● The electric windows will work until the surface Fig. 90 (arrow) on the door han- ››› been disconnected or is flat and will have to ignition has been switched off and one of dle for several seconds to close the windows be reset. the front doors has been opened. and the sunroof. If you release the sensor ● If necessary, use the safety switch to disa- surface, the closing movement stops. ● Pull the button of the corresponding win- ble the rear electric windows. Make sure dow and hold it for one second in this posi- that they have been disabled. » tion. 111 Operation

● For safety reasons, you should only use ● If there is no obvious reason why the win- WARNING the remote control open and close func- dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by If the sunroof is used negligently or without tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle. pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- paying due attention, it can cause serious To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the dow closes with maximum force. The roll- injury. windows when pressing the button to close back function is now deactivated. ● Open or close the sunroof and the sun them. The windows stop moving as soon as ● If more than 10 seconds pass, the window the button is released. blind only when no one is in their path of will open fully when you operate one of the movement. buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated. Note ● Never leave any key inside the vehicle WARNING when exiting. If the window is not able to close because it ● Never leave a child or any other person is stiff or because of an obstruction, the Observe the safety warnings in Elec- ››› who may need help in the vehicle, especial- window will automatically open again trically opening and closing the windows on ly if they have access to the vehicle key. If page 112. If this happens, check why the page 111. ››› using they key unattended, they could lock window could not be closed before at- ● The roll-back function does not prevent the vehicle, start the engine, switch on the tempting to close it again. fingers or other parts of the body getting ignition and activate the sunroof. pinched against the window frame. Risk of ● After switching off, it is still possible to accident. open or close the sunroof during a short Window anti-trap function space of time provided that neither the driver nor passenger door is opened. The roll-back function reduces the risk of injury when the electric windows close. Sunroof CAUTION ● If a window is obstructed when closing au- Introduction ● To prevent damage, during winter tem- tomatically, the window stops at this point peratures remove any ice or snow that and lowers immediately ››› . The sunroof consists of two glass parts. The might be on the car roof before opening ● Next, check why the window does not rear part is fixed and cannot be opened. It al- the sunroof or adjusting the tilt position. close before attempting it again. so has a sun blind. ● Before leaving the vehicle or in case of rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the ● If you try within the following 10 seconds The sunroof only works when the ignition is sunroof open or in a tilted position, water and the window closes again with difficulty or switched on. Once the ignition has been can enter the interior and can cause con- there is an obstruction, the automatic clos- switched off, you can still open or close the siderable damage to the electrical system. ing will stop working for 10 seconds. sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver As a result, other damage can occur in the ● If the window is still obstructed, the win- door and the front passenger door are not vehicle. dow will stop at this point. opened. 112 Opening and closing

Note Raising, opening and closing the sunroof Convenience function to open or ● Leaves and other loose objects that ac- Opening the sunroof: close the sunroof cumulate on the sunroof rails should be ● Automatic movement: slide your finger regularly cleaned away either by hand or back over the functional area  with a vacuum. ››› Fig. 89 A . ● If the sunroof does not work correctly, ● Manual movement: slide back over the the anti-trap function will not work either. functional area  and keep it there. Contact a specialised workshop. Closing the sunroof: ● Automatic movement: slide your finger Operating the sunroof forward over the functional area  A . ● Manual movement: slide forward over the  functional area and keep it there. Fig. 90 Door handle: sensor surface. Raising the sunroof: The sunroof can be opened and closed with ● The sunroof can only be raised if it is the convenience function, just like the win- closed. dows. ● Automatic movement: press briefly in the centre of the functional area  B Using the door lock ● Hold the key in the door lock of the driver Closing the sunroof when raised: door in either the unlocking or locking posi- ● Automatic movement: slide your finger Fig. 89 tion to open or close the roof in the tilted On the interior roof lining: sunroof forward over the functional area  A or button. position. Release the key to interrupt this press briefly in the centre of the functional function. area  B . Functional area  can be operated in two ways: sliding and pressing. Using the remote control Stop the automatic opening or closing Sliding: The roof is opened or closed totally movement: ● Keep the locking or unlocking button or partially. ● Press again on the functional area . pressed to open or close the roof. If you release the button is the opening or closing will Pressing: The roof is raised, opened or stop. » closed totally or partially. Press again to stop the automatic movement.

113 Operation

Using the Keyless Access system (only forward over the functional area  Lights closing) ››› Fig. 89 A and keep pressed until the sun- ● Press and hold the locking sensor surface roof is fully closed. ››› Fig. 90 (arrow) on the door handle to ● The sunroof closes without the anti-trap Vehicle lighting close the sunroof. If you release the sensor function intervening! surface, the closing movement stops. ● If the sunroof will still not close, visit a spe- Control lamps cialised workshop.  It lights up Anti-trap function of the panor- WARNING Driving light totally or partially faulty. amic sunroof and sunshade Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the anti-trap function can cause serious in- Fault in the cornering light system. The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of juries. injury when closing the sunroof and the sun ● Always be careful when closing the sun-  It lights up blind ››› . If the sunroof or sun blind en- roof and sun blind. counter resistance or an obstacle when clos- Rear fog light switched on. ● No person should ever remain in the way ing, they reopen immediately. of the sunroof or sun blind, especially when  It lights up ● Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not closing without the anti-trap function. close. ● The anti-trap function does not prevent Left or right turn signal. fingers or other parts of the body from be- The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn sig- ● Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again. coming trapped against the roof frame and nal is faulty. ● If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be injuries occurring. Hazard warning lights on ››› page 120 . closed due to an obstacle or some resistance, it stops at the corresponding position and then opens. For automatic closing, a  It lights up new closing attempt might take place. Trailer turn signals ● If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to close, close it without the anti-trap function.  It lights up

Closing the sunroof without the anti-trap Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 116 . function It lights up ● Before approx. 5 seconds after activation  of the anti-trap function, slide your finger The Light Assist system is on ››› page 118 . 114 Lights

Several warning and control lamps light up  Switching on the side lights. automatically switch on in the following sit- for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- uations ››› : ed on, signalling that the function is being Additionally, the following light functions can ● The photo sensor detects darkness, for ex- verified. They will switch off after a few sec- be activated by pressing on the correspond- ample, when driving through a tunnel. They onds. ing symbol. switch off when adequate lighting is detec- WARNING When the function is activated, the corre- ted. sponding symbol lights up. To deactivate it, ● The rain sensor detects rain and activates Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- you will need to press on the symbol again. trol and warning lamps on page 84. the wipers. They switch off when the wipers have not been activated for a few minutes.  Turning the front fog lights on or off  Daytime running lights Lighting and visibility buttons The daytime running lights consist of individ-  Turning the rear fog lights on or off. ual lights, integrated in the front headlights.  The daytime running lights come on every  Connecting or disconnecting the wind- time the ignition is switched on if the lamps  screen demisting function ››› page 150 . are off or the lamp  is alight, if the light sensor does not detect darkness. The day-  Connecting or disconnecting the heated light running lights turn off when the ignition  rear window ››› page 150 . is turned off. When the lamp  is alight, a light sensor The driver is personally responsible for the automatically switches dipped beam on and correct use and adjustment of the lights in all off (including the control and instrument situations. Fig. 91 Dash panel: lights control. lighting) or the daytime running lights depending on the level of exterior lighting. By clicking on the button   you can se- Automatic dipped beam headlight control lect between (the corresponding indicator  Motorway light lights up): The automatic dipped beam control is mere- The motorway light is available on vehicles ly intended as an aid and is not able to recog- Switching on the dipped beam headlights. equipped with LED High lights.  nise all driving situations. The function is connected and disconnected Automatic control of dipped beam head- When the lamp  is alight, the vehicle  lights and daytime running lights. via the corresponding Infotainment system lights and the instrument panel and controls menu. » 115 Operation

● Activation: when going above 110 km/h ahead and to ensure that other road users Turn signal and main beam lever (68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip- are able to see you. ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv- ● Always use your dipped beam head lights er's visibility distance. if it is raining or if visibility is poor. ● Deactivation: when reducing the speed of ● Never drive with daytime lights if the road the vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), the is not well lit due to weather or lighting dipped beam immediately returns to its nor- conditions. mal position. WARNING Audible warnings to advise the driver that the lights have not been switched off If the headlights are set too high and not used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or If the ignition is not connected and the driver distracting other road users. This could re- door is open, an audible warning signal is Fig. 92 Turn signal and main beam lever sult in a serious accident. (depending on the version). heard in the following cases: this will remind ● you to turn the light off. Always make sure that the headlights are correctly adjusted. More the lever to the required position: ● When the parking light is on page 116 . ››› 1 Right turn light or right-hand parking ● When the lamp  or  is on. Note light (ignition switched off). ● The legal requirements regarding the use 2 Left turn light or left-hand parking light WARNING of vehicle lights in each country must be (ignition switched off). If the road is not well lit and other road observed. 3 Turning main beam headlights on: con- users cannot see the vehicle well enough or ● The dipped beam headlights will only trol lamp  lit up on the instrument pan- at all, accidents may occur. work with the ignition on. The side lights el. ● The automatic dipped beam control come on automatically when the ignition is ( ) only switches on the dipped beam turned off. 4 The headlight flasher comes on while we pull the lever. Control lamp  lit up. when there are changes in light conditions ● The rear fog light can dazzle drivers be- but not, for example, when it is foggy. hind you. You should use the rear fog light Place the lever in rest position to turn off the only when visibility is very poor. corresponding function. WARNING The side lights or daytime running lights are Convenience turn signals not bright enough to illuminate the road When the ignition is switched on, move the lever as far as possible upwards or

116 Lights downwards and release the lever. The turn WARNING lights also work when the ignition is switch- signal will flash three times. ed off. Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, The convenience turn signals are activated or forgetting to deactivate them can con- ● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the and deactivated in the infotainment system fuse other road users. This could result in a control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn using the function button  > Vehicle > Ex- serious accident. signals) and the vehicle turn signal will flash at double speed. terior > Light > Convenience turn signals ● Always give warning when you are going ››› page 89. to change lane, overtake or when turning, ● The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam headlights In vehicles that do not have the correspond- activating the turn signal in good time. are already on. ing menu, this function can be deactivated in ● As soon as you have finished changing a specialised workshop. lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn ● In cold or damp weather conditions, the signal off. headlights, tail lights and turn signals may mist up inside temporarily. This is normal Parking light  and in no way effects the useful life of the The parking lights will only work with the ig- WARNING vehicle lighting system. nition off. If said light is on, an audible warn- Incorrect use of the headlights may cause ● The parking light does not activate auto- ing will sound while the driver door is open. accidents and serious injury, as the main matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig- beam may distract or dazzle other drivers. nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec- ● Switch the ignition off. ted. ● Move the turn signal lever up or down. Note When the parking light is switched on, the ● When you turn the ignition off without front side light and the tail light on the corre- having turned the turn signals off, an Main beam assist (Light Assist) sponding side of the vehicle turn on. acoustic signal sounds while the driver door is open. This is intended as a reminder to The main beam assist automatically prevents Parking light on both sides switch off the turn signal, unless you wish to glare from vehicles moving in the opposite leave the parking light on. direction or ahead in the same direction. In ● Switch the ignition off. ● If the convenience turn signals are oper- addition, the main beam assist detects illu- ● Press the button   to select . ating (three flashes) and the other conven- minated areas and disconnects the main ● Lock the vehicle from the outside. ience turn signals are switched on, the ac- beam headlight when passing, e.g. by popu- tive part stops flashing and only flashes lated areas. In doing so, only the side lights of both head- once in the new part selected. Within its limitations, the assist system auto- lights light up, and additionally the tail lights ● The turn signal only works when the igni- matically connects or disconnects the main » will do so partially. tion is switched on. The hazard warning

117 Operation

beam headlight depending on the environ- ● On roads with insufficient lighting with very situations and is limited under certain cir- mental and traffic conditions, as well as the reflective signs cumstances. speed . ››› ● If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g. ● When the field of vision of the camera is pedestrians or cyclists. dirty, covered or damaged, operation of Switching the main beam assist on  ● On closed curves, when the traffic in the the main beam control may be affected. ● Turn on the ignition and select the mode opposite direction is partially hidden, on pro- This also applies when changes are made to  in the lights panel ››› Fig. 91 . nounced slopes or inclinations. the vehicle lighting system, for example, if additional headlights are installed. ● From the base position, press the turn sig- ● On roads with traffic in the opposite direc- nal and main beam headlights lever forwards tion and with a central reservation barrier ››› Fig. 92 3 where the driver can see over it e.g. lorry CAUTION drivers. To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- When the main beam assistant is on, the  tem, take the following points into consid- indicator lamp lights up on the instrument ● In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain eration: cluster display. ● In the event of dust or sand storms ● Clean the field of vision of the camera ● If the windscreen is damaged in the cam- regularly and make sure it is free of snow Switching the main beam assist off  era's field of vision. and ice. ●  Disconnect the mode in the lights ● If the camera's field of vision is misted up, ● Do not cover the field of vision of the panel ››› Fig. 91 . dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice. camera. ● OR: while the main beam is on, pull the ● If the camera is damaged or if the power ● Check that the windscreen is not dam- turn signal light and main beam headlights supply has been cut off. aged in the area of the field of vision of the lever forwards ››› Fig. 92 4 . camera. ● OR: push the turn signal and main beam WARNING headlight lever forwards to manually turn on The convenience features of the main Note the main beam. The main beam assist will beam assist should not encourage the tak- ● The headlight flasher can be turned on then be deactivated. ing of risks. The system is not a replace- and off manually at any time with the turn ment for driver concentration. signal and main beam lever ››› page 116 . System limitations ● You are always in control of the main ● If there are objects that radiate light in In the following cases, the main beam head- beam and adapting it to the light, visibility the camera's area of influence, e.g. a porta- light must be switched off manually because and traffic conditions. ble navigation system, this may affect the the main beam assist will not disconnect it ● It is possible that the main beam head- operation of the main beam assist system. on time or disconnect it at all: light control does not recognise all driving

118 Lights

Fog lights with cornering light In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain- Activating the “Leaving Home” function function ment system you can adjust the duration of ● Unlock the vehicle using the remote con- the light switch-off delay, and activate and trol. deactivate the function. The cornering light function is an additional ● The “Leaving Home” function is only acti- function to the dipped beam headlights to vated when the lights are in  mode and Activating the “Coming Home” function improve lighting of the side of the road when the light sensor detects darkness. taking a sharp turn at low speed. For vehicles with light and rain sensors. The cornering light function works when the ● Turn off the vehicle and turn off the igni- The “Leaving Home” lighting switches off dipped beam headlights are already on and it tion with the lights in  ››› page 115 mode. in the following cases: is activated when driving at speeds below ap- ● The automatic “Coming Home” function is ● Automatically, when the “Leaving Home” proximately 40 km/h (25 mph). only active when the light sensor detects switch-on time ends (default 30 sec). darkness. ● If the steering wheel is turned or the turn ● When the vehicle is locked using the re- signal is switched on, the front fog light grad- mote control. For vehicles without light and rain sensors. ually turns on. After the turn, the cornering ● If the light panel lamps are off page 115 . ● Switch the ignition off. ››› light function is gradually switched off. ● With the ignition is switched on. ● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi- ● When engaging reverse gear, both front mately 1 second. fog lights turn on. Note When the driver door is opened, the “Com- To activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav- ing Home” lighting comes on. The headlight ing Home” functions, the  lamp on the “Coming home” and “Leav- turning off time counts from when the last main switch of the lights should be on and ing home” function door or rear lid are closed. the light sensor should detect darkness.

The “Coming home” and “Leaving home” The “Coming Home” lighting turns off in function lights up the vehicle’s immediate the following cases: proximity when getting into and out of it in ● Automatically, once the headlight turning the dark. When switched on, the front posi- off time has elapsed. tion and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li- ● Automatically, when a vehicle door or the cense plate light come on. rear lid is still open 30 seconds after starting The “Leaving Home” is controlled by a pho- the engine. tosensor. ● If the light panel lamps are off ››› page 115 . ● With the ignition is switched on. 119 Operation

Hazard warning lights 7. Always take the vehicle key with you when Note you leave the vehicle. ● The battery will run down if the hazard All turn signals flash simultaneously when the warning lights are left on for a long time, hazard warning lights are switched on. The even if the ignition is switched off. two turn signal turn signal lamps   and the ● The use of the hazard warning lights de- turn signal lamp in the switch  will flash at scribed here is subject to the relevant stat- the same time. The simultaneous hazard utory requirements. warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off. Dynamic headlight range control Emergency braking warning The headlight range is automatically adjus- Fig. 93 Dash panel: hazard warning lights If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu- switch ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50 ted according to the vehicle load status mph), the brake light flashes several times when they are switched on. The hazard warning lights are used to draw per second to warn the vehicles driving be- the attention of other road users to your ve- hind. If you continue braking, the hazard WARNING hicle in emergencies. warning lights will come on automatically Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They If your vehicle breaks down: the headlights dazzle and distract other switch off automatically when the vehicle drivers. This could result in a serious acci- 1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from starts to move again. dent. moving traffic. ● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load WARNING 2. Press the button to switch on the hazard status so that it does not blind other driv- warning lights ››› . ● The risk of an accident increases if your ers. vehicle breaks down. Always use the hazard 3. Switch the ignition off. warning lights and a warning triangle to 4. Apply the electronic parking brake. draw the attention of other road users to Driving abroad your stationary vehicle. 5. Engage 1st gear in vehicles with a manual ● Due to the high temperatures that the The light beam of the dipped beam lights is gearbox, or press the parking lock button catalytic converter can reach, never park in asymmetric: the side of the road on which P in vehicles with automatic transmission. an area where the catalytic converter could you are driving is lit more intensely. 6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at- come into contact with highly inflammable When a car that is manufactured in a country tention of other road users to your vehi- materials, for example dry grass or spilt that drives on the right travels to a country cle. petrol. This could start a fire. 120 Lights that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is With the ignition switched on and without Door contact connection. normally necessary to cover part of the switching on the lights, the lighting dims as The interior lights come on automatically headlight bulbs with stickers or to change the exterior light decreases. In some cases,  when you unlock the vehicle, open a door the adjustment of the headlights to avoid e.g. when driving through a tunnel without  or disconnect the ignition. dazzling other drivers. the  function active, the instrument pan- The light goes out a few seconds after closing all the doors, when locking the ve- el lighting may even switch off. The objective In such cases, the regulations specify certain hicle or connecting the ignition. of this function is to provide the driver with a light values that must be complied with for visual indication that he or she should acti- designated points of the light distribution. Reading light vate the dipped beam. This is known as “Tourist light”. The reading light is tactile, each lens is If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in- The light distribution of the headlights allows turned on and off individually by pressing in strument cluster (Digital Cockpit), the fol- the specific “tourist light” values to be met the respective central area. In addition, the lowing message will appear Turn on the without the need for stickers or changes be- intensity of the light can be adjusted accord- lights on the instrument cluster. ing made to the settings. ing to the pressure exerted. If you want to turn on the two lenses togeth- Note Interior and reading lights er you must press the symbol  ››› Fig. 94 . “Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If you are planning a long stay in a country Glove compartment and luggage com- that drives on the other side, you should partment lighting take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to change the headlights. When opening and closing the glove compartment on the front passenger side and the rear lid, the respective light will automatically switch on and off. Interior lights Footwell lighting Lighting of the instrument panel, The lights in the footwell area below the dash displays and switches (driver and front passenger sides) will switch Fig. 94 Detail of roof lining: front lighting on when the doors are opened and will de- of the passenger compartment. Depending on the model, the lighting of the crease in intensity while driving. This intensity instrument cluster and controls can be ad- can be adjusted through the infotainment justed in the infotainment system, using the  Turning the interior lights on or off. system menu using the function button  > function button  > Vehicle > Interior > In- Background lighting ››› page 89 ). » fotainment ››› page 89 . 121 Operation

Note of turning the ignition off. This prevents the battery from discharging. The reading lights go out when the vehicle is closed and locked or after a few minutes

Background lighting

Fig. 95 Schematic representation: Back- ground lighting

The background lighting lights up the area of ● Manual: to adjust the intensity of the back- reaches 10 km/h while either of the two the centre console, the footwell area and, ground lighting in each of the areas as well as front doors is not closed properly. depending on the version, the front door to change the colour in the versions that ● Rear windows locked alert: Representa- panels and the instrument panel line. have lighting on the front door panel and the tion on the line of the respective front door instrument panel line. There are predefined Background Lighting when the operation buttons of the rear win- versions ››› Fig. 95 . The intensity of the light- ● Off: turns off the background lighting. dows are pressed, if they have been locked ing can be adjusted using the function but- with the safety button ››› Fig. 88 5 and the ton : Additional functions of the background vehicle is locked (Auto Lock). lighting ● Representation of the hazard warning ● Automatic: lights up the interior of the ve- ● Door open alert: Representation on the lights: Animation on the entire background hicle depending on the selected driving line of the respective front door if the vehicle mode. 122 Visibility lighting line while the hazard warning light Visibility More the lever to the required position: function is active. ● Representation of acceleration: Anima- Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Windscreen wiper and rear 4  Hold the lever down for more time to in- tion on the entire background lighting line crease the wipe frequency. when accelerating. This function is only rep- window wiper systems resented in the Cupra when the link be- Windscreen washer. The windscreen washer function is activated by pushing tween the background lighting and the drive 5 Window washer lever  the lever towards the steering wheel, profile is activated. and the wipers operate simultaneously.

The representation of these functions by the Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper background lighting can be switched on and 6  will wipe the window approximately ev- off both individually and as a whole in the in- ery six seconds. fotainment system:  > Background light- The rear window wash function is activa- ing >  Settings. 7  ted by pressing the lever, and the rear wiper starts simultaneously.

WARNING In cold conditions you should not use the wash/wipe system unless you have warmed Fig. 96 Operating the windscreen wiper and rear wiper. the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The windscreen washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen More the lever to the required position: and obscure your view of the road. 0  Windscreen wipers off. CAUTION Wiper intervals. Use control Fig. 96 A to set the in- If the ignition is switched off while the 1 ›››  terval (vehicles without rain sensor), or windscreen wipers are switched on, they the sensitivity of the rain sensor. complete their wipe and return to the rest position. When the ignition is switched Slow sweep adjustable by using control 2  back on, the windscreen wiper will contin- ››› Fig. 96 A . ue to operate at the same wiping level. Ice, » Fast sweep adjustable by using control 3  ››› Fig. 96 A .

123 Operation

snow and other obstacles on the wind- change to a lower position speed. The set Rain sensor screen may damage the wiper and the speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls windscreen wiper motor. away. ● If necessary, remove snow and ice from ● The air conditioner comes on for approxi- the windscreen wipers before starting your mately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode journey. when the windscreen washer is activated,  ● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash- the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the er fluid entering the inside the vehicle. windscreen wipers while dry can cause ● When wiping at intervals, the intervals vary damage. according to the speed. The higher the vehi- ● In icy conditions, always check that the cle speed the shorter the intervals. wiper blades are not frozen to the glass before using the wipers. In cold weather, it Note Fig. 97 Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor may help to leave the vehicle parked with A. ● The wiper will try to wipe away any obsta- the wipers in service position page 50 . ››› cles that are on the windscreen. The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its Note path. Remove the obstacle and switch the wiper back on again. ● The windscreen and window wipers only function when the ignition is switched on ● The windscreen will be wiped again ap- and the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are proximately 5 seconds after the windscreen closed. washer has been activated, provided the vehicle is moving (“drip” function). If you ● The rear wiper is automatically switched activate the wipers less than 10 seconds af- on when the windscreen wiper is on and the ter the “drip” function, a new wash se- car is in reverse gear. quence will begin without performing the last wipe. For the “drip” function to work Fig. 98 Rain sensor sensitive surface again, you have to turn the ignition off and Wiper functions then on again. The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen wiper intervals, depending Windscreen wipers performance in differ- on the amount of rain ››› . The sensitivity ent situations of the rain sensor can be adjusted manually. ● If you stop the vehicle with the windscreen Manual wipe ››› page 123 . wiper in position 1 or 2, it will automatically

124 Visibility

Move the lever to the required position reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor Mirrors ››› Fig. 97: or make it react more slowly, later or not at all. 0 Rain sensor off. Interior mirror anti-dazzle func- ● Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone 1 Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces- will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain tion sary. sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz- A Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor reduction in the sensitive surface area and zle function – Set control to the right: high sensitivity. adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sensor will vary with the size of the damage The anti-dazzle function is activated every – Set control to the left: low sensitivity. caused by the stone. time the ignition is switched on. When the ignition is switched off and then When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, back on, the rain sensor remains active and WARNING the interior rear vision mirror will darken au- starts operating again when the windscreen The rain sensor may not detect enough rain tomatically according to the amount of light wipers are in position 1 and the vehicle is to switch on the wipers. it receives. The anti-dazzle function is can- travelling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph). ● If necessary, switch on the wipers man- celled if reverse gear is engaged. ually when water on the windscreen ob- Modified behaviour of the rain sensor structs visibility. WARNING Possible causes of faults and mistaken read- In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 98 of the Note rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu- rain sensor include: id may leak. This could cause irritation to ● Regularly clean the sensitive surface of the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you ● Damaged wipers: a film of water on the the rain sensor ››› Fig. 98 (arrow) and check come into contact with this liquid, it must for possible damage to the wiper blades. damaged blades may lengthen the activation be rinsed with large quantities of water. If time, reduce the washing intervals or result in ● To remove wax and coatings, we recom- necessary, get medial help. a fast and continuous wipe. mend a window cleaner containing alcohol. ● Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger ● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in CAUTION the windscreen wiper. front of the rain sensor. This may cause sensor disruption or faults. In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle ● Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu- the roads may cause an excessively long id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur- wipe when the windscreen is almost dry. faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon as possible. » ● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may

125 Operation

Note Adjusting the exterior mirrors Synchronized regulation of the exterior mirrors ● If the light falling on the interior mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sun blind), the an- In the infotainment system, the function but- ti-dazzle mirror with automatic adjustment ton  > Vehicle > Exterior > Mirrors can be will not operate perfectly. used to select the exterior mirrors for ● When the interior lights are on or reverse synchronised adjustment. gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken ● Turn the knob to position L1). with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle position. ● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the ● If you have to stick any type of sticker on same time (synchronised). the windscreen, do not do so in front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti- ● If necessary, correct the right-hand rear- dazzle function from working well or even Fig. 99 Detail of the driver's door: control view mirror: rotate the control to position R1). from working at all. for the exterior mirror. Tilt function for front passenger exterior Turn the control to the corresponding posi- mirror tion: When parking backwards, and in order to be L/R Turning the knob to the desired posi- able to see the kerb, the passenger side mir- tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver ror can be automatically tilted towards the side (L, left) and the passenger side (R, passenger to provide a better view of the right) to the direction desired. kerb. The control must be in the position R1)  Depending on the equipment fitted on for this feature to be operational. the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated The mirror returns to its original position as according to the outside temperature. soon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h  Folding in mirrors. (9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also returns to its original position if the position of the control is adjusted.

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym- metrical. 126 Visibility

Storing the rear view mirror settings for WARNING the exterior mirrors in to prevent them the tilt function from being damaged. Electrically retracta- Convex or wide-angle exterior mirrors give ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in or ● Switch the ignition on. a larger field of vision. However, they make out by hand, always use the electrical pow- ● In the infotainment system, select  > Ve- objects look smaller and further away than er control. hicle > Exterior > Mirrors ››› page 89 . they really are. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind ● Select the R1) position on the control. you when changing lane, you could mis- Note ● Select reverse gear. judge the distance. Risk of accident! ● If the electrical adjustment should fail to ● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror operate, both of the mirrors can be adjus- so that you can see, for example, the kerb WARNING ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of area well. the mirror glass. Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking ● Release the reverse gear. care to avoid injuries. ● The fold-in function on the exterior mirrors will not activate at speeds over ● The adjusted position for the rear view mir- ● Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror 40 km/h (25 mph). ror is stored. when there is no-one in the way of the mirror. Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the ● When moving the mirror, take care not to vehicle trap fingers between the mirror and the In the infotainment system, using the func- mirror bracket. tion button  > Vehicle > Exterior > Mirrors the exterior mirrors can be selected to fold in CAUTION when the vehicle is parked and locked ● If for any reason (e.g. a bump when ma- ››› page 89. noeuvring) one of the rear view mirrors is When the vehicle is locked with the remote knocked out of position, the mirrors must control, the exterior mirrors are retracted first be fully retracted with the electric con- automatically. When the vehicle is opened trol. The rear view mirror must not be with the remote control, the exterior mirrors placed by hand in the starting position, as the folding mechanism can be damaged. are deployed automatically. ● Before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, please make sure to fold

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym- metrical. 127 Operation

Sun protection WARNING Seats and headrests Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility. sun blind ● Always store sun blinds and visors in their Adjusting seats housing when not in use. Manual adjustment of the front Note seats The light above the sun visor automatically switches off after a few minutes in certain conditions. This prevents the battery from discharging.

Fig. 100 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front passenger sun visors ● Lower the sun visor towards the windscreen. ● The sun visor can be pulled out of its Fig. 101 Front seats: manual seat settings. mounting and turned towards the door 1 Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and Fig. 100 1 . ››› move the seat. The seat must engage ● Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon- when the lever is released! gitudinally backwards. 2 Raise/lower: pull the lever up or push There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with down (several times if necessary) from its a cover. When the cover is opened 2 a light home position. comes on. 3 Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel. The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror 4 Lumbar support: move the lever until the cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed required position is achieved. back up.

128 Seats and headrests

WARNING Electric driver's seat adjustment WARNING Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to acci- ● If the electric front seats are used negli- dents and severe injuries. gently or without paying due attention, it ● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is can cause serious injury. stationary, as the seats could move unex- ● The front seats can also be electrically pectedly while the vehicle is in motion and adjusted when the ignition is switched off. you could lose control of the vehicle. Fur- Never leave a child or any other person who thermore, an incorrect position is adopted may need help in the vehicle. when adjusting the seat. ● In the event of an emergency, electrical ● Adjust the height, position and inclina- adjustment can be stopped by pressing any tion of the front seats only when their control. movement area is empty. ● Make sure there are no objects in that CAUTION area. To avoid damaging the electrical compo- ● Make sure that the movement and lock- nents of the front seats, please refrain from ing areas of the seats are clean. Fig. 102 Driver's seat: electric seat settings. kneeling on the seat or applying sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest. WARNING A Adjust the lumbar support: press the Incorrectly using upholstery and seat cov- button according to the desired position. ers might cause an accidental activation of B Seat forwards/backwards: press the but- Note the electrical seat adjustment system and ton forwards/backwards. ● It may not be possible to electrically ad- make it move unexpectedly while driving. Seat up/down: Press the rear part of the just the seat if the vehicle battery is very This might cause loss of control of the vehi- low. cle and thus accidents or injuries. More- button up/down. To adjust the angle of ● over, the electrical components of the the seat cushion, press the front of the If the engine is started while the seats are front seats might be damaged. button up/down. being electrically adjusted, the adjustment will stop. ● Never attach or place seat upholstery or C Backrest further upright/further re- ● covers on the electric controls. clined: press the button forwards/back- When changing user a warning will be shown on the infotainment system's screen ● wards. Never use upholstery or seat covers that during the time that the seat is moving to have not been explicitly authorised for the The position will be saved automatically in the saved position. This movement can be seats of the vehicle. the CUPRA Connect Active user when the stopped by pressing the stop button on the ignition is switched off. screen. 129 Operation

Headrest WARNING Adjusting the headrests If travelling with the headrests removed or Introduction improperly adjusted, the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and The possibilities for the adjustment and dis- sudden braking or manoeuvres increases. assembly of the headrests are described be- ● Always travel with the headrest correctly low. Always make sure that the seats are cor- installed and adjusted. rectly adjusted ››› page 13 . ● To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in All seats are equipped with a headrest. The the event of an accident, adjust the head- central rear headrest is only intended for the rest correctly based on your height, always central seat of the rear bench. Therefore, do making sure that its upper edge is at the not install it on any other seat. same height as the top of the head, but never below eye level. Keep the back of Fig. 103 Front seat: headrest adjustment. your head always as close to the headrest as Correct adjustment of headrest possible and centred. Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is ● Never adjust the headrest while the vehi- at the same level as the top of your head and cle is in motion. under no circumstances below eye level. ● Under no circumstances should the rear Keep the back of your head always as close passengers travel while the headrests are in to the headrest as possible. the non-use position.

Adjusting the headrest for short people CAUTION Lower the headrest completely, even if your head is below its upper edge. In the lowest When assembling and disassembling the position, there may be a small distance be- headrests, do not let them meet the top Fig. 104 Rear headrest: headrest adjust- lining of the vehicle, the back rest of the tween the headrest and the backrest. ment. front seat or other parts of the vehicles. If not, this could damage the vehicle. Adjusting the height of the headrests Adjusting the headrest for tall people ● Grab the sides of the headrests with both Push the headrest up as far as it will go. hands and push upwards to the desired position. To lower it, repeat the same action, pressing the 1 ››› Fig. 103 ››› Fig. 104 button on the side.

130 Seats and headrests

● The headrest must lock correctly in one ● Unlock the backrest ››› page 132 . Seat functions position. ● Move the headrest upwards until it arrives to the top. Memory function ● Press button ››› Fig. 105 1 , while simulta- Removing and fitting the headr- neously pressing on the security hole 2 with ests a flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and remove the headrest. ● Move the backrest until it engages properly ››› in Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest on page 133.

Fitting the rear headrests To mount the external headrests, the corre- Fig. 106 On the outer side of the driver's sponding backrest must be partially folded seat: memory buttons. forward. Memory buttons ● Unlock the backrest ››› page 132 . The memory buttons can be used to save Fig. 105 Rear headrest: removal. ● Insert the headrest bars into the guides and turn on settings for the driver seat and until they perceptibly engage. It should not Removing and fitting the front headrests the exterior mirrors. be possible to remove the headrest from the ● Move the headrest upwards until it arrives backrest. Save the settings of the driver seat and the to the top. ● Move the backrest until it engages properly exterior mirrors while driving forward ● Press the side button Fig. 103 1 and ››› ››› in Folding down and raising the rear ● Apply the electronic parking brake. remove the headrest. seat backrest on page 133. ● Move the gearshift to the neutral position. ● To refit, insert the headrest into the holes in the backrest, pushing it down until it en- WARNING ● Switch the ignition on. ● gages. Remove the rear headrests only when it is Adjust the driver seat and the exterior mir- necessary to fit a child seat. After removing rors. Removing the rear headrests a child seat, refit the headrest immediately. ● Press  for longer than 1 second To remove the headrest, the corresponding ››› Fig. 106. backrest must be partially folded forward. ● Press the memory button in which to store the settings within approx. 10 seconds. A » 131 Operation

warning sound will confirm they have been changed to a position other than R Folding down and raising the rear stored. ››› page 125. seat backrest

Storing the passenger rear view mirror set- Initialising the seat position memory tings while driving in reverse The position memory system must be restar- ● Apply the electronic parking brake. ted if, for example, the driver seat has been ● Move the gearshift to the neutral position. changed. ● Switch the ignition on. Restarting deletes all memories and assign- ments for the seat with position memory. ● Press the required memory button. The memory keys can then be programmed ● Select reverse gear. again. ● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so that you can see, for example, the kerb ● Open the driver door and do not get into area well. the vehicle. Fig. 107 Rear seat: clip to hold the seatbelt in place. ● The new position of the mirror will be stor- ● Operating the seat settings from outside ed automatically and allocated to the vehicle the vehicle. key that was used to unlock the vehicle. ● Move the angle of the seat backrest completely forwards. Activating settings ● Release the control to set the angle and ● With the vehicle stopped and the ignition then press again until an audible warning is switched on, press and hold the correspond- heard. ing memory button until the saved position is reached. WARNING ● OR: With the ignition switched off and the Adjust the memory function only when the driver's door open, briefly press the corre- vehicle is stationary. sponding button. Fig. 108 Rear seat: folding the backrest. ● The front passenger side exterior mirror Note The rear seat backrest is split and each part automatically changes from the position If the driver door is opened approx. 10 mi- be lowered separately to extend the luggage stored for reversing as soon as the vehicle nutes after the vehicle was unlocked or lat- compartment. moves forward at a speed of at least 15 km/h er, the driver seat and the exterior mirrors (10 mph) or when the gear selection lever is do not move automatically.

132 Seats and headrests

Folding the backrest forwards centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a Unlock the seat backrest with the ● Place the side seat belts in the trim clip seat whose backrest is not properly engag- cord ››› Fig. 107. ed they will fly forward, along with the backrest, during an accident or a sudden ● Completely lower the rear headrests driving or braking manoeuvre. ››› page 130. ● A red signal on the button 2 warns that ● Press the unlock button ››› Fig. 108 1 for- the backrest is not engaged. Always check wards and at the same time fold the backrest that the red marking is not visible when the down. The rear seat backrest is not engaged backrest is in the upright position. when the red marking of the button 2 is ● When the rear seat backrest is lowered or visible. is not properly engaged nobody else can travel in the corresponding seats (not even Converting the table to a seat a child). ● Raise and lock in the back rest. The red Fig. 109 In the luggage compartment: lev- marking on the tab 2 should no longer be CAUTION ers to unlock the rear backrest. visible when the backrest is properly se- Serious damage can be caused to the vehi- cured. ● Lower the head restraint properly. cle and other objects if the rear seat backrest is lowered or lifted without due care ● Open the rear lid. WARNING and attention. ● Pull the remote release lever of the left Serious injuries can be caused if the rear ● Before lowering the rear seat backrest, part ››› Fig. 109 1 or right part 2 of the seat backrest is lowered or lifted without always adjust the front seats so that neither backrest in the direction of the arrow. The due care and attention. the head restraints nor the cushions of the released part of the rear seat backrest is fol- ● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest rear backrest can hit them. ded automatically down and forwards. while driving. ● If this occurs, close the rear lid. ● Do no trap or damage the seat belt when raising the rear seat backrest. The rear seat backrest is not engaged when ● When lowering or lifting the rear seat the red marking of the button ››› Fig. 108 2 backrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and is visible. other body parts out of its path. ● For the rear seat belts to offer the necessary protection all the parts of the rear backrest must be properly engaged. This is particularly important in the case of the 133 Operation

Front centre armrest ● Never let anyone sit on the centre arm- Transport and practical rest while the vehicle is in motion, not even a child. This position is incorrect and may equipment cause severe injuries. Storing objects

Positioning the luggage and cargo

It is possible to carry objects and luggage in the vehicle, in a trailer ››› page 291 and on Fig. 110 Front centre armrest the roof ››› page 140 . When doing so, please consider all legal provisions. To raise the armrest, pull it fully up in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 110 up or step by Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely step depending on the desired opening. ● Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highest as possible. position. Then lower it down. ● Always place equipment and heavy objects in the boot . To move the armrest horizontally, move it ››› forward ››› Fig. 110 or backward as much as ● Position heavy items in the boot as far for- possible in the direction of the correspond- ward as possible. ing arrow. ● Take into account the maximum authorised weight per axle, as well as the maximum WARNING authorised weight of the vehicle The front centre armrest may obstruct the ››› page 367. driver's arm movements, which could cause ● Secure the objects to the fastening rings of an accident and severe injuries. the boot using appropriate chains or belts ● Keep the storage compartments of the ››› page 138. centre armrest closed at all times while the ● Also place small objects safely. vehicle is in motion.

134 Transport and practical equipment

● Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into ● Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. account the pressure adhesive of the tyres from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin ● Brake earlier than usual. ››› page 342. and store them safely. ● In vehicles equipped with tyre pressure WARNING control system, adjust to the new load status WARNING if necessary ››› page 346 . ● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es- The transport of heavy object changes ve- pecially when the rear lid is open. Children WARNING hicle handling and increases braking dis- could climb into the luggage compartment, tance. Heavy objects that are not properly closing the door behind them; they will be Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri- placed or secured may cause loss of control trapped and run the risk of death. ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring of the vehicle and thus severe injuries. or braking or in case of an accident. Partic- ● Close and lock all the doors and the rear ● Never put too much load in the vehicle. ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy- lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you Both the carrying capacity as well as the ing and they are thrown across the inside of lock the vehicle, make sure that there are distribution of the load in the vehicle have the vehicle. Please observe the following no adults or children in the vehicle. effects on the driving behaviour and brak- rules to minimise the risk of injury: ing ability. ● Place all objects inside the vehicle safely. CAUTION ● When transporting heavy objects, the ● Secure all objects, little and large. driving behaviour of the vehicle varies due Electrical wires or, depending on the fea- ● Place the objects in the cabin in such a to the displacement of the centre of gravi- tures, the antenna embedded into the rear way that they can never reach the airbag ty. windows could be damaged, even irrepara- deployment areas while the vehicle is in ● Always distribute the load in the vehicle bly, if they are in contact with objects. motion. as evenly and horizontally as possible. ● Keep the storage compartments closed ● Always place heavy objects in the boot Note at all times while the vehicle is in motion. before the rear axle and as far away from it Straps for securing the load to the fastening ● Place the objects in such a way that they as possible. rings are commercially available from ac- never force any occupant of the vehicle to ● Objects in the luggage compartment that cessory shops. sit in an incorrect position. are unsecured could move suddenly and ● When transporting objects that take up a modify the handling of the vehicle. seat, never let anyone use that seat. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all ● Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects times to suit visibility, weather, road and loose in open storage compartment of the traffic conditions. vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat ● Accelerate with particular care and cau- or on the dashboard. tion.

135 Operation

Luggage compartment ● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup- ● If the luggage compartment is overloa- ports ››› Fig. 112 by pulling it upwards and ded, remove the tray. then take it out. Luggage compartment shelf If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un- Note der the luggage compartment double floor Ensure that, when placing items of clothing ››› page 137. on the luggage compartment cover, rear visibility is not reduced. Fitting ● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “recess” fits onto the axis of the supports ››› Fig. 112 and press down until it engages. ● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 111 B to the rear lid.

Fig. 111 In the luggage compartment: removing and fitting the shelf. WARNING Animals, loose or unsecured or objects carried on the rear shelf can cause serious injury in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or in case of an accident. ● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy objects or in bags on the rear shelf. ● Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

CAUTION ● Before closing the rear lid, ensure that Fig. 112 In the luggage compartment: re- the rear shelf is correctly fitted. moving and fitting the shelf. ● An overloaded luggage compartment could mean that the rear shelf is not cor- Removing rectly seated and it may be bent or damaged. ● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 111 B from their hooks A . 136 Transport and practical equipment

Store the rear shelf ● Place the rear shelf in the corresponding housing ››› Fig. 114 . ● Put the left and right covers in their original position.

Variable luggage compartment floor

Fig. 116 Variable luggage compartment floor: inclined position. Fig. 113 In the luggage compartment: covers for storing the rear shelf. Variable floor in high position ● To move from the low position to the high position, lift the floor using the handle ››› Fig. 115 1 , and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports ››› Fig. 115 2 . ● Move the floor forward over the supports as far as the rear seat backrest and then lower the floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in low position ● To move from the high position to the low Fig. 114 In the luggage compartment: fitting the rear shelf. position, lift the floor using the handle ››› Fig. 115 1 , and pull it back until the front Depending on the equipment, once the lug- of the floor has fully passed the supports gage compartment shelf has been removed, ››› Fig. 115 2 . it can be stored under the boot floor. Fig. 115 Variable luggage compartment ● Now let the front part fall to the floor and floor:  raised position;  lowered posi- slide the floor forwards as far as the rear seat ● Remove the left and right covers tion. backrest; lower the floor at the same time Fig. 113. ››› with the handle 1 . » 137 Operation

Variable floor in the tilted position guide it downwards in a controlled manner. ● Tighten the belts and straps in a cross lay- When the variable floor is tilted you can ac- Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the out over the load placed on the boot floor cess the spare wheel or anti-puncture kit luggage compartment could be damaged. and secure them to the fastening rings area. safely. ● Never exceed the maximum tensile load ● Lift the variable floor in the high position Fastening rings of the fastening rings when securing ob- using handle ››› Fig. 115 1 , pull it up and jects. push it towards the backrest of the rear seats ● Make sure that, particularly for flat ob- until it folds along the hinge line and the jects, the upper edge of the load is higher movable part of the floor is resting on itself. than the fastening rings. ● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 116 ● Depending on the features, take into ac- (arrows). count the instruction panels on the boot on how to place the load. WARNING ● Never secure a child seat to the fastening ● Always secure objects, even when the rings. luggage compartment floor is properly lif- Fig. 117 In the luggage compartment: ted. fixed and deployable fastening rings. Note ● Only objects that do not protrude more ● The maximum tensile load that the fas- than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car- There are fastening rings Fig. 117 on the ››› tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN. ried between the rear seat and the raised front and rear of the boot to secure loose luggage compartment floor. objects and luggage with fastening belts and ● Belts, straps and securing systems for the appropriate load can be obtained from spe- ● Only objects that do not weigh than ap- cords. cialised dealerships. To do so, CUPRA rec- proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between ommends going to a specialised CUPRA the rear seat and the raised luggage com- WARNING dealer or any SEAT dealership. partment floor. If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining straps are used, they could break in the CAUTION event of braking or an accident. Objects could then be launched across the passen- ● The maximum weight that can be loaded ger compartment and cause serious or fatal on the luggage compartment variable floor injuries. in the top position is 100 kg. ● Always use belts or straps that are suita- ● Do not let the luggage compartment ble and in good condition. floor fall when closing it. Always carefully

138 Transport and practical equipment

Net bag The net bag can be hooked up to the lug- ● Always secure the bag hooks properly so gage compartment in different ways. that they do not suddenly release from the fastening rings when hooking or unhooking Hooking the net bag into the luggage them. compartment floor ● On hooking or unhooking them, protect If necessary, the front eyes must be unfolded your eyes and face in case the hooks are re- first ››› page 138 . leased suddenly. ● Always hook up the net bag hooks in the ● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings described order. If a hook is unfastened 1 and 2 ››› Fig. 118 ››› . The bag zip suddenly, this may cause injuries. should be facing upwards.

Hook the net bag next to the load thresh- Fig. 118 In the luggage compartment: net Bag hooks bag hooked up at floor level. old ● Secure the short net hooks to the fastening rings ››› Fig. 119 1 ››› . The bag zip should be facing upwards. ● Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bag The hooked up net bag is taut ››› .

● Release the net bag from the fastening rings. ● Fig. 120 In the luggage compartment: bag Fig. 119 In the luggage compartment: Store the net bag in the luggage compart- hooks. rings 1 and hooks 2 for attaching the net ment. bag. WARNING There may be hooks for hanging bags on The luggage compartment prevents light both sides of the luggage compartment To secure the elastic net bag on the fasten- ››› Fig. 120. luggage from moving. The net bag has a zip ing rings of the boot it must be stretched and can be used to store small objects. out. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net The retaining hooks have been designed to bag is hooked up or unhooked incorrectly secure light shopping bags. » the hooks could cause injuries. 139 Operation

WARNING ● Close the rear lid. Never use the hooks to hang luggage or Closing the tailboard other objects. In case of sudden braking or an accident, the hooks could break. ● Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. The red mark on the luggage compartment side should never be visible. Trapdoor for transporting long ● Close the rear lid. objects ● Lift the centre armrest if necessary.

Note Fig. 122 In the luggage compartment: opening the trapdoor. The tailboard can also be opened from the luggage compartment. To do so, press the On the rear seat, behind the central armrest, release lever down, in the direction of the there is a tailboard for transporting long arrow, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 122 . items in the interior, such as skis. To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objects should be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) before Roof carrier they are inserted through the tailboard.

Fig. 121 In the rear seat backrest: opening When the armrest is down, nobody may trav- Introduction the trapdoor. el in the centre rear seat. The vehicle roof has been designed to opti- Opening the tailboard mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross ● Lower the centre armrest. bars or conventional roof carrier systems cannot be secured to the roof water drains. ● Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow and push the tailboard cover As the roof water drains are integrated in the ››› Fig. 121 1 down and forwards. roof to reduce air resistance, only CUPRA- ● Open the rear lid. approved cross bars and roof carrier systems can be used. ● Insert the long objects through the gap from the luggage compartment. ● Secure the objects with the seat belt.

140 Transport and practical equipment

Cases in which cross bars and the roof car- fere with the roof aerial or hamper the path or boats on the roof. The appropriate acces- rier system should be disassembled. of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid. sories can be purchased at specialised CU- PRA dealers or any SEAT dealership. ● When they are not used. ● On opening the rear lid make sure that it ● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash. does not knock into the roof load. Always secure the crossbars and the roof carrier system properly. Always take the as- ● When the vehicle height exceeds the max- sembly instructions that come with the imum height, for example, in some garages. For the sake of the environment crossbars and the roof carrier system in When cross bars and a roof carrier system question into account. WARNING are installed, the increased air resistance ● Always secure the load properly using means that the vehicle uses more fuel. The crossbars are assembled on the roof belts or retaining straps that are suitable railings. The distance between crossbars and in a good condition. ››› Fig. 123 A should be between 70 and 90 cm and the distance between the crossbars ● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a Securing the crossbars and the and the brackets of the roof railings B must negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen- roof carrier system tre of gravity and driving performance. be 15 cm. ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. WARNING ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- times to suit visibility, weather, road and bars and the roof carrier system may cause traffic conditions. the whole system to detach from the roof and cause an accident and injuries. CAUTION ● Always take the manufacturer assembly ● Remove the cross bars and the roof carri- instructions into account. er system before entering a car wash. ● Check threaded joints and attachments ● Vehicle height is increased by the instal- travelling and if necessary tighten them af- lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system ter you have travelled a short distance. and the load secured on them. For this pur- When making long trips, check the threa- pose, check that your vehicle's height does Fig. 123 Attachment points for the roof ded joints whenever you stop for a rest. not surpass the headspace limit, for exam- railings for the roof carrier system. ● Do not modify or repair the crossbars or ple, for underpasses or for entering garage roof carrier system. » doors. The crossbars are the basis of a series of ● Cross bars, the roof carrier system and special roof carrier systems. For safety rea- the load secured on them should not inter- sons, special fixtures must be used to safely transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards 141 Operation

Note Distributing a load Storage compartment Always read the assembly instructions that Distribute loads uniformly and secure them come with the crossbars and the roof carri- correctly ››› . Introduction er system carefully and keep them in the vehicle. Check attachments Use the storage compartments only for small Once the cross bars and roof carrier system or light items. have been installed, check the bolted con- Loading the roof carrier system nections and attachments after a short jour- WARNING ney and subsequently with a certain fre- Objects inside the vehicle that are not se- The load can only be secured if the crossbars quency. cured could be thrown across the cabin in and the roof carrier system are properly in- the event of sudden braking or manoeu- stalled ››› . WARNING vring. This may cause severe injuries as well as loss of control of the vehicle. ● Never exceed the maximum authorised Maximum authorised cargo on the roof load on the roof and on the axles or the ve- ● Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg. hicle's maximum authorised weight. heavy items in open storage compartments of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the This figure comes from the combined weight ● Never exceed the load capacity of the cover behind the rear seats, or inside of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the cross bars and the roof carrier system, even pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi- load itself on the roof . if the maximum authorised roof load has ››› cle. not been reached. Always check the weight of the roof carrier ● Keep the storage compartments closed ● Secure heavy items as far forward as pos- system, the cross bars and the weight of the at all times while the vehicle is in motion. sible and distribute the vehicle load uni- load to be transported and weigh them if formly. necessary. Never exceed the maximum au- WARNING thorised roof load. WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell could diffi- If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier cult the use of the pedals. This may cause If the load is loose or not secured, it could with a lower weight rating, you will not be loss of control of the vehicle and increases fall from the roof carrier system or cause able to carry the maximum authorised roof the risk of severe injuries. load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- accidents and injuries. ● Make sure that nothing prevents you from mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is ● Always use belts or retaining straps that using the pedals at any time. listed in the fitting instructions. are suitable and in a good condition. ● Always secure the mat in the footwell. ● Never place other mats or other type of covers on the factory-fitted mat.

142 Transport and practical equipment

● Ensure that no objects can fall into the pads stuck to the windows can concentrate ● Always keep the glove compartment driver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo- sunlight and damage the vehicle. closed while the vehicle is in motion. tion. ● When the vehicle is stationary, remove the objects in the footwell. Glove compartment Storage compartment under front seats WARNING If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they might be damaged or lit inadvertently. This could lead to severe burns and damage to the vehicle. ● Before moving a seat, make sure there are no lighters in the moving part area of the vehicle. ● Before closing a storage compartment, make sure there are no lighters in the closing area. Fig. 124 On the front passenger side: glove compartment. ● Never leave a lighter inside a storage Fig. 125 Storage compartment under the front seats. compartment or any other surface of the Opening and closing the glove compart- vehicle as it could ignite due to the high ment temperatures on such surfaces, particularly Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handle during the summer. Opening: Pull the handle ››› Fig. 124 and and take the drawer out. open the glove compartment. Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until CAUTION Closing: Press the glove compartment up- it engages. ● Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive ob- wards. Depending on the equipment, under the jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat driver's seat there may be a magazine holder and cold could damage them or render WARNING (about the size of the instruction manual) in- them useless. If the glove compartment is left open, the stead of the storage compartment. » ● Objects made from transparent materials risk of causing severe injuries in the event left inside the vehicle, such as glasses, of an accident, sudden braking or manoeu- magnifying glasses or transparent suction vring increases.

143 Operation

WARNING Front drink holders ● Never leave closed bottles in the vehicle if the temperature inside is very high or If the drawer is left open, it could prevent There are two cup holders in the centre con- very low. use of the pedals. This may cause serious sole ››› Fig. 126 . accidents and injuries. ● Always keep the drawer closed while the Drinks holder in the rear central armrest CAUTION vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer Use: Lower the centre armrest. Do not leave open cans in the drink holders and any objects in it could fall into the driv- when the vehicle is in motion. If the drink is When the drink holder is no longer in use, lift er's footwell and obstruct the pedals. spilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it may the armrest again. damage the vehicle and its electrical system. CAUTION WARNING The drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most. Incorrect use of the bottle holders may Note cause injuries. The inside elements of the drink holders ● Never put hot drinks in the drink holders. can be extracted for cleaning. Drink holder In the event of sudden braking or an accident while driving, hot beverages in the bottle holders might spill and cause burns. ● Ensure that no bottles or other objects Other object holders are dropped in the driver footwell while driving, as they could get under the pedals You will find more object holders, compart- and obstruct their working. ments and supports in other parts of the ve- ● Never place glasses, food or other heavy hicle: objects drink holders. These heavy objects ● In the centre console. may be thrown across the cabin in the event of an accident and cause serious in- ● In the upper part of the glove compart- juries. ment. The load of the compartment should Fig. 126 In the rear central armrest: drinks not exceed 1.2 kg. holder. WARNING ● Other storage compartments are found in the rear seat, to the left and the right of the Closed bottles may explode inside the vehi- The storage compartments of the driver and seats. passenger doors contain a bottle holder. cle due to cold or heat. There are hangers on the struts of the doors and the rear.

144 Transport and practical equipment

WARNING Maximum power consumption Hanging clothes may decrease the driver's Maximum power con- Power socket visibility, which may cause serious acci- sumption dents and injuries. 12 Volts 120 Watts ● Always hang clothes from hangers in such a way that the driver's visibility is not affec- 150 watts (300 watts - maximum 230 Volts ted. 2 minutes) ● Only hang light pieces of clothing from the hangers of the vehicle. Never leave Electrical equipment can be connected to heavy, hard or sharp objects in the pockets the 12 volt power socket. of these pieces of clothing. Fig. 128 On the right side of the luggage compartment: 230 volt power socket. Make sure that the maximum power con- ● Do not use clothes hangers to hang up sumption displayed on each outlet is not ex- the clothing, as this could interfere with the In the front armrest ceeded. The power consumption of devices function of the head-protection airbags. is shown on the model plate. ● Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 127 . ● Insert the plug of the electrical appliance When connecting two or more electrical de- into the power socket. vices at the same time, make sure that their Power sockets total consumption never exceeds 190 watts USB power sockets ››› . Vehicle power sockets Depending on the equipment and the coun- 230 volt power socket try, the vehicle may also have USB connections exclusively for charging or as a power With the engine running, the power socket socket. ››› Fig. 128 activates automatically as soon as a connector is plugged in. If there is enough These USB ports are located at the rear of power available, the socket can still be used the console, between the front seats . These while the engine is off ››› connectors can work at a maximum power of up to 10.5 W per port. Connect an electrical device: Open the cover and insert the plug into the power socket They are not intended for file playback. as far as possible to unlock the built-in child Fig. 127 12 volt power socket: 1 inside the lock. The socket only supplies power once front armrest. the child lock is unlocked. »

145 Operation

LED on the power socket ● Do not spill liquids onto the socket. – The built-in overload disconnect func- ● Do not plug adapters or extension cords tion prevents any electrical devices Steady green The childproof lock is unlocked. that require a high start-up current light: The socket is ready to operate. into the 230 volt power socket. Otherwise, the integrated child lock will be unlocked from turning on. In this case, unplug The ignition is switched off, but and the power socket will operate. the electrical device's power supply and there is enough power available re-try the connection after about 10 ● Do not insert conductive objects (a knit- to continue supplying the socket seconds. with current for a maximum of 10 ting needle, for example) into the 230 volt Flashing green minutes. If the connector is un- power socket. light: plugged before this time elapses, Note the socket is disconnected and WARNING ● The use of electrical appliances with the cannot be used again until the ig- engine switched off will cause a battery dis- nition is switched on again. The power socket works only when the ig- charge. nition is on. Improper use may cause seri- There is an anomaly, e.g. discon- ous injury or even fire. Children should ● Should the connected appliance over- Flashing red light: nection due to a current surge or heat, immediately switch it off and discon- overheating. therefore not be left in the vehicle unattended if the button is also left behind. Other- nect it from the socket. wise there is a possibility that they may be ● Before switching the ignition on or off, Disconnection due to overheating injured. unplug the appliances from the USB ports When the temperature exceeds a certain to protect them from any damage caused by fluctuations in voltage. value, the 230 volt socket inverter is auto- CAUTION matically disconnected. The disconnection ● Some appliances may not work properly prevents overheating when the power con- Always use the correct type of plugs to when connected to the 230 volt sockets avoid damaging the sockets. sumption of the connected devices is exces- due to a lack of power (watts). sive or the ambient temperature is very high. The 230-volt power supply can be used once CAUTION again after a cooling time. First unplug the ● 230 volt power socket: connector of the connected device and – Do not leave devices or connectors that then plug it back in again. This prevents the are too heavy (e.g. a transformer) electrical device from being switched on hanging directly from the power sock- again if this is not wanted. et. WARNING – Do not connect neon lamps. – Only connect devices to the socket if The electrical system is under high voltage! the device and socket voltage match.

146 Air conditioning

Air conditioning Passenger recognition function impurities in the air taken into the vehicle in- 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles. terior. Heating, ventilation and The front or rear area passenger recognition The dust and pollen filter must be changed function turns down the air conditioning in regularly so that air conditioner performance cooling these areas if no occupation is detected in is not adversely affected. them, with the aim of reducing the vehicle’s If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due Introduction energy consumption. to use in areas with very high levels of air pollution, the filter must be changed more fre- The turning down of the air conditioning is The 3 zone Climatronic: heats, ventilates, quently than stated in the Service Schedule. cools and dehumidifies the passenger com- indicated as follows: partment considering it as 3 independent air ● Front passenger area: on the front passen- WARNING conditioning areas (driver, front passenger ger temperature setting, which will display Reduced visibility through the windows in- and rear seats). ECO instead of the selected temperature. creases the risk of serious accidents. ● Rear area: On the rear temperature setting, There are several ways to switch on the air ● Always ensure that all windows are free of where ECO will be displayed instead of the se- conditioning: ice and snow, and that they are not fogged, lected temperature. This turning down of the so as to maintain good visibility of every- ● Press AUTO on the climabar Fig. 129 A air conditioning will also be displayed on the ››› thing outside. ●  control located in the rear area. OR: Press in the air conditioning menu ● Only drive when you have good visibility. ››› page 150 or in the air conditioning widg- ● Always ensure that you use the air condi- et. Air conditioning percentage reached function tioner and heated rear window to maintain ● OR: Press  in the air conditioning menu good visibility. page 150 or in the air conditioning widg- Shows how long it will take to reach the set ››› ● Never leave the air recirculation on for a comfort temperature as a percentage. et. long period of time. If the cooling system is ● OR: Change the desired temperature. Once reached, 100% will be displayed on switched off and air recirculation mode the screen. There is one indicator for the switched on, the windows can mist over The Climatronic operates most effectively driver's area and another for the passenger very quickly, considerably limiting visibility. with the windows and the sunroof closed. area. ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it Some functions and menu tabs depend on is not required. » the equipment. Dust and pollen filter The dust and pollen filter with its activated charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against

147 Operation

WARNING only available when the engine has reached its normal running temperature. Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and reduce driver concentration possibly re- ● Keep the air intake slots in front of the sulting in a serious accident. windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not im- ● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or paired, and to prevent the windows from use the air recirculation for long periods of misting over. time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be refreshed. ● The air from the vents flows through the vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in the luggage compartment designed for this CAUTION purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob- ● To replace the pollen filter, always visit a structing these slots with any kind of ob- service centre. ject. ● Switch the air conditioner off if you think ● Do not smoke while air recirculation it may be broken. This will avoid additional mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air damage. Have the air conditioner checked conditioning system leaves residue on the by a specialised workshop. evaporator, producing a permanent un- ● Repairs to the air conditioner require pleasant odour. specialist knowledge and special tools. CU- ● It is advisable to turn on the air condi- PRA recommends going to a specialised tioning at least once a month, to lubricate CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Service. the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling capacity is detected, a Technical Service should be consul- Note ted to check the system. ● When the cooling system is turned off, air ● When the engine is under extreme strain, coming from the outside will not be dried. switch off the compressor for a moment. To prevent fogging of the windows, CUPRA recommends leaving the cooling system (compressor) turned on. To do this, press the function button . The icon should light up. ● The maximum heat output required to defrost windows as quickly as possible is

148 Air conditioning

Climatronic control

Fig. 129 Schematic representation: air conditioning functions

A Climabar Temperature Slide your finger from left to Temperature setting submenu Fixed bar at the top of the Infotainment Sys- right or vice versa over the numbers to Submenu where the following functions are adjust the desired temperature. Press tem ››› Fig. 129 A screen, (even if it is dis- found: connected) where the following Air Condi- on the same numbers to access the tioning functions are located: temperature adjustment submenu.  /  Press to set the desired temperature Or: use the touch zones 1 and 2 on the driver or front passenger side.  Shows fan status/speed. By pressing it, (blue / red) to adjust the temperature of You can also slide your finger over the you can access the Air conditioning the Air Conditioning ››› Fig. 129 . bar to make the adjustment. menu ››› page 150 .  Switching air recirculation on and off  Synchronizes the temperature on the   Access the seat heating submenu ››› page 152. driver's side with the other zones. ››› page 153.

149 Operation

Air Conditioning Menu

Fig. 130 Schematic representation: Air conditioning menu.

Within the Air Conditioning menu, the fol- but the requested temperature de- When this function is switched on, the lowing submenus are found depending on pending on the surrounding conditions. rear air conditioning remains switched the equipment:  Manual adjustment of fan speed by off. pressing  or . The heated rear window only works Front Submenu   Turn on, change the level or turn off the when the engine is running and Submenu for the air conditioning in the front steering wheel heating. It also shows its switches off automatically after a maxi- of the passenger compartment where the status (on/off) and its level. mum of 10 minutes. It should be switch- following functions are found: ed off as soon as the glass is demisted. The multifunction steering wheel can By saving electrical power you can also also be used to switch it on and off and  Connect/disconnect the Climatronic save fuel. Fig. 130 A . change its levels ››› page 154 . ››› To avoid possible damage to the bat- The defrost/demist function of the Cli- Vents Selection of the air distribution to one  tery, an automatic temporary discon- matronic removes ice and condensa- or more of the following areas: feet, up- nection of this function is possible, tion from the windscreen. The air is de- per body or windscreen. The colour coming back on when normal operating humidified and the fan is set high. represented by the arrows does not in- conditions are re-established. dicate the outlet temperature of the air,  Switching the cooling and demisting system on/off. 150 Air conditioning

 In  mode, the selected tempera-  Cool feet: automatically adjusts for a Settings submenu ture will remain constant. Fan speed certain time the air conditioning to cool Submenu where the following settings are and air distribution are automatically the footwell area. located:  adjusted. The mode will be deacti-  Defog the windows: automatically ad- vated when the fan speed and/or the air justs for a certain time the air condition- ● Automatic recirculation: to switch auto- distribution are modified manually. ing to defog the windscreen. matic air recirculation on and off  ››› page 152. Fan speed in mode can be adjusted  Warm feet: automatically adjusts for a in the Climaprofile (low, medium or certain time the air conditioning to heat ● Climaprofile: To adjust the fan speed (low, high) by successive presses on the func- the footwell area. medium or high) during operation in  tion button . Climaprofile adjust- mode. Fresh Air: automatically adjusts the air ment is also possible in the Settings  conditioning for a certain time to venti- ● Smart Heated Seats: Pressing  turns the submenu. late the passenger compartment. smart heated seats function on/off for the driver and front passenger ››› page 153 . Rear Submenu  Quick cooling: automatically adjusts the air conditioning to cool the vehicle inte- Submenu for the air conditioning in the rear rior for a certain amount of time. of the passenger compartment where the Climate control usage instruc- following functions are found: AirCare Climate submenu tions Connect/disconnect the Climatronic A. The air conditioning system contains a filter  The interior cooling system only works when that can reduce the penetration of allergenic With the icon lit up, it is not possible to the engine is running and fan is switched on.  contaminants. adjust the temperature from the rear area. When the Air Care function is activated, the Economic use of the air conditioning recirculation mode is on and the air is regula-  /  Press to adjust the rear zone temper- When the air conditioning is switched on, ted automatically and continuously, as long ature. the compressor consumes engine power as there is no detection of fogging hazard. and has influence on fuel consumption. iClimate submenu ● Press on  to activate/deactivate the The air conditioning operates most effec- Submenu where different smart and/or au- AirCare function. tively with the windows and the sunroof tomatic functionalities are located: ● Press  to access the information on the closed. However, if the passenger compart- status of the AirCare system. ment has heated up after standing in the sun Warm hands: automatically adjusts for a  for some time, the air inside can be cooled certain time the air conditioning to heat more quickly by briefly opening the windows the steering wheel area. and the sunroof. »

151 Operation

Change the temperature unit (Climatron- Note ● To close the air vents on the left side, move ic) the corresponding diffuser vent lever fully to After starting the engine, any residual hu- the right. To close the air vents on the rights The temperature display can be changed midity in the air conditioner could mist over side, move the corresponding diffuser vent from Celsius to Fahrenheit on the Infotain- the windscreen. Switch on the defrost lever fully to the left. ment system screen using the function but- function as soon as possible to clear the ton  > Settings > Units. windscreen of condensation. ● Change the air direction using the ventilation grille lever. The cooling system cannot be activated There are other additional, non-adjustable If the air conditioning system cannot be Rear controls air vents in the dash panel, in the footwells switched on, this may be caused by the fol- and in the rear area of the passenger com- lowing: partment. ● The engine is not running. Note ● The fan is switched off. Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen- ● The air conditioner fuse has blown. sitive objects should never be placed in ● The outside temperature is lower than ap- front of the air outlets as they may be dam- proximately +3°C (+38°F). aged or made unsuitable for use by the air. ● The air conditioner compressor has been temporarily switched off because the engine Fig. 131 In the rear part of the centre console: controls for the rear seats. coolant temperature is too high. Air recirculation  ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air Temperature Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient conditioner checked by a specialised work- ● Press buttons 1 and 2 Fig. 131 to ad- air from entering the interior. shop. ››› just the temperature of the rear zone. When the outside temperature is very high, Special characteristics selecting manual air recirculation mode for a short period refreshes the vehicle interior If the humidity and temperature outside the Air vents more quickly. vehicle are high, condensation can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti- For safety reasons, the air recirculation is dis- form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is lation in the vehicle interior, the air vents connected when  is pressed. normal and does not indicate a leak! must remain open.

152 Air conditioning

Switching the manual air recirculation Control seat heating also be shown during this process, until it is mode on and off Press the icon  on the Climabar complete (AUTO). ● Press the button  to connect or discon- ››› Fig. 129 A to view the seat heating menu. Once the learning period is over, the heated nect manual air recirculation. seats are turned on and their temperature ● Press the left or right seat icon to connect level adjusted automatically. Climatronic automatic air recirculation the seat heating to maximum power. If you are not satisfied with the temperature mode ● Press the left or right seat icon repeatedly level provided by the system during automat- until the desired level is adjusted. With the automatic air recirculation mode ic regulation, adjust the seat heating man- activated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin ● To switch off seat heating, press the corre- ually and the function will be optimised (Op- interior is enabled. If the system detects a sponding seat icon several times until no LED timising). The optimisation process will be high concentration of hazardous substances is on. displayed in the seats submenu of the info- in the ambient air, air recirculation mode is ● You can also adjust the seat heating level tainment display. switched on automatically. When the level of by using two fingers to press the sensor field To reset the process and start the learning impurities drops to within a normal range, re- ››› Fig. 129 1 or 2 (left or right seat). circulation mode is switched off. period, go to the submenu Settings > Reset If the ignition is switched on again in approx. driver / front passenger profile. The system is unable to detect unpleasant the next 10 minutes, the driver seat heating smells. is automatically turned on to the level set the Cases in which the heat seating should not be switched on ● Automatic air recirculation is activated and last time. deactivated in the air conditioning settings Do not switch the seat heating on if any of menu. An A will be displayed next to the re- Smart Heated Seats the following conditions are met: circulation icon  on the Climabar, indicat- This is an smart function that automatically ● The seat is not occupied. ing that the function is active ››› page 149 activates and regulates the driver and front passenger seat heating for greater comfort. ● The seat has a cover. ● A child seat has been installed on the seat. To access the Smart Heated Seats function, Front seat heating the CUPRA CONNECT personalisation serv- ● The seat cushion is wet or damp. ice must first be activated ››› page 173 . ● The outdoor or indoor temperature is With the engine on, the front seat cushion greater than +25°C (77°F). and backrest can be heated electrically. The Smart Heated Seats function requires a period for learning usage habits. The start of the learning process is shown on the info- WARNING tainment display. Its evolution (learning) will People who cannot perceive pain or temperature because of medications, paralysis »

153 Operation

or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have a ● In the event of smells, switch off the seat Steering wheel heating levels limited perception of these, may suffer heating immediately and have it inspected The selected steering wheel heating level will burns to the back, buttocks or legs when by a specialised workshop. be displayed on the instrument cluster dis- using seat heating. play and in the air conditioning menu. ● People with limited pain and temperature For the sake of the environment Level control is carried out using the  but- thresholds must never use seat heating. The seat heating should remain on only ton on the multifunction steering wheel: ● If an abnormality in the device's tempera- when needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces- ture control is detected, have it checked by sary fuel waste. ● Brief press (less than 1 second): the heat- a specialist workshop. ing is switched on at maximum level. Press the steering wheel button repeatedly until Note WARNING the desired level is adjusted. To switch off Please note the following for the Smart steering wheel heating, press the steering If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can Heated Seats feature: wheel button repeatedly until the heated adversely affect the operation of the seat ● steering wheel OFF icon is displayed on the heating, increasing the risk of burns. The system may reset the learning process if it has not been satisfactory. instrument cluster. ● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to ● ● Long press (more than 1 second): the heat- using the seat heater. Separate driver’s seat learning will be required for each registered user. ing is switched off directly from the level that ● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is ● is currently operating. If the steering wheel wet or damp. The passenger seat learns regardless of the active registered user. button is pressed again for a long period, the ● Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp heating is switched on directly at the last lev- ● on the seat. In hybrid vehicles the use of the extended pre-air conditioning function may af- el saved before switching off. ● Do not spill liquid on the seat. fect the learning time of the function. Heating levels can also be controlled through the infotainment system's air condi- CAUTION tioning menu: ● To avoid damaging the heating elements Steering wheel heating ● Press the steering wheel heating function of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on button  . The heating is switched on at its the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single Steering wheel heating works only with the maximum level. point on the seat cushion or backrest. engine running. ● Press the function button repeatedly to set ● Liquids, sharps objects and insulating the desired level. materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage the seat heating. ● To switch off steering wheel heating, press the function button several times until no LED is on. 154 Air conditioning

Automatic off Disconnecting parking ventilation CAUTION The steering wheel heating will be switched The parking ventilation will turn off in the fol- Foods sensitive to heat or cold, medica- off automatically when any of the following lowing situations: tions and other objects can be damaged by conditions are met: the airflow. ● When the operating time selected by the ● Power consumption is too high. user in the MyCUPRA App or website for the ● Do not place any type of food, medicines instant on/off mode has elapsed. or other temperature sensitive items in ● The steering wheel heating system is faulty. front of the ventilation slots. ● If the ignition is switched off. ● The parking ventilation function can be switched off instantly using the instant on/off button in the MyCUPRA App or web- Note site. If parking ventilation works repeatedly for Parking ventilation ● When the scheduled departure time has long periods of time, the 12V battery been reached. charge level will drop. It is advisable to take With the parking ventilation function, the the vehicle for a long drive to recharge the passenger compartment can be ventilated in The maximum operating period of the park- battery. spring/summer. ing ventilation is 60 min. The power required for parking ventilation will be provided by the vehicle's 12V battery. Programming a departure/trip start The ventilation function is controlled The activation of the parking ventilation for a through the CUPRA CONNECT mobile App scheduled time is only valid for a single venti- or the MyCUPRA website. lation process. The departure time must be for each newly programmed ventilation Connecting parking ventilation process. The function will be switched on as follows: Before programming the departure time, you must check that the date and time of the car ● The parking ventilation function can be are correctly set. switched on/off instantly using the on/off button in the MyCUPRA App or website. When programming a departure time, the car automatically calculates, depending on ● By programming a departure time. the environmental conditions, the necessary In the event of low level charge of the 12V operating time of the parking ventilation. battery, the parking ventilation will not turn on.

155 Operation

●  auxiliary heating (addition- ● Never programme the auxiliary heater so Press the immediate on/off button in the that it switches itself on and is running in an infotainment system (while the vehicle is al heating) enclosed space or an area with no ventila- switched off). tion. ● Press button  on the remote control Introduction ››› page 157. WARNING ● Automatically scheduling a departure time The auxiliary heater runs on fuel from the in the auxiliary heater menu in the infotain- vehicle's tank and can be used while you are The components of the auxiliary heater are ment system, or on the MyCUPRA App or driving and when the vehicle is stationary. extremely hot and could cause a fire. portal page 158 . ● Always park your vehicle so that no part ››› The auxiliary heating can be controlled of the exhaust system can come in contact through the CUPRA CONNECT mobile app, with easily flammable materials that might Disconnection the MyCUPRA website or with the remote be below the vehicle, such as dried grass. The independent heating can be switched control. off in the following ways: In winter, with the auxiliary heater switched CAUTION on, you can defog the windscreen and leave ● The supplementary heating function will Never place food, medicines or other tem- it free of ice and snow (if it is a thin layer) be- be turned off immediately using the on/off perature-sensitive objects close to the air fore you start driving. button in the App or MyCUPRA website. vents. Food, medicines and other objects ● Press the immediate on/off icon  in the If the outside temperature is very high, the sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged infotainment system (while the vehicle is vehicle interior can be ventilated with the or made unsuitable for use by the air com- switched off). engine off using the auxiliary heater. ing from the vents. ● Press button  on the radio-operated re- The maximum operating period of the park- mote control ››› page 157 . ing ventilation is 60 min. Switching the auxiliary heater on ● Automatically at the scheduled departure WARNING and off time or after the programmed operating time has elapsed . The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain Connection ● Automatically when the control lamp  carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can The independent heating can be connected (fuel level indicator) lights up ››› page 315 . cause people to lose consciousness. It can in the following ways: ● Automatically when the 12-volt battery also cause death. charge drops too low ››› page 333 . ● Press the immediate on/off button in the ● Never switch on the auxiliary heater or leave it running in enclosed spaces or areas App or on the MyCUPRA website. with no ventilation. 156 Air conditioning

Things to note out of range or when the control lamp is It lights up for approx. 2 seconds Once switched off, the auxiliary heater will flashing. ● In orange (then in green or in red): The re- continue to operate for a short period of To switch on and off the independent heat- mote control battery is almost flat. However, time in order to burn the fuel remaining in ing, the button must be pressed and held for the on or off signal has been received. the system and also to expel the exhaust approximately 1 second. ● In orange (then flashes green or red): The fumes. remote control battery is almost flat. No on Control lamp on the remote control or off signal has been received. When the buttons are pressed, the control Flashes for around 5 seconds Radio-operated remote control lamp on the remote control 1 provides the ● In orange: The remote control battery is user with different information: flat. No on or off signal has been received. It lights up for approx. 2 seconds Changing the battery of the radio-operat- ● In green: The auxiliary heater has been ed remote control switched on using the button.  When pressing the buttons, if the control ● In red: The auxiliary heater has been lamp of the remote 1 flashes for approx. 5 switched off con with button . orange or does not light up, the batteries must be replaced. Flashes slowly for approx. 2 seconds The battery is located beneath a cover on ● In green: No on signal has been received. the back of the remote control. Fig. 132 Auxiliary heating: radio-operated The remote control is out of range. Move remote control. closer to the vehicle. ● To open the cover, lift it slightly at the bot- ● In red: No off signal has been received. The tom and slide it down. Fig. 132 remote control is out of range. Move closer ● Remove the old battery.  Switch the auxiliary heater on to the vehicle. ● Insert the new battery. When doing so,  Switch the auxiliary heater off Flashes quickly approx. 2 seconds take into account the polarity and use batteries of the same type . 1 Control lamp ● In green: The independent heating is ››› blocked. Possible causes: the fuel tank is al- ● Replace the battery cover by inserting the If the buttons of the remote control are most empty, the 12-volt battery charge is tabs at the top and pressing the bottom. » pressed unnecessarily, it could switch on the very low or there is a fault. auxiliary heater involuntarily, even when it is

157 Operation

Range For the sake of the environment tion. The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless The receiver is inside the vehicle. The re- ● Please dispose of your used batteries and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide mote control, when fitted with new batteries, correctly and with respect for the environ- can cause people to lose consciousness. It has a range of several hundred metres. Ob- ment. stacles between the remote control and the can also cause death. ● The remote control battery may contain vehicle, bad weather conditions and dis- perchlorate. Observe the legal provisions charged batteries can considerably reduce regarding disposal. the range of the remote control. ● Care should be taken so as not to operate Usage instructions the remote control unintentionally so as to WARNING The auxiliary heater exhaust system located prevent the auxiliary heater being switched Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame- on accidentally. below the vehicle must be kept clear of ter or any other button battery can cause snow, mud and other objects. The exhaust serious and even fatal injuries within a very fumes must be able to exit freely. The emis- short time. sions generated by the auxiliary heater are Programming the auxiliary heater removed via an exhaust pipe fitted under- ● Always keep the remote control, keyrings neath the vehicle. with batteries, the spare batteries, button The activation of the parking ventilation for a batteries and all other batteries over 20 scheduled time is only valid for a single venti- On heating the vehicle interior, depending mm out of reach of children. lation process. The departure time must be on the outside temperature, the warm air is ● If you suspect that someone may have for each newly programmed ventilation first directed at the windscreen and then to swallowed a battery, seek immediate medi- process. the rest of the vehicle interior through the air cal attention. vents. Directing the diffusers – towards the Before programming the departure time, you windows for example – can affect air distri- must check that the date and time of the car CAUTION bution. are correctly set. ● The radio frequency remote control con- When programming a departure time, the When the auxiliary heater is not switched tains electronic components. Therefore, on avoid getting it wet and exposing it to car automatically calculates, depending on knocks or direct sunlight. the environmental conditions, the necessary ● The auxiliary heater requires about as operating time of the parking ventilation. ● The use of inappropriate batteries may much power as the dipped beam headlights. damage the radio frequency remote con- If the 12-volt battery charge is too low, the WARNING trol. For this reason, always replace the auxiliary heater switches off automatically used battery with another of the same volt- Never programme the auxiliary heater so and cannot be switched on. This avoids age, size and specifications. that it switches itself on and is running in an problems when starting the engine. enclosed space or an area with no ventila- 158 Air conditioning

● The heating must be activated every time Stationary air conditioning heating or cooling capacity to reach the you want to set off. Similarly, the departure desired set temperature. time must reactivate each time. Introduction ● The control lamp  (fuel level indicator) 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles. lights up. Operating the stationary air con- With stationary air conditioning, the vehicle Note ditioning interior can be cooled, ventilated or heated 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles. ● Noises will be heard while the auxiliary while the vehicle is parked. It can also be heater is running. used to demist and remove ice or a thin layer Operation of the stationary air condition- ● When the air humidity is high and the in- of snow from the windscreen. The stationary ing when the charging connector is not side temperature low, condensation from air conditioning is powered by the vehicle’s plugged in the heating and ventilating system may electrical socket or high-voltage battery. evaporate when the auxiliary heater is The stationary air conditioning can operate Stationary air conditioning can be program- switched on. In this case, steam may be re- when the charging connector is not plugged leased from underneath the vehicle. This med and controlled in the Infotainment sys- in When the charging connector is not plug- does not mean that there is a vehicle mal- tem in the Battery Manager menu, through ged in, the stationary air conditioning oper- function. the CUPRA CONNECT mobile App and on ates with the high-voltage battery. the MyCUPRA website. ● If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on a ● Open the Battery Manager menu. slope, the operation of the auxiliary heater CAUTION may be restricted if the fuel tank level is low ● Select the settings menu. (just above the reserve level). Food, medicines and other objects sensi- ● Turn on the Enable High-Voltage Battery ● If the auxiliary heater is used a number of tive to heat and cold may be damaged or Power function if necessary. times for a long period of time, the 12-volt spoiled by the air coming out of the vent. battery will lose its charge. To recharge the ● Never place food, medicines or other The stationary air conditioning only works if battery, the vehicle must be driven for a temperature-sensitive objects close to the the high voltage battery is sufficiently charg- number of kilometres from time to time. As air vents. ed. a guideline: the journey should last approximately as long as the heater was connec- Setting the desired temperature Note ted. ● The desired temperature for the stationary Operating the stationary air conditioning ● At temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the air conditioning is selected in the Battery while the charging cable is not connected auxiliary heater may switch itself on auto- Manager Infotainment system menu using  reduces the vehicle’s range. In the case of matically when the engine is switched on. or . » The auxiliary heater is switched off again extreme outside temperatures, the station- after a certain time. ary air conditioning may not have sufficient 159 Operation

Switching on the stationary air condition- ● Automatically if the charge level of the ve- Vehicle air conditioning prior to departure ing hicle's high-voltage battery drops excessive- ● Open the Battery Manager menu. ly. It can be switched on in the following ways: ● Set the scheduled departure time. ● Press the immediate on/off button in the Note ● Turn on the air conditioning and charging functions as needed. mobile App or on the MyCUPRA website. ● Operating noises are heard while the sta- ● Press the immediate on icon  in the Info- tionary air conditioning is connected. If the two air conditioning and charging tainment system (while the vehicle is switch- ● When the outside humidity is high and functions are on at the same time, the high- ed off). During immediate air conditioning, the inside temperature low, condensation voltage battery is charged first and then the the vehicle reaches the set temperature in a from the air conditioning system may evap- vehicle is air conditioned. The departure maximum of 30 minutes. orate when the stationary air conditioning time can only be enabled when one of the ● Automatically programming a departure is running. In this case, steam may be re- two functions has been enabled. leased from underneath the vehicle. This time in the mobile App, on the MyCUPRA does not mean that there is a vehicle mal- If the charging connector is plugged in, the website, or in the Battery Manager menu of function. vehicle starts cooling down around 30 mi- the Infotainment system page 160 . ››› nutes before the scheduled departure time. If the vehicle is not ready to drive at the Switching off the stationary air condition- scheduled departure time, it will be cooled ing Setting the stationary air condi- for a further 15 minutes. In can be switched off in the following ways: tioning If the charging connector is not plugged in, 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles. ● Press the immediate on/off button in the the air conditioning operating time is re- mobile App or on the MyCUPRA website. The stationary air conditioning can be set in duced to 10 minutes. The operating time is extended by 5 minutes if the vehicle is not ● Press the immediate on/off icon  in the the Infotainment system for the scheduled ready to drive. infotainment system (while the vehicle is departure time. You can set the desired tem- switched off). It is only possible to switch it perature of the inside of the vehicle for the The stationary air conditioning switches off off if the stationary air conditioning was vehicle’s planned departure time. automatically. switched on using this button. Based on the desired temperature, the vehi- ● Press the air conditioning off button in the cle calculates the time that the stationary air Extended stationary air conditioning air conditioning menu of the infotainment conditioning needs to be switched on to In the Battery Manager menu can be found system (while the vehicle is off). reach the desired temperature at the depar- an option to add extended air conditioning. ● Automatically, a few minutes after the ture time. This means if the vehicle is air conditioned scheduled departure time. (either by being switched on immediately or due to departure scheduling), the 160 Air conditioning convenience consumers, e.g. seat or rear Vehicle air conditioning when the vehicle window heating may switch on automatically is unlocked (with the opening of a door) if considered necessary by the Climatronic ● Open the Battery Manager menu. (in cold conditions) before the departure ● time. Select settings. ● Enable the When unlocking the vehicle Comfort consumers depend on features. function. ● Open the Battery Manager menu. The vehicle’s air conditioning will switch on ● Tap on the icons of the seats whose con- as soon as it is unlocked. venience consumers should be switched on in addition to the stationary air conditioning. Checking the schedule The driver's seat icon always stays activated When the ignition is switched off, the next by default (the driver's seat icon includes the activated time and the configured functions comfort consumers of seat heating and are displayed in the Infotainment system. steering wheel heating). ● To turn on the rear window heating before the departure time, switch on the Automatic rear window heating function.

The maximum waiting time for comfort consumers is approximately 10 minutes before the departure time.

Immediate activation of the rear window heating The rear window heating can be switched on/off using the CUPRA CONNECT mobile app or the MyCUPRA website, regardless of whether or not the stationary air conditioning is switched on.

161 Infotainment system Infotainment system Current documentation attached Radio stations and owners of data media and For using infotainment and its components, audio sources are responsible for the infor- take into account, together with this instruc- mation they transmit. Introduction tion manual, the following documentation: Bear in mind that parking lots, tunnels, tall buildings, mountains or due to the operation ● Supplements to your vehicle’s on-board of other electrical devices, such as chargers, First steps documentation. can also interfere with the reception of the ● Instruction Manual of the mobile phone radio signal. Introduction device or audio sources. Foils or adhesives with metallic layers on the ● Operating instructions for data media and Infotainment functions and settings depend antenna and on the window panes can inter- external players. on the country and equipment fere with radio reception. ● Manuals for the Infotainment accessories Before first use subsequently installed or used additionally. WARNING Before the first use, bear in mind the follow- ● Description of services when running CU- The infotainment central computer is in- ing points, to take full advantage of the func- PRA CONNECT services. terconnected with the control units moun- tions and settings offered: ted on the vehicle. Therefore, there is a serious danger of accident and injury if the ● Observe the basic safety warnings Safety instructions central computer is repaired or disassem- ››› page 162. bled and reassembled incorrectly. ● Reset the Infotainment factory settings. Some function areas may include links to ● Never replace the central computer with another used, recycled or from another ve- ● third-party websites. CUPRA is not the owner Search and store favourite radio stations on hicle at the end of its useful life. the preset buttons so you can tune them of the third-party websites accessible ● The repair or disassembly and reassembly quickly. through the links, and assumes no liability for their content. of the central computer should only be car- ● Use only suitable audio sources and data ried out at specialised workshops. To do so, media. Some function areas may include outside in- CUPRA recommends going to a specialised formation from third-party providers. CUPRA ● Pair a mobile phone to use phone man- CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership. is not responsible for such information being agement through the Infotainment system. correct, up-to-date or complete, or for en- WARNING ● Use current maps for navigation. suring it does not infringe the rights of third ● Register in CUPRA CONNECT to run the parties. The factory assembled radio with integra- corresponding services. ted software is interconnected with the control units mounted on the vehicle.

162 Introduction

Therefore, there is a serious danger of acci- at all times (e.g. emergency services si- vice is connected to the telephone inter- dent and injury if the radio is repaired or rens). face of the vehicle, inside it there is an “un- disassembled and reassembled incorrectly. ● Hearing may be impaired if using too high locked” SIM card with sufficient balance to ● Never replace the radio with another ra- a volume setting, even if only for short peri- make calls and with sufficient network sig- dio that is used, recycled or from another ods of time. nal coverage. vehicle at the end of its useful life. ● The repair or disassembly and reassembly WARNING WARNING of the radio should only be carried out at Read and observe the operating instruc- specialised workshops. To do so, CUPRA The following circumstances may result in an emergency call, phone call or data tions provided by the manufacturer in recommends going to a specialised CUPRA question when using mobile phone devices, dealer or any SEAT dealership. transmission not being made or being interrupted: data media, external devices, external audio and multimedia sources. ● When in areas with zero or insufficient WARNING mobile telephony or GPS signal. Also in Any distraction affecting the driver in any tunnels, confined areas between very tall WARNING way can lead to an accident and cause inju- buildings, garages, underpasses, mountains Position the connection cables of the audio ries. Reading the information on the screen and valleys. sources and external devices so that they and managing the infotainment system can ● When in areas with sufficient mobile do not interfere with the driver. distract your attention from traffic and phone or GPS signal, the telephony net- cause an accident. work of the telecommunications provider WARNING ● Always drive as carefully and responsibly has interference or is not available. as possible. ● When the vehicle components necessary When changing or connecting an audio or to make emergency calls, phone calls and multimedia source may cause sudden changes in the volume. WARNING to transmit data are damaged, do not work or do not have sufficient electrical power. ● Lower the volume before connecting or Connecting, inserting or removing an audio switching to audio or multimedia sources. source or data media while driving can dis- ● When the battery of the mobile phone tract your attention from the traffic and device is discharged or its charge level is in- cause an accident. sufficient. WARNING If mobile phone and radiocommunication WARNING WARNING devices are used without connection to an In some countries and some telephone external antenna, the maximum electro- Select volume settings that allow you to magnetic radiation levels inside the vehicle easily hear signals from outside the vehicle networks it is only possible to make an emergency call, if a mobile telephone de- might be surpassed, thus posing a risk to the health of the driver and passengers. » 163 Infotainment system

This is also the case if the external antenna WARNING ● When the speakers and the vehicle com- has not been correctly installed. ponents necessary for radio reception are The centre armrest may obstruct the driv- damaged, do not work or do not have suffi- ● Keep a distance of at least 20 centime- er's arm movements, which could cause an cient electrical power. tres between the antennas of the mobile accident and severe injuries. phone device and an active medical device, ● When the infotainment is switched off. ● Keep the storage compartments of the such as a pacemaker, as mobile phones centre armrest closed at all times while the might alter the functioning of these devi- vehicle is in motion. WARNING ces. ● Do not carry a mobile phone switched on Switch off mobile phone devices in areas very close or directly on top of an active WARNING with a risk of explosion! medical device, for instance in a chest If the light conditions are not good and the pocket. screen is damaged or dirty, the indications WARNING and information displayed on the screen ● Immediately turn off the mobile phone if The driving recommendations and traffic may not be read or be read incorrectly. you suspect it is causing interferences in an indications shown on the navigation system active medical device or any other medical ● The indications and information dis- may differ from the current traffic situa- device. played on the screen should never induce tion. to take any risk that compromises safety. ● Traffic signs, signalling systems, traffic The screen is not a replacement for driver WARNING regulations and local circumstances prevail awareness. Mobile phones, external devices and acces- over driving recommendations and naviga- sories that are loose or not properly se- tion system indications. cured could move around the passenger WARNING ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit compartment during a sudden driving or Radio stations can transmit disaster or haz- visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- braking manoeuvre or an accident and ard announcements. The following conditions. cause damage or injury. tions prevent such notices from being re- ● Certain circumstances can significantly ● Set mobile phone devices, external devi- ceived or issued: initially planned lengthen both the dura- ces and their accessories outside the air- ● When in areas with zero or insufficient ration of the trip and the route to the desti- bag deployment areas or store them se- dio signal. Also in tunnels, confined areas nation, or even temporarily prevent naviga- curely. between very tall buildings, garages, under- tion to it, for example, if a road is closed to passes, mountains and valleys. traffic. ● When the frequency bands of the radio station have interference or are not availa- Note ble in areas with sufficient radio signal re- In areas where special regulations apply or ception. the use of mobile phones is forbidden, the 164 Introduction mobile device in question must be switched off at all times. The radiation produced by a mobile phone device when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment.

Note If the playback volume is excessive or distorted, the speakers may be damaged.

165 Infotainment system

Overview and controls

Connect System

Fig. 133 Overview: control unit

1 Touch screen. The infotainment func- 5 Touch zones (to raise and lower the air tions can be used through the screen. conditioning temperature). 2 HOME button. 6 Touch zones (to raise and lower the vol- : main menu with widget views. ume). : main menu in mosaic mode. 3 Direct access button to the assist systems and vehicle settings. 4 Touch zone (to turn the infotainment system on or off). 166 Introduction

General instructions for use ● If a function button is missing on the ● In some countries, the infotainment sys- screen, it is not a device defect, but corre- tem automatically shuts off when the engine sponds to the specific equipment of the is switched off and the vehicle's 12-volt bat- Operating indications country or version. tery charge level is low.

● The infotainment needs a few seconds for ● Some infotainment functions can only be ● On vehicles with park assist, the audio the complete start-up of the system and selected when the vehicle is at a standstill. In source volume is automatically lowered during that time it does not react to inputs. some countries the parking lock must also when reverse gear is selected. The volume Only the image of the rear view camera sys- be enabled (button P ) or the selector con- reduction can be adjusted. tem can be displayed during system start-up. trol must be in the neutral position N. This is ● Information about the included software not a malfunction, but is due to compliance ● The display of all indications and the exe- and the license conditions can be found in with legislation. cution of functions only takes place once the Settings > Copyright. infotainment system has finished booting. ● Restrictions on the use of devices using ● When selling or lending the vehicle, make The duration of the system booting depends Bluetooth® technology may apply in some sure that all saved data, files and settings on the number of infotainment functions countries. For further information, contact have been deleted and, if necessary, exter- and may take longer than normal in the the local authorities. nal audio sources and data media have been event of very high or very low temperatures. ● If you disconnect the 12-volt battery, turn removed. ● When using the infotainment system and on the ignition before restarting the infotain- corresponding accessories, e.g., head- ment system. Note phones, bear in mind country-specific regu- ● If the setup is changed, this may change You will find more information and tips for lations and legal provisions. the display on the screen and in some cases, using the infotainment system in the Help ● Some functions of the infotainment system the infotainment system may behave in a menu. require an active CUPRA CONNECT user ac- manner different to that described in this in- count and an Internet connection for the ve- struction manual. hicle. The data transmission must not be ● Ensure that any repairs or modifications HOME screen limited to perform the functions. that need to be carried out on the infotain- ● To use the infotainment system, simply ment system are carried out by a specialised In the control and display unit you can set up lightly press a button or touch the screen. workshop. To do so, CUPRA recommends the views and representation on the home going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any screen or use the factory setting templates. ● For the correct operation of the infotain- SEAT dealership. ment system it is important that it is switched If an icon is missing on the screen, it is not a on and that, if necessary, the time and date ● Using a mobile phone device inside the ve- device defect, but corresponds to the spe- of the vehicle are set correctly. hicle may cause noise in the speakers. cific equipment of the country or version. »

167 Infotainment system

The following menus can be included as an Managing the infotainment sys- Moving objects and adjusting volume icon on the home screen: tem Move objects on the screen to adapt settings, for example, with scrollable buttons or Main menus on the home screen Execute the functions and settings with the to move the areas of a menu. Navigation ››› page 193 infotainment controls.  Depending on the equipment, customise  Radio ››› page 186 , Multimedia Depending on the equipment, the infotain- menus and views. ››› page 190 ment system has different controls: Increasing and reducing images or map Telephone ››› page 200 ● Touch screen.  sizes ● Touch zones outside the screen, for exam- Full Link page 178  ››› ple, Volume (+ -). Tip: use your thumb and index finger. ● Press on the map with both fingers at the Setup ››› page 169  Help Menu same time and leave them on the screen.  Vehicle ››› page 89 This menu displays information on the oper- ● To enlarge views, slowly separate one fin- ation of the infotainment system and gives ger from the other. To reduce views, slowly  Data ››› page 88 practical tips. bring one finger towards the other.  Air conditioning ››› page 147 ● Press  Help. Note If you turn on the infotainment system Sound Connecting and disconnecting the info-  manually with the ignition off, it will auto- tainment system matically turn off after about 30 minutes. Users  The infotainment system turns on when the  Store ignition is switched on, unless it has been manually turned off beforehand. Customising the infotainment  Legal The infotainment system starts-up with the system last set volume, provided that this does not Help  exceed the preset maximum start-up vol- Customise the menus and infotainment ume. views to quickly access your favourite or most frequently used functions. The infotainment system automatically turns off when the driver's door is opened, provi- The main menu contains function buttons ded the ignition has been switched off be- for accessing all of the Infotainment apps. forehand. 168 Introduction

Configuring customised menus ● You can add a maximum of two more cus- Symbol and its meaning In all views (except Main Menu, StandBy, tomised menus (in total, a maximum of four The setting is not selected, disabled or Parking, Speller and Full Link), you will find customised menus).  /  disconnected. shortcuts to customizable system functions ● For some function buttons, more func- in the lower part of the screen. Use the set- tions are available than those seen at first  To open a drop-down list. tings to delete or replace them, or change sight in the additional window. To find all their order. the functions, in the additional window  To increase a setting value. slide the screen to the left or right. To increase a setting value. ● Press and hold one of the icons (or press  ● For the drop-down menu, more functions on the icon of an empty position) to display are available than those seen at first sight in  To go back step by step. an additional window. the additional window. To find all the func- To go forward step by step. ● Select one of the icons from the apps bar. tions, in the additional window slide the  screen to the left or right. ● Press  to delete an icon. To change a setting value with the scrol- ● The shortcut bar cannot be edited when  lable button without adjusting. ● Click on an icon in the additional window the vehicle is moving. to replace the value. Sound settings ● Hold your finger on one of the icons and drag it to the desired position. Accessing the sound settings: press  Settings (system and sound) Sound ● To close the edit mode, press  in the additional window. The selection of possible settings varies de- In the sound settings there may be the fol- pending on the country, the equipment in lowing functions, information and setting Adapting customised menus question and the equipment of the vehicle. options: ● Press a function button in a customised ● Equaliser. menu and keep your finger on the screen Modifying settings ● Position. until an additional window is displayed. The meaning of the following symbols are ● Settings. ● Press the function button to which you valid for all system and sound settings. want to add a function. All changes are automatically applied when System settings ● Click close to return to the custom menu. the menus are closed. Accessing the system settings: press  Set- tings. » Note Symbol and its meaning ● At least two customised menus are always The setting is selected and activated or available. These cannot be deleted.  /  connected. 169 Infotainment system

In the system settings there may be the fol- If the sound from the connected external Trademarks, licenses and copy- lowing functions, information and setting audio source is too loud or distorted, lower rights options: the output volume on the external audio source. If this is not enough, change the in- Registered trademarks and licenses ● Screen. put volume to medium or low. ● Time and date. Certain terms in this manual bear the symbol ® or ™. These symbols indicate that it is a ● Language. trademark or a registered trademark. The ● Additional keypad languages. Clean the screen absence of this symbol, however, does not necessarily mean that the term in question ● Units. Remove persistent dirt carefully and without can be used freely. ● Voice control. using aggressive cleaning products. To clean ● Wi-Fi. the screen we recommend that: Other product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of the respective rights ● Data connection. ● The infotainment system is switched off. holders. ● Manage mobile devices. ● Use a clean, soft cloth dampened with wa- ● Manufactured under license from Dolby ● Reset factory settings. ter ››› page 353 . Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym- ● System information. ● In case of persistent dirt: soften the dirt by bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. moistening with a little water. Then carefully ● Copyright. ● remove with a clean, soft cloth. Manufactured under license from Dolby ● Configuration wizard. Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym- CAUTION bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Adjust the volume of external audio sour- ● Android Auto™ is a trademark of Google Cleaning the screen with inappropriate ces cleaning products or when dry, may dam- Inc. If you need to increase the playback volume age it. ● Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of Apple for the external audio source, first lower the ● When cleaning, only press lightly. Inc. volume on the infotainment system. ● Do not use aggressive cleaning products ● Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of If the sound from the connected audio or that contain solvents. Such products Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.iPod®, iPad® and source is very low, increase the output vol- may damage the equipment and “darken” iPhone® are trademarks of Apple Inc. ume on the external audio source. If this is the screen. ● MirrorLink™ and MirrorLink Logo are certi- not enough, change the input volume to fied trademarks of Car Connectivity Consor- medium or high. tium LLC.

170 Introduction

● Windows® is a registered trademark of Mi- The corresponding indications are shown on ■ 7 speakers: 5 frequency bands or pre- crosoft Corporation, Redmond, USA. the control and display unit screen and partly defined settings. ● MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technology on the instrument panel. ■ Sound distribution, depending on the and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS. ■ Capacitive colour screen: system: ● This product is protected by certain Micro- ■ Using the equipment with: ■ 7 speakers: Balance + Fader (left / right / front / rear). soft Corporation industrial and intellectual ■ Touch zones Touch operation. property rights. The use or commercializa- ■ Sound optimisation by zones (valid for ■ Buttons on the multifunction steering tion of technology of this type outside the the 7 speaker system): wheel. configuration of this product, without a li- ■ Manual (Driver and All) ■ Proximity sensors and gesture control. cence from Microsoft or an authorised Mi- ■ Automatic depending on the seats oc- crosoft branch is prohibited. Vehicle and comfort functions cupied. ■ Copyright Driver assistance system settings. Optional sound system ■ Heating and air conditioning settings. As a general rule, audio and video files stored The infotainment system can be extended ■ on data media and audio sources are subject Lights and visibility function settings. with an optional sound system as follows: to intellectual property protection in accord- ■ Vehicle comfort settings. ■ 10 speakers in different locations and with ance with the national and international pro- ■ Parking and manoeuvring settings. visions applicable in each case. Please bear different power levels (watts). in mind all legal provisions! ■ External amplifier (340 W Ethernet), which processes the audio signals sent by the Sound system central computer. ■ Excitation of speaker channels through Technical data Basic equipment: class AB final stages. Central computer with control and display The infotainment system that is supplied ■ Audio signal processing in digital internal unit from the factory is equipped as follows: signal processor (DSP). ■ The factory-mounted central computer in Speakers in different locations and with ■ Independent subwoofer in the luggage the vehicle includes country-specific com- different power levels (watts). compartment. ponents and software for connectivity and ■ Internal amplifier depending on the sys- ■ Setting options: for the execution of vehicle, comfort and in- tem: ■ User equaliser: 5 bands. ■ fotainment functions. 7 speakers: 5 x 20 W ■ Equaliser settings predefined by BEATS® ■ Setting options: (Signature, Active, Immersive and Voice). » ■ Equaliser, depending on the system:

171 Infotainment system

■ Sound distribution: Balance + Fader Bluetooth® profiles (left / right / front / rear). There can be a maximum of two mobile de- ■ Sound optimisation by zones: vices connected to the Bluetooth® hands- ■ Manual (Driver, Front and All) free and a third device connected to the ■ Automatic depending on the seats oc- Bluetooth® as a music player. cupied. When a mobile phone is connected to the ■ Subwoofer volume. telephone management system, a data ex- ■ Surround settings. change takes place via one of the Blue- tooth® profiles.

● Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): the Connectivity HFP can be used to manage calls through the infotainment system. Wi-Fi ● Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows ■ Wi-Fi conforming to IEEE 802.11 b/g/n audio to be transmitted with stereo quality. It ■ 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz transfer (depending on may require connecting other profiles for the country) managing and controlling playback. ■ Two Wi-Fi modes at the same time: ● Phone book access profile (PBAP): Al- ■ Tethering. lows phone book contents to be downloa- ■ Access point. ded from the mobile telephone. ■ Simultaneous connection of up to 8 Wi-Fi ● Message profile (MAP): It allows short devices. messages (SMS) and emails to be downloa- ■ Internet connection via Wi-Fi: ded and synchronised. ■ Tethering through the customer's phone. ■ Access point for customers in the vehicle. ■ Apple CarPlay and Android Auto over Wi- Fi. ■ Pairing process simplified by WPS or QR code.

172 Data transfer

Data transfer CUPRA CONNECT's voice recognition or ● Malicious software on data storage devi- search technology does not recognise or of- ces, computers, tablets or mobile phones. fer results for all words. CUPRA CONNECT There are CUPRA CONNECT services for which registration is mandatory and others Services portfolio Introduction for which it is not mandatory. The initial service allocation shown here cor- To use it, CUPRA CONNECT must first be ac- Description of services responds to the third generation of CUPRA tivated online by entering into a CUPRA CONNECT services and represents the maxi- CONNECT contract with SEAT, S.A. and is Before running CUPRA CONNECT services, read and take into account the description of mum services portfolio. The maximum pos- subject to a temporary use limitation de- sible portfolio is only available on some vehi- pending on the country. the corresponding services. Descriptions are updated from time to time and are available cle models. During the useful life of the vehi- Both the CUPRA CONNECT service portfo- online at myCUPRA.com. cle, you can change the assignment shown lios offered by CUPRA and individual services here. ● Always use the most up-to-date version of can be modified, cancelled, deactivated, re- After activating the services management in the corresponding service description. activated, renamed and extended, even the infotainment system you can check if the without prior notification. vehicle has services and what they are. WARNING You can create the user account, see the de- In some countries and in the event of a con- In areas with insufficient mobile phone and scription of services and more information at tract renewal, the services offered may be myCUPRA.com. GPS coverage, neither emergency calls or phone calls can be made, and data cannot combined differently than indicated here. The execution and availability of the CUPRA be transmitted. Change location if possible. They may also vary depending on the year of CONNECT services and service portfolios production of the vehicle. The aforemen- may vary depending on the country, as well tioned services correspond to the third gen- CAUTION as the vehicle, its equipment and connectivi- eration of CUPRA CONNECT. ty. The vehicle may be damaged by factors outside CUPRA’s control. These may be CUPRA CONNECT services and functions Connectivity statuses specifically: that do not require activation ● Misuse of mobile terminals  (white) Full connectivity, all services active The following services also work without ac- ● Data loss during transmission. tivating CUPRA CONNECT: Limited connectivity, some services ● Unsuitable or defective third party appli-  (grey) may not be available. ● Public emergency call service. cations. no icon No connectivity, no services available. ● Privacy mode ››› page 177 . » 173 Infotainment system

● Legal. ● Online map update ● Departure times ● Customisation. ● Search for points of interest ● plus all CUPRA CONNECT services in the ● Activating CUPRA CONNECT. ● Petrol stations previous section ››› page 174 . ● Private mode (deactivation of services). ● Online traffic information CUPRA CONNECT individual options ● Delete user / Restore factory settings. ● Parking lots ● In-Car Applications. These applications ● Online infotainment system update can be purchased and installed directly in CUPRA CONNECT services ● Online route calculation the infotainment system through the In-Car The CUPRA CONNECT services are: ● Information on risks store. ● Private emergency call ● ● Dictation Full Link. ● Public emergency call ● ● Natural voice control for infotainment, me- Data package. Pay per use data rates for ● Roadside assistance call dia and radio apps the use of online functions, for example, 2 GB per month. ● Customer support ● Natural voice control for destinations and ● Service appointment planning addresses Note ● Online radio ● Online system update ● The public emergency call service is ● Customisation ● Online media available regardless of whether the infotainment system is logged in. ● Activating CUPRA CONNECT ● Online route import ● Customisation and purchase of In-Car ● Private mode (deactivation of services) ● Online destination import applications requires logging into the info- ● Delete user / Reset factory settings ● Remote auxiliary ventilation tainment system, but it is not necessary to ● Remote independent heating ● Parking position activate the vehicle in a CUPRA CONNECT account. ● Remote opening ● Privacy mode ● Horn and turn signals ● Legal ● Vehicle status incl. doors and lights CUPRA CONNECT services for hybrid vehi- Activating CUPRA CONNECT and ● Driving data cles S-PIN ● Vehicle status report Available only in electric and hybrid vehicles. Activating CUPRA CONNECT ● Anti-theft alarm warning ● Remote air conditioning The following steps are necessary to activate ● Zone warning ● Electrical power manager CUPRA CONNECT (including registration): ● Speed warning 174 Data transfer

● Create a user account at myCUPRA.com or S-PIN ● Switch on the ignition and the infotainment directly through the infotainment system in The S-PIN is a sequence of several digits, system. the User Management menu. which can be selected when the CUPRA ● In the infotainment system, register in CU- ● Place the CUPRA CONNECT order and ac- CONNECT registration is completed. PRA CONNECT. tivate it. When creating the S-PIN, avoid easy-to- ● Or: open the menu  Users > Settings > ● Add the vehicle to your user account. guess number sequences and known dates Become primary user and follow the in- ● Prove ownership. of birth. You can change the S-PIN in the structions. ● Prove your identity. It is only necessary if CUPRA CONNECT user account in “Account ● Press the unlock button on the first vehicle you are to run CUPRA CONNECT services settings”. key. relevant to security. The S-PIN is necessary, for example, to pro- ● Press the unlock button on the second ve- ● You can activate it at myCUPRA or directly tect your user profile or to run a CUPRA hicle key. through the infotainment system. To activate CONNECT service relevant to the security of Once the infotainment system has pro- it through the infotainment system, proceed your vehicle. cessed the orders by radiofrequency, the ac- as follows:  Users > Settings > Become pri- You must manage this S-PIN with absolute creditation of the ownership will have been mary user. confidentiality. If you reveal the S-PIN to completed. You can control the current sta- third parties, for security reasons you must Follow the rest of the indications and the in- tus on the CUPRA CONNECT website. change it immediately. formation shown in the infotainment system. During activation, you may be asked to cre- How is ownership accredited? ate an S-PIN. Ownership and identity accredi- Infotainment 2-Key method. Update option tation CUPRA CONNECT web- No, it is not possible site Infotainment yes Become primary user CUPRA CONNECT ap- No, it is not possible CUPRA CONNECT website yes To become a main user and thus prove own- plication CUPRA CONNECT application yes ership of the vehicle, you need both of the vehicle’s physical keys. Ownership accredita- Identity accreditation (SEAT Ident) More information at myCUPRA.com/faqs tion takes place in the vehicle during regis- Identity accreditation must be completed tration or, if you already have a CUPRA CON- before you can use CUPRA CONNECT serv- NECT user account, you must log in through ices that are relevant to security, such as the » the infotainment system and then go to Manage users

175 Infotainment system

“Remote Opening” service. Identity accredi- Follow-up services: ask all occupants you can access in its corresponding current tation is done at the specialised CUPRA deal- The follow-up services need geographical version on the CUPRA website. er or any SEAT dealership. and vehicle data to determine whether the Permanent transfer of the vehicle You can find more information about SEAT vehicle is being used within defined speed Ident on the CUPRA CONNECT website at ranges, where it has been parked or if it is be- If another person has left you the vehicle for myCUPRA.com. ing used in an established geographical area. permanent use (for example, if you buy a This information is displayed on the CUPRA used vehicle), CUPRA CONNECT may al- CONNECT website and in the CUPRA CON- ready be activated and the previous user may Legal provisions NECT app. still be able to access the data registered through CUPRA CONNECT and control cer- Therefore, before moving off, ask all the ve- tain functions of your vehicle. When using CUPRA CONNECT services, in- hicle occupants if they agree with the activa- formation is transferred and processed on- ted services. If they do not, deactivate the In the infotainment system you can check if line through the vehicle. Such data can also service in question (if possible) or do not al- your vehicle is assigned to a person as the provide (at least indirectly) information low the occupants to use the vehicle. main user. In this case, you can register your- about the driver in question, for example, self as the main user of the vehicle and thus driving behaviour and location. As a con- GPS tracking: marking automatically delete the previous main user. tracting party in the CUPRA CONNECT con- If the vehicle has a factory-assembled con- Alternatively, through the infotainment sys- tract with SEAT, S.A., you must ensure that trol unit that transmits the its current geo- tem you can directly and permanently delete when your vehicle is used by other drivers graphical position and speed, the vehicle the previous user as the main user, as well as (for example, family or friends), data protec- usually has this GPS marking (e.g., on the put the vehicle in offline mode and thus limit tion and personal rights are respected. roof console). The absence of the marking both the communication of your vehicle with Therefore, you must inform drivers in ad- on the vehicle does not guarantee that the the SEAT, S.A. data server and the processing vance that the vehicle transfers and receives control unit does not transmit the vehicle’s of personal and vehicle data. data online, and that you can access such current geographical position and speed. data.

Not taking into account this obligation to in- Personal information Deactivating CUPRA CONNECT form, can infringe certain rights of the occu- CUPRA protects your personal data and only services pants. uses them, as long as the law allows it or you Users can manage data sending and trans- have given your consent on the occasion of The following functions are available in the fers through the privacy mode at any time. a use. You will find detailed information on infotainment system to deactivate and acti- For more information visit: data processing in relation to CUPRA CON- vate CUPRA CONNECT services: myCUPRA.com/faqs NECT services in the Privacy Policy, which ● Central deactivation or activation

176 Data transfer

● Individual deactivation or activation ● Interference, disturbance or interruption in Find out more information at: the reception of the mobile phone and GPS myCUPRA.com. You can rerun the corresponding services af- signal due to aspects such as high-speed ter cancelling their deactivation in the info- driving, solar storms, meteorological influen- Privacy and Services Settings tainment system. ces, topography, blocking equipment and CUPRA CONNECT services can be activated the intensive use of mobile phones in the ra- and deactivated individually. To do this, just Note dio cells in question. check the box corresponding to the service The services required by law and their data ● When in areas with zero or insufficient mo- you want to activate or deactivate. Use the transmission, such as the public emergency bile telephony or GPS signal. Also, for exam- privacy mode option if you want to deacti- call system, cannot be disconnected or de- ple, in tunnels, confined areas between very vate all of the services at the same time. activated. tall buildings, garages, underpasses, mountains and valleys. Privacy mode ● External information from third party sup- Faults Allows you to deactivate or activate the serv- plies available with limitations, incomplete or ices depending on the selected privacy level. incorrect, e.g. representations of maps. Even if the prerequisites for the use of CU- Share location. Main users and co- PRA CONNECT services are met, there may ● Countries and regions where CUPRA CON-  NECT is not offered. users can view position data on the CU- be factors beyond the control of CUPRA that Tracking PRA CONNECT portal or app. interfere with the execution of such services or prevent them. These may be specifically:  Use location. Position, vehicle, and Service management Location user data are used for services. ● Maintenance, repair, deactivation, software update and technical expansion of tele- Open the settings in Users and go to Privacy  No location. Only the vehicle data and communication equipment, satellites, serv- settings and services. You can do the fol- Personal user data are used for services. ers and data banks. lowing in the infotainment system: Maximum privacy. Your services are ● Change of the mobile telephony standard ● Check which CUPRA CONNECT services  disabled. Only services required for le- for the transmission of mobile data by the Incognito are currently available in the vehicle. gal reasons use data. telecommunications service provider, for example, from UMTS to EDGE or GPRS. ● The number of CUPRA CONNECT services Setting options are not available in all mar- that are activated or deactivated. ● Disconnection of an existing mobile phone kets or in all vehicle models. » standard by the telecommunications service ● Activate or deactivate CUPRA CONNECT provider. services.

177 Infotainment system

Note The availability of the technologies that Full ● Confirm authorisation inquiries on the mo- Link includes depends on the country and bile phone device to grant the necessary au- If you deactivate all CUPRA CONNECT serv- the mobile phone device used. thorisations to the infotainment system. ices, the OCU may continue to transmit data. You can find more information on the CU- ● Disconnect the USB connection and con- PRA website. nect with the infotainment system again via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®. Wireless Full Link is now Access the Full Link main menu configured. Full Link Browsing the Full Link main menu depends The pairing has concluded. The connected on the infotainment system used. mobile phone device can also use Wireless Introduction Full Link from now on without the USB con- ● Click on  Full Link. nection. With Full Link it is possible to view and use the contents and functions that are shown Configure Wireless Full Link If pop-up menus are rejected during the on the mobile phone device on the infotain- connection process, Wireless Full Link will In order to use Wireless Full Link, you must ment screen. not be available. In this case, CUPRA recom- first pair the mobile phone device with the mends removing the devices in both the tel- To do this, the mobile phone device must be infotainment system. To do this, proceed as ephone settings and the infotainment sys- connected with the infotainment system follows: tem, and restarting the connection process. through a USB interface. Connect a mobile phone device for the first Some technologies can also be used by time. WARNING Wireless Full Link through the Bluetooth® in- ● Unlock the mobile phone device. The use of applications while driving can terface and a Wi-Fi connection. distract your attention from the traffic. Any ● Enable Wi-Fi reception and Bluetooth® on distraction affecting the driver in any way The following technologies may be availa- the mobile phone device. can lead to an accident and cause injuries. ble: ● Connect the mobile phone device to the ● Always drive as carefully and responsibly ● Apple CarPlay™ infotainment system using a USB cable or via as possible. Bluetooth®. ● Apple CarPlay™ Wireless ● Access the Full Link main menu, unless it ● WARNING Android Auto™ appears automatically. ● Android Auto™ Wireless Any applications that are not suitable or ● Select the mobile phone device and the execute incorrectly may cause damage to ● MirrorLink® technology you want. the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.

178 Data transfer

● Protect the mobile phone device and its In the case of third-party applications, there Apple CarPlay™ applications from inappropriate use. may be compatibility problems. ● Never carry out modifications to the ap- Applications, their use and the necessary In order to use Apple CarPlay, the following plications. mobile phone connection may be pay per requirements must be met: ● Follow instructions in the instruction use. ● The iPhone™ must be compatible with Apple CarPlay™. manual for the mobile phone device. The offer of applications can be varied and designed for a vehicle or a specific country. ● Voice control (Siri ™) must be active on the CAUTION The content and volume of applications, as iPhone™. well as the companies that offer them, may ● CUPRA cannot be held liable for any dam- Apple CarPlay™ must be active without age caused to the vehicle as a result of the vary. Some applications also depend on the limitations in the iPhone™ settings. use of applications that are of poor quality availability of third-party services. ● The iPhone ™ must be connected to the or are defective, the inadequate program- It cannot be guaranteed that all the applica- infotainment system via a USB connection. ming of the applications, the insufficient tions offered will work on all mobile phone Only USB connections with data transmis- coverage of the network, the loss of data devices or with all their operating systems. sion are suitable for the use of Apple Car- during transmission or the improper use of Play™. mobile phone devices. The applications offered by CUPRA can be modified, cancelled, deactivated, reactiva- ● The USB cable used must be an original Apple™ cable. Note ted and extended without prior notification. ● Wireless Full Link may not be compatible To avoid distracting the driver while driving, Apple CarPlay™ Wireless: Bluetooth® and with all technologies. only certified applications can be used. Wi-Fi must also be activate on the iPhone™. ● Wireless Full Link (Android Auto ™ and Establish connection Apple CarPlay ™) is disabled in countries whose radio frequency regulations do not Full Link symbols and settings When you first connect an iPhone™, follow allow it to operate. the instructions on the infotainment system  To show more information screen and on the iPhone ™.  To open the Full Link settings menu The requirements must be met to use Apple Applications (apps)  To select Apple CarPlay technology. CarPlay™.  To select Android Auto™ technology. With Full Link, the display of the contents of Launch Apple CarPlay™:  To select Mirror Link® technology. CUPRA applications and other providers in- ● Press  Full Link to access the Full Link stalled on mobile phone devices can be main menu. » transferred to the infotainment screen.

179 Infotainment system

● Press Apple CarPlay™ to establish a con- ● Depending on the infotainment system Android Auto™ nection with the iPhone™. you use, on the instrument panel screen you can view data from the Telephone and Media Requirements for Android Auto™ mode. Disconnecting In order to use Android Auto™, the following ● In Apple CarPlay™ mode, press the CUPRA ● With the multifunction steering wheel you requirements must be met: can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as icon to access the Full Link main menu. ● The mobile phone device, called smart- end an ongoing telephone conversation. ● Press  to interrupt the active connection. phone from here on, has to be compatible with Android Auto™. The representation of function buttons on voice control ● The smartphone must have an Android the screen may vary. ●  Press briefly to start voice control using Auto™ application installed. the infotainment system. Special characteristics ● The smartphone has to be connected ● Press this button for a long time to start through the USB connection with data trans- During an active Apple CarPlay™ connec- voice control (Siri™) of the connected mission with the infotainment system. tion, the following characteristics are appli- iPhone™. cable: ● The USB cable used must be an original cable provided by the smartphone manufac- ● Bluetooth® connections between the Note turer. iPhone™ and the infotainment system are ● The availability of technologies depends not possible. on the country and may vary. Android Auto™ Wireless: Bluetooth® and ● If there is an active Bluetooth® connec- ● You will find information about technical Wi-Fi also have to be activated on the de- tion, it is automatically interrupted. requirements, compatible iPhones, certi- vice. ● The phone functions are only available fied applications and their availability on the CUPRA and Apple CarPlay ™ websites, through Apple CarPlay™. The functions de- Establish connection at specialised CUPRA dealers. scribed for the Infotainment system are not When you first connect a smartphone, follow available. the instructions on the infotainment system ● The connected iPhone™ cannot be used screen and on the smartphone. as a multimedia device in the Media main The requirements must be met to use An- menu. droid Auto™. ● It is not possible to use the built-in navigation system and the Apple CarPlay™ naviga- Launch Android Auto™: tion system at the same time. The last route ● Press  Full Link to access the Full link started interrupts the one that was previously main menu active. 180 Data transfer

● Press Android Auto™ to establish a con- ● On the instrument panel screen you can ● The mobile phone device must be connection with the smartphone. view data from the Telephone and Media nected to the infotainment system via a USB mode. connection that is suitable for data transmis- Disconnecting ● With the multifunction steering wheel you sion. ● In Android Auto™ mode, press the Ex- can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as ● The USB cable used must be an original it/SEAT icon to access the Full Link main end an ongoing telephone conversation. cable provided by the mobile phone device menu. manufacturer. ● Press  to interrupt the active connection. voice control ● Depending on the mobile phone device ● Press  briefly to start voice control using used, a Car-Mode application that is suitable Special characteristics the infotainment system. for using MirrorLink® must be installed. During an active Android Auto™ connection, ● Press and hold this button to start voice Establish connection the following characteristics are applicable: control (Google Assistant) on the connected smartphone. When you first connect a mobile phone de- ● An active Android Auto™ device can be vice, follow the instructions on the infotain- connected at the same time via Bluetooth® Note ment system screen and on the mobile (HFP profile) with the infotainment system. ● The availability of technologies depends phone device. ● It is possible to use the phone’s functions on the country and may vary. through Android Auto™. If the Android Au- The requirements must be met to use Mir- to™ device is connected at the same time via ● You will find information about technical rorLink™. Bluetooth® with the infotainment system, requirements, compatible mobile phone Launch MirrorLink®: the telephone function of the infotainment devices, certified applications and their availability on the CUPRA and Android Au- can also be used. ● Press  Full Link to access the Full Link to™ websites, at specialised CUPRA deal- main menu. ● An active Android Auto™ device cannot be ers. used as a multimedia device in the Media ● Press to establish the connection with the main menu. mobile phone device. ● It is not possible to use the built-in naviga- MirrorLink® Disconnecting tion system and the Android Auto™ naviga- ● In the MirrorLink® mode, press the APP tion system at the same time. The last route Requirements for MirrorLink® started interrupts the one that was previously icon to access the Full Link main menu. In order to use MirrorLink™, the following re- active. ● OR: press  to access the MirrorLink® quirements must be met: main menu. ● The mobile device must be compatible ● Press  to interrupt the active connection. » with MirrorLink™. 181 Infotainment system

Special characteristics all function button to close all the open Note applications. During an active MirrorLink® connection, the ● Data transmission may incur charges. following characteristics are applicable:  Press to display the mobile phone de- Due to the high volume of data exchanged, vice screen on the infotainment system ● An active MirrorLink® device can be con- CUPRA recommends the use of a flat rate screen. nected to the infotainment system at the tariff for data transmission. Mobile phone same time via Bluetooth®.  To open the MirrorLink® settings. operators can provide the relevant information. ● If the MirrorLink® device is connected to Press to return to the MirrorLink® main  ● The exchange of data packages may gen- the infotainment system via Bluetooth®, the menu. erate additional costs, depending on your telephone function of the infotainment sys- mobile phone rate, particularly if you are tem can be used. Note abroad (for example, roaming rates). ● You cannot use an active MirrorLink® de- You will find information about technical vice as a multimedia device in the Media requirements, compatible mobile phone main menu. devices, certified applications and their availability on the CUPRA and MirrorLink® Configuration for sharing a con- ● On the instrument panel screen you can websites, at specialised CUPRA dealers. nection over WLAN view data from the Telephone mode. ● The instrument panel screen does not dis- Establishing the connection with the wire- play any indication to turn or the Media less network (WLAN) mode. WLAN access point ● Press the  Settings button. ● With the multifunction steering wheel you ● Activate the wireless network. To do this, can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as Introduction press the function button Wi-Fi > Infotain- end an ongoing telephone conversation. 3 Not available on vehicles without CUPRA ment system as hotspot. CONNECT and without navigation Function buttons ● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on The infotainment system can be used to the device that is to be connected. If neces- Function buttons and their function: share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi- sary, refer to the manufacturer’s instruction APP Return the Full Link main menu. Here ces ››› page 182, Configuration for sharing manual. you can end the MirrorLink® connec- a connection over WLAN. ● Activate the mobile device assignment in tion, connect another mobile phone the infotainment system. To do this, press The infotainment system can also use the device or select another technology. the function button Enable as hotspot and WLAN hotspot of an external device to pro-  check the checkbox. Press to close the open apps. Then vide Internet to the devices connected to press the apps to be closed or the Close the hotspot (WLAN client) ››› page 183 . ● Enter and confirm the network key displayed on the device. 182 Data transfer

The following adjustments can also be made Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) Establishing the connection with the wire- in the Infotainment system as hotspot less network (WLAN) 3 This depends on the equipment and the menu: country in question. ● Activate and check the wireless hotspot on ● Security level: WPA2 encryption automat- the external device. If necessary, refer to the Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to create ically generates a network key. manufacturer’s instruction manual. a ciphered local wireless network quickly and ● Press the  Settings button; OR access ● Network key: Network key automatically simply. generated. Press the function button to the Media and press the Settings menu. manually change the network key. The net- ● Establish the connection with the wireless ● Press the Wi-Fi > Connect to Wi-Fi menu work key must have a minimum of 8 charac- network (WLAN). and put a check in the checkbox. ters and a maximum of 63. ● Press the WPS button on the WLAN router ● Press the Search for Wi-Fi button and se- ● SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of until the warning light on the router starts lect the device you want from the list. 32 characters). flashing. If the WLAN router does not sup- ● If necessary, enter the network key of the port WPS the network must be configured device in the infotainment system and con- The wireless (WLAN) connection is estab- manually. firm with OK. lished. To complete the connection, it may ● OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on be necessary to enter other data into the de- the WLAN router until the WLAN light on the Manual settings: vice. router starts flashing. ● To manually enter the network settings of Repeat this process to connect other devi- ● Press the WPS button on the WLAN de- an external (WLAN) device. ces. vice. The wireless (WLAN) connection is es- The wireless (WLAN) connection is estab- tablished. There is also the option of scanning the QR lished. To complete the connection, it may code by connecting the device directly to Repeat this process to connect other devi- be necessary to enter other data into the de- the infotainment system’s Wi-Fi network ces. vice. without having to enter the password: select Settings > Wi-Fi > Quick connection to in- Note fotainment system. Configure Internet access Due to the large number of devices on the market, it is not possible to guarantee fault- The infotainment system can use the WLAN free operation of all functions. hotspot of an external device to establish an Internet connection.

183 Infotainment system

Infotainment operation Requirements Connect and disconnect the wake word ● Online and offline: voice control with the ● Press  Settings > Voice control > Acti- corresponding infotainment installed in the vate/deactivate wake word. voice control vehicle. ● Online current active CUPRA CONNECT Wake word: Hola Hola Introduction Plus contract. Commands Voice control works both online and offline. Note In online mode, commands are recorded For voice control to recognise commands ● more accurately, as more data is available. Voice control only recognises commands reliably, bear in mind the following tips for in the language that is set in the infotain- the commands to work properly: Voice control understands questions and ex- ment system. ● pressions without having to learn com- ● Test the voice control with the vehicle Pronounce clearly. Confusing commands mands. Commands can be formulated freely stopped before starting to move to familiar- are not recognised. Speak in a normal tone and can be colloquial. You will find proposals ise yourself with its operation. of voice. Speak a little louder if you are driv- for commands in the infotainment system. ing at high speed. ● Additional information and examples can Functions are reduced in offline mode. be found in the menu Home > Help > Voice ● Avoid outside noises. Open windows and control doors can interfere with voice control. Loud noises inside or outside the vehicle can ● Avoid other secondary noises, such as cause malfunctions, as well as confusing conversations in the vehicle. Do not direct phrases and answers. Wake word and commands the air flow from the outlets towards the microphone or the interior lining of the roof. Languages available depending on the market Voice control wake words ● Do not use a very strong accent or dialec- tal. Online and offline: German, American Eng- If you have connected the voice control via lish, British English, French, Italian, Spanish the wake word, the connected infotainment ● Do not make long pauses. and Czech. These languages have advanced responds with How can I help you?. It then functions such as Online Commands, air scans the words spoken in the vehicle after Voice control is active and recognises the  words pronounced. conditioning control,natural interaction, etc. the wake word. Voice control starts when the infotainment The other languages of the infotainment sys- Note tem do not offer Online Commands, air con- recognises the wake word. ● ditioning control or natural interaction. When the activation word is disconnected, the infotainment system cannot be activated by means of the activation word.

184 Infotainment operation

Voice control is still available via the  but- Start voice control Manually ending voice control ton on the multifunction steering wheel. ● Voice control activation: say the word that Voice control can be cancelled with the ● Availability depends on the country and activates voice control. Cancel command. equipment. ● Multifunction steering wheel: press the ● Multifunction steering wheel: press the ● Depending on the content of the phone voice control button . voice control button  twice in a row, or a book and to ensure reliable recognition of long press. the names of the phone book, it may be The voice control ends automatically, if you useful to change the order of the first and use infotainment functions, if the parking last name of the contact in question. system is activated or by incoming calls. In some cases you can also start voice control of the connected mobile phone device, Start and stop voice control by pressing and holding the voice control button. Depending on the equipment, you can start voice control in different ways.

185 Infotainment system

Radio mode

Introduction

Fig. 134 Schematic representation: Radio view

In Radio mode you can tune in the available Access the settings ● You have a corresponding data package radio stations in different frequency bands ● Press  > . acquired from the In-Car store or have a data and memorise your favourites on the preset volume for your own mobile phone device buttons to access them quickly. Online functions in Radio mode via Wi-Fi access point. The types of reception and frequency bands Online functions in Radio mode are only Note available depend on the equipment and the available under the following conditions: country. In certain countries, frequency ● For streaming services you need to have bands may stop broadcasting or not be avail- ● CUPRA CONNECT or CUPRA CONNECT an account with the provider in question. able again. Plus equipment. ● Radio stations are responsible for the ● You have an active CUPRA CONNECT user content of the information they transmit. Access the RADIO menu account. Additional electrical equipment connected to the vehicle can cause interference in the ● Press  >  Fig. 134 . ● Add the vehicle is assigned to your user ac- ››› reception of the radio signal and noise in count. the speakers.

186 Infotainment operation

● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to TP Next to the name of the station, moni-  Show online radio stations whose pro- the windows may affect reception on vehi- toring of active traffic information sta- gramme belongs to the desired musical cles with a window aerial. tions (TP). genre.

Symbols on the FM/DAB frequency band Radio equipment and symbols  To display the frequency band for man- Selecting, tuning and saving a ual selection of the FM frequency. Only station The functions, as well as the types of recep- possible when the summary station list tion and frequency bands available depend is disconnected. Select the frequency band on the equipment and the country.  DAB not available. Before selecting a station you have to select a frequency band or a type of reception. Dif- ● AM tuner.  DAB stations support presentations (slideshow). ferent stations are available depending on ● Dual FM receiver (diversity antenna). the frequency band selected or the type of ● Summarised FM station list. Symbols on the AM frequency band reception. ● Fusion of DAB and FM stations into one list.  Manually updating the station list. The types of reception and frequency bands available depend on the equipment and the ● Fusion of all stations stored in preset but-  To display the frequency band for man- country. tons into one list. Maximum 36 favourite sta- ual selection of the AM frequency. tions. ● Select the frequency band or type of re- ● Station logos. Menus in Internet radio mode ception: AM, FM/DAB, FM (for devices that ● DAB presentation (slideshow). Images that  Show station selection. do not have DAB), Internet radio. are emitted sequentially.  Open text search. ● Internet radio. Search and select a station  Show the last online radio stations heard. You can select radio stations in different Universal symbols in Radio mode ways. The options vary depending on the  Show the 100 most played radio sta- frequency band and the type of reception. AM To select the desired AM frequency tions and podcasts. band. Show available online radio podcasts. Select via the frequency band (AM and FM) FM/DAB To select the desired FM/DAB fre-  quency band.  Show online radio stations, grouped by ● Activate the frequency band. Online radio To select the type of Internet country. ● Click on the cursor, scroll through the fre- radio reception.  Show online radio stations by the de- quency band and release it when you reach sired language. the frequency band you want. » 187 Infotainment system

● OR: press on a point on the frequency ● OR: press  to start the text search. The ● OR: press the station on the station list and band. The cursor will automatically jump to input field is displayed. keep it pressed. The preset buttons are dis- the corresponding frequency. ● Enter the name of the station you want. played. The list of the stations found is updated while ● Press the preset button. The station of the set frequency is tuned. entering the text. The station is stored in the selected preset ● Press the station you want. Select from the station list (AM and button. FM/DAB) The selected station is tuned. If a station was already stored in the preset The station list shows the stations that are button, it is overwritten with the new station. currently tunable. In the AM frequency band, Search in SCAN mode (AM and FM/DAB) you may have to update the station list if you In SCAN mode the stations are automatically are no longer in the area where you last ac- tuned in a sequential manner and each of cessed the station list. In the FM/DAB fre- Special functions in Radio mode them is played for approx. 5 seconds. quency band, the station list is automatically Traffic information (TP) updated. ● To start the SCAN mode press SCAN. The TP function monitors the announce- ● Open the station list SCAN mode starts and the station currently ments of a station with traffic information ● Press the station you want. tuned in is shown on the screen. Next to it is and automatically reproduces them in the a SCAN function button. Radio mode or in the multimedia playback The selected station is tuned. In the case of that is active. To do this, you have to be able FM/DAB and if the station is available, the ● To select a station press SCAN. to tune into a station with traffic information. best quality reception is automatically selected. SCAN mode stops and the station is tuned. Some stations without their own traffic infor- The SCAN function button is hidden. mation support the TP function by broadcasting traffic information from other sta- Search and filter stations (Internet radio) Storing the station on the preset buttons tions (EON). In Online Radio mode, stations can be filtered by categories and can be searched by You can store up to 36 stations of different In the AM frequency band or in the Multime- text. frequency bands and reception types as fa- dia mode, a station with traffic information in vourites using the preset buttons. the background is automatically tuned while ● Open the station list. it is possible to tune into a station with traffic ● Tune the station you want. ● Select the category by which the stations information. ● Access the preset buttons. are to be filtered. If no station with traffic information can be ● Press the preset button and keep it press- tuned in, the device automatically searches ed until the station is stored. for stations with tunable traffic information. 188 Infotainment operation

Stations with traffic information are not avail- system. The use of online radio can generate In the Online radio mode, the infotainment able in all countries. expenses due to the transmission of data system accesses the station logos of the on- from the Internet. line database and automatically assigns Activating and deactivating the TP func- them to the stations ● tion In Online radio mode, press and set the audio quality to high or low to tune the online Assign station logos manually ● In Radio mode or Multimedia mode, press radio. ● In FM/DAB mode, press Station logos. Settings > Traffic station (TP). ● Press on the  icon and then select the Station logos Online radio station to which a station logo is to be as- In the case of some frequency bands, station signed. Online radio is a type of reception for Inter- logos may already be pre-installed in the in- ● Select the station logo. If desired, repeat net radio stations and podcasts that are infotainment system. dependent of AM, FM and DAB. Thanks to the same process with other stations. Internet transmission, reception is not limi- If in the FM/DAB frequency band settings ● OR, via the menu Settings > Station logos. ted to the region. the automatic selection of station logos is activated, station logos are automatically as- Online radio is only available through the In- signed to the stations. ternet connection of the active infotainment

189 Infotainment system

Media Mode

Introduction

Fig. 135 Schematic representation: Multime- dia view

In Media mode you can play multimedia files ● Video files (depends on the system). Limitations and indications of data media from data media and streaming services Data media may not work if they have been through the infotainment system. You can also use streaming services. The availability of streaming services depends on exposed to high temperatures or have been Depending on the equipment, the following the equipment and the country. damaged. Please bear in mind the manufac- data media can be used: turer’s indications. To use streaming services you need to have ● USB storage support (for example, a USB your own user account in the streaming Quality differences between data media pro- stick, a mobile phone connected via USB). service in question. duced by different manufacturers can cause multimedia playback malfunctions. ● Bluetooth® device (for example, a mobile phone or a tablet). Access the MEDIA menu Incorrect configuration on a data media may ● Press  >  ››› Fig. 135 . cause the data media to be unreadable. Depending on the equipment, the following Playlists only specify a playback order and re- types of multimedia files can be played: Access the settings fer to the storage location of the multimedia ● Audio files. ● Press  > . files within the folder structure. In a playlist

190 Infotainment operation there are no multimedia files saved. To play a  To change to the previous title. Playing audio and video files playlist, multimedia files have to be found in  To change to the next title. You can search and play multimedia files the storage places of the data media to  Repeat the current track. from an available multimedia source in dif- which the playlist refers. ferent ways.  Repeat all titles. Note  To activate the shuffle playback order. Search in the folder structure CUPRA assumes no liability for any deterio-  To display the favourites list. Multimedia files can be catalogued by cate- ration or loss of files on data storage devi-  Add multimedia file as favourite. gories (for example, album, artist, title). In My ces.  Top right: Select multimedia source. media this category view is always displayed. The classic folder structure of individual USB  Access the settings. data media is also found in My media. Features of the multimedia  Open the search. 1. Activate the folder structure. equipment and symbols  To return to the top folder of the multimedia source. The folder structure of the selected Audio, multimedia and connectivity: multimedia source is displayed. When ● Multimedia playback and control via Blue- My media is selected, the categories tooth®. Select and play a multimedia (music, videos, playlists) and connected multimedia sources are displayed first. ● Audio playback in these formats: AAC, source ALAC, AVI, FLAC, MP3, MP4, WMA. 2. Search for the title you want in the folder structure. ● Video playback in these formats: MPEG-1 Select multimedia source  and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg), ISO MPEG4, Before playing multimedia files you must first OR: press to start the text search. The DivX 3, 4 and 5 Xvid (.avi), ISO MPEG4 H.264 connect a multimedia source. input field is displayed. (.mp4, .m4v, .mov), Windows Media Video 3. Enter the name of the desired title. The To use streaming services you must be con- 10 (.wmv, .asf). list of the titles found is updated while nected to the Internet. ● Playlists on any type of device. entering the text. ● Connect an external multimedia source. ● Multimedia streaming (online). 4. Press the desired title. ● Select the connected media source to be ● Multimedia search. If at the beginning of the playback your used for playback. selection is in a folder of a multimedia source, the multimedia files that are in it Universal symbols in Media mode are also added to the playback. »  To start playback.  To pause playback. 191 Infotainment system

If a playlist is played, all available titles in 2. Select the streaming service you want. media file. If the music genre is not indicated the playlist are added to the playback. 3. Follow the steps indicated by the info- in the music files, for example, you cannot 5. Close your selection with . tainment system. save the music genre as favourite. The streaming service is added to the If a video file is playing, only that video can Select favourites list of multimedia sources as a new be saved as favourite. In favourites you can save titles, music gen- function button. res, artists and albums individually for playback. Save favourites Playing entertainment content in Only multimedia files in My media of the in- the infotainment system ● Access favourites . fotainment system can be saved as favour- ● Press the favourite you want. ites. You can save up to a maximum of 30 ti- Depending on the infotainment system, vid- tles, albums, artists and music genres indi- eos can be played. Depending on your selection, all the titles vidually as favourites. belonging to the favourite are added to the Video mode playback. 1. Start playback. When in video mode, a video can be played 2. Access favourites. Configure streaming services on the infotainment screen if this is stored on 3. Tap a favourite that is not assigned. a data media, in My media or is sourced from Depending on the equipment you can use a streaming service. In this case, the video streaming services directly through the info- OR: press on an existing favourite and sound is played through the vehicle's speak- tainment system. For this you need to have a old for approx. 3 seconds. ers. premium user account of the streaming 4. Select from the selection list: Title, Al- service in question and you have to log in bum, Artist, Music genres, Playlist. The image is only displayed if the vehicle is with it in the infotainment system. You also stopped. When the vehicle is in motion, the need to be connected to the Internet. The selection is saved instead of the previ- infotainment screen turns off. The sound of ously selected favourite. If the favourite was the video can still be heard. 1. Select  Streaming as the multimedia already assigned, the previously saved fa- source. vourite is overwritten. A stable Internet connection is required for playback from a streaming service. In this A list of available streaming services is The selectable options in the selection list case, telephony costs may be generated. displayed. depend on the data attached to the multi-

192 Infotainment operation

Navigation

Introduction

Fig. 136 Schematic representation: Navigation view

A global satellite system determines the cur- ble on the screen when travelling above a If the exact destination cannot be reached rent position of the vehicle and the sensors certain speed. It is not a malfunction, but is because, for example, it is in a non-digitised mounted on the vehicle analyse the routes due to compliance with legislation. area, indications relating to the address and taken. All measured values and possible traf- the distance to the destination are displayed fic events are compared with the available Navigation announcements on the screen. maps to allow optimal navigation to the des- Navigation announcements are acoustic in- During dynamic route guidance, you will re- tination. dications for driving referred to the current ceive information about reported traffic Navigation announcements and graphic rep- route. congestion on the route. An additional navi- resentations will guide you to your destina- gation announcement is provided if the The type and frequency of navigation an- tion. route is recalculated due to traffic conges- nouncements depend on the driving situation. Navigation management is carried out on tion, for example, starting the guide to the the screen. destination, driving on the motorway or on a While a navigation announcement is playing, roundabout and the settings. its volume can be adjusted. The following » Depending on the country, some functions of the infotainment system will not be availa- 193 Infotainment system

navigation announcements provided will be Zoom in the view (tip: use your index fin- map backward, move your fingers down- played with the newly adjusted volume. ger). wards. ● To increase the view in a certain position, Limitations during navigation double-click on the map. Rotate view (tip: use your index and middle fingers). If the infotainment system cannot receive Zoom out the view (tip: use your index and ● Press on the map with both fingers at the data from GPS satellites, for example, in a middle fingers). same time and keep them pressed. tunnel or in an underground garage, navigation continues using the vehicle's sensors. ● Press on the map with both fingers at the ● To rotate the map view, turn your fingers same time. clockwise anticlockwise. In areas that are not digitised or are only partially digitised on the infotainment memory, Change view (tip: use your index finger). Saved data the infotainment system will still attempt to ● Press twice on the map and keep your fin- The infotainment system saves certain data, provide route guidance. ger pressed on the screen. for example, frequent routes and position In the case of missing or incomplete naviga- ● To zoom out the view of the map, move data, to make the entry of the destination tion data, it may not be possible to deter- your finger upwards. To zoom in the view of more agile and optimise the route guidance. mine the exact position of the vehicle. This the map, move your finger downwards. may mean that navigation is not as precise as Delete saved data Change view (tip: use your index and middle usual. ● Press Settings > Basic function settings > fingers). Roads and streets are subject to constant Delete and then OK ● change (e.g. new roads, road works, roads Press on the map with both fingers at the closed to traffic, changes to street names same time and keep them pressed. WARNING and building numbers). If the navigation data ● To zoom out the view of the map, move Select the settings, enter the destination is obsolete, this may lead to errors or inac- one finger towards the other. To zoom in the and the modifications for navigation only curacies during the route guidance. view of the map, move one finger away from with the vehicle at a standstill. the other. Managing the navigation map Tilt the view (tip: use your index and middle Note To allow an optimal view, you can also man- fingers). ● If a detour is passed during route guid- age the navigation map with additional finger ● Press on the map with both fingers at the ance, navigation may recalculate the route. movements. same time and horizontal to each other, ● The quality of the navigation recommen- Move the map (tip: use your index finger). keep them pressed. dations given by the Infotainment system depends on the navigation data available ● Move the map with your finger. ● To tilt the view of the map forward, move your fingers upwards. To tilt the view of the and any reported traffic congestions. 194 Infotainment operation

● Navigation announcements are not emit-  Current position Other symbols ted if the sound is muted in the infotain-  Search for destinations.  Entering the detailed destination for an ment system.  Destinations along the route. address.  Final destination  Search for destinations.   Frequent destinations. Navigation functions and symbols Home address  Work address  Last destinations. Navigation  Favourite destinations  Favourite destinations Navigation functions depend on the equip-  Additional window with more options.  Back ment and country.  Additional window with route options. Symbols in the route details Functions  Centre the map on the current position.  Current position. ● Entering destination and route calculation  Change view: 2D oriented to the north,  Destination of the current guidance. (offline and online). or 2D oriented to the direction of travel, ● Displaying two navigation maps at the or 3D to the direction of travel. POI symbols (points of interest) same time (display and instrument cluster). Information about the current route | POIs (points of interest) are shown on the ● Update of online maps. guidance. map, provided the navigation has said data. ● Predictive navigation.  Map scale. Click on the desired POI (point of interest) to ● 3D urban maps. Symbols in the additional window start a route guidance ››› page 196 . ● Online traffic information ● To open the additional window, press .  Petrol station. ● Dynamic POIs (points of interest)  Repeat the last navigation announce-  Parking lot. Symbols on the map ment.  Tourist information offices. The buttons and indications depend on the  Volume of navigation announcements.  Train station. settings and the current driving situation.  Map lighting in Automatic, Day or Night  Restaurant. Symbols for traffic events and points of inter- mode. est (POIs) are displayed on the map, for ex-  Offer new guidance routes. Traffic information. ample, petrol stations, train stations or inter-  360° electric range indicator (hybrid ve- POIs (points of interest) are shown on the esting stopovers, provided navigation has hicles) map, provided the navigation has said data such data ››› page 198 . ››› page 198. »

195 Infotainment system

Click on a traffic event to open an additional Using obsolete data may lead to errors dur- WARNING window with further details ››› page 198 . ing navigation. Current routes cannot be traced or the route guidances will lead to If you update the navigation data manually while driving, it may cause accidents with . Slow traffic. mistaken destinations. serious injuries. Traffic jam.  Ensure navigation data is updated at all ● Update the navigation data only with the times. vehicle at a standstill.  Accident. Online updating of navigation data  Broken down vehicle. Note The navigation data of the regions through Automatic update of the navigation data is  Slippery surface (ice or snow). which you travel frequently is automatically subject to the privacy settings. In “Incogni- updated in the background if the Internet Road closed to traffic. to” mode, no update is carried out.  connection is established and the privacy  Slippery road hazard. settings are valid.  Danger. ● With the ignition switched on, the naviga- Start route guidance tion data is updated automatically.  Road works. Depending on the country and equipment, Manual update of navigation data different functions are available to enter des-  Strong wind. Current navigation data for large regions, for tinations.  Reduced visibility. example Western Europe, can be downloa- The different functions for entering destina- ded from www.seat.com and stored on USB tions are found in the navigation main menu. data devices. Navigation through USB data Navigation data devices is not possible. Opening the Navigation main menu ● Download the navigation data to a USB da- ● Press  Navigation. The Infotainment system is equipped with a ta device. built-in navigation data memory. Depending Select the destination and start navigation ● Turn on the ignition of the vehicle. on the country, the necessary navigation da- 1. Press . ta may already be pre-installed. ● Connect the USB data device to the infotainment system. Navigation data is auto- 2. Select the desired destination. You can To provide correct route guidance and make matically updated in the background. chose from  Frequent destinations, the most of the functions offered, the info-  Last destinations and  Favourite tainment system should be updated on a The map version is displayed in  Settings > destinations. regular basis. System information.

196 Infotainment operation

OR: press  and enter the address in To save a destination as a favourite press  Start navigation the input screen. in the split screen when entering the desti- ● Press . nation. OR: detailed address. ● Move the view on the map until the desired 3. Press Start. Select the destination and start navigation position can be selected. The navigation map can be used by means of additional fin- 1. Press  and then .  Frequent destinations ger movements ››› page 194 . 2. Press the desired destination. The destination synopsis uses recorded data ● Press the desired destination on the map. 3. Press Start. to propose possible destinations. ● Press Route. Note Select the destination and start navigation Offroad navigation 1. Press  and then . Enter the destination as accurately as pos- “Offroad navigation” calculates routes to se- sible. If you enter a destination incorrectly, 2. Select the desired destination. The the route guidance will not be able to start lected destination points using unknown da- route guidance starts automatically. or it will guide you to an incorrect destina- ta. When a destination point is outside the known roads or position data, navigation Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold tion. finds the route to the next point of the the desired destination for a few seconds. known road and completes the path to the next destination point with a direct connec-  Last destinations Start route guidance by selecting tion. Navigation saves the last destinations to from the map make them available for a route guidance. Start navigation The navigation map includes active areas at ● Move the view on the map until the desired Select the destination and start navigation many points that are suitable for entering the position can be selected. The navigation 1. Press  and then . destination. To do this, press the desired po- map can be used by means of additional fin- sition or place on the map. If there is map 2. Press the desired destination. ger movements ››› page 194 . data at this point, you can start a route guid- ● Press on any point on the map without po- 3. Press Start. ance. sition data. Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold Whether it is possible to enter the destina- ● Press Route. the desired destination for a few seconds. tion through the navigation map depends on the state of the data and it is not possible for  Favourite destinations all positions. Save up to 20 destinations as favourites. To start “offroad navigation”, press an empty area without position data. 197 Infotainment system

Start route guidance using con- With an active route guidance, traffic inci- Function descriptions tact details dents that are on the current route are shown in the route details. Such traffic inci- Route details dents can be avoided page 198 . Start route guidance with the saved address ››› The route details contain information on all data of a contact. Contacts saved without incidents, for example, the starting point, address data cannot be used for route guid- Hazard information stopovers, traffic events, POIs and destina- ance. Hazard information is shown on the navigation, provided the navigation has such data. tion map with symbols in the same way as If you press on an incident, an additional win- Start navigation traffic incidents. In this case, the source of dow opens providing more options. The ● Press . this information is another vehicle that has available options depend on the incident detected the hazard and has uploaded the ● Press on the contact you want. and the current settings. information to the service provider. ● Press Route. The hazards shown are: accident, broken Open and close the route details Note down vehicle and slippery road surface. ● To open, press | or swipe it. If the address details of a contact are obso- ● lete, the route guidance will nevertheless Traffic flow indication To close, press | or swipe it. take you to the registered address. Check The navigation map shows traffic flow ac- that the contact address is updated. cording to current traffic events, highlighting Edit route guidance the road network in colour. To edit route guidance, move the stopovers to the destination in the TripView view. ● Traffic information Orange: Slow traffic. ● Red: Traffic jam. ● Hold the desired destination pressed until The infotainment system receives detailed it is visibly highlighted. traffic information automatically if the Inter- Note ● Move the destination to the desired posi- net connection is established. This informa- Traffic information receipt is subject to the tion. tion is shown with symbols and highlighting privacy settings. In maximum Privacy ● Remove your finger from the screen. The the road network in colour on the map. mode, no traffic information is received. route will recalculate. Tracking or Location level setting is neces- Traffic incidents sary. Avoid traffic incidents Traffic incidents, for example, traffic jams or The details of the route show the current congested traffic, are shown on the naviga- traffic incidents if the navigation has such tion map using symbols.

198 Infotainment operation data. Avoid traffic incidents by editing route Functions in the additional window: ternative routes are available, provided navi- details ››› page 198 . gation has such data. Stopping route Ends the current route guidance. ● Press on a traffic event. guidance You can activate and deactivate the function whenever you want. ● Press on Avoid. The route will recalculate.  Close the additional window. Enable and disable learning usage pattern Split screen  Add a destination to favourites. The setting is in the corresponding naviga- When handling navigation functions, an ad- tion menu  > Basic function settings. ditional window with other options may Learn usage pattern open. Possible options depend on the func- When the vehicle is in motion, navigation ● To activate the function, activate Learn us- tion being used. saves routes and destinations used to auto- age pattern. matically generate destination proposals. ● Close the additional screen To disable the function, disable Learn us- Destinations are learned based on the time age pattern. ● Press on an empty area outside the addi- of day and the day of the week. tional window. ● To delete saved data, press Delete usage Navigation can propose up to 5 routes at the pattern. ● OR: press . same time. The proposed routes may be dif- ● OR: press Accept. ferent from the routes of the normal route 360° electric range display guidance. 3 Valid for: plug-in hybrid vehicles Functions in the additional window: If one of the proposed destinations is selec- The 360° electric operating range display Show on map Show what is selected on the map. ted, the guide to that destination is started. shows the possible range with the current Add stopover Add a stopover to the route guid- The route guidance follows the selected charge level of the high voltage battery. ance. route until the vehicle deviates from it. In that case, the route is recalculated and takes Switch on the 360° electric operating Direct route Starts direct route guidance. you back along the most direct path to the range display Delete Delete a stopover from the route initially selected destination. ● Open the additional map window and guidance. press the symbol . Important traffic jams are taken into account Avoid Avoid traffic jam. The route will re- in the route guidance, and are avoided if al- calculate.

199 Infotainment system

Telephone interface

Introduction

Fig. 137 Schematic representation: Phone view

You can use the telephone interface to con- Note Telephone interface equipment nect your mobile to the infotainment system and symbols and operate phone functions through it. The ● As a general rule, pairing a device (for example, a mobile phone device) is only nec- sound is played through the vehicle's speak- essary once. You can restore the device Equipment features ers. connection via Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi with ● Hands-free function. You can connect up to two mobile phone the infotainment system whenever you ● Use up to two phones at the same time. devices simultaneously to the infotainment want without having to pair the device system. again. ● Phone book with a maximum of 5,000 ● The availability of some telephone func- contacts. High speeds, poor weather or road conditions will depend on the mobile phone con- ● SMS functions via Bluetooth®: SMS read- tions and a noisy ambience (even outside of nected to the infotainment system. ing, SMS writing (templates included), SMS the vehicle), as well as the quality of recep- playback, message history. tion can all affect the quality of a telephone conversation in the vehicle. ● Email functions via Bluetooth®: reading email, writing email.

200 Infotainment operation

● Connection to wireless charging option.  Obtain information on the CUPRA Places with special regulations ● Connection to the microphone mounted brand and selected additional services on the vehicle. related to traffic and your travel. Switch off the mobile telephone and the tel-  Voice mail. ephone interface in places with a risk of ex- Symbols in the main menu plosion. These places are not always clearly marked. They include, for example:  Contacts. Call list symbols  List of incoming and outgoing calls. ● To open the call lists, press . ● The vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks.  Enter telephone number.  Incoming call. ● The lower decks of boats and ferries.  Text messages (SMS and emails).  Outgoing call. ● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liq-  Telephone interface settings.  Missed call. uefied gas (such as propane or butane).  Telephone number (company). Symbols for calls ● Places where the air is laden with chemi-  Telephone number (private). cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal The symbols may be different depending on Mobile telephone number (company). powder. the infotainment system.  ● All other places where the vehicle engine  Mobile telephone number (private).  Start a call or bringing it to the fore- or telephone must be switched off. ground.  Fax (private).  End or reject a call.  Fax. WARNING  Open contact list. Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a Symbols for text messages risk of explosion!  Enter telephone number. The symbols may be different depending on  Mute the sound of the hands-free the infotainment system. Note  Hold call. ● To open the text messages, press . In areas where special regulations apply or  Continue call. the use of mobile phones is forbidden, it  Start conference call.  Activate voice control input must be switched off at all times. The radiation produced by the mobile phone when  ››› page 184. Pass call to private mode switched on may interfere with sensitive   Make an emergency call. Templates for text messages. technical and medical equipment, possibly  Get help in case of breakdown. resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment.

201 Infotainment system

Pair, connect and manage ● Optional: confirm the data transfer mes- Connect a mobile phone device sage on the mobile phone device. Requirement: the mobile phone device is Requirement for pairing: paired with the infotainment system. Active and passive connection ● Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile ● Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone device. To use the functions of the telephone inter- phone device. face, there must be at least one mobile ● Bluetooth® is activated on the infotain- phone device connected to the infotain- Establish an active connection ment system. ment system. If there are several mobile ● Depending on the mobile device, it will be phone devices connected to the infotain- Requirement: several mobile phone devices necessary to have the Bluetooth® menu ment system, you can switch between active are connected to the infotainment system at open or activate the Visibility option so that and passive connections. To use the tele- the same time. the device is visible from the infotainment phone interface with the desired mobile ● Select the desired mobile phone device system. phone device, establish the active connec- from the drop-down menu. All other mobile tion with the infotainment system. phone devices are automatically in the pas- Pair a mobile phone device suitable for tel- sive connection. ephony with the infotainment system to use Difference between connection types the telephone interface functions. On the The mobile phone device is paired and User profiles first connection, the mobile phone device is connected. The functions of the tele- Primary For each of the paired mobile phone devices paired with the infotainment system. Doing phone interface are performed with the so saves a user profile ››› page 202 . data of said mobile phone device. an individual user profile is automatically cre- ated. In the user profile, data from the mo- The pairing can take a few minutes. The The mobile phone device is paired and bile phone device is stored, for example, functions available depend on the mobile connected. Calls can be managed but Secondary contact details or settings. A maximum of phone device used and its operating system. the phone book, messages or other functions will not be active. four user profiles can be saved in the infotainment system at the same time. Pair a mobile phone device Paired mobile phone devices are stored in ● Open the list of available Bluetooth® devi- the infotainment system, even if they are not WARNING ces on the mobile phone device and select currently connected. If you perform the pairing while driving, it the name of the infotainment system. could cause an accident or injury. ● Please note and, if necessary, confirm the ● Perform pairing only with the vehicle at a messages that appear on the mobile phone standstill. device and on the infotainment system. If the pairing was successful, the phone data is saved in the user profile. 202 Infotainment operation

Note The Comfort phone interface can be equip- ● OR: press a favourite in the telephone in- ped with the wireless charging function terface main menu to start the call. ● In the pairing of some mobile phone de- ››› page 204. vices, a PIN number is shown on the screen  Calls of the mobile phone device. Enter that In order to use the functions of the wireless number in the infotainment system to com- charging function, you have to place a suita- The telephone interface shows the call list of plete the pairing. ble mobile phone device correctly in the the mobile telephone device. Start a call ● While the infotainment system is in the storage compartment. The mobile phone from the call list. Known mobile phones menu, the wireless device will then connect to the vehicle an- ● Press  > All and press a number on the charging function is disabled. When you tenna. This improves the reception and exit this menu, the wireless charging func- sound quality of calls. list to start the call. tion is activated again. ● OR: press  and filter the call list entries (for example, missed calls or dialled num- To call bers). In filtered list, press a number to start Basic and Comfort Telephony the call. Open the telephone interface  Dial Depending on the equipment, two types of ● Press  Telephone. telephone interface can be used: Manually enter a phone number to start a call. While entering the phone number, con- ● Make a call Basic telephone interface. tacts that match that number are shown on Select a phone number to start a call. Differ- ● Comfort telephone interface. the infotainment screen. ent functions are available for selecting a phone number: Basic telephone interface ● Press  and enter telephone number. ● Press  to start the call The Basic telephone interface uses the Blue-  Contacts tooth® HFP profile for transmission. This in- The last call is dialled by pressing and holding terface allows the use of telephone functions If a contact has several registered phone numbers you have to select one. the  button on the multifunction steering through the infotainment system and play- wheel. back through the vehicle's speakers. ● Press  and press a number on the list to start the call. Comfort telephone interface ● OR: press  and enter the contact name in Send messages Like the Basic telephone interface, the Com- the input field to search for it. Press on the fort telephone interface also uses the Blue- contact to start the call. Depending on the mobile phone device and tooth® HFP profile. the infotainment system used, you can send »

203 Infotainment system

and receive SMS and e-mails through the tel- Each time the phone is reconnected, the Call a favourite ephone interface. phone book is updated. ● Press the assigned speed dial button. If conference calls are supported, the phone Send an SMS book can be accessed during a call. If there Note ● Press  > Text message > Enter new is a saved image for a contact, it can be dis- Favourites are not updated automatically. If message and enter the message on the played in the list next to the entry. you change a contact's phone number, you screen. have to reassign the speed dial button. ● Enter the contact you want in the search Favourites bar. A speed dial button can be assigned to a ● To send the message press OK. phone book favourite up to a maximum of Connectivity Box six. If there is a registered photo saved to the Send an e-mail contact, it is shown on the speed dial button. ● Press  > E-mail > Enter new message All speed dial buttons have to be manually and enter the message on the screen. edited and will be assigned to a user profile. ● Enter the contact you want in the search bar. Assign the speed dial button ● To send the message press OK. ● In the Favourites menu, press the  button, then open the phone book to select a contact as a favourite. If the contact has several phone numbers, press on the number in Phone book, favourites and the list. speed dial buttons Fig. 138 In the centre console: pad for the mobile phone connection. Edit the speed dial button In the first connection of a telephone with the infotainment system, the phone book is ● To edit or delete a favourite contact press The Connectivity Box includes different saved in the infotainment system. It may be on the icon  in the Favourites menu functions that will help to use your mobile necessary to confirm the data transmission screen. You can delete one or more favour- device. These are: ites. on the mobile phone. ● Wireless Charger1).

1) It only includes the wireless charge functionality. 204 Infotainment operation

● Signal amplifier / (Mobile Signal Amplifier) To establish a connection with the vehicle's circumstances, the infotainment system in- external aerial: dicates that there is a foreign object in the (Wireless Charger) storage compartment. Using a suitable mo- ● Place your mobile device in the middle of bile phone device and correcting its posi- The Wireless Charger allows mobile devices the pad with the screen facing up Fig. 138 1) ››› tion can eliminate the fault. with Qi technology to be charged without a ››› . cable. ● If necessary, remove any objects that Make sure there are no objects between the may obstruct the cover's closing function. To charge your mobile phone wirelessly: pad and the mobile phone. ● Place your mobile device in the middle of Your mobile phone will automatically be WARNING the pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 138 ready to make use of the external aerial. ● The mobile phone may heat up due to ››› . the wireless charging. Think about this be- WARNING fore you pick it up, and take care when re- Make sure there are no objects between the moving it. pad and the mobile phone. Notifications on the screen of the mobile phone device can distract the driver’s at- ● There must be no metallic or other ob- The mobile phone will start charging auto- tention and increase the risk of a serious jects between the mobile phone and the matically. For further information about accident. housing, to prevent the functionality of the whether your mobile device supports Qi Connectivity Box from being affected. ● Place only one suitable mobile phone de- technology, check your phone's user manual vice, Qi compatible if applicable. For cor- or visit the CUPRA website. rect operation, remove the protective case Note and ensure that it has maximum dimen- ● Your mobile device must support the Qi Signal amplifier / (Mobile Signal Amplifier) sions (width x length) of 80 mm x 140 mm inductive charging interface standard for (3.15 x 5.512 inches). Place on the It allows you to reduce radiation in the vehi- proper operation. cle and have better reception. Connectivity Box base as per the indications. ● The charging time and the temperature For safety reasons, it is recommended that vary in accordance with the device used. ● If the mobile phone device is not placed you pair the system and the mobile using on the base of the Connectivity Box in the ● The maximum charging capacity is 5 W. Bluetooth® and place it on the Connectivity correct position, or if it is larger than the ● Qi technology does not allow you to Box pad, for the best reception without hav- detailed dimensions, it may not be recog- charge more than one mobile device simul- ing to handle the mobile phone. nised or charge correctly. Under certain taneously. »

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile phone wirelessly. 205 Infotainment system

● No improvement in reception can be guaranteed if there is more than one mobile phone on the pad. ● You are advised to keep the engine running to guarantee proper wireless charging. ● When a telephone with Qi technology is connected by USB, it will be charged by the means specified by the manufacturer.

Fig. 140 Rear part of the centre console: Multimedia USB connectors with power outlet function.

USB port The USB port can be found in the storage compartment area of the front centre console ››› Fig. 139 . Depending on the equipment and the country, the vehicle may also have USB connections exclusively for charging or as a power socket. These USB ports are located at the rear of the console, between the front seats ››› Fig. 140.

Fig. 139 Centre console: USB port.

206 Start and driving

the version, on the multi-function steering Automatic deactivation of the ignition on Driving wheel. vehicles with the Start-Stop system Opening the driver's door when exiting the The ignition is switched off automatically Start and driving vehicle activates the electronic lock on the when the vehicle is stopped and the auto- steering column if the ignition is disabled. matic engine shutdown is active, if:

Starting and stopping the ● The driver's seat belt is not fastened, Switching the ignition on/off ● the driver does not step on any pedal, engine If you only want to switch on the ignition (without starting the engine), briefly press ● the driver door is opened. Ignition and start button the start button once without pressing the After automatically turning off the ignition, if brake pedal or the clutch pedal . ››› the dipped beam  is on, the side light re- The    push-button text flashes mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there is like a heartbeat when the system is ready for enough charge in the battery). If the driver the ignition to be turned on or off1). locks the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the side light goes out. Automatic ignition disconnection When the vehicle detects that there is no Switching off the ignition when leaving the driver once the engine has stopped, after a vehicle, with hybrid drive certain time the ignition is switched off auto- When the ignition is not switched off in E- matically. If at that time the dipped beam MODE operating mode, a certain amount of Fig. 141 Starter button headlights are on, the side lights will stay on time after the journey is complete it switches for approx. 30 minutes. The side lights can off automatically to prevent draining the 12- The engine can be started with a start button be turned off by blocking the vehicle volt vehicle battery. (Press & Drive). For this there must be a valid ››› page 97, or manually ››› page 115 . key inside the passenger compartment. “My Beat” function1)

The    button is found at the bot- For vehicles with a convenience key there is tom of the centre console or, depending on the “My Beat” function. This feature provides »

1) Valid for versions with the start button on the centre console. 207 Driving

an additional indication of the vehicle igni- WARNING ● If during the STOP phase you press the tion system.    button, the ignition is switch- When switching on the ignition, do not ed off and the push-button flashes1). When entering the vehicle, the start button press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise ››› Fig. 141 flashes to draw attention to it. the engine could start immediately. ● If the indication is displayed on the instrument panel display “Start-Stop system When the ignition is on/off, the engine start deactivated: Start the engine manually”; WARNING button flashes. With the ignition is switched the    button will flash1). off, the start button goes off after a few sec- If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- onds. out due care, this may cause accidents and serious injury. With the engine running, the start button Starting the engine light stays on, indicating that the engine is ● Never leave any key inside the vehicle running. The time elapsed between the mo- when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un- ● Vehicles with manual transmission: put the ment the user starts the engine with the start authorised person could lock the vehicle, gear lever in neutral, press the clutch pedal button and the lighting changes from flash- start the engine or connect the ignition and and keep it pressed in this position until the operate any of the electrical equipment. ing to fixed will depend on specific engine engine starts. size characteristics. When the start button is ● Vehicles with automatic transmission: used to stop the engine, the button starts Note press the brake pedal and keep it pressed in flashing again. ● Before leaving the vehicle, always discon- this position until the engine starts. In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the nect the ignition and, if appropriate, take “My Beat” function also offers additional in- into account the instructions on the screen ● Press the starter button ››› Fig. 141 ; do not formation: of the dash panel. press the accelerator. There needs to be a ● If the vehicle is stationary for a long time valid key inside the vehicle for the engine to ● When the engine stops during the Stop with the engine off and the ignition on, the start. After starting the engine, the lighting of phase, the light of the start button stays on, vehicle battery might be discharged and it the  button remains fixed indi- 1) as the Start-Stop system remains active even might not be possible to start the engine. cating that the engine is running . though the engine is off. ● In vehicles with diesel engines, wait until ● Once the engine starts, release the start- ● When the engine cannot be started again the warning light  ››› page 208 goes off up button. with the Start-Stop system, ››› page 215 , and before starting the engine. needs to be started manually, the start button flashes to indicate this situation.

1) Valid for versions with the start button on the centre console. 208 Start and driving

● If the engine does not start, stop and wait ous gas that can cause loss of conscious- Note for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary, ness and death. perform an emergency start ››› page 210 . ● Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer WARNING when the engine starts. than usual to start on cold days. During pre- Do not get out of the vehicle with the en- ● When starting with a cold engine, noise heating, the warning lamp  remains lit. To gine running, especially if a gear is engag- levels may briefly increase. This is quite avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat- ed. The vehicle could then suddenly move normal, and no cause for concern. tery, do not use any other major electrical or something strange could happen that ● When the outside temperature is below equipment while the glow plugs are pre- would cause damage, fire or serious injury. +5 °C (+41 °F), if the engine is diesel, some heating. smoke may appear under the vehicle when the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on. The preheating time depends on the coolant WARNING and exterior temperatures. With the engine Never use cold start sprays, they could ex- at operating temperature, or at outside tem- plode or cause the engine to run at high peratures above +8°C, the warning lamp  revs. Doing this risks injury. Turning off the engine will light up for about one second. This means that you can start the engine almost ● Bring the vehicle to a full stop ››› . CAUTION immediately. ● With manual transmission, press the clutch ● The starter motor or the engine may be all the way down. If fitted with an automatic Starting a diesel engine after having run damaged if you try to restart the engine im- gearbox, activate the parking lock by press- mediately after switching it off. out of fuel ing button P. ● When the engine is cold, you should If the fuel tank of a diesel vehicle was run un- ● Apply the electronic parking brake. avoid high engine speeds, driving at full til completely empty, after refuelling it can throttle and over-loading the engine, as ● Briefly press the start-up button last longer than normal to start the engine, this could cause engine damage. ››› Fig. 141. even up to a minute. This is because the fuel system must eliminate air first. For the sake of the environment Car wash function (hybrid vehicles) When the ignition is turned off with gear N WARNING Do not warm-up the engine by running the activated, the vehicle can roll for the next 30 Do not keep the engine running in confined engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off minutes. After that time, if the vehicle is spaces, as there is a risk of poisoning. immediately, driving gently. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster stopped the parking lock P activates auto- ● The exhaust gases contain carbon mon- and reduces emissions. matically. The corresponding warning mes- oxide, an odourless and colourless poison- sage is displayed on the instrument cluster display one minute before this happens. » 209 Driving

WARNING the vehicle, otherwise the battery could The engine can only be started using a genu- discharge. ine CUPRA key with its correct code. Never switch off the engine while the vehi- ● If the engine has been driven at high cle is moving. This could cause loss of con- Note trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in- speed for a prolonged period of time, it jury. may overheat when switched off. To avoid A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur- damage, allow the engine to run for ap- ed if genuine CUPRA keys are used. ● The airbags and belt tensioners do not proximately two minutes in neutral before work when the ignition is switched off. switching it off. ● The brake servo does not work with the engine off. Therefore, you need to press Emergency starting function the break pedal harder to brake the vehicle. Note ● Power steering does not work when the After the engine is switched off the radiator engine is not running. You need more fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if strength to steer when the engine is switch- the ignition is switched off. It is also possi- ed off. ble that the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant temperature increases due to ● If the ignition is switched off, the steering the heat accumulated in the engine com- column could be locked, making it impossi- partment or due to its prolonged exposure ble to control the vehicle. to solar radiation.

WARNING Always take the key with you when you Electronic immobilizer leave the vehicle. This is particularly important if there are children in the vehicle, as The electronic immobiliser prevents unau- Fig. 142 In the centre console: emergency they might otherwise be able to start the thorised persons from driving the vehicle. start. engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could In the key there is a chip that automatically If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, cause injuries. deactivates the electronic immobiliser. an emergency start-up will be required. The relevant message will appear in the dash The electronic immobiliser is automatically panel display. This may happen when, for ex- CAUTION activated when the key is outside the vehicle. ample, the vehicle key battery is very low: ● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start- If the following message is shown on the in- Stop system switches off the engine, the ig- strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle nition remains switched on. Make sure that cannot be started. the ignition is switched off before leaving

210 Start and driving

● Immediately after pushing the start button, Move the selector lever to P; the To access driving with the electric drive in place the key in the drink holder of the cen- vehicle can move; the doors can only the infotainment system: tre console ››› Fig. 142 , as close as possible be locked in P ●  > Vehicle > Exterior > Electric to the Kessy logo. ● For safety reasons, this driver message ap- drive. ● The ignition connects and the engine pears and an audible warning sounds if the starts automatically. parking lock button P is not pressed after Requirements for switching on the drive switching off the engine. Press button P oth- system erwise the vehicle could move. The drive system can be switched on when Instructions for the driver on the the following conditions are met: Ignition is switched on instrument panel display ● This driver message is displayed and a buz- ● The high voltage battery has a sufficient zer is sounded when the driver door is charge level. Depress the clutch opened with the ignition switched on. ● There is no charging cable plugged in. ● This indication is displayed on vehicles with a manual gearbox when the driver does not ● The temperature of the high-voltage bat- depress the clutch pedal when starting the tery is within the operating range. engine. The engine can only be started if the Driving with electric drive ● There is a valid remote control key in the clutch pedal is depressed. vehicle. Switching on the hybrid drive sys- Press the brake tem Switching on the drive system ● This message appears on vehicles with an ● Press the ignition and start button once. automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles The ignition must be switched on. the engine without having the brake pedal Switching on the hybrid drive activates the pressed. ● Press the brake pedal and keep it pressed. vehicle's propulsion system. When the vehicle’s drive system is switched on, the electric ● Set the gear selector switch to position N Press the brake to engage a gear drive is activated. The combustion engine or activate the parking lock P. ● This indication is displayed when starting starts automatically when the charge level of ● Press the ignition and start button or stopping the engine if the automatic the high-voltage battery is not sufficient to ››› Fig. 141 until indicator lamp  lights up transmission selector lever is in position D or run with the electric drive, or if high drive on the instrument cluster. Do not press the R and the brake pedal is not depressed. The power is required. accelerator. Release the ignition and start engine can only be started and stopped in button when the indicator lamp  lights these positions. up on the instrument cluster. The mark on the power display changes from  to . »

211 Driving

● If the indicator lamp  does not light In this case it's not possible to switch on the in traffic-restricted areas and when ma- up, cancel and repeat the operation. drive system. noeuvring or reversing. Accident hazard! ● If the vehicle has been locked with the re- As soon as the temperature of the high-volt- mote control key, the ignition and start but- age has increase enough, the drive system ton is deactivated. If you are inside the vehi- can be switched on again. Troubleshooting cle and have to start the engine, first unlock the vehicle or perform an emergency start To ensure that the drive system can be 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles ››› page 210. switched on, even in very low outside temperatures, CUPRA recommends parking the  Drive: Fault! Stop the vehicle safely vehicle in a place protected from the cold. Detecting the drive system The warning lamp lights up red. With the electric drive, the motor makes no Note There is a fault in the vehicle’s drive system. noticeable noise when the drive system is The vehicle's drive system is no longer availa- A click is heard when the drive system is switched on or while driving. Therefore, you ble. Park the vehicle in a safe place as soon turned on. This is completely normal and cannot defect that the vehicle's drive system as possible. Seek professional assistance. does not mean there is a problem. is on by engine noise. Instead, the following characteristics show that the vehicle is ready  Drive: Fault! The electric drive is not to drive: working properly. Visit a workshop Vehicle sound The warning lamp lights up yellow. ● The power display on the instrument clus- 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles ter displays  ››› page 77 . There is a fault in the vehicle’s drive system. ● The display light on the instrument cluster The electric drive makes much less noise Drive slowly to a specialised workshop to is on, regardless of whether the vehicle’s ex- than a combustion engine. In the versions have the fault repaired. terior lighting is on. for some countries, artificial vehicle sound is  Drive: Warning! Power is limited. ● The indicator lamp on the instrument clus- generated to allow the vehicle to be heard Check the manual ter switches on . better from the outside. At higher speeds, when the noise produced by the tyres and The warning lamp lights up yellow. ● An audio signal is heard. the wind increases, the vehicle's sound automatically fades out. Performance limited. The high-voltage bat- Switching on the drive system in very low tery may not be sufficiently charged or may outside temperatures WARNING have reached its operating temperature limit, for example in very cold outside tempera- If the outside temperature is very low (ap- During electric driving, the auditory per- tures. proximately -27°C (-16°F) or lower), the high- ception of the vehicle by other road users voltage battery may freeze and stop working. may be much lower. This is especially true

212 Start and driving

 Vehicle sound: Fault! Pedestrians can- ● Press button  on the control panel of the The combustion engine starts when a kick- not hear the vehicle. Visit a workshop upper centre console. down occurs in E-MODE. However, E-MODE The warning lamp lights up yellow. ● Press the E-Mode or Hybrid function but- remains activated. ton in the infotainment system. There is a vehicle sound fault. Drive with ut- Hybrid  (use the battery's charge)1) most care, as other road users may not be Further information about the operating This is the operating mode that allows you to able to hear the electric vehicle. Go immedi- mode can be found in . save most fuel. ately to a specialised workshop to have the fault repaired. E-MODE  (electric driving)1) The operating mode control unit tries to make the most of the battery charge. For this In the E-MODE electric driving mode, the ve- purpose, with active directions the naviga- hicle basically drives in electric only mode. tion data are also accessed. Operating mode selection To the extent possible, the vehicle's combustion engine is not used. In this operating mode, the electric motor and the combustion engine share the work Operating mode selection All of the following conditions must be met of driving the vehicle. 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles for E-MODE to be activated: In hybrid operating mode, the power from The vehicle has different operating modes ● The high voltage battery has a sufficient the battery charge is used optimally. If route so that it can always be optimally adjusted to charge level. guidance is activated, the vehicle may au- every situation while driving. Once the drive ● The vehicle speed is lower than 130 km/h tonomously recharge the high-voltage bat- system has been turned on, and provided (80 mph). tery using the combustion engine. that all of the operating conditions required ● The high voltage battery temperature is for this purpose have been met, the E- above -10°C. Manual control of the battery charge MODE operating mode is always activated in Manual control of the battery charge is only the first instance for electric driving. If, while driving in E-MODE mode, the neces- possible in Hybrid operating mode. The op- sary conditions are no longer met, the com- tion selected by the user is only valid until the Operating mode selection bustion engine starts and electric driving is ignition is switched off or the vehicle is suspended. In this case, the display  lights ● Switch on the drive system ››› page 211 . switched to Hybrid mode or E-MODE. » up on the instrument cluster display.

1) The displayed symbol varies depending on the active operating mode and the charge level of the high-voltage battery. 213 Driving

Press the function button  and use the The Intelligent Hybrid App allows the user Troubleshooting symbols , = and  to control the battery to save electrical energy until reaching home (charging point) with just “one click”. If this  The E-MODE operating mode is not charge: option is not selected, the maximum amount available of electrical energy will be consumed until  Pressing this symbol selects a higher The indicator lamp lights up in white. theoretical charge level. The vehicle the selected destination is reached. If the  tries to reach that new theoretical high- user has no active route, the function will of- The E-MODE operating mode (driving in voltage battery charge level while driv- fer the activation of a predictive route and electric mode) cannot be used temporarily ing. The vehicle is powered by the com- BMA mode from the widget itself with just because one or more conditions are not bustion engine. If the combustion en- one click. met. gine has “excess” power, it is used to ● The conditions must be met to use the E- Show the active operating mode charge the high-voltage battery. This MODE operating mode ››› page 213 . option increases fuel consumption. CU- The operating mode active at any given time PRA therefore recommends using the is displayed on the instrument cluster discharging socket to charge the high-volt- play, e.g. . age battery, whenever possible Start-Stop system ››› page 306 . WARNING = The high-voltage battery charge level is Switching to a different operating mode Control lamps kept at around the current level while while driving can distract you from traffic driving. If you accelerate harder or in- conditions and cause accidents.  It lights up crease the vehicle speed, the combustion engine starts up. When permitted The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en- Note by the driver’s demand for acceleration gine shutdown is active. and the vehicle speed, the vehicle Information about the operating mode that switches back to electric mode. is currently active is displayed on the in- . It lights up strument cluster display, along with the  Pressing this symbol selects a lower the- charge level of the high-voltage battery. The Start-Stop system is not available or has been dis- oretical charge level. The vehicle only connected. uses the battery's charge when it is above the selected theoretical charge level. The rest is kept until the end of the journey.

214 Start and driving

Instructions for the driver on the instru- When the ignition is switched on, the Start- Hold system, the engine will not start if you ment panel display Stop function is automatically activated. remove your foot from the brake pedal. The Start-Stop system deactivated. Start car starts when you press the accelerator the engine manually Vehicles with a manual gearbox pedal. ● This indication for the driver shows that ● When the vehicle is stopped, put it into neutral and release the clutch pedal. The en- Basic requirements for the Start-Stop the Start-Stop system cannot start the en- mode gine again. gine will stop. The warning lamp  will light up. The engine may be stopped before the ● The driver door must be closed. Start-Stop system: Fault! Function vehicle comes to a standstill (approximately 7 ● The driver's seat belt must be fastened. not available km/h). ● The bonnet must be closed. ● There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. ● When you depress the clutch pedal, the ● The engine has reached operating tem- Take the vehicle to a workshop to have the engine will start again. The indicator lamp perature. fault repaired. goes out. ● The reverse gear must not be engaged. Vehicles with an automatic gearbox ● The vehicle must not be on a very steep Description and operation ● Brake until the vehicle has come to a slope. standstill, and keep your foot on the brake The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel pedal or activate the Auto Hold system so The engine does not turn off for various and reduce CO2 emissions. that the vehicle remains braked. The engine reasons In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automat- will stop. The warning lamp  will appear in Before stopping the vehicle, the system veri- ically switch off when the vehicle stops or is the display. The engine can be stopped be- fies whether certain conditions are met. The stopping. The ignition remains switched on. fore stopping completely (approximately 7 or engine does not switch off, in the following The engine automatically switches back on 2 km/h depending on the vehicle's gear- situations for example: 2) when required. box). ● The engine has not yet reached the re- ● When you take your foot off the brake In this scenario, the light of the    quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode. pedal the engine will start up again. The » button stays lit1). warning lamp will switch off. With the Auto

1) Valid for versions with the start button on the centre console. 2) In the mHEV version (semi-hybrid), above 20 km/h. 215 Driving

● The temperature selected on the climate The engine starts by itself start the engine up again the accelerator control has not been reached. When stopped, the normal system mode must be pressed, or another gear engaged ● The interior temperature is very high/low. may be interrupted in the following situa- or the brake released. ● Defrost function button activated tions. The engine restarts by itself without in- If the selector lever is placed in R while stop- ››› page 147. volvement from the driver. ped, the engine will start up again. ● Park assist is switched on. ● The interior temperature differs from the Additional information about vehicles with ● temperature selected on the climate control. The battery is very low. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ● The steering wheel is overly turned or is ● Defrost function button activated In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will being turned. page 147. ››› start up again in certain operating conditions ● If there is a danger of misting. ● The brake has been pressed several times if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle consecutively. ● After engaging reverse gear. ahead drives off again. ● The battery is too low. ● In case of a very steep gradient. ● High power consumption. WARNING ● In a traffic jam after stopping for the fifth ● Never switch the engine off until the ve- time, the engine will not stop any more. ● The vehicle rolls forward or backward with hicle is stationary. The operation of the the engine off. ● With ESC disabled. brake and steering will not be fully guaran- ● teed. More force will be needed to turn the ● ESC deactivated. After emergency braking or loss of adhe- steering wheel or to brake. You could suffer ● The accelerator pedal (automatic trans- sion. an accident and even serious injuries. mission), or the clutch (manual transmission) ● With a trailer attached. is pressed. ● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- ● In a traffic jam after stopping for the fifth Stop system is switched off when working in ● The steering wheel is slightly turned. time, the vehicle will not stop any more. the engine compartment ››› page 217 . ● When the air conditioning is activated. ● When the battery charge level is low. ● CAUTION While the particle filter is regenerating. Additional information related to the automatic gearbox The Start-Stop system must always be . is displayed on the instrument cluster switched off when driving through flooded screen; it is also displayed in the driver infor- The engine stops when the selector lever is areas ››› page 231 . mation system, . in D, N and S, as well as in Tiptronic mode. When the parking lock button P is activated, Note the engine will also remain off when you remove your foot from the brake. In order to ● You can control whether the engine should switch off or not by reducing or 216 Start and driving increasing the brake force applied. While Manually connecting and discon- Note the vehicle remains stopped, the engine necting the Start-Stop system The system switches on every time the en- will not stop if the brake pedal is slightly gine is turned off voluntarily. pressed, in traffic jams with frequent stopping and starting for example. As soon as strong pressure is applied to the brake pedal, the engine will stop. Manual gearbox ● When stopped, the brake pedal must be kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle does not move. Changing gears ● If the engine “stalls” with a manual gearbox, it can be directly started up again by immediately pressing the clutch pedal. ● With an automatic gearbox, if the lever is placed in position D, N or S after engaging reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwards direction must be reached for the system to be in a status to stop the engine. Fig. 143 On the Infotainment system screen.: Start-Stop system connected.  View in the main menu.  View with the Infotainment system off.

If you do not want to use the system, you can disconnect it manually through the Infotain- Fig. 144 Diagram of a 6-speed manual ment system: gearbox.

● Select  > Assistants > Smart Assistants. Gear positions are indicated on the gear lever Fig. 144 . When the symbol  appears orange ››› ››› Fig. 143 the system is activated and will ● Depress the clutch and keep your foot as stop and start. When the symbol  appears far as it will go. in white the system is disconnected. ● Move the gear lever to the desired position. ● Release the clutch. »

217 Driving

Engaging reverse gear WARNING DSG automatic transmis- Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is Changing down through the gears incor- sion stopped. rectly by selecting a gear that is too low can lead to loss of control of the vehicle and ● Depress the clutch and keep your foot as cause accidents and serious injuries. Introduction far as it will go. ● With the gear lever in neutral, push it Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni- CAUTION down, move it all the way to the left and then cally controlled manual gearbox. Torque be- forwards to select reverse gear ››› Fig. 144 Engaging a gear that is too low when driving tween the engine and the gearbox is trans- R . at high speed or at high engine RPM can mitted via two independent clutches. They cause considerable damage to the clutch replace the torque converter found on con- ● Release the clutch. and gearbox. This can happen even if the ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for clutch pedal is kept depressed and the gear smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the Changing to lower gears is not engaged. vehicle. When driving, you should always change The Tiptronic system allows the driver to down through the gears progressively, i.e. to CAUTION change gears manually page 220, Chang- the gear immediately below when engine ››› Consider the following to avoid damage ing gear in Tiptronic mode. RPM is not tool high . Skipping one or ››› and premature wear: several gears when changing down through the gears at high speed or high RPM can ● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever cause damage to the clutch and gearbox, while driving. The pressure exerted by the Control lamps even if the clutch is depressed ››› . hand is transmitted to the gearbox forks. ● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal;  It lights up green WARNING Even if the pressure seems insignificant, it can cause premature wear of the clutch The brake is not pressed. If the engine is running, the vehicle starts disc. Use the footrest when not changing To select a gear range, press the brake pedal. moving as soon as a gear is engaged and gears. the clutch pedal is released. This also happens if the electronic parking brake is ● Make sure the vehicle is completely stop- switched on. ped before engaging reverse gear. ● Never engage reverse gear while the ve- ● When changing gears, always fully de- hicle is in motion. press the clutch. ● Do not “ride” the clutch with the engine running when the vehicle is stopped on an uphill slope. 218 Start and driving

Selector lever positions  – Reverse gear Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun- Reverse gear must be engaged only when tain roads) it can be advantageous to switch the vehicle is stationary and the engine is tiptronic mode ››› page 220 , to adapt the idling ››› . gears to suit the road conditions. To engage reverse gear R, you must press the WARNING brake pedal simultaneously. The reverse ● Take care not to press the accelerator lights switch on when the reverse gear R is pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve- selected and the ignition is on. hicle could start moving immediately (in some cases even if the parking brake is en-  – Neutral gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident. In this position, the gear is in neutral. ● Never move the lever to R position when driving. Failure to follow this instruction Fig. 145 In the centre console: selector Press the brake pedal to move the lever from lever. could result in an accident or failure. N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) ››› . ● With lever in any position, the foot brake The selector lever position is shown when must be depressed whenever the engine is the corresponding sign lights up. The engag- running. This is because an automatic gear-  – Permanent forward drive position ed gear is also displayed on the screen in box still transmits power even at idling manual shift positions M, D, S and E (when The D/S position enables the gears to be speed. operated in normal mode (D) or sport mode the ECO engine setting is selected in the In- ● While you are selecting a gear and the ve- dividual profile ››› page 226 ). (S). To select Sport mode S, move the lever hicle is stopped with the engine running, do backwards. Pushing the lever again will select In certain versions, S+ or M+ is also displayed not accelerate. Failure to follow this in- normal mode D. The selected driving mode on the screen when the Drift or CUPRA pro- struction could result in an accident. is displayed on the instrument panel screen. file is selected ››› page 226 . S+ and M+ are ● As a driver you should never leave your more extreme shift modes than the conven- In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects the vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is tional Sport (S) mode. best gear ratio. This depends on the engine engaged. Switch on the electronic parking load, the road speed and the dynamic gear brake and select the parking lock (P).  – Parking lock control programme (DCP). When the P button is pressed, the drive Sport mode (S) should be selected for a Note wheels are locked. Only press P when the ve- sporty driving style. This setting makes use of ● If the lever is moved accidentally to N hicle is stationary ››› . the engine's maximum power output. When when driving, release the accelerator and accelerating the gear shifts will be noticea- let the engine speed drop to idling before To press the P button you must press the ble. selecting gear range D or S again. » brake pedal simultaneously. 219 Driving

● If the power supply is interrupted while Changing gear in Tiptronic mode ● To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right- the P parking lock is active, it will not be hand gear shirt paddle towards the steering possible to move the lever. If this should wheel for approximately 1 second. happen the manual release can be used. In this case, you should seek professional as- To keep Tiptronic mode permanently switch- sistance. ed on, move the selector lever to the S position. If the selector lever is in position D and the gear shift paddles are not operated for Note some time, the Tiptronic mode will automat- ● If a gear has been selected, the vehicle ically be switched off. does not move forwards or back. Proceed to the next mode: CAUTION – When the vehicle does not move in the ● When accelerating, if a higher gear is not Fig. 146 required direction, the system may not Steering wheel: automatic transmission levers selected, it will automatically change short- have the gear range correctly engaged. ly before reaching the maximum permitted Press the brake pedal and engage the Tiptronic gives the driver the option to RPM. gear range again. change gears manually. ● Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys- – If the vehicle still does not move in the tem will not change until it detects that the required direction, there is a system When you change to the Tiptronic pro- engine will not reach its maximum RPM. malfunction. Seek specialist assistance gramme, the vehicle remains in the currently and have the system checked. selected gear. This is possible as long as the system is not changing gear automatically due to a traffic situation. Driving with an automatic gearbox Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel paddles The gearbox changes gear ratios automatically as the vehicle moves. The gear shift paddles can be used when the selector lever is in the D/S position. The engine can only be started with the lever in the N position and the P button must be lit ● Press the gearshift paddle + to select a up (the parking lock remains active). higher gear ››› Fig. 146 . ● Press the gearshift paddle – to select a Driving down hills lower gear. Under certain circumstances it may be advantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to 220 Start and driving select the gear manually according to driving Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold and engine speed. This takes advantage of conditions ››› . function the maximum acceleration of the vehicle ● Pull on the electronic parking brake but- ››› . Stop/Park ton. The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed To park on flat ground, just press the P but- ● Once you have engaged a gear, gently until the engine reaches maximum rpm. ton ››› Fig. 145 . On slopes the parking brake press the accelerator and pull on the elec- should first be applied and then press the P tronic parking brake button. WARNING button. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Selec- If the driver door is opened and the P button Back-up programme tor lever positions on page 219. has not been activated, the vehicle could If all the positions of the lever are shown over ● Never allow the brake to rub and do not move. The following warning is displayed on a light background on the instrument clus- use the brake pedal too often or for long the instrument panel:  Gear change: ter, there is a system fault and the automatic periods, as the brakes can overheat. This selector lever in the drive posi- gearbox will operate with the backup pro- reduces the braking power, increases the tion!. Additionally, a buzzer will sound. gramme. It is still possible to drive the vehi- braking distance or even causes a brake cle, however, at low speeds and within a se- system fault. Stopping on a downhill lected range of gears. Driving in reverse ● If you have to stop on a hill, keep the ve- Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre- gear may not be possible. hicle’s brakes applied with the brake pedal or parking brake. vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary, apply the electronic parking brake ››› . Parking lock manual release mechanism WARNING Do not accelerate while a range of gears is If, in the event of a power failure (e.g. the 12- engaged to prevent the car from rolling volt vehicle battery is drained), the vehicle Please note that if the road surface is slip- downhill ››› . must be towed and the parking lock can be pery or wet, the kick-down feature could released manually. In this case, you should cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding. Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold func- seek professional assistance. tion Kick-down CAUTION ● Once you have engaged a gear, take your foot off the brake pedal and gently press the The kick-down device provides maximum ● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do accelerator. acceleration when the gear selector lever is not attempt to stop it from rolling by de- in the positions D, S or in Tiptronic mode. pressing the accelerator when a gear has been selected. This could cause overheat- When the accelerator pedal is pressed right ing and damage the automatic gearbox. » down, the automatic gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending on road speed 221 Driving

● If you allow the vehicle to roll with the ● Press the brake pedal with your left foot Note lever in position N and the engine off, the and hold it down for at least one second. ● After using the Launch control pro- automatic gearbox will be damaged due to ● Set the selector lever to position S or Tip- gramme, the temperature in the gearbox a lack of lubrication. tronic, or select the Sport or Cupra Drive may have increased considerably. In this ● In certain driving situations or traffic con- Profile ››› page 226 . case, the programme could be disabled for ditions, the gears could overheat and be ● With your right foot, press the accelerator several minutes. The programme can be  damaged! If the warning lamp lights up, down to the full throttle or kick-down posi- used again after the cooling phase. stop the vehicle as soon as you can and wait tion. The engine speed will stabilise at about ● Accelerating with the launch control pro- for the gearbox to cool page 223 . ››› 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about gramme places a heavy load on all parts of ● If the gearbox operates with the backup 2,000 rpm (diesel engine). the vehicle. This can result in increased programme, take the vehicle to a special- wear and tear. ● Take your left foot off the brake pedal. The ised workshop and have the fault repaired without delay. vehicle starts with maximum acceleration.

WARNING downhill assistant ● Always adapt your driving style to the Launch-control program Downhill speed control is activated when the traffic conditions. lever is in the D/S position and the brake is The Launch-control programme enables ● Only use the Launch control programme applied. An appropriate lower gear is engag- when road and traffic conditions permit, maximum acceleration from a standstill. ed. and make sure your manner of driving and Condition: the engine must have reached accelerating the vehicle does not incon- The assistant attempts to maintain the speed operating temperature and the steering venience or endanger other road users. at which the vehicle was travelling when the wheel must not be turned. ● Make sure that the ESC remains switched brake was applied, within logical limits. It may The engine speed for Launch-control is dif- on. Please note that when the TCS and ESC be necessary to correct the speed by press- ferent on petrol and diesel engines. are deactivated, the wheels may start to ing the brake. spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of The assistant can only change down as far as To use the Launch-control you must discon- accident! nect the traction control (TCS) or activate 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steep ● After moving off, you should activate the the ESC Sport or ESC OFF mode, using the slopes you may have to switch to tiptronic TCS or deactivate the ESC “sport” mode Infotainment system menu: press the func- mode and thus manually change down to again using the Infotainment system: func-  2nd or 1st gear to take advantage of engine tion button > Assistants > ESC Menu. The tion button  > Assistants. warning lamp  will remain on. braking and take the load off the brake system.

222 Start and driving

Downhill speed control is deactivated as Activation of the inertia mode how smoothly you remove your foot from soon as the road levels out again or you press Condition: lever in position D, slopes of less the accelerator. the accelerator pedal. than 12% and speeds between 20 and 130 WARNING On vehicles with a cruise control system km/h (12 and 80 mph). ››› page 236, downhill speed control is acti- ● If the inertia mode has been switched on, ● Gently take your foot off the accelerator. vated when you set a cruising speed. take into account, when approaching an obstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler- The indication will be shown on the instru- ate in the usual manner: risk of accident! WARNING ment panel , the engaged gear and cur- ● When using inertia mode while travelling The downhill speed control cannot defy the rent consumption will disappear and the down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be word Inertia will appear. risk of accident! maintained constant in all situations. Al- The gears will automatically disengage and ways be prepared to use the brakes! ● If other users drive your vehicle, warn the vehicle will roll freely, without the effect them about inertia mode. of the engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed. Hill Hold Control (HHC) Note Stopping inertia mode ● The operation of the inertia mode in When driving up a slope or driving in Off- combination with hybrid engines (MHEV ● Press the brake or the accelerator pedal. road with the lever in position D/S, stopping and PHEV) can cause the combustion en- the vehicle switches on the hill hold control. To take advantage of the engine's inertia gine to switch off. When the brake pedal is released, the assis- mode, simply remove your foot from the ac- ● The inertia mode will be automatically tant keeps the vehicle’s brakes applied for a celerator. disconnected on gradients steeper than few seconds to give the driver time to press 15%. Applying both the inertia mode (= pro- the accelerator pedal and continue driving. longed section with less energy) and inertia disconnection (= shorter section without the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel Indications on the instrument Inertia mode consumption and emission balance. panel display With Drive Profile page 226 , the inertia The inertia mode allows you to travel certain ››› Clutch distances without using the accelerator, mode can be activated in the Comfort or In-  Clutch overheating! Please stop! which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the individual profiles. If the engine is set to Eco in ertia mode to “let” the vehicle “roll”. the Individual profile, it activates when the ● The clutch has overheated and could be operating conditions are met, regardless of damaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox to cool with the engine idling and press the P » 223 Driving

 parking lock button. When the warning lamp Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your Display Meaning and the driver message turn off, go to a spe- driving accordingly cialised workshop to get the fault repaired. If ● Continue driving at moderate speeds.  Optimum gear. they do not turn off, do not continue driving. When the warning lamp switches off, you Changing to a higher gear is recom- Seek specialist assistance.    can continue driving in a normal manner. mended. Faults in the gearbox  Gearbox: press the brake and en-    Changing to a lower gear is recom- gage a gear again. mended.  Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle and place the lever in the position ● If the warning was caused by the tempera- P. ture of the gearbox, this driver message will Information regarding the “cleanliness” of be displayed when the gearbox has cooled the particulate filter ● There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the ve- again. hicle in a safe place and do not continue When the exhaust system detects that the driving. Seek specialist assistance. particulate filter is close to saturation, this system’s self-cleaning function recommends  Gearbox: System fault! You may Gear-change recommen- the optimal gear for that function continue driving. ››› page 321. ● Have the fault corrected by a specialised dation workshop without delay. WARNING Selecting the optimal gear The gear change recommendation is an  Gearbox: System fault! You can auxiliary function and in no case should be continue driving with restrictions. Depending on the equipment on the instru- a substitute for careful driving. Reverse gear disabled ment panel screen, a recommendation is ● Responsibility for selecting the correct ● Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop shown with the gear that should be engaged gear, depending on the circumstances, and have the fault repaired. to optimise consumption. rests solely with the driver. Displayed only when driving in Tiptronic  Gearbox: System fault! You can mode page 220 . For the sake of the environment continue driving in D until switch- ››› ing off the engine No recommendation will appear if the opti- Selecting the correct gear can help to save ● Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek spe- mal gear is engaged. The current gear will be fuel. cialist assistance. displayed. Note The recommended gear display turns off when you are no longer in tiptronic mode. 224 Start and driving

Hill Descent Control (HDC) mum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of switched off manually in the infotainment 30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, the system using the  > HDC function button. driver may increase or decrease the speed Control lamps within the limit by pressing the accelerator or WARNING the brake. At this point the function is inter- Always be ready to brake. Otherwise, an ac- It lights up white  rupted and, if necessary, it is then reactiva- cident could occur and cause injury. ted. Hill Descent Control is active. ● Hill Descent Control is only an auxiliary Even so, it is imperative that the surface system that in some situations may not suf-  It lights up grey guarantees sufficient adhesion. For this rea- ficiently brake the vehicle when going son, the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil its down a slope. Hill Descent Control is not active. The system is switch- function when, for example, descending a ● The speed of the vehicle may increase ed on, but is not adjusting. slope with a frozen or slippery surface. despite the intervention of Hill Descent Control. Some control and warning lamps will light up Hill Descent Control is available when the briefly when the ignition is switched on to dash panel display shows the message . check certain functions. They will switch off Hill Descent Control automatically inter- after a few seconds. venes if the following conditions are met: Steering

WARNING ● The vehicle engine is running. Information relating to different Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- ● The Offroad driving profile has been se- vehicle processes. trol and warning lamps on page 84. lected ››› page 226 . Driving at a speed below  30 km/h (18 mph) (the message is shown Electro-mechanical power steering adapts on the instrument panel). electronically to the speed of the car, torque Description and operation ● The slope of the descent is at least 10% and steering angle. when driving forward and 9% when driving in Even if the power steering fails or the engine Hill Descent Control limits the speed on reverse. is stopped, it is possible to continue to rotate steep descents by automatically braking all ● The brake and the accelerator are not the steering wheel as long as the key remains four wheels, both when moving forward and pressed. in the ignition, but more force must be ap- in reverse. As the anti-lock brake system re- plied. » mains active, it prevents the wheels from Hill Descent Control is deactivated on press- locking. ing the brake and the accelerator or if the slope is below 5%. The function can be After starting the descent of a slope below 30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a mini- 225 Driving

Progressive steering  It lights up yellow ● If the warning lamps and the correspond- Depending on the vehicle’s features, it may ing messages are ignored, the vehicle may Limited steering operation. or may not incorporate a progressive steer- stall in traffic, causing serious damage or Drive carefully to a specialised workshop to have the accidents and injuries. ing system. steering checked. ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity In city traffic you do not need to turn so If the warning light does not come on again after restarting the engine and driving a short distance, it is and in a safe place. much on parking, manoeuvring or in very not necessary to check the steering. tight turns. OR: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and recon- On the road or on the motorway, progressive nected. steering transmits, for example, in bends, a Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph). Driving modes (Drive Pro- sportier, more direct and noticeably more file) dynamic driving sensation.  It flashes yellow

The steering column is jammed. Introduction When stopped, turn the steering wheel in both direc- Control lamp tions. The Drive Profile enables the driver to choose between the Comfort, Sport, Cupra OR: The steering column does not unlock or lock.  It lights up red and Individual, profiles, which modify the Turn off the ignition and turn it on again. Consider the behaviour of several vehicle functions, pro- Faulty steering. messages shown on the instrument panel display. viding different driving experiences. Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon as Do not continue driving if the steering column remains locked after switching on the ignition. Seek spe- possible and in a safe manner. In addition, the 4Drive version features the cialist assistance. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have Offroad1) and Snow profiles. the fault repaired as soon as possible. The control lamp should light up for a few The Individual profile can be configured ac- seconds when the ignition is switched on. It cording to personal preferences. should go out once the engine is started. The VZ5 version exclusively features the WARNING Drift profile. Never ignore the warning lamps or messages.

1) Not available for PHEV hybrid vehicles. 226 Start and driving

Description engine and intake noise, as well as the noise Air conditioning from the exhaust system. The configuration Climatronic can operate in Eco mode, espe- Depending on the equipment fitted in the is preset for each profile and can be modi- cially restricting fuel consumption. vehicle, the Drive Profile can operate on the fied in the Individual profile. following functions: Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Adaptive chassis control (DCC) Engine Depending on the driving profile, the per- The DCC continuously adapts the damping formance of the ACC varies, to allow more Depending on the profile selected, the en- of the suspension system to the characteris- sporty acceleration and braking or a more gine responds more quickly or smoothly to tics of the road surface and the driving situa- respectful fuel consumption. the accelerator being pressed. tion (speed, acceleration and steering wheel angle) according to the selected driving pro- In vehicles with automatic transmission, the PreCrash system file. The vehicle's dynamic behaviour is also behaviour of the transmission is modified, adapted to improve grip on curves and turn- The PreCrash system adapts according to whenever a gear is changed up and down, ing capacity. Within the Individual profile the selected configuration. The Sport and and at other times. The idle level may also you can also adjust the DCC level in a cus- Offroad driving profiles have specific set- change according to the selected profile and tomised manner. tings to adapt them to driving and terrain selector lever position. characteristics ››› page 22 . In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow- The Inertia Mode function can also be ing message is displayed on the instrument switched on by selecting the Comfort pro- Hill descent control assistant screen Fault: shock absorber regula- file, or from the Individual profile by putting tion This assistant can be activated or deactiva- the engine into ECO mode. This allows fuel ted in the Offroad profile. Hill Descent Con- consumption to be reduced. Other factors Four-wheel drive (4Drive) trol limits the speed on steep descents by can cause it to switch on ››› page 223 . automatically braking all four wheels, both Modify the transmission to adjust the vehi- With manual transmission, the ECO profile when moving forward and in reverse cle’s traction capacity to the road surface. changes the gear change recommendations ››› page 225. The acceleration capacity from a standstill to facilitate more efficient driving. will also be modified. Hill Start Assist Engine sound Steering It is possible to activate or deactivate this as- Depending on the equipment and the selec- sistant in the Offroad profile ››› page 223 . » The power steering varies its driving modes ted profile, it modifies the acoustic sensation and adapts to the profile selected, thus of- in the vehicle's interior and the outside fering the best behaviour for each situation. sound levels. It acts on several components of the vehicle to strengthen or weaken the 227 Driving

Torque splitter (only the VZ5 version) file or double press on the icon to show the Driving pro- Characteristics This distributes torque as appropriate be- available profiles. file tween the rear wheels, giving more traction ● OR: With the Infotainment System turned It allows you to personalise the on corners. off, by pressing on the Drive Profile icon, the configuration. The functions that available driving profiles will be displayed.  Individual can be adjusted depend on the ● OR: briefly press the CUPRA button on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. left hand side of the steering wheel Setting the driving profile Maintains optimal off-road driving ››› Fig. 147 to change the driving profile.  by allowing the personalisation of Press and hold the CUPRA button to access Offroadb) the vehicle’s configuration param- the Cupra profile directly. eters.

The icon of the selected profile is displayed  Configures the vehicle to enable a at all times in the upper central part of the Driftc) controlled oversteer experience. instrument panel and on the Infotainment System screen when it is turned off a) Available in the VZ version. ››› page 85. b) Only for 4Drive models. c) Only available in the VZ5 version. Driving pro- Characteristics file WARNING Fig. 147 Multifunction steering wheel: button to change the driving profile. It permits more relaxed and com- When operating the Drive Profile, pay at- fortable driving, for example for tention to all traffic: doing otherwise could There are several ways to select a driving  long motorway journeys. Its main cause an accident. profile using the Infotainment System: Comfort characteristic is the soft suspension setting (DCC). Note ● Press the function button  > Drive Pro- It represents the vehicle's default ● When the engine is switched off it will file, available profiles will be displayed.  behaviour, suitable for dynamic store the driving profile that was selected ● OR: Press the function button  > Vehicle Sport driving. when the ignition was turned off. When re- settings > Drive Profile, available profiles will It gives the vehicle a decidedly starting, the engine and the gearbox will be displayed.  sportier nature, and makes for start in their Comfort mode. To return the a) ● OR: Press the function button , slide your Cupra maximum performance. engine and gear to your desired mode, re- finger horizontally across the screen to Drive select the corresponding driving profile. Profile. Press on  to change the driving pro-

228 Start and driving

● In the VZ5 version, when you switch the gine speeds. Always engage a lower gear General notes ignition off and on again, the Comfort when the engine works “irregularly”. For the On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine driving profile is activated by default. first 1000 km or 600 miles, please note: power is distributed to all four wheels. The ● When the vehicle is restarted after using ● Do not use full throttle. distribution of power is controlled automati- the Offroad profile, the system is always ac- cally according to your driving style and the ● tivated in the Comfort profile. Do not force the engine above two thirds road conditions. Also see ››› page 269 . of its maximum speed. ● Your speed and driving style must always The four-wheel drive is specially designed to ● Do not tow a trailer. be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic complement the superior engine power. conditions. Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600 This combination gives the vehicle excep- to 1000 miles), gradually increase power tional handling and performance capabili- until reaching the maximum speed and high ties, both on normal roads and in more diffi- Driving tips engine speeds. cult conditions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or perhaps especially for this reason), it is Running in new tyres and brake pads important to observe certain safety points Running in ››› . ● Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres Please observe the instructions for running- page 340. ››› Winter tyres in new components. ● Information about brakes page 264 . ››› Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will have plenty of traction in winter conditions, Running-in the engine For the sake of the environment even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, A new engine must be driven through a run- If the engine is run in gently, the life of the we still recommend that winter tyres or all- in period during its first 1500 kilometres engine will be increased and the engine oil season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to (1000 miles). During its first few hours of consumption reduced. give even better braking response. running, the internal friction in the engine is greater than later on when all the moving Snow chains parts have bedded down. Four-wheel drive (4Drive) On roads where snow chains are mandatory, How the vehicle is driven for the first this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive 1500 km (1000 miles) influences the future On four-wheel drive models, the engine ››› page 345. engine performance. Throughout the life of power is distributed to all four wheels the vehicle, it should be driven at a moderate Changing tyres speed (especially when the engine is cold) this will reduce engine wear and increase its On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four useful life. Never drive at extremely low en- tyres must have the same rolling » 229 Driving

circumference. Also avoid using tyres with Economical and environmentally Changing gear to save energy varying tread depths ››› page 340 . friendly driving An effective way of saving is to change in advance to a higher gear. Off-roader? Fuel consumption, environmental pollution Manual gearbox: change from first to sec- Your CUPRA vehicle is not an off-roader: it and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres all ond gear as soon as possible. Choosing the does not have enough ground clearance to depend largely on driving style. Consump- correct gear saves fuel. Select the highest be used as such. It is therefore best to avoid tion can be reduced between 10-15% with possible gear suitable for the driving situa- rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as an efficient driving type. The following section (the engine should continue to run with possible. tion gives you some tips on lessening the im- cyclical regularity). pact on the environment and reducing your WARNING operating costs at the same time. Automatic transmission: accelerate gradually and without reaching the “kick-down” ● Even with four-wheel drive, you should position. always adjust your speed to suit the condi- Active cylinder management (ACT®) tions. Do not let the extra safety features Depending on vehicle equipment, the active tempt you into taking any risks when driv- cylinder management (ACT®) may deacti- Avoid driving at high speed ing. Risk of accident! vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv- Avoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed, ● The braking capability of your vehicle is ing situation does not require too much whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis- limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no power. The number of active cylinders can sion of harmful gases and noise pollution different from a car without four-wheel be seen on the instrument panel display. multiply as speed is increased. Driving at drive. So do not be tempted to drive too ››› page 67. moderate speeds will help to save fuel. fast on firm or slippery roads just because the vehicle still has good acceleration in Foresight when driving Reduce idling time these conditions. Risk of accident! If you think ahead when driving, you will In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling ● On wet roads bear in mind that the front need to brake less and thus accelerate less. is automatically reduced. In vehicles without wheels may start to “aquaplane” and lose Take advantage of the inertia of the vehicle the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off contact with the road if the car is driven too whenever possible, with a gear engaged. the engine, for example, at level crossings fast. If this should happen, there will be no sudden increase in engine speed to warn This takes advantage of the engine braking and at traffic lights that remain red for long the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel effect, reducing wear on the brakes and periods of time. When an engine has drive car. For this reason you should always tyres. Emissions and fuel consumption will reached operating temperature, and de- choose a driving speed suitable for the road drop to zero. pending on the cylinder capacity, keeping it conditions. Risk of accident! switched off for a minimum of about 5 seconds already saves more than the amount of fuel necessary for restarting. 230 Start and driving

The engine takes a long time to warm up tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater Note when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- rolling resistance, under-inflation also in- tant emissions are also especially high during creases tyre wear and impairs handling. ● If you have the Start-Stop system, it is recommended that it should not be discon- this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best Do not use winter tyres all year round as nected. to drive off immediately after starting the en- they increase fuel consumption by up to gine. Avoid running the engine at high ● It is recommended that you close the 10%. speed. windows when driving at more than 60 km/h (37 mph). Avoid carrying unnecessary loads Regular maintenance ● Do not drive with your foot resting on the Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable plate slip. This causes wear and can damage before the engine is started. A well-serviced make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- the clutch plate. engine gives you the benefit of improved ing transported. ● Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability brake. The fuel consumption will be lower and an enhanced resale value. A badly serv- Since the luggage rack increases the aero- and you will prevent the clutch plate from iced engine can consume up to 10% more dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re- being damaged. fuel than necessary. move it when not needed. At speeds of 100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save ● Use the engine brake on downhills by changing to the gear that is best suited for Avoid short journeys 12% of fuel. the gradient. Fuel consumption will be The engine and catalytic converter need to “zero” and the brakes will not suffer. Save electrical energy reach their optimal operating temperature in order to minimise fuel consumption and The engine drives the alternator, thereby emissions. generating electricity. This implies that any Driving on flooded roads increase in power consumption also increa- A cold engine consumes a disproportionate ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switch amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work- To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices ing temperature after about four kilometres flooded roads, take the following into ac- that use a lot of electricity include the blower (2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will re- count: at a high setting, the rear window heating or turn to a normal level. the seat heating. ● The water should never come above the lower edge of the bodywork. Check tyre pressure Plug-in hybrid drive: brake early and evenly to take advantage of energy recovery. ● Drive at pedestrian speed. » Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the correct pressures ››› page 342 to save fuel. If the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-

231 Driving

WARNING information about service station networks Driver assistance sys- selling unleaded fuel. After driving through flooded zones, braking effectiveness can decrease if the brake ● In some countries, it is possible that your tems discs or pads are damp ››› page 264 . vehicle is not sold and some spare parts may not be available or the technical services General notes may only be able to make limited repairs. CAUTION ● Driving through flooded areas may dam- CUPRA distributors and importers will pro- Safety advice age vehicle components such as the en- vide information about the technical prepa- gine, transmission or electrical system. ration that your vehicle requires and also WARNING about necessary maintenance and repair ● Whenever driving through water, the ● Responsibility for driving rests with the possibilities. Start-Stop system must be switched off driver at all times. The driver assistance ››› page 214. systems are not a replacement for driver CAUTION attention. Focus all your attention on driv- Note CUPRA does not accept liability for any ing and be prepared to intervene at all damage to the vehicle due to the use of a times. ● Check the depth of the water before en- lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or ● Use the driver assistance systems only tering the flooded zone. the non-availability of genuine spare parts. when conditions allow. The driving style ● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, must always be suitable for the weather, or stop the engine. visibility, road and traffic conditions. ● Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc- ● In order for driver assistance systems to tion cause waves that could exceed your react correctly, sensors and cameras must vehicle's critical height. operate without limitations. Please read ● Avoid driving through salt water (corro- the notes on sensors and cameras in this sion) ››› page 353 . chapter.

Note Trips abroad ● Keep in mind the specific rules of each country, especially when it comes to driv- ● With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured ing, formation of an emergency corridor, that lead-free petrol is available throughout braking distance, speed, parking position, the journey ››› page 317, Fuel types . Seek

232 Driver assistance systems wheel position, etc. The driver is solely re- cumstances. As a driver, you must be pre- Driver assistance sensors sponsible for always complying with the pared to act at all times. specific regulations of each country. and cameras ● The area in front of and around the radar Note sensor should not be covered with adhe- Front radar ● sives, additional headlights or similar items, Due to the system's detection limits in the as this could have a negative impact on the surroundings, the systems may not give operation of the assistants. If the vehicle is warnings or intervene on time, or they not properly repaired or structural modifi- might do so even if it is not desired. In addi- cations are made to it, the operation of the tion, the auxiliary systems may incorrectly assistants may be affected. interpret a manoeuvre and, as a result, warn the driver in an unexpected manner. ● The repair and adjustment of sensors and ● cameras requires special knowledge and When the towing mode is selected, some tools. It is recommended to visit a CUPRA assist systems may react with limitations, in dealership for this purpose. an unusual way or may not be available. Keep in mind the instructions relating to the towing mode. Fig. 148 On the front bumper: radar sen- System limits sors.

WARNING ● Driver assistance systems can not overcome the laws of physics. Depending on the circumstances, a collision may not be avoidable. ● Warnings, notices and indicator lamps may not be displayed on time, or may be displayed incorrectly, e.g. if a vehicle approaches too quickly. ● Corrective interventions by driver assis- Fig. 149 Detection area. tance systems (e.g. interventions in the steering or brakes) may be insufficient or A radar sensor may be fitted to the front may never occur, depending on the cir- bumper of the vehicle ››› Fig. 148 . The front radar detects any objects in its detection » 233 Driving

zone ››› Fig. 149 and provides support for ● The operation of the radar can be affec- detects lane boundaries (lines) to provide the following functions: ted by strong reflections of the emitted sig- support for the following functions: nal. This may occur, for example, in an en- ● Front Assist page 240 . ● Lane Assist page 252 . ››› closed car park or due to the presence of ››› ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) metallic objects (e.g. guard rails or sheets ● Travel Assist ››› page 254 . ››› page 244. used in road works). ● Emergency assist ››› page 256 . ● The sensor may not be adjusted correctly The radar can have a range of up to 120m if it receives an impact. This may compro- CAUTION (400ft) depending on road and weather mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it. To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- conditions. If you have the feeling that the radar sensor tems, take the following points into consid- is damaged or adjusted incorrectly, switch eration: WARNING off the Front Assist and ACC functions to The visibility of the radar sensor can be im- avoid any damage. If this occurs have it ad- ● Clean the field of vision of the camera paired by dirt or environmental influences justed. regularly and make sure it is free of snow such as rain, fog, snow, mud, dust, insects and ice. etc. In this case the Front Assist and ACC ● Do not cover the field of vision of the functions may stop working. The instru- Front camera camera. ment panel displays the following message: ● Check that the windscreen is not dam- No sensor vision! And the Front Assist aged in the area of the camera's field of vi- unavailable or ACC unavailable warning sion. lights come on. ● Clean the sensor area on the bumper as indicated in ››› page 355, Cleaning the exterior . When the radar sensor starts correctly detecting again, the message disappears from the screen and the functions become available again.

CAUTION Fig. 150 On the windscreen: field of vision ● If the radar sensor is dirty or poorly adjus- of the Lane Assist system. ted, the Front Assist system may give unnecessary warnings and apply the brakes Depending on the equipment, the vehicle inappropriately. may be fitted with a front camera on the front windscreen ››› Fig. 150 . This camera 234 Driver assistance systems

Rear radar ● Lane departure warning (Side Assist) ● The visibility of radar sensors may be af- ››› page 259. fected due to leaves, snow, strong haze or ● Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ››› page 261 . dirt, among others. Clean the area in front of the sensors. ● Door opening warning (Exit Assist) ››› page 262. ● Never use the lane departure warning, the rear cross traffic alert or the door opening warning if the radar sensors are Automatic deactivation of supported dirty. functions The rear radar sensors deactivate automatically when, among other reasons, one of the sensors is detected to be permanently cov- Ultrasound sensors ered. This may be the case if, for example, Fig. 151 Rear view of the vehicle: radar The bumpers are fitted with ultrasound sen- there is a layer of snow or ice over one of the sensor zones. sors to perform the following functions: sensors. The relevant text message will appear in the ● Park Assist ››› page 274 . dash panel display. ● Parking aid Plus ››› page 282 . ● Rear parking aid ››› page 285 . CAUTION ● The radar sensors on the rear bumper CAUTION may be damaged or shifted in the event of a ● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, collision, for example, when entering or ex- wheel arch and vehicle underbody can iting a parking space. This may result in the modify the orientation of the sensors. This system disconnecting itself, or at least pos- can affect the parking aid function. Have sibly having its functionality diminished. the function checked by a specialised Fig. 152 Sensor detection zones ● In order to ensure that the radar sensors workshop. work properly, keep the rear bumper free ● A number plate or number plate holder The radar sensors are located on the left and of snow and ice and do not cover it. right of the bumper and are not visible from with dimensions that exceed the space for ● The rear bumper should only be painted the outside ››› Fig. 151 . The sensors monitor the number plate, or a cured or deformed with paint authorised by CUPRA. The lane number plate can cause false detections or both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve- departure warning's functions may be limi- a loss of visibility for the sensors. » hicle ››› Fig. 152 . ted or work incorrectly if other paints are They support the following functions: used.

235 Driving

Note ● Area View ››› page 286 Cruise control system (CCS) ● ● In order to guarantee good operation, Rear View Camera ››› page 288 . keep the sensors clean, free of snow and Introduction ice, and do not cover them with stickers or WARNING other objects. The use of a number plate may interfere in The cruise control system (GRA) helps main- ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- the views shown on the screen, since the tain a constant speed set by you. ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly, cameras' field of vision may be reduced. unless you do so very briefly, and always Speed range keep a distance of more than 10 cm away. CAUTION The cruise control system is available when ● Fitting certain accessories to the front of ● In order to guarantee good system opera- driving in forward gear at a speed of over ap- the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad- tion, keep the cameras clean, free of snow prox. 20 km/h (15 mph). vertising, may interfere with the operation or ice, and do not cover them with adhe- of the Park Assist. sives or other objects. The camera can be Temporarily switching off the cruise con- cleaned by operating the windscreen wiper. trol ● The vehicle is fitted with a cleaning sys- The saved speed can be exceeded at any Area View system tem for the rear camera. To operate it, push time, e.g. for overtaking. The cruise control is the wiper lever away from the steering suspended during acceleration and is then wheel (the camera will be cleaned at the resumed with the saved speed. same time as the rear window). If the camera is still dirty after using it, clean it man- Status display ually. ● Never use abrasive cleaning products to When the cruise control system is switched clean the camera lenses. on, the instrument cluster display shows the saved speed and the system status: ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lenses. Doing It lights up grey so could damage the lenses.  The cruise control system is switched on, but regula- Fig. 153 In the rear lid handle: location of tion is not active. the reverse assist camera.  It lights up green Depending on your vehicle’s equipment, it can be fitted with 1 or 4 cameras that provide The cruise control system is switched on and regula- support to the following functions: tion is active. 236 Driver assistance systems

If there is no speed saved, the instrument the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- Start regulation  cluster display shows instead of speed. ditions. ● When the vehicle is moving, press the but- ● After use, always switch off the speed ton . Changing gears limiter to prevent the speed being regula- As soon as the clutch pedal is depressed, ted against your wishes. The cruise control system saves and regulates the current speed. regulation is suspended and resumes once ● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is the gear change has been made. too high for the prevailing road, traffic or weather conditions. Adjusting the speed Driving down slopes While the GRA is set, the stored speed can Shift into a low gear before descending a be adjusted: long hill. This makes use of engine braking Operating the cruise control  + 1 km/h (1 mph) and relieves the brakes.  - 1 km/h (1 mph) Driving down slopes  + 10 km/h (5 mph) Shift into a low gear before descending a  - 10 km/h (5 mph) long hill. This makes use of engine braking The vehicle adapts the current speed by ac- and relieves the brakes. celerating or stopping accelerating. WARNING Interrupting the adjustment If it is impossible to drive with sufficient ●  braking distance and at a constant speed, Briefly press the button on the multi- using the cruise control system may cause function steering wheel or press the brake accidents and serious injuries may occur. Fig. 154 On the multifunction steering pedal. wheel: buttons to operate the speed limit- ● Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is er. The speed is stored. bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice, Connecting Reinstating the cruise control rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads. ● Press the  button. ● Press the  button. ● Only use the cruise control system on paved roads with a firm surface. There is no speed saved and regulation is not The cruise control system resumes the saved ● Adapt your speed and safety distance to yet operating. speed and regulates it. » the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit

237 Driving

Switching off ● A brake assistance system has intervened, Status display ● Press and hold the button . e.g. TCS or ESC. When the speed limiter is switched on, the ● Front Assist has braked the vehicle. instrument cluster display shows the saved The cruise control system switches off and ● If the fault continues, disconnect the speed and the system status: the saved speed is deleted. Emergency Assist and consult a specialised workshop.  It lights up grey Switching off the speed limiter The speed limiter is switched on but regulation is not ●  Press the button. active. ● Select the speed limiter on the instrument Speed limiter cluster display.  It lights up green

The cruise control system is switched off. Introduction The speed limiter is switched on and active.

The speed limited helps the driver not to ex- Driving down slopes Problems and solutions ceed a set speed. Shift into a low gear before descending a long hill. This makes use of engine braking Temporarily switching off the cruise Speed range  and relieves the brakes. control The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a programmed speed, from 30 km/h (20 mph) The control lamp switches on yellow. WARNING approx. and faster. After use, always switch off the speed limit- ● Abnormal operation. Switch off the cruise er to prevent the speed being regulated control system and take the vehicle to a spe- By selecting the speed limiter against your wishes. cialist workshop. The speed limitation can be interrupted at ● The speed limiter does not relieve the any time by depressing the accelerator pedal driver of their responsibility to drive at the The adjustment is interrupted unexpect- fully, beyond the point of resistance. As soon appropriate speed. Do not drive at high edly as the saved speed is exceeded, the green speed if not necessary. indicator light flashes and an audible warning ● If the clutch pedal is pressed for a long ● Using the speed limiter under adverse signal sounds. The speed is stored. time. weather conditions is dangerous and can ● The vehicle has exceeded the saved speed The limiter is reactivated automatically after cause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning, for a long time. returning to less than the set speed. snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speed limiter when the status of the road and the ● No forward gear has been selected. weather conditions allow it.

238 Driver assistance systems

Operating the speed limiter  - 10 km/h (5 mph) The control lamp switches on yellow.

● Interrupting the adjustment Malfunctions Switch off the speed limiter and go to a specialist workshop. ● Press the  button.

The speed is stored. The adjustment is interrupted unexpectedly Reinstating the cruise control ● You have switched off the Electronic Stabi- lization Control (ESC). ● Press the  button. ● The brakes have overheated. Wait for the The limiter will re-activate as soon as the ve- brakes to cool down and check the opera- hicle is moving at a speed lower than the tion again. saved one. Fig. 155 On the multifunction steering ● If the fault continues, consult a specialised wheel: buttons to operate the speed limit- workshop. er. Switching off ● Press and hold the button . For safety reasons, the speed limiter only Connecting switches off fully whenever the driver stops ● Press the  button. The speed limiter switches off and the speed pressing the accelerator pedal or switches is deleted. the system off manually. It does not take effect yet. Switch to cruise control (GRA) or adaptive Not possible to start regulation Start regulation cruise control (ACC) ● The selected driving profile does not allow ● When the vehicle is moving, press the but- ● Press the  button. regulation to start. Select another profile and ton . ● Observe the corresponding message on repeat the procedure. The current speed is saved as a limit speed. the instrument cluster display. The speed limiter is switched off. Adjusting the speed The programmed speed can be set:

 + 1 km/h (1 mph) Problems and solutions  - 1 km/h (1 mph)   The speed limiter is not active.  + 10 km/h (5 mph)

239 Driving

emergency brake assis- The system can be cancelled if the accelera- Warning levels and brake assist tor pedal is pressed or the steering wheel is tance system (Front Assist) turned firmly. Depending on the equipment and the coun- Introduction try, the Front Assist also includes the following functions: The objective of the system is to prevent head-on collisions against objects that may ● Pedestrian protection ››› page 241 be in the vehicle’s path or minimise the con- ● Cyclist protection ››› page 241 sequences of such impacts. ● Dodge assist ››› page 241 The function is designed to avoid collisions ● Turn assist ››› page 242 Fig. 156 On the instrument panel display: against: advance warning indications. WARNING ● Parked vehicles. Front Assist is active between 5 km/h (3 ● Vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists that are ● Front Assist is a driving assistance func- mph) and 250 km/h (155 mph). Depending travelling in the same lane and direction. tion that can never replace the driver’s at- on different conditions (vehicle speed, tention. ● Pedestrians and cyclists who transversely speed and type of object recognised, etc.), cross the vehicle path. ● Front Assist cannot change the laws of some of the stages described below are physics or replace the driver in terms of omitted to optimise the performance of the The Front Assist records the mentioned ob- keeping control of the vehicle and reacting system. jects by means of a camera on the top of the to a possible emergency situation. windscreen and a radar sensor on the front ● Following a Front Assist emergency warn- Safety distance warning of the vehicle ››› page 233 . ing, pay immediate attention to the situa- If the system detects that you are driving too tion and try to avoid the collision where ap- Depending on several factors and how criti- close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the propriate. cal the situation is, the system operates in a driver with this indication on the instrument staggered manner. panel display . First informing the driver, and if there is no or The timing of the warning varies depending insufficient reaction, then activating an au- on driver behaviour, vehicle speed and rela- tonomous emergency braking or an evasive tive speed between both. manoeuvre as indicated by the conditions The safety distance warning is active be- that will be discussed in the following points. tween approx. 65 km/h (40 mph) and 250 km/h (155 mph).

240 Driver assistance systems

Advance warning Driver emergency braking assistance sys- Pedestrian and cyclist recognition technolo- If the system detects a possible collision with tem gy cannot exceed the physically prescribed the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by If the driver, after the critical warning, starts limits and works exclusively within the sys- means of an audible warning and an indica- braking but the system detects that the tem’s limits. The responsibility for braking al- tion on the instrument panel display  brake is not being applied with sufficient ways depends on the driver. ››› Fig. 156. force, the braking intensity will be increased. The pedestrian and cyclist recognition can This brake assist only occurs if the pedal is The warning moment varies depending on cause undesired warnings and braking inter- pressed firmly. the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At ventions, e.g. with a hidden radar sensor or a the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a dirty camera field of vision. WARNING possible emergency braking ››› in Intro- Be ready to take charge of the vehicle at any duction on page 240. ● The system cannot prevent a collision, al- time. though it can significantly minimise the When Front Assist is connected, the indica- consequences by reducing the speed and The pedestrian and cyclist recognition oper- tions of other functions on the screen may the force of the impact. ating speed range is lower than that of the be hidden. ● When the Front Assist causes a braking, Front Assist. the brake pedal is “harder”. Critical warning ● Automatic interventions by the Front As- If the driver fails to react to the advance sist on the brakes may be interrupted by Dodge assist warning, the system may actively intervene pressing the accelerator or moving the in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn steering wheel. Dodge assist helps the driver avoid an obstacle in critical conditions. the driver of the imminent danger of a colli- ● The Front Assist may brake the vehicle sion. until it stops completely. However, the Once the Front Assist has activated a critical brake system does not halt the vehicle per- warning, if the driver intends on dodging the Automatic braking manently. Use the foot brake! object, the dodge assist will help correct the If the driver also fails to react to the critical trajectory. The driver must start and finish warning, the system may initiate independ- the manoeuvre, as this is an assistance sys- ent emergency braking by progressively in- Pedestrian and cyclist recogni- tem and not an autonomous one. creasing the braking in accordance with the tion Front Assist is active between approx. 30 criticality of the situation. km/h (20 mph) and 150 km/h (90 mph). » The system recognises pedestrians and cyclists who travel in the same lane and direction and pedestrians and cyclists who transversely cross the vehicle's path. 241 Driving

Limitations System limitations ● Vehicles that suddenly change to the lane This system does not react to objects that on which your vehicle is travelling. cross transversely or to animals. The basic ● Pedestrians that cannot be recognised be- limitations of the Front Assist must also be cause they are partially or totally hidden. taken into account ››› page 242 . ● Objects such as walls, posts, fences, trees or garage doors. ● Loads and accessories of other vehicles Turn assist that protrude over the sides, backwards or over the top. Turn assist can avoid a collision with a vehicle ● Other vehicles crossing the vehicle’s path. approaching in the opposite direction, by Fig. 157 On the instrument panel display: braking the vehicle itself when the intention initial system self-calibration indication. ● In the case of pedestrians or cyclists stand- is to turn. ing or approaching in the opposite direction. Front Assist has certain limitations inherent This system is active up to 15 km/h (9 mph). to the system. Thus, in certain circumstan- Operating limitations: ces, some of the reactions may be inappro- Limitations In the following situations, the Front Assist priate from the driver's standpoint. So pay may work late or in an undesirable manner. The turn-off assist function is available if you attention in order to intervene if necessary. The following icon is displayed  (in yellow) have indicated your intention to turn by acti- in the instrument panel, accompanied by the vating the turn signal, you have turned the The following conditions may cause the message Front Assist with limita- steering wheel and the turning path has star- Front Assist not to react or to do so too tions. ted. late: It only reacts to vehicles that are in the path ● In the first few instants of driving after ● If the Front Assist or the front camera are of the vehicle (not to animals, people, etc.). switching on the ignition, due to the system’s disabled or broken. initial auto-calibration. During this phase, the ● If the radar sensor or the front camera are The basic limitations of the Front Assist must instrument panel screen will display the fol- dirty or covered. also be taken into account ››› page 242 . lowing indication ››› Fig. 157 . ● On taking tight bends or complex paths. ● When pressing the accelerator firmly or at Unrecognised objects full throttle. ● Vehicles travelling outside the reach of the ● If the TCS has been disconnected or the sensors at close range from your own vehi- ESC is activated in Sport page 272 mode. cle. ››› ● If the ESC is adjusting or is broken. 242 Driver assistance systems

● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- the ignition, the Front Assist may not be the function button  > Assistants > Smart trically connected trailer are damaged. available for a short period of time while the Assistants > Front Assist ››› page 89 . system starts. During this phase, the instru- ● If the vehicle is reversing. The system will store the setting for the next ment panel screen will display the following ● In case of snow or heavy rain. time the ignition is switched on. indication ››› Fig. 157 . ● In case of dazzling sun or total darkness. CUPRA recommends keeping advance warn- When the Front Assist is disabled, so too are ing active. ● Entrances and exits of tunnels. the advance warning and the distance warn- ● In complex driving situations (such as traf- ing functions. CUPRA recommends leaving Depending on the vehicle’s infotainment fic islands, cut-through roundabouts, etc), the Front Assist activated except in the situa- system the advance warning function may Front Assist may issue warnings and inter- tions presented in ››› page 244 . be adapted in the following modes: vene in braking in an unnecessary manner. ● Advance Switching the Front Assist on and off For more details, see section ››› page 232 . ● Medium With the ignition switched on, the Front As- sist can be deactivated or activated as fol- ● Delayed lows: Manual activation and deactiva- ● Deactivated ● Select the corresponding menu option us- tion of the function CUPRA recommends driving with the func- ing the button for the driver assistance sys- tion in “Medium” mode. tems ››› page 81 . ● OR: using the Infotainment system: press Switching distance warning on and off the function button  > Assistants > Smart The safety distance warning can be activated Assistants > Front Assist ››› page 89 . or deactivated in the infotainment system When the Front Assist is deactivated, the in- using the function button  > Assistants > dication ››› Fig. 158 will be displayed on the Smart Assistants > Front Assist ››› page 89 . instrument panel. The system will store the setting for the next Each time the ignition is switched on, the time the ignition is switched on. Fig. 158 On the instrument panel display: Front Assist will reappear as active. Front Assist deactivated indication. CUPRA recommends having the safety distance warning activated except in the excep- Front Assist indicators appear on the instru- Activating or deactivating the pre-warning tions described in section ››› page 244 . » ment panel display. (advance warning) The Front Assist is active whenever the igni- The advance warning can be activated or tion is switched on. At the time of starting deactivated in the infotainment system using 243 Driving

Activate or deactivate the dodge and turn ● If the radar sensor or the front camera are Speed range assistant temporarily covered by an accessory. ACC regulates speeds between 30 km/h (20 The dodge and turn assistance systems can ● When the vehicle is going to be loaded on- mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph).1) be activated or deactivated in the infotain- to transportation. The ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill ment system using the function button  > ● If the windscreen is damaged in an area if a vehicle in front stops. If your vehicle is fit- Assistants > Smart Assistants > Front Assist that covers the vision of the front camera. ted with a manual gearbox, you should pay page 89. ››› attention to gear changes. The ACC could The system will store the setting for the next switch off if the RPM gets too high or low. time the ignition is switched on. ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con- Driver intervention prompt CUPRA recommends having the dodge and trol turn assistance systems activated except in  ACC is subject to certain limitations in- the exceptions described in section herent to the system. This means that ››› page 244. Introduction the driver will have to control the speed and distance from other vehicles in cer- Deactivating Front Assist temporarily in Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) maintains a tain situations. In this case, the instru- the following situations constant speed set by the driver. When ment cluster display will tell you to in- approaching another vehicle in front, the tervene by applying the brake, and an In the following situations the Front Assist ACC detects it and adapts the speed auto- audio warning will be played. should be deactivated due to the system's matically, maintaining a distance set by limitations: the driver. Radar sensors ● When the vehicle is to be towed. The ACC uses the front radar technology. Does my vehicle have ACC? ● If the vehicle is on a test bed. Read its maintenance instructions and infor- Your vehicle has ACC if it has a configuration ● If the radar sensor or the front camera are mation about its limitations ››› page 232 . menu in the infotainment system ››› page 89 faulty. and if it has the ACC function buttons on the WARNING ● If the radar sensor or the front camera multifunction steering wheel ››› Fig. 159 . have suffered a violent blow. The ACC’s technology cannot overcome the system's inherent limitations or change ● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. the laws of physics. If used negligently or involuntarily, it may cause serious

1) When E-Mode is activated in hybrid vehicles, the ACC speed range may vary. 244 Driver assistance systems accidents and injuries. The system is not a ● Brake immediately if the ACC does not ACC operation replacement for driver awareness. slow down enough. ● Always be prepared to brake or acceler- ● Brake immediately when a driver inter- ate. vention instruction is displayed on the in- ● If you press the accelerator pedal the strument cluster screen. ACC will stop working. Therefore, it will not ● If the vehicle continues to move involun- brake or request any braking intervention. tarily after a driver intervention prompt, ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to brake the vehicle. the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit ● The brake pedal may move downwards visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- during braking. Be careful not to position tions. your foot under the pedal. ● Do not use the ACC in poor visibility, or Fig. 159 on roads that are steep, with lots of curves On the multifunction steering Note wheel: buttons to operate the ACC or slippery. If the ACC does not work as described in ● Never use ACC when driving off-road or this chapter, do not use it until it has been Connecting on unpaved roads. checked by a specialised workshop. CUPRA ● Press the  button on the multifunction ● The system may not react in time to sta- recommends visiting a specialised CUPRA steering wheel. tionary obstacles (such as a traffic jam dealer or any SEAT dealership. queue), particularly at high speeds. React The ACC does not regulate anything yet soon enough to avoid a hazardous situa- (standby). tion. ● The system may not react to stopped ve- Start regulation hicles in the same lane. You must react ear- Activating the ACC system automatically ac- ly enough yourself in this case. tivates the ESC and ASR. ● The system does not react to people, animals or vehicles that are crossing or ap- ● To start regulation, press the button  proaching in the opposite direction. ››› Fig. 159. ● If you are driving with a spare wheel fitted, the ACC system could automatically The ACC sets the current speed, or the clos- switch off. Switch off the system when est speed within the valid range (30-210 starting off. km/h), as the cruise speed. »

245 Driving

Depending on the driving situation, the fol- Keep in mind each country’s regulations on ● Very short, Short, Medium, Long and Very lowing indicator lamps come on: minimum braking distances. long using the Infotainment system:  > As- sistants > Smart Assistants > ACC  It lights up green Suspend regulation (standby) ››› page 89.

ACC connected, no vehicle detected in front. ● Briefly press the button  on the multifunction steering wheel or press the brake Changing the driving profile pedal. In vehicles with Drive Profile, the driving pro-  It lights up green file selected can have an influence on the ACC connected, vehicle detected in front. The ACC indicator lamp is grey; the speed ACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour and distance are saved. ››› page 226. When the ACC is in standby, the indicator On vehicles with a Drift driving profile, ACC lamps light up grey. Reinstating the cruise control will be deactivated when this is selected and ●  Press the button. ACC regulation cannot be started until an- Setting speed The ACC regulates to the last speed and dis- other profile is selected. To program the speed, press the  or  tance setting. In vehicles without Drive Profile, the behav- ››› Fig. 159 buttons to the desired speed. The iour of the ACC can also be affected if any of speed is adjusted at intervals of 10 km/h (5 Switching off the following drive profiles are selected in mph). ● Press and hold the button . The set the infotainment system in Driver assis- When the ACC is active, the button  can speed is cleared. tance. ACC settings will be the same as be pressed to increase the desired speed by those in the Drive Profile. 1 km/h (1 mph). You can then press  to de- Exceeding the speed regulated by the ACC crease it by 1 km/h (1 mph). WARNING While driving with the ACC switched on, the driver can increase speed by pressing the ac- Before driving off, check that the road is Setting your distance level clear. The radar sensor may not detect ob- celerator pedal. ACC regulation is suspen- The distance can be set to one of five levels, stacles on the road. This could cause an ac- ded until you release the accelerator pedal from very short to very long: cident and serious injuries. If necessary, . ››› apply the brake. ● Press the button  and then the button  or  Fig. 159 . Set the default distance setting ››› CAUTION ● Alternatively, press the button  as many In the Infotainment system, you can pre-se- If you increase speed using the accelerator times as necessary to set the desired dis- lect the distance level when connecting the pedal, the ACC may not be able to safely tance. ACC from:

246 Driver assistance systems

1) adjust the speed of the distance due to the of the instrument cluster in a simplified man- Avoid undertaking on the right ner. limitations of the system. If a vehicle is detected in the left lane that is ● Be prepared to react if required by the The set speed will be displayed next to the travelling at a speed slower than that set by situation. function status indicator described in the driver, it will brake the vehicle within the ››› page 245, Start regulation. comfort limits of the system to avoid passing it on the right ››› Fig. 161 . Status display You can cancel this regulation by changing Special driving situations the set speed or by pressing the accelerator pedal. The function works at speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). It may not be available in certain countries.

Overtaking When the turn signal is switched on for overtaking, the ACC reduces the distance from the vehicle in front to help with the overtak- Fig. 160 On the instrument panel display: ing manoeuvre. The set cruising speed will ACC active. Fig. 161 On the instrument panel display: not be exceeded. ACC active, vehicle detected in an outer The function works at speeds over 80 km/h 1 Vehicle ahead detected. It will light up if lane. (50 mph). It may not be available in certain the distance to the vehicle is adjusted. Be aware of the limitations and warnings de- countries. 2 Selected distance level 2. scribed at the beginning of this chapter. Stop&Go function This information can be displayed on the ››› in Introduction on page 244. central panel of the Assists view, or in the The ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill left hand information profile ››› page 65 . If (0 km/h) if the vehicle in front stops. With these views are not selected, it will be auto- manual gearboxes you will need to keep the » matically displayed in the lower central part

1) Or on the left, in countries that drive on the left hand side of the road. 247 Driving

clutch pedal depressed to allow the car to ● Always check the road before moving off, come to a complete stop. and apply the vehicle brakes yourself if The ACC remains active and the message necessary. ACC ready to start is displayed on the instrument cluster for a few seconds. You can extend or reactivate this warning by pressing ACC system limitations the button  or, depending on your vehicle’s equipment, by grabbing the steering wheel. During this time, the vehicle will move off again if the vehicle in front moves forwards.

To move off when the message ACC ready to start is not longer displayed, once the vehicle in front has moved off:

● Briefly depress the accelerator pedal (and Fig. 163  Vehicle changing lanes.  One vehicle turning and another stationary. gently lift the clutch pedal on vehicles with manual gearboxes). The limits of the ACC system mean that it is The ACC is deactivated while stopped in the not appropriate in all situations ››› in In- following cases: troduction on page 244. CUPRA does not recommend using the ● If the vehicle stops for several minutes. Fig. 162  Vehicle on a bend.  Motorcy- function in the following cases ››› : ● If a door is opened. clist ahead, out of range of the radar sensor. ● Heavy rain, snow or fog. WARNING ● When going through tunnels. If the message ACC ready to start is dis- ● In sections with roadworks. played on the instrument cluster display ● On routes with curves, e.g. on mountain and the vehicle in front moves off, your vehicle will move off automatically. In this roads. case, any obstacles in the road may not be ● On off-road routes. detected. This may cause serious accidents ● In covered car parks. and injuries.

248 Driver assistance systems

● On roads with embedded metal objects ● Vehicles travelling in the opposite direction The ACC does not work as expected such as train or tram tracks. or crossing the road. ● Make sure that the conditions are met for ● On roads with loose gravel. ● Other stationary obstacles the radar sensor to operate properly ››› page 233. Pay special attention when using ACC in the The ACC may not react to stationary vehi- ● following situations: cles. If, for example, a vehicle detected by If the brakes overheat, regulation stops au- the ACC turns or moves over and there is a tomatically. Wait for them to cool down and check the operation again. On curves stationary vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not react to the second vehicle Fig. 163 ● Unusual noises during automatic ACC The ACC may not detect the vehicle in front ››› . braking are normal and do not indicate any on a curve, or may regulate the distance anomalies. from vehicles in other lanes Fig. 162 . ››› WARNING The following conditions may lead the ACC Vehicles outside the sensor zone Using the ACC in the above situations can cause serious accidents and injuries, and not to react: In the following situations the ACC may not you could break the law. ● The accelerator or brake is depressed. react, or may react slowly or inappropriately: ● No gear is engaged or the vehicle is in gear ● Vehicles that are not aligned while driving R. or that are outside the sensor's detection Problems and solutions ● The vehicle is reversing. area, such as motorcycles ››› Fig. 162  ● ESC is operating. ● Vehicles that move into your lane, a short  ACC not available distance from your vehicle ››› Fig. 163 . ● The driver is not wearing his/her seat belt. The indicator lamp lights up yellow: ● Vehicles with loads or accessories that ● A vehicle or trailer brake light is faulty. protrude from the sides, rear or roof. ● The radar sensor is dirty or adjusted incor- ● The RPM is too high or too low. rectly. Take into account the warnings de- ● The parking brake is applied. Objects that are not detected scribed at the beginning of this chapter ● Driving on an excessive slope. The ACC function only detects and reacts to ››› page 233 vehicles moving in the same direction. ● There is a fault or defect. Turn off the vehi- Therefore it does not detect: cle's ignition and turn it on again after a few minutes. ● People ● If the problem persists, consult a special- ● Animals ised workshop.

249 Driving

Proactive speed adjust- ● Always pay attention to traffic and always Limitations of the proactive ment keep the vehicle environment in mind. speed adjustment ● Always be prepared to adjust the speed yourself. If the traffic signal detection sys- In addition to the limitations of the traffic sig- Introduction tem is not working properly or the naviga- nal detection system ››› page 73 and of the tion data is not up to date, the speed may limitations of the ACC, proactive speed ad- The proactive speed adjustment adapts the change unexpectedly and suddenly or may justment has the following limitations inher- speed to the speed limitations detected and not suit the current traffic situation. In ad- ent to the system: to the road layout (curves, crossings, round- dition, the speed adjusted by the system abouts, etc.). may not suit your driving style. ● Proactive speed adjustment only recognises traffic signals that show a speed limita- Proactive speed adjustment is an additional ● Always be prepared to adjust the speed tion. The proactive speed adjustment does function of the ACC page 244 and uses yourself. If you drive without any active gui- ››› not take into account, above all, the rules on the traffic signal detection system ››› page 73 ded route, if you leave the route calculated by the navigation system or if the position priority of passage or traffic lights. and the navigation data of the infotainment of the vehicle cannot be determined cor- system. ● On roads that are not included in the navi- rectly because the GPS does not provide gation data, or that are included with little Proactive speed adjustment is available de- accurate data, the speed may change un- accuracy, proactive speed adjustment is not pending on the equipment, although not in expectedly and suddenly or may not adapt available. all countries. to the current traffic situation. ● If a speed limitation is notified based on ● Always use up-to-date navigation data. WARNING the navigation data without it being detected ● Always take into account the maximum by the traffic signal detection system, the in- The proactive speed adjustment smart permitted speed. In the case of speed limi- dicated speed will be adjusted to the speed technology cannot overcome the limits im- tations that are not included in the naviga- that was saved the last time. posed by the laws of physics and it only tion data, the maximum permitted speed ● works within the limits of the system. Never may be exceeded. Proactive speed adjustment is not available allow the enhanced convenience of this for speed limitations below approx. 20 km/h (approx. 15 mph). In this case, a relevant function induce you to take any risk that Note compromises safety. If used negligently or message is displayed on the instrument pan- involuntarily, it may cause serious acci- Also note the information related to the el screen. dents and injuries. The system is not a re- ACC relevant to safety ››› page 244 . placement for driver awareness. ● Always adapt your speed to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

250 Driver assistance systems

Activating the proactive speed justment due to the road layout, the vehicle Note adjustment will accelerate again after leaving the reason for the adjustment behind and the speed will ● When a speed limitation is recognised, the proactive speed adjustment also adapts be adjustment to that which has been saved. In the infotainment system, in the assist serv- the saved speed even if the ACC is switched ices menu, you can individually adjust the The speeds indicated for curves depend on off. However, it will not adjust. type of incident the vehicle should react to the driving profile ››› page 226 . ● If the speed of travel considerably ex- ››› page 89: ceeds the speed limit detected by the traf- Interrupting speed adjustment fic signal detection system, a relevant warn- ● Response to road layout. ● During the warning, press the button . ing is displayed in the instrument panel dis- ● Reaction at permitted speeds. play. ● During the adjustment, press the button ● In the event of joining a highway without . speed limitation, the recommended speed Driving with the proactive speed is automatically saved as the desired speed. Adjust the announced speed adjustment If a higher speed has previously been saved The announced speed can only be adjusted for a motorway without a speed limit, this is ● Connect the ACC ››› page 245 . in the event of adjustment due to a speed used instead of the recommended speed. limitation. ● Set distance and speed. ● Activate the proactive speed adjustment. Multifunction steering wheel: Problems and solutions  + 1 km/h (1 mph), only while the ACC is As soon as the system recognises a speed adjusting limitation or a relevant road layout during the A message is displayed indicating that pro- route, a warning will appear on the instru-  - 1 km/h (1 mph), only while the ACC is active speed adjustment is not currently ment panel display. This warning will indicate adjusting available or not in your country. the reason and the speed to which the vehi- + + 10 km/h (5 mph) ● If this message is displayed for a long time cle will adjust due to said limitation. and proactive speed adjustment is available – - 10 km/h (5 mph) in your country, contact a specialised work- Adjustment due to a speed limitation.  shop. If you adjust the indicated speed excessively, Adjustment due to a road layout.  the proactive speed adjustment is interrup- Note ted. In the event of adjustment due to a speed Depending on the anomaly in question, ad- limitation, the detected speed will be saved ditional information may be displayed in as the new desired speed. In the event of ad- Vehicle status ››› page 88 .

251 Driving

Lane Assist ● On tight bends. may be that the system does not intervene ● Temporarily in very sporty driving situa- at all. In these situations, special attention Introduction tions. is required from the driver and, where appropriate, the temporary deactivation of the lane assist warning system: The Lane Assist System helps the driver WARNING stay in his/her lane within the physical lim- The intelligent technology in the Lane As- – In very sporty driving situations. its of the system. This function is not suita- sist system cannot change the limits im- – In adverse weather conditions and ble and is not designed to keep the vehicle posed by the laws of physics and by the very roads in poor condition. automatically in the lane. nature of the system. Careless or uncon- – When passing through areas undergo- trolled use of the Lane Assist system may ing works. Using the camera located in the windscreen, cause accidents and injury. The system is – Before gradient changes of grade and the Lane Assist system detects the limits not a replacement for driver awareness or river beds. (lane lines) dividing the lanes in which the manoeuvres when driving. vehicle is travelling. If the vehicle gets too ● Always observe the vehicle surroundings ● Always adapt your speed and the distance close to the detected lane limits, the system carefully and drive proactively. to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, alerts the driver through a corrective motion weather conditions, the condition of the ● When the area of vision of the camera of the steering wheel. The driver can cancel road and the traffic situation. becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the the steering corrective action at any time. Lane Assist system function can be affec- ● Always keep your hands on the steering ted. No warning is produced with the turn signals wheel so it can be turned at any time. The activated, given that the Lane Assist system responsibility of staying in the lane is always understands that a lane change is required. the driver's. ● The Lane Assist system does not detect Control lamp System limits all road markings. The road surfaces, road Use the Lane Assist system only on large, structures or objects in poor condition can  It lights up green be incorrectly detected as road markings well-maintained motorways and highways. under certain circumstances by the Lane Lane Assist system active and available. The system is not available under the follow- Assist system. Immediately counter any un- ing conditions: wanted intervention of the system.  It lights up yellow ● Please observe the indications on the in- ● The driving speed allowed is below approx. strument panel and act as is necessary if The Lane Assist system intervening with a rectification of the steering. 55 km/h (30 mph). the traffic situation permits. ● The system has not detected any lane ● In the following situations there may be lines. undesired interventions of the system or it

252 Driver assistance systems

2 Lane line detected. The system does not Driver intervention prompt  It lights up yellow intervene.  If the steering is not corrected manually, the system prompts the driver through an indi- Lane Assist system Switching the lane assist system on or off cation on the instrument panel display and In some countries, the Lane Assist System is acoustic warnings. Some control and warning lamps will light up always activated when the ignition is switch- briefly when the ignition is switched on to If no reaction is obtained from the driver, the ed on. The connection status is shown in the check certain functions. They will switch off system switches to a passive state. Driver assistance menu of the Infotainment after a few seconds. system or the driver assistance systems Regardless of the steering manoeuvres, menu after pressing the corresponding but- through an indication on the instrument WARNING ton. The Lane Assist system can be activated panel display and acoustic warnings, the Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- and deactivated in these menus. driver is also prompted to drive through the trol and warning lamps on page 84. centre of the lane if the steering correction The Lane Assist system is ready to actively in- lasts more than reasonable. tervene as of approximately 60 km/h (35 mph) and if it has detected the lane limits Steering wheel vibration Driving with the Lane Assist Sys- (system status: active). The control lamp  tem emits a green light. When the system inter- The following situations may result in a steer- venes by rectifying the direction, the control ing wheel vibration: lamp  emits a yellow light. ● The lane ceases to be recognised during a If the control lamp of the instrument panel sudden intervention in the direction of the display is off, it means that the Lane Assist system. system is connected but not ready to intervene or it is disconnected. It is also possible to select steering wheel vibration in the Assistants menu of the info- When you activate a turn signal, the system tainment system. In this case, when a vehicle temporarily goes into a passive state in order with Lane Assist switched on crosses over a to allow manual lane change. detected lane marking, the steering wheel An energetic rotation or rectification of the will vibrate. Fig. 164 On the instrument panel display: steering wheel by the driver causes the sys- indications of the Lane Assist System. tem to temporarily switch to a passive state.

1 Lane line detected. The system intervenes assisting on the represented side.

253 Driving

Troubleshooting distance from the vehicle in front that is How to know if the vehicle is fitted with preselected by the driver and remain in Travel Assist Error message, the system disconnects the preferred position within the lane. The vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist if the ● Clean the windscreen. ››› page 353 Travel Assist uses the same sensors as Adap- multifunction steering wheel has the button  ● Check that the windscreen is not damaged tive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist. ››› Fig. 167 . in the area of the camera's field of vision. Therefore, carefully read the information about the ACC ››› page 244 and the Lane Driver intervention prompt System behaviour is different than expec- Assist ››› page 252 and take into account the If you remove your hands from the steering ted limitations of the systems and the indications wheel, after a few seconds the system asks given in the information. ● Clean the field of vision of the camera reg- you to take over the steering with an indica- ularly and make sure it is free of dirt, snow tion on the instrument panel display and Speed range and ice. acoustic warnings. Travel Assist adjusts at speeds between ap- ● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam- prox. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph) and approx. WARNING era. 210 km/h (approx. 130 mph); in the case of The Travel Assist smart technology cannot ● Check that the windscreen is not damaged the adaptive lane guidance function, be- overcome the limits imposed by the laws of in the area of the camera's field of vision. tween 0 km/h (0 mph) and approx. 250 physics and it only works within the limits of ● Do not mount objects on the steering km/h (approx. 155 mph). the system. If Travel assist is used negli- wheel. gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious Driving with Travel Assist accidents and injuries. The system is not a In the event of doubts or queries, go to a replacement for driver awareness. Travel Assist automatically controls the ac- specialised workshop. celerator pedal, the brakes and the steering. ● Bear in mind the system limitations and In addition, Travel Assist may, within its limi- the indications regarding the control of the tations, decelerate the vehicle until it stops Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist. Driving Assist (Travel Assist) behind another that stops and automatically starts again. ● Adapt your speed and safety distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit Introduction You can override assisted adjustment at all visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- times. tions. The driving assist (Travel Assist) combines ● Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is adaptive cruise control (ACC) and adap- bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in tive lane guidance. Within the limitations slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice, of the system, the vehicle can maintain a rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.

254 Driver assistance systems

● Do not use Travel Assist offroad or on Indications on the instrument 2 Distance set. roads where the surface is not firm. Travel panel display In addition, depending on the equipment, Assist has been designed for use on paved control lamps indicate the status of the sys- roads only. tem on the instrument panel display: ● Travel Assist does not react to people or animal or vehicles crossing your path or ››› Fig. 166 which approach you head-on in the same A Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- lane. trol and adaptive lane guidance func- ● Brake immediately if Travel Assist does tion are active. not slow down enough. B Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- ● Brake immediately when a braking mes- trol active and adaptive lane guidance sage is displayed on the instrument panel function passive. screen. C Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- ● Brake when, after an indication to brake, Fig. 165 On the instrument panel display: trol passive and adaptive lane guidance the vehicle rolls without it being desired. indication with active adjustment. function active. ● Keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times, to ensure you have control over D Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- the steering at all times. The driver is always trol and adaptive lane guidance func- responsible for keeping the vehicle in its tion are passive. own lane. E Inactive Travel Assist. ● If possible, do not wear gloves while driving. The system could interpret this as no Depending on the equipment, more details driving activity. may be displayed on the instrument cluster, such as dashed lines or other vehicles on the ● If driver intervention is requested on the road. instrument panel display, immediately resume control of the vehicle. Fig. 166 On the instrument panel display: ● Always be prepared to adjust the speed control lamps. yourself. Displays on the screen ››› Fig. 165 1 The adaptive lane guidance function is active. 255 Driving

Operating Travel Assist The set distance remains saved. ● The system limits have been reached. Take hold of the steering wheel and take control Making other adjustments of the vehicle. For all else, Travel Assist is operated like the ACC ››› page 245 . Travel Assist disconnects automatically Vehicles without Emergency Assist: You have released the steering wheel for a long peri- Problems and solutions od. ● Abnormal operation. Contact a specialised  Travel Assist is not available or does workshop. not work as expected The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele- Fig. 167 Left side of the multifunction The adjustment is interrupted unexpect- steering wheel: buttons for operating Trav- vant warning is also displayed on the instru- edly ment panel screen. el Assist. Vehicles without lane departure warning: ● There is a fault in the sensors. Check the You have turned on the turn signal. Connecting causes and solutions described in ● Press the  button on the multifunction ››› page 233. steering wheel. ● The system limits are exceeded. Emergency Assist The control lamp  will light up green. The ● If the fault continues, consult a specialised following warning is also displayed on the in- workshop. How it works strument panel screen: The Travel Assist maintains the current speed and the preset  Take the wheel Emergency Assist can detect whether distance from the vehicle in front. At the The warning lamp comes on white or red, there is inactivity by the driver and can au- same time, if it detects road markings it depending on the urgency of the interven- tomatically keep the car within the lane keeps the vehicle in the lane by moving the tion. A message is also displayed. and stop it altogether if necessary. This steering wheel. way the system can actively help avoid an ● You released the steering wheel for a few accident or reduce its consequences. Interrupting the adjustment seconds. Take hold of the steering wheel and Emergency Assist uses the same sensors as ●  take control of the vehicle. Briefly press the button on the multi- Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane As- function steering wheel or press the brake sist. Therefore, carefully read the informa- pedal. tion about the ACC ››› page 244 and the 256 Driver assistance systems

Lane Assist ››› page 252 and take into ac- Connecting and disconnecting ● There is a fault or defect. Turn the drive count the limitations of the systems and the Emergency Assist can be connected and dis- system off and on again. indications given in the information. connected in the infotainment system, in the ● If the fault continues, disconnect the If the Emergency Assist detects that the driv- assist services menu ››› page 89 . Emergency Assist and consult a specialised workshop. er does not perform any activity, it requests When connected, the Emergency Assist is that the driver take control of the vehicle. To only activated if the following requirements WARNING do this, it emits optical and acoustic warn- are met: ings and causes braking jolts. The seat belt is The smart technology fitted into the Emer- tightened (depending on the equipment). ● The Travel Assist or the Lane Assist are gency Assist cannot overcome the limits The system slows down the vehicle and switched on. imposed by the laws of physics; it only keeps it in its lane. ● The system has detected a road lane mark- works within the limits of the system. The driver is responsible for driving the vehicle. You can cancel the adjustment at any time ing on both sides of the vehicle. by moving the steering wheel, over-acceler- ● Adapt your speed and safety distance to ating or braking. Troubleshooting the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- While the emergency assistant is in opera-  Emergency Assist not available ditions. tion, other road users are warned as follows: ● The Emergency Assist cannot always The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele- avoid accidents or serious injuries by itself. ● The hazard warning lights are switched on vant warning is also displayed on the instru- ● If possible, do not wear gloves while driv- soon after. ment panel screen. ing. The system could interpret this as no ● The horn sounds (depending on the driving activity. speed). ● The field of vision of the camera is dirty. Clean the windscreen. ● If the radar sensor or the camera are cov- The following happens as soon as the vehicle ● The visibility of the camera is diminished ered or have been altered or damaged, the system may intervene on the brakes or on stops: due to weather factors, e.g. snow, or deter- the direction in an inappropriate manner. gent residue or some coating. Clean the ● All doors are unlocked. windscreen. ● The Emergency Assist does not react to ● The interior lighting comes on. people or animal or vehicles crossing your ● The visibility of the camera is diminished path or which approach you head-on in the ● Depending on the equipment, an emer- due to accessories or adhesives. Leave the same lane. » gency call (eCall) is made. area around the camera’s field of vision free. ● The electronic parking brake and gear shift ● The camera has been altered or damaged, position P are engaged. e.g. because of damage caused to the windscreen. Check for visible damage.

257 Driving

WARNING Lane departure warning or involuntarily. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inop- (Side Assist) with rear cross portunely, serious accidents and injuries ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to may occur. traffic alert (RCTA) and the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- ● If the vehicle behaves differently than ex- door opening warning (Exit tions. pected, interrupt the intervention of the Emergency Assist by over-accelerating, Assist) ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times braking or moving the steering wheel. to be ready to intervene in the steering at any time. ● Do not use Travel Assist or Lane Assist. Introduction Have the system checked by a specialised ● Pay attention to the indicator lamps that workshop. The lane departure warning (LCA) helps may come on in the external rear view mir- detect traffic that is at the rear of the vehi- rors and on the instrument cluster, and follow any instructions they may give. Note cle. ● The lane departure warning could react The rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) helps ● Automatic interventions by the Emergen- to any special constructions that might be the driver when backing out of a parallel cy Assist on the brakes may be interrupted present to the sides of the vehicle, e.g. high parking spot and when manoeuvring. by pressing the accelerator or brake or by or irregular dividers. This may cause erro- moving the wheel. The door opening warning (EWA) alerts neous warnings. ● Hazard warning lights that come on auto- the occupant of a possible danger ap- ● Never use the lane departure warning on matically can be switched off by pressing proaching from behind when opening or unpaved roads. The lane departure warning the accelerator or the break, moving the when any of the vehicle’s doors are open. has been designed for use on paved roads. steering wheel or pressing the hazard ● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- warning light switch. WARNING roundings. ● If this occurs, the Emergency Assist may The smart technology incorporated into ● The control lamps of the lane departure decelerate the vehicle until it comes to a the lane departure warning (LCA) with rear warning may have limited functionality due complete stop. cross traffic alert (RCTA) and the door to solar radiation. ● When the Emergency Assist is activated, opening warning included cannot over- it is only available again after the ignition come the limits imposed by the laws of Note has been switched off and back on again. physics; it only works within the limits of the system. Accidents and severe injury may If the lane departure warning with rear occur if the lane departure warning or the cross traffic alert does not work as descri- rear cross traffic alert are used negligently bed in this chapter, stop using it and contact a specialised workshop.

258 Driver assistance systems

Control lamp It lights up the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. It lights up continuously: the lane departure warning has detected a vehicle in the blind spot. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or messages. Flashes ● Carry out the necessary operations.

A vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane and CAUTION the turn signal has been engaged in the direction of the detected vehicle ››› . Failure to heed the control lamps and corresponding text messages when they light For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist up may result in damage to the vehicle. ››› page 252, a warning to switch lanes will also appear even though the turn signal has not been engaged Fig. 168 Control lamp of the lane depar- (Lane Assist “Plus” ››› page 260 ). ture warning. Lane departure warning (Side As- The control lamps light up when the ignition is switched on and should turn off after ap- sist) proximately 2 seconds. This is the time taken The lane departure warning uses radar sen- for the function check. sors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle If there are no indications from the control ››› page 7. The system does this by measur- lamp of the lane departure warning, this ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles means that the lane departure warning has and its speed differential. The lane departure not detected any other vehicles at the rear warning will not work at speeds of less than area ››› . approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). When the exterior lighting is low, the intensi- The lane width is not detected individually, Fig. 169 Control lamp of the lane depar- ty with which the control lamps come on is but is rather pre-configured in the system. ture warning. dimmed. The user can modify the intensity Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be- of the control lamps with up to 5 levels in the tween two lanes, the indications may be in- infotainment system menu. It lights up correct. Furthermore, the system can detect vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if It turns on once briefly: the lane departure warning is WARNING there are any), and can also detect stationary activated and ready to operate, i.e. when activating the If the warning lamps and the corresponding objects such as dividers, and thus give an in- system. messages are ignored when they light up, correct indication. »

259 Driving

Light indication Driving situations The control lamp provides an indication on the corresponding side regarding the traffic situation behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be critical. The control lamp of the left- hand side ››› Fig. 168 indicates the traffic situation to the rear left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of the right-hand side ››› Fig. 169, indicates the traffic situation to the rear right of the vehicle. Keep the warning lamps zone of the lane departure warning free of objects, adhesives or the likes that may interfere with your visibility.

Lane assist Plus.

The Lane Assist Plus function can be used by activating the Lane Assist ››› page 252 and Fig. 171 Schematic representation:  Sit- uation of an overtaking in the centre lane Side Assist functions. In this case its func- and then moving into the right-hand lane. tions are expanded as described below. Fig. 170 Schematic representation:  Passing situation with traffic behind the ve-  Indication of the lane departure warning If the driver initiates a lane change manoeu- hicle.  Indication of the lane departure in the control lamp on the right side. vre in a potential critical situation: warning in the control lamp on the left side. In the following situations, an indication will ● The lamp flashes in the corresponding be displayed in the control lamp ››› Fig. 170 rear-view mirror even though the turn signal  (arrow) or ››› Fig. 171  (arrow): has not been activated. ● When being overtaken by another vehicle ● The steering wheel vibrates to warn the ››› Fig. 170 . driver of the risk of collision. ● When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 171 ● torque is applied to correct the steering  with a speed differential of approx. and return the vehicle to its lane. 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a

260 Driver assistance systems considerably higher speed, no indication will Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) displayed in the form of a red or yellow strip be displayed. at the back of the image of the vehicle on the infotainment system screen. This strip The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon- displays the side of the vehicle towards which er an indication will be displayed in the con- traffic is approaching in transverse direc- trol lamp, because the lane departure warn- tion1). ing takes into account the speed differential with other vehicles. Thus even though the Automatic braking to reduce damages distance from the other vehicle is identical, the indication will appear sooner in some ca- If the rear cross traffic alert detects that ses and later in others. someone else on the road is approaching the rear of the vehicle and the driver does Physical limitations inherent to the system not step on the brake, the system will engage Fig. 172 Schematic representation of the the brakes automatically. In some situations the lane departure warn- rear cross traffic alert assistant: zone moni- ing may not interpret the traffic situation tored around the vehicle while leaving a The parking system helps the driver by auto- correctly. I.e. in the following situations: parking space. matically engaging the brakes to reduce any damage. The automatic intervention on the ● on tight bends; Park Assist uses the radar sensors on the rear brakes takes place when driving in reverse at ● in the case of lanes with different widths; bumper ››› page 233 to monitor the traffic approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph). After detecting crossing behind the vehicle as it backs out of that the vehicle is stationary, the system ● in areas with significant gradient changes; a parallel parking space or as it is being man- keeps it that way for around 2 seconds. ● in adverse weather conditions; oeuvred, for example in very low visibility After automatically braking to reduce dam- ● conditions. in the case of special constructions to the age, the system will not be able to automati- side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular di- When the system detects a relevant vehicle cally brake again for approximately 10 sec- viders. on the road that is approaching the rear of onds. the vehicle Fig. 172 , an acoustic alarm ››› You can interrupt the automatic braking by may sound if the relevance so requires it. stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is the brake pedal in order to regain control of also informed by means of a visual signal on the vehicle. » infotainment system display. This signal is

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with a parking system. 261 Driving

WARNING Door opening warning (Exit As- sors ››› page 233 . It detects moving objects sist) that approach from behind, such as cars The smart technology incorporated into ››› Fig. 173. the rear cross traffic alert cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it If a critical situation is detected when the only works within the limits of the system. door is opened, it will be alerted by an The parking assistant function should not acoustic signal on the door speaker of the tempt you into taking any risks. The system corresponding side ››› Fig. 174 . Additionally, is not a replacement for driver awareness. the control lamp of the lane departure warn- ● The system should never be used in limi- ing of the corresponding door will flash. If ted visibility conditions or complicated the door has already been opened and an- traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when other road user has been detected in a criti- crossing multiple lanes. cal situation, the control lamp of the lane ● Be sure to always be aware of the vehi- departure warning on the corresponding cle's surroundings, since the system often Fig. 173 Graphic example side will light up permanently. fails to detect things such as bicycles or pe- The brightness of the door opening warning destrians. indication cannot be adjusted. ● The rear cross traffic alert itself will not brake the vehicle to a complete stop. When you want to access the vehicle for the first time, with the doors closed and locked, the function will be available 3 minutes after the first opening of any of the doors. The function will continue to be available as long as the vehicle has the ignition connected and is not moving. After switching off the ignition, the function Fig. 174 Door: warning lamp will remain available for approximately 3 minutes. After that time, the control lamps will The door opening warning (Exit Assist) warns light up indicating the deactivation of the occupants of a possible collision when function. opening the door when the vehicle is stationary. The system monitors, within the lim- WARNING its of the system itself, the rear and side envi- ● Always pay close attention to the traffic ronment of the vehicle using the rear sen- and the surroundings of the vehicle. The 262 Driver assistance systems door opening warning (Exit Assist) cannot Managing the assist systems If the verification box on the instrument pan- replace the necessary attention to be paid el or the infotainment system is checked , by the vehicle’s occupants. The responsi- Enabling and disabling the assist systems the functionality will be automatically activated when switching on the ignition. bility for opening the doors and exiting the Side Assist, Exit Assist and the Rear Cross vehicle always lies with the occupants of Traffic Alert (RCTA) can also be switched on When the lane departure warning is ready to the same. and off from the Assistants menu of the in- operate, the indications in the control lamps ● The door opening warning (Exit Assist) fotainment system. will turn on briefly as confirmation. operates continuously as long as the vehicle ignition is on. Otherwise, the system is Exit Assist and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) When the vehicle is restarted, the last ad- deactivated and the lamps light up briefly. can also be found in the Park Assist Settings justment in the system will remain active. menu. ● It is possible that the traffic situation is not interpreted correctly and you cannot Side Assist and the Rear Cross Traffic Alert Trailer mode be aware of all the objects that are ap- (RCTA) can also be switched off and on in the The lane departure warning, the rear cross proaching, such as pedestrians. Always vis- instrument cluster Assistants menu traffic alert and the door opening warning ually monitor the traffic and the area sur- ››› page 69. will be automatically deactivated and will be rounding the vehicle. prevented from reactivating if the factory- Open the Assistants menu in the infotain- mounted tow hook is electrically connected WARNING ment system. to a trailer or other similar device. ●  Side Assist The door opening warning (Exit Assist) is As soon as the driver starts to drive with a subject to system limits and cannot warn of ●  Door opening warning trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a an imminent collision in all cases: ●  Rear cross traffic alert message will appear on the instrument panel ● If your vehicle is too deep in the parking display indicating that the lane departure space and the adjacent vehicles hide it. Open the Park Assist > Settings menu in the warning, the rear cross traffic alert and the ● In certain circumstances, objects or peo- infotainment system. door opening warning are deactivated. Once ple who approach, e.g. on a bicycle or ●  Door opening warning the vehicle trailer has been disengaged, the lane departure warning, the rear cross traffic scooter, are not detected. ●  Rear cross traffic alert alert and the door opening warning will re- ● The system does not react to stopped objects. Open the Assistants menu on the instru- turn to the initial state prior to the moment ment cluster the trailer was electrically connected. ●  Side Assist If the towing hook is not factory-mounted, ●  Rear cross traffic alert then the lane departure warning, the rear cross traffic alert and the door opening »

263 Driving

warning will have to be deactivated manually Braking and parking fluid level in the reservoir is too lo so there when driving with a trailer. is a risk of an accident ››› page 331, Brake fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Braking system Obtain technical assistance. ● If the brake warning lamp lights up  to- Control lamps gether with the ABS lamp  this could be due to an ABS fault. When this function  It lights up red fails, the rear wheels can lock up. Under certain circumstances, the rear of the vehi- Brake fluid level too low ››› page 331 or fault in the cle may skid, with the danger of losing con- brake system. trol. Stop and seek technical assistance.  Do not carry on driving! ● If the  lamp lights up, alone or accompanied by a warning message on the instru-  It lights up red ment panel display, please go immediately to a specialised workshop to check the Electronic parking brake page 266 . ››› brake pads and to replace them if they are The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is released. worn.

 It lights up yellow Information about the brakes Front brake pads worn. Contact a specialised workshop immediately. New brake pads For the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200 WARNING miles), new brake pads have not yet reached ● When the ignition is switched on, the sta- their maximum braking capacity, and need tus of the brake system and the brake assist to be “run in” first. However, you can com- functions is automatically checked. The pensate for the slightly reduced braking ef- control lights on the instrument cluster fect by applying more pressure on the brake light up briefly and then turn off again. If a pedal. Avoid overloading the brakes while warning light stays on permanently, there is running them in. a fault. Seek qualified technical assistance immediately. ● If the brake warning lamp  does not go out or if it lights up when driving, the brake 264 Braking and parking

Wear Corrosion Electromechanical brake servo (eBKV) The rate of wear on the brake pads depends There may be a tendency for corrosion to The electromechanical brake servo only a great deal on how you drive and the condi- form on the discs and dirt to build up on the works when the ignition is switched on and tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently optimises the force of the foot by increasing a particular problem in urban traffic and or the brakes are not used very often. the pressure that the driver exerts on the short stretches, or with very sporty driving. brake pedal. If the brakes are not used frequently, or if Depending on the speed, the braking force rust has formed on the disks, it is advisable to If the electromechanical brake servo is not and the environmental conditions (e.g. tem- clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly working, the brake pedal must be pressed perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may be a few times at a moderately high speed ››› . harder, as the braking distance increases due produced when braking. to the lack of assistance from the servo Fault in the brake system brake. Wet roads or road salt If the brake pedal travel should ever increase WARNING In certain situations (for example, on driving suddenly, this may mean that one of the two through flooded areas, in severe downpours brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to Any anomaly in the brake system can in- or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac- the nearest specialised workshop and have crease the braking distance, with the re- tion could be delayed if the discs and pads the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and resulting risk of an accident. are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the member that you will have to apply more ● New brake pads and discs must be run in brakes should be “dried” by pressing the pressure on the brake pedal and allow for and do not have the correct friction during brake pedal several times. longer stopping distances. the first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced braking capacity may be offset by pressing At high speed and with the windscreen wip- Low brake fluid level on the brake pedal a little harder. ers activated, the brake pads will briefly ● touch the brake discs. This takes place, al- Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if If you are driving on roads which have been salted, braking effectiveness may be though unnoticeable to the driver, at regular the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid decreased. intervals to improve the response time of the level is monitored electronically. brakes when they are wet. ● Brakes can overheat if used excessively Brake servo on slopes. Before driving down a long steep The effectiveness of the brakes can also be slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven The brake servo increases the pressure you change down into a lower gear or range. for some distance without using the brakes apply to the brake pedal. It works only when Therefore, using the engine brake relieves when there is a lot of salt on the road in win- the engine is running. the brakes. » ter. The layer of salt that accumulates on the discs and pads can be removed by gently applying the brakes a few times. 265 Driving

● Gentle continuous braking causes the firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes Applying the electronic parking brake brakes to overheat and the braking dis- continuously. The electronic parking brake can be activa- tance will increase. Apply and then release ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill, the brakes alternately. Note even when the ignition is switched off. Acti- ● Apply the brakes heavily to clean the vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi- ● If the brake servo is out of action, for ex- brake system only in a suitable traffic situa- cle. tion. Do not put other road users in danger: ample when the car is being towed, you will there is risk of causing an accident. have to press the brake pedal considerably ● Pull and hold the  ››› Fig. 175 button. harder than normal to make up for the lack ● ● The parking brake is activated when the Ensure the vehicle does not move while in of servo assistance. neutral, when the engine is stopped. The control light of button ››› Fig. 175 and the ● braking distance is increased considerably If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac- red  control lamp on the instrument panel cessories such as a front spoiler or wheel when the brake servo is not active. is always on. covers, it is important that the flow of air to ● If the brake is subjected to high stresses, the front wheels is not obstructed, other- ● Release the button. vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys- wise the brakes can overheat. tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency of Disconnecting the electronic parking the brakes. brake ● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers ● Switch the ignition on. could restrict the airflow to the brakes and Electronic parking brake (EPB) cause them to overheat. Before purchasing ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 175 . At the accessories please read the relevant in- same time step hard on the brake pedal or, if structions. the engine is running, press the accelerator pedal slightly. CAUTION ● The control lamp of button ››› Fig. 175 (arrow) and the red  control lamp on the in- ● Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is not neces- strument panel go out. sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stopping distances and Automatic release of the electronic park- greater wear. ing brake upon moving off ● Before driving down a long, steep gradi- Fig. 175 In the lower part of the centre The electronic parking brake is automatically ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se- console: electronic parking brake button switched off when starting if, after the driv- lect a lower gear. This makes use of engine er's door is closed and the driver's seat belt braking and relieves the brakes. If you still The electronic parking brake replaces the fastened, any of the following situations take have to use the brakes, it is better to brake handbrake ››› . place: 266 Braking and parking

● In vehicles with automatic gearboxes: a Automatic activation of the electronic ● Never use the electronic parking brake to gear is engaged or changed to another and parking brake when turning the ignition stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency. the accelerator is pressed gently. off Braking distances can be considerably lon- ● In vehicles with manual gearboxes: the In vehicles with manual transmission, the ger, since, under certain circumstances, clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting electronic parking brake is activated auto- only the rear wheels brake. Always use the off and the accelerator is pressed gently. matically when turning the ignition off. This foot brake. ● To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are function can be deactivated through the In- ● Never accelerate from the engine when a exceptions that allow the automatic parking fotainment system ››› page 89 . gear range or a gear is engaged and the engine is running. The vehicle could move, brake to be released without the driver's seat even if the electronic parking brake is acti- belt being fastened. Emergency brake function vated. Only use the emergency brake function if The parking brake can be prevented from ● When the electronic parking brake is you are unable to stop the vehicle with the being automatically released by continuously switched on or off, there is a slight move- foot brake ››› . pulling up the  ››› Fig. 175 switch when ment of the brake pedal. Be careful not to starting off. ● Pull and hold the  ››› Fig. 175 button in position your foot under the pedal. The electronic parking brake is not discon- this position to forcefully brake the vehicle. nected until the  button is released. This At the same time, an acoustic warning can CAUTION can facilitate starting off when a heavy load is be heard. To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally towed ››› page 291 . ● To stop the braking process, release the moving when parking it, first apply the  button or press the accelerator. electronic parking brake and then remove Automatic activation of the electronic your foot from the brake pedal. parking brake when exiting the vehicle in- When the ESC “Sport” or ESC OFF mode is selected, ESC will reactivate to assist the correctly Note driver during braking. Depending on the In vehicles with automatic transmission, the model version, the ESC will either switch ● In vehicles with manual transmission, electronic parking brake is activated auto- back to its previous disconnected state or when you release the clutch pedal and ac- matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly will remain on. celerate at the same time, the electronic if: parking brake is automatically disconnec- WARNING ted. ● The selector lever is in the D/S or R or is in ● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be tiptronic mode. The improper use of the electronic parking possible to disconnect the electronic park- brake can cause accidents and serious in- ● AND: the vehicle is stationary. ing brake. Use the jump-start page 52 . » jury. ››› ● AND: the driver door is open.

267 Driving

● When the electronic parking brake is ap- When connected, the Auto Hold function Switching the Auto Hold function on and plied or released, noises may be heard. automatically prevents the vehicle from roll- off ing when stationary without pressing the ● The system performs automatic and au- Press the Auto Hold button ››› . The con- brake pedal. dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi- trol lamp on the button goes out when the cle if some time elapses without the elec- After detecting that the vehicle is stationary Auto Hold function is switched off. tronic parking brake being used. and the brake pedal has been released, the Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The Automatically engaging and disengaging driver can lift their foot off the brake pedal. the Auto Hold function Auto Hold Function When the driver touches the accelerator If the Auto Hold function was switched on via pedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv- the Auto Hold button before switching the ing, the Auto Hold function releases the ignition off, the function will remain on the brake. The vehicle moves according to the following time the ignition is switched on. slope of the road. If the Auto Hold function was not switched If the vehicle is stationary and one of the on, it will automatically remain off next time conditions required by the Auto Hold func- the ignition is engaged. tion is impaired, it disconnects itself and the The Auto Hold function connects auto- button's control light goes out ››› Fig. 176 . matically if the following conditions are The electronic parking brake connects auto- met (all points must be met at the same matically, if necessary, to park the vehicle time ››› ): safely ››› . Fig. 176 In the lower part of the centre 1. The vehicle is kept stationary with the console: Auto Hold function button. Conditions for keeping the vehicle station- brake pedal on a flat surface or on a The indicator lamp of the Auto Hold ary with the Auto Hold function slope. ››› Fig. 176 button remains on when the Au- ● The driver door must be closed. 2. The engine rotates “correctly”. to Hold function is connected. ● The driver's seat belt must be fastened. The Auto Hold function is automatically Once connected, the Auto Hold function as- ● The engine is running. turned off if the following conditions are sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station- met: ary at repeated intervals or for a certain period of time with the engine running, for ex- 1. If any of the conditions mentioned on ample, when going up a slope, when stop- ››› page 268, Conditions for keeping ped at traffic lights or in heavy traffic with in- the vehicle stationary with the Au- termittent stops. to Hold function are no longer met. 268 Braking and parking

2. If the engine is running irregularly or an electronic parking brake is automatically WARNING anomaly is detected. connected, it may cause damage. When the ignition is switched on, the status 3. If the engine stalls. of the brake system and the brake assist 4. Manual gearbox: If the clutch and the functions is automatically checked. The accelerator are pressed at the same control lights on the instrument cluster time. Stabilisation and brake as- light up briefly and then turn off again. If a warning light stays on permanently, there is Automatic gearbox: If the accelerator is sistance systems a fault. Seek qualified technical assistance pressed immediately. 5. Automatic gearbox: If any of the tyres Control lamps has only minimal contact with the ground, e.g. in the case of axle articula-  It lights up Brake assist systems tion. Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused by the system. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) WARNING The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If the ABS The ESC helps to improve safety. It reduces The smart technology incorporated into fails, the lamp also lights up. the tendency to skid and improves the stabil- the Auto Hold function cannot defy the ity and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC laws of physics; it only works within the lim-  Flashes detects critical handling situations, such as its of the system. The greater convenience vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheel- provided by the Auto Hold function should ESC or TCS activated. never tempt you to take any risk that may spin on the driving wheels. It stabilises the compromise safety.  It lights up vehicle by braking individual wheels or by reducing the engine torque. The warning lamp ● Never leave the vehicle running and with TCS manually deactivated. will flash on the instrument panel when the the Auto Hold function switched on. ESC is intervening . ● The Auto Hold function cannot always Or: ESC in Sport mode ››› page 272 . keep the vehicle stationary uphill or down- The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system Or: ESC manually deactivated page 272 . hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, on ››› (ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the slippery or frozen surfaces. traction control system (TCS), electronic dif-  It lights up ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control (XDS) and the tractor-trailer sway mitiga- Note ABS faulty or does not work. tion. Before entering a car wash, always switch off the Auto Hold function, because if the ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by changing the torque. »

269 Driving

The TCS can be deactivated when wheel spin the other driven wheel. This function is ac- case the front axle, which results in under- is desirable ››› page 272 . tive up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph). steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory. To prevent the disc brake of the braked The XDS can detect and correct this effect Anti-lock brake system (ABS) wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out via the sensors and signals of the ESC. ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un- automatically if subjected to excessive loads. Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside der braking until the vehicle has reached a The vehicle can still be driven. The EDL will wheel and counter the excess driving torque virtual standstill. You can continue to steer switch on again automatically when the of that wheel. This means that the requested the vehicle even when the brakes are on full. brake has cooled down. trajectory is much more precise. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not pump the brakes. You will feel the brake Tractor-trailer sway mitigation XDS works in combination with the ESC and pedal pulsate while the ABS is working. is always active, even when TCS is switched If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control off, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis- If the running gear or brake system is modi- the following: tractor-trailers tend to sway. connected. fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the severely limited. vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto- Multi-collision brake matically brake the towing vehicle within the Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) limits of the system and mitigate the sway. The multi-collision brake consists of auto- Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available matic braking activated by the Airbag control The brake assist system can reduce the re- in all countries page 297 . unit. It is activated when, in the event of an quired braking distance. The braking force is ››› accident, the Airbag control unit detects de- automatically boosted if you press the brake celerations above the activation level, and pedal quickly in an emergency. You must Electronic engine torque management braking is managed by the ESC system. keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan- (XDS) ger has passed. When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- In the event of an accident, the multi-colli- tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher sion brake can help the driver by braking to Traction control (TCS) speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the avoid the risk of skidding during the accident wheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re- and causing other collisions. In the event of the wheels spinning, the TCS ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel. reduces the engine torque to adapt to the The following actions control automatic This may mean that in certain situations the road condition. This helps the car to start braking during the accident: torque delivered to the inner wheel is too moving, accelerate or climb a gradient. high, causing the wheels to spin. On the oth- ● When the driver presses the accelerator, er hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower Electronic differential lock (EDL) the automatic braking does not take place. drive torque than it could transmit. This can When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes cause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in this the spinning wheel and directs the power to 270 Braking and parking

● When the braking pressure through press- to the lack of assistance from the servo Always bear this in mind, especially on wet ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys- brake. or slippery roads. If you notice the systems tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake cutting in, you should reduce your speed automatically. Brake blending1) immediately to suit the road and traffic ● Multi-collision braking will not be available The brake energy recuperation can generate conditions. Do not be encouraged to take risks by the presence of more safety sys- if there is an anomaly in the ESC system. a braking effect. This braking effect depends tems. If you do, an accident may occur. on the selected driving programme and the Electromechanical brake servo (eBKV) level of charge of the high-voltage battery. ● Please remember that the accident risk always increases if you drive fast, especially With the ignition switched on, the electro- If the braking effect caused by the recupera- in corners or on a slippery road, or if you mechanical brake servo supports the force tion is very intense, the vehicle’s brake lights follow too close behind the vehicle in front of the foot by increasing the pressure that with turn on. The electric engine, when op- of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDS and the driver exerts on the brake pedal. When erating as an alternator, can generate brak- the electronic torque control system can- the brakes are applied by the driver assist ing torque on the front wheels based on the not prevent accidents: risk of accidents! systems, such as those regulated by the ACC RPM and the temperature and charge level ● Accelerate with caution on slippery sur- (adaptive cruise control) or emergency brak- of the high-voltage battery. faces (for example, icy or snow-covered). ing, the brake pedal may move downwards. These variable parameters cause fluctuating Despite the control systems, the driven After disconnecting the ignition, the assis- wheels could spin, affecting the stability of electric decelerations which are hydraulically tance of the brake servo is progressively re- the vehicle: risk of accident! duced. Once stopped, immobilise the vehi- compensated according to the driver’s de- cle to prevent it from moving. Please follow sires. This function is called “brake blending” Note the parking instructions ››› page 273 . and it combines mechanical braking with the engine brake effect. ● The ABS and TCS will only operate cor- If the electromechanical brake servo does rectly if the four wheels have identical not work, the red symbol  indicating failure WARNING tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius in the brake system appears in the instru- Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet of the tyres can cause the system to reduce ment panel. When braking with the faulty ground can result in loss of vehicle control engine power when this is not desired. electromechanical brake servo, vibration of and serious injury to the driver and passen- ● The regulating processes of the systems the brake pedal may occur. gers. can make noises due to their operation. If the electromechanical brake servo is not ● The ESC, ABS, TCS, EDS and the electron- ● If the warning lamp  or  lights up, working, the brake pedal must be pressed ic torque control systems cannot exceed there could be a fault ››› page 82 . » harder, as the braking distance increases due the limits imposed by the laws of physics.

1) Valid for hybrid vehicles 271 Driving

● Any modifications made to the vehicle the TCS or activating the ESC in “Sport” tion, the  control lamp lights up on the in- (for example, to the engine, brake system, mode. strument panel. running gear or to the combination of wheels and tyres) may affect the operation Disconnecting and connecting the TCS Disconnecting and connecting the ESC of the ABS, TCS and EDS. ● The TCS can be switched on and off by In some versions of the model, the electron- briefly pressing the  button on the centre ic stability programme (ESC) can also be console ››› Fig. 177 . switched off. Connecting and disconnecting ● OR: in the infotainment system, press the ● The ESC can be switched on and off by function button  > Assistants > ESC Menu the ESC and TCS briefly pressing the  button on the centre page 89. In vehicles with a driver informa- ››› console ››› Fig. 177 . tion system the corresponding indication will be displayed. ● OR: in the infotainment system press  > Assistants > ESC Menu ››› page 89 . In vehi- When the TCS is disconnected the control cles with a driver information system the cor- lamp  lights up on the instrument panel. responding indication will be displayed.

Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in When the ESC is disconnected the control  “Sport” mode warning lamp lights up on the instrument panel. ● In “Sport” mode, the ESC can be switched  off and on by briefly pressing the button on ESC in “Offroad” mode Fig. 177 In the lower part of the centre the centre console ››› Fig. 177 . Select the Offroad profile to switch it on console: button to switch the ESC off/on ● OR: in the infotainment system, press the ››› page 228. The interventions of the ASR, function button  > Assistants > ESC Menu as well as of the EDS and the ABS system The ESC is switched on automatically when page 89. In vehicles with a driver informa- ››› adapt to irregular terrain. the engine is started, and only works when tion system the corresponding indication will the engine is running and includes the ABS, be displayed. In the following exceptional situations it may EDS and TCS systems. make sense to activate the Offroad mode to When “Sport” mode is connected, the inter- The TCS function should only be switched allow the wheels to spin: ventions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle, off in situations in which traction is insuffi- and the traction control (TCS) interventions ● When “swinging” the vehicle to get it un- cient. are limited. In vehicles with 4-wheel drive, stuck. Depending on the finishes and versions, the TCS is disconnected completely . In addi- ● Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces. there is the possibility of disconnecting only

272 Braking and parking

● When driving on rough terrain with much mode when the brake pedal is released (de- ● On slopes, turn the front wheels so that of the car's weight is lifted off the wheels pending on the model version). they are against the edge of the kerb. (axle articulation). ● Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre ● Steep descents with braking on unpaved of the road. terrain. Parking WARNING For your safety we recommend that you turn off the Offroad mode when it is not abso- ● Avoid parking the vehicle where the hot To park the vehicle exhaust system could ignite inflammable lutely necessary. materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, To disconnect the “Offroad” mode, select a When parking your vehicle, all legal require- spilt fuel or flammable materials. ments should be observed. different driving mode. ● Do not leave passengers inside a closed Always note the following points when park- vehicle, they may not be able to open doors WARNING ing the vehicle: or windows. Locked doors hinder the possi- The ESC Sport mode should be activated bility of a rescue. ● only when traffic conditions and the ability Park the vehicle on a suitable surface ››› . ● Children should not be left alone in the of the driver allow it. Danger of skidding! ● Connect the electronic parking brake vehicle. They could tamper with the hand- ● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising ››› page 266. brake or the gears, which could cause the vehicle to move without control. function will be limited or fully deactivated ● With an automatic gearbox, switch on the (depending on the model version) for parking lock by pressing the P button. ● Depending on weather conditions, it may sportier driving. The driving wheels could become extremely hot or cold inside the ● Stop the engine and turn off the ignition. spin and the vehicle could skid. vehicle. This can be fatal. Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage ● If the ESC is deactivated, the vehicle sta- the steering lock. bilisation function is not available. ● With a manual gearbox, engage first gear on flat ground and slopes, or even reverse Note gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal. ● If the TCS or ESC is switched off or ● When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with “Sport” mode is selected, the cruise control you. system switches off. ● In ESC OFF mode, the ESC will be tempo- Additionally, on steep slopes and inclines rarily reactivated to assist the driver during braking and will then switch back to passive Before switching off the engine, rotate the steering wheel so that if the vehicle should move, it will be held by the kerb. 273 Driving

Help with parking and WARNING WARNING The technology used in the park assist sys- Quick turns of the steering wheel when manoeuvring tem involves a series of limitations inherent parking or exiting a parking space with Park in the actual system and in the use of ultra- Assist can cause serious injury. Assisted parking system sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should ● Do not hold the steering wheel during never tempt you to take any risk that may manoeuvres to park or exit a parking space (Park Assist) compromise safety. The system is not a re- until the system requests it. Doing so disa- placement for driver awareness. bles the system during the manoeuvre, re- Introduction ● Any accidental movement of the vehicle sulting in the parking being cancelled. could result in serious injury. The parking assist system is an additional ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all CAUTION function of the ParkPilot ››› page 281 and times to suit visibility, weather, road and ● helps the driver find a suitable parking space traffic conditions. In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic from among the following types: sensors do not detect objects such as trail- ● Certain surfaces of objects and garments er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, ● park driving in reverse in suitable perpen- do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- or an open (or opening) rear lid, which dicular and parallel spaces, nals. The system cannot detect, at least could damage the vehicle. correctly, these objects or people wearing ● ● park driving forwards in suitable perpen- such clothes. Retrofitting of certain accessories to the dicular spaces, vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter- ● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec- fere with the operation of the Park Assist ● exit a parking space driving forwards from a ted by external sound sources. In certain system and cause damage. parallel space, circumstances this may prevent them from ● detecting people or objects. The Park Assist system uses as a refer- ● park in a suitable space driving forward on ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob- angle partially entering into the selected ● The ultrasound sensors may have blind jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels parking space. The system will centre the ve- spots in which obstacles and people are not are not damaged while parking. If necessa- hicle in said parking space. detected. ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma- ● Monitor the area around the vehicle at all noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle. In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac- times, since the ultrasound sensors do not ● The ultrasound sensors on the bumper tory infotainment system, the front, rear and detect small children, animals or certain may be damaged or shifted in the event of a side areas are represented, and the position objects in all situations. collision, for example, when entering or ex- of obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle. iting a parking space. The Park Assist system is subject to certain ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- limitations inherent to the system and its use ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do requires special attention by the driver ››› . 274 Help with parking and manoeuvring not apply it directly unless very briefly and ● To become familiar with the system and more than once, the Park Assist system always from a distance of more than 10 cm. its functions, CUPRA recommends that you switches off. ● A registration plate or plate holder on the practice operating the Park Assist system in front with larger than the space for the reg- an area where there is not too much traffic Requirements for leaving the parking istration plate, or a registration plate that is or in a car park. space (only for parallel parking) curved or warped can cause: ● The traction control (TCS) must be switch- – False detections. ed on ››› page 272 . – The sensors to lose visibility. Description of the parking assist ● Space length: length of the vehicle + 0.5 – Cancellation of the parking manoeuvre system metres. or defective parking. ● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h The components of the Park Assist system ● If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam- (4 mph) when exiting the parking space. are the ultrasonic sensors located in the aged, the area corresponding to that group front and rear bumpers, the  to switch the of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and Prematurely stopping or automatically in- system on and off and the messages on the cannot be activated until the fault is cor- terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or instrument cluster display. rected. However, you can still use the sen- exiting a parking space sors of the other bumper as per usual. If Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for there is a fault in the system, consult a spe- Prerequisites for parking parking or exiting a parking space in any of cialist workshop. To do so, CUPRA recom- ● The traction control (TCS) must be switch- the following cases: mends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer ed on ››› page 272 . or any SEAT dealership. ● Speed when passing next to the parking ● Press button  in the infotainment system, space: do not exceed approx. 50 km/h (31  > Assistants > Parking > Park assist sys- Note mph). tem. ● In order to guarantee good system opera- ● Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 me- ● When exceeding a speed of approximately tion, keep the ultrasound sensors of the tres when driving past the parking space. 7 km/h (4 mph) more than once. bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do ● ● The driver takes control of the steering not cover them with adhesives or other ob- Space length (parallel parking): vehicle wheel. jects. length + 0.8 meters. ● The parking manoeuvre does not end ● Certain sources of noise, such as rough ● Space width (angle parking): vehicle width asphalt or paving stones and the noise of + 0.8 meters. within 6 minutes from the activation of automatic steering. other vehicles can induce the Park Assist ● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn- (4 mph) when parking. The vehicle will per- ● There is a fault in the system (the system is ings. The presence of metal objects can al- form an automatic braking only once if this temporarily unavailable). » so affect the manoeuvre. speed is exceeded. If you exceed the speed 275 Driving

● The TCS is disconnected. Trailer mode Selecting a parking type ● TCS or ESC intervene with regulation. The Park Assist system cannot be switched ● The driver door is opened. on if the factory-fitted towing bracket ››› page 291 is electrically connected to a To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that trailer. none of these things occur and that the  button on the infotainment system is pressed After changing a wheel again. If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops entering and exiting parking spaces correct- Special characteristics ly, the circumference of the new wheel may The Park Assist system is subject to certain be different and the system may need to limitations inherent to the system. For exam- adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or ex- takes place during driving. Making turns Fig. 178 On the instrument panel display: view of the parking assist system with re- it a parking space on sharp bends. slowly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 duced view. mph]) for a few minutes may contribute to While entering or exiting a parking space, a this adaptation process in Introduc- brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to ››› tion on page 274. change between forward and reverse gears (depending on the case). In successive manoeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to change gears, at the latest, when the continuous audible signal is given (object present at a distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot. When the Park Assist system turns the steering wheel with the vehicle stationary, the instrument panel also displays the symbol . Keep the brake pedal depressed while the symbol remains on the dash panel display to turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. This way, the system will require fewer ma- Fig. 179 On the Infotainment system noeuvres to complete the parking action. screen.: indication of parking modes.

Park assist has 5 parking modes:

276 Help with parking and manoeuvring

 Reverse parallel parking. ● When the system is connected, the symbol the system itself will drive out of the parking  Reverse angle parking.  on the Infotainment System screen is space before starting parking in a similar way highlighted. Additionally, the selected park- to type .  Forward angle parking. ing type is shown on the instrument panel  Reverse parallel parking without driving display. You can change the type of parking Special case of driving forwards into a type past first: “Help me”. on the infotainment system display.  parking bay without driving past first  Forward parking in a parking bay without ● If there are more spaces available, another ● The necessary conditions to park with Park driving past first. space can be selected by clicking on it on Assist have to be met ››› page 275 . the infotainment system display. ● Move forward towards the parking space Selecting a parking type after passing in ● Follow the instructions displayed on the in- while paying attention to traffic and stop the front of the space strument panel while paying attention to vehicle with the front part partially inside the After activating the Park Assist system and traffic and drive the vehicle past the parking parking space. after detecting a parking space, the display space. ● Press button  once in the infotainment on the instrument panel proposes a parking system,  > Assistants > Parking > Park as- type. The Park Assist system selects the Reverse parallel parking without driving sist system. parking type automatically. The selected past first (type ) type is shown on the instrument panel dis- ● When the system is connected, the symbol With this type of parking , press button  play Fig. 178 and on the Infotainment Sys-  on the Infotainment System screen is ››› so that the system resolves the parking that tem screen. highlighted. Additionally, the selected park- has already been started. The system will on- ing mode is shown on the instrument panel ● The necessary conditions to park with Park ly switch on if sufficient progress has been display without reduced display. made with the manoeuvre (the side sensor Assist have to be met ››› page 275 . ● Release the steering wheel in Intro- must be able to detect the reference vehi- ››› ● Press button  in the infotainment system, duction on page 274. cle). If it is impossible to successfully com-  > Assistants > Parking > Park assist sys- plete the manoeuvre that has been started, tem.

277 Driving

Parking with the parking assist system

Fig. 180 On the instrument panel display: parallel parking.  Finding a parking space.  Parking position.  Manoeuvring.

Fig. 181 On the instrument panel display: angle parking.  Finding a parking space.  Parking position.  Manoeuvring.

1 Message to move forwards The necessary conditions have to be met to “appropriate” if the display on the instru- 2 Your vehicle park with Park Assist ››› page 275 and the ment panel shows the message to park 4 . parking mode must be selected ››› page 276 . ● 3 Parking space detected Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, engage reverse gear, or press the button  4 Message to park Parking in the infotainment system,  > Assistants > 5 Message to press the brake pedal ● Look at the display on the instrument pan- Parking > Park assist system. el to see if the space has been detected as 6 Progress bar ● Release the steering wheel in Intro- “appropriate” and if the correct position for ››› duction on page 274. parking has been reached ››› Fig. 180  or ››› Fig. 181 . The space is considered

278 Help with parking and manoeuvring

● Please note the following message: Inter- sponding message is displayed on the instru- Leaving a parking space with the vention in active direction. Watch ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic parking assist system (only for your surroundings!. While you keep signal sounds. watch around you, carefully start accelerat- parallel parking) ing up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). Dur- Progress bars ing the parking manoeuvre, the system only The progress bar takes charge of the steering. You, as the ››› Fig. 180 6 and ››› Fig. 181 6 on the driver, have to accelerate, engage the screen of the instrument panel displays the clutch if necessary, change gears and relative distance to be covered. The greater brake. the distance, the fuller the progress bar. ● Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig- When driving forward, the content of the nal sounds; OR: reverse until the indication progress bar decreases upwards, and when to move forward appears on the instrument reversing, it decreases downwards. panel display ››› Fig. 180  or ››› Fig. 181 ; OR: reverse until the Park Assist finish- Note Fig. 182 On the instrument panel display: ed message appears on the instrument pan- If the manoeuvre is terminated premature- exit a parallel parking space. el display. The progress bar 6 indicates the ly during parking, the result may not be the distance to cover page 279 . ››› best. 1 Your vehicle in reverse gear ● Press the brake pedal until the parking as- 2 Message giving the proposed manoeuvre sist system completes the steering wheel to exit the parking space turns; OR: until the symbol  goes out on the instrument panel screen. 3 Progress bar to indicate the distance left to cover ● Select first gear. ● Move forward until the continuous ParkPi- Leaving a parking space (parallel parking) lot signal sounds; OR: move forward until the The necessary conditions to exit a parking reverse indication appears on the instrument space with Park Assist have to be met panel display. The Park Assist system steers page 275. the vehicle forward and back until it centres ››› it in the space ››› Fig. 180  or ››› Fig. 181 . ● Press button  in the infotainment system, ● For best results, wait at the end of each  > Assistants > Parking > Park assist sys- manoeuvre until the Park Assist system has tem. When the system is connected, the finished turning the steering wheel. The symbol  on the Infotainment System parking manoeuvre ends when a corre- screen is highlighted. » 279 Driving

● Turn on the corresponding turn signal to- ● The vehicle can exit the space when a cor- Automatic braking to reduce damages wards the road you will enter when exiting responding message is displayed on the in- Depending on certain conditions, the Park the parking space. strument panel and, in some cases, an Assist system can automatically brake the ve- ● Engage the reverse gear, or press the but- acoustic signal sounds. Take charge of the hicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly ac- ton  in the infotainment system. steering with the turning angle set by the tioning and holding down the brake ped- Park Assist system. ● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro- al ››› . Following this the driver must press duction on page 274. Please note the fol- ● Paying attention to the traffic, exit the the brake pedal. parking space. lowing message: Automatic steering en- Automatic braking intervention to reduce abled Pay attention to your sur- damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin- roundings. While you keep watch around ishing. you, carefully start accelerating up to no Automatic operation of the more than 7 km/h (4 mph). When exiting the brakes by the parking assist sys- WARNING parking space, the system only takes charge tem The automatic braking intervention by Park of the steering. You, as the driver, have to Assist should never tempt you to take any accelerate, engage the clutch if necessary, Park Assist helps the driver by automatically risk that may compromise safety. The sys- change gears and brake. braking in certain situations. tem is not a replacement for driver aware- ● Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig- ness. The driver is always responsible for braking in nal sounds; OR: reverse until the instrument time ››› . ● The Park Assist system is subject to cer- panel display shows the forward indication. tain limitations inherent to the system. In The progress bar ››› Fig. 182 3 indicates the certain situations, the automatic braking Automatic braking intervention to avoid distance to cover ››› page 279 . intervention may only work in a limited way exceeding the speed limit ● Press the brake pedal until the parking as- or not work at all. sist system completes the steering wheel To avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap- ● Always be ready to use the brakes your- turns; OR: press the brake pedal until the prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leav- self! ing a parking space, the brakes may activate symbol  goes out on the instrument cluster ● The automatic braking intervention will automatically. After automatically activating screen. end after approximately 1.5 seconds. After- the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a ● wards, brake the vehicle yourself. Move forward until the continuous ParkPi- parking space may continue. lot signal sounds; OR: move forward until the reverse indication appears on the instrument The brakes are only automatically activated panel display. The Park Assist system steers once for each attempt to enter or exit a the vehicle forward and back until it can exit parking space. If the speed of approximately the space. 7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corresponding operation is halted. 280 Help with parking and manoeuvring

Parking aid parking and CAUTION ● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle underbody can Parking distance warning system functions manoeuvring (ParkPilot) modify the orientation of the sensors. This can be affected by different factors that can affect the parking aid function. Have can cause damage: Introduction the function checked by a specialised ● Under certain circumstances, the system workshop. does not detect or display certain objects: These assist systems help you when parking ● A number plate or number plate holder and manoeuvring: – Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences, with dimensions that exceed the space for posts and thin trees. the number plate, or a cured or deformed – Plus Parking Aid ››› page 282 . It is an assis- – Objects that are located above the sen- number plate can cause false detections or tant that gives a visual and audio warning sors, such as protrusions in a wall. a loss of visibility for the sensors. of obstacles detected in front and behind the vehicle ››› page 282 . – Objects with certain surfaces or structures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- Note – Rear Parking Aid ››› page 285 . An audio der snow. and visual assistant that warns of obstacles ● The display on the Infotainment system ● Certain surfaces of objects and garments screen shows a slight time delay. located behind the vehicle ››› page 285 . do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- ● In certain situations, the system can give nals. The system cannot detect these ob- a warning even though there is no obstacle WARNING jects or people wearing such clothes cor- in the detected area: ● Always pay attention, by looking directly, rectly. – Rough or cobbled surfaces or surfaces to traffic and the area around the vehicle. ● Sensor signals may be affected by exter- with long grass. Assistance systems are not a replacement nal sound sources. This may prevent them for driver awareness. Responsibility always from detecting people or objects. – External ultrasound sources, such as lies with the driver. other vehicles equipped with ultra- ● If the system warns you of the proximity sound systems. ● The sensors have blind spots in which ob- of a low obstacle, please note that after be- stacles and people are not detected. Pay ing detected by the system, the obstacle in – Heavy rain or snow, hail or dense ex- special attention to children and animals. question may disappear from the measure- haust gases. ● Always keep visual control of the sur- ment sensors as the vehicle moves closer, – If the number plate is not properly se- roundings: use the mirrors for additional and the system will no longer warn of its cured to the surface of the bumper. presence. In certain circumstances, objects help. – Gradient changes. such as high kerbs that could damage the underside of the vehicle are not detected. ● In order to guarantee good operation, keep the sensors clean, free of snow and ● If the parking distance warning system is ice, and do not cover them with stickers or ignored, the vehicle could suffer consider- other objects. » able damage. 281 Driving

● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- Parking aid plus assists the driver by giving Parking Aid operation ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly, visual and audio warnings about obstacles unless you do so very briefly, and always detected in front of and behind the vehicle. Manually connecting and disconnecting the parking aid keep a distance of more than 10 cm away. The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When ● Fitting certain accessories to the front of an obstacle is detected, it is indicated by au- ● Press the function button  > Assistants > the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad- dible signals and in the Infotainment system Parking > Park distance control. vertising, may interfere with the operation ››› Fig. 183. of the Park Assist. Automatic connection of Parking Aid When moving close to an obstacle, it is pos- ● We recommend that you practice parking sible to know if the obstacle is in front of the ● Select reverse gear. in an area without traffic. vehicle or behind it by choosing different ● OR: if you drive forward at a speed of less ● The volume and tone of the signals and sounds. than 15 km/h (9 mph) and you encounter an indications can be changed ››› page 285 . The approximate measurement range of the obstacle, it is detected when it is optically ● Please observe information on towing a sensors is: approx. less than 95 cm. away, or acoustical- trailer ››› page 285 . ly approx. 50 cm. away. If the automatic con- A 1.20 m nection is activated, a reduced display is B 0.60 m shown. ● Parking System Plus C 1.60 m OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain distance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm ap- D 0.60 m Description prox depending on whether or not an obsta- As you approach the obstacle, the frequency cle is detected) of the audible signals will increase. The signal will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid Stop! ● Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster. If the separation is maintained, the warning ● OR: press the parking lock button P. volume is reduced after about 2.5 seconds. Temporary suppression of sound in Park- ing Aid ● Press the  function button. ● OR: activate the electronic parking brake. Fig. 183 Parking aid view on the Infotain- ment system display. 282 Help with parking and manoeuvring

Change from reduced view to full view It only operates every time the speed is re- front are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap- ● Engage the reverse gear if your vehicle is duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first prox. equipped with a reversing camera. time. CAUTION ● OR: press the car icon on the reduced If disabled using the button  in the info- view. tainment system ( > Assistants > Parking > The automatic connection of the Parking Park distance control) to be automatically Aid only works when you are driving slowly. ● OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis- activated again, one of the following actions If driving style is not adapted to the circum- tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm ap- must be taken: stances, an accident and serious injury or prox depending on whether or not an obsta- damage may be caused. cle is detected). ● Switch off the ignition and switch it on again. Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear ● OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph) Visual indication segments View Camera “RVC”) approx. ● Select reverse gear. ● OR: activate or deactivate the parking lock ● OR: press the RVC button on the Infotain- button P ment System screen1). ● OR: switch the automatic activation on and A short confirmation signal will be heard and off in the Infotainment system. the button symbol will light up when the system is switched on. The automatic activation of the parking aid can be switched on and off in the Infotain- ment system››› page 85››› page 89 :

Automatic activation ● Switch the ignition on. ● Press the function button  > Assistants > Fig. 184 Parking aid view on the Infotain- When the Plus Parking Aid connects auto- Parking > Park distance control. ment system display. matically, a diagram of the vehicle and the ● Select Automatic activation. If the box is segments will appear on screen. This func- The optical indication of the segments works checked, the function is connected. tion will be available unless the user has de- as follows: » activated it. If activated automatically, an audible sound warning will only be given when obstacles in

1) The RVC button will only be displayed when reverse gear is engaged. 283 Driving

– White and segments: the obstacle is  > Assistants > Parking > Park distance Trailer mode more than approx. 30 cm away from the control: path or in the direction opposite to trav- On vehicles with a factory-mounted trailer el. They are also displayed when the Setup hook, when the trailer is connected, the rear electronic parking brake is activated. sensors will not activate when reverse gear is Automatic activa- On/off engaged or button  is pressed in the Info- – Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on tion the vehicle’s path and are at a distance tainment system ( > Assistants > Parking > Volume in the front and rear Park distance control). Therefore, any ob- of less than approx. 30 cm away. Front volume area. jects behind or to the side of the vehicle will – Red segments: obstacles are less than not be indicated on the screen and no audio approx. 30 cm away. Rear volume Volume in the rear area. signals will sound. A wake will indicate the anticipated forward When the parking aid is switched on, the volume of The screen will only display objects detected or backward trajectory, depending on the Adjust volume the audio source will be re- at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will engaged gear. duced, depending on the se- be hidden. lected option. If an obstacle is located in the vehicle’s way, the corresponding audible warning will sound. Manoeuvre braking function When the penultimate segment is displayed, Error messages The emergency braking function is used to the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In If a an error or fault message appears on the minimise damage in the event of a collision. the collision zone, the obstacles are repre- instrument cluster in Park Assist, there is a sented in red (including those out of the Depending on the equipment, if the Parking fault. path). Stop the vehicle! ››› in Introduction Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring on page 281, ››› in Introduction on If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- function activates emergency braking when page 281 ! necting the ignition, it will not be indicated it detects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path next time the parking aid is connected. that could cause a collision, driving forwards or in reverse. If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in Setting the indications and audio the areas A and B are displayed ››› Fig. 183 . The function will not brake if the Parking Aid signals If a front sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in is activated automatically. For the system to the areas C and D will be displayed. Symbol operate, manoeuvring speed must be be- The indications and acoustic signals are set  is displayed. tween 2.5-7 km/h (1.5-4 mph) for the front in the Infotainment system: function button area and between 1.5-7 km/h (1-4 mph) for We recommend taking the vehicle to a spe- the rear. cialised workshop to have the fault repaired. 284 Help with parking and manoeuvring

Following an intervention, the braking while are alerted by audible and visible warnings on  > Assistants > Parking > Parking assis- manoeuvring function will be inactive in the the Infotainment system. tant. same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once Make particularly sure that the sensors are the gear is changed, or the selector lever’s Settings not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and position is changed, the function will be ac- the like, as this could affect the system's op- tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations ap- Rear volume Volume in the rear area. eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 355 . ply. When the parking aid is The approximate measurement range of the switched on, the volume of The braking while manoeuvring function is rear sensors is: Adjust volume the audio source will be reset in the Infotainment system: function but- duced, depending on the se- ton  > Assistants > Parking > Park dis- ● Side area: 0.60 m lected option. tance control. ● Central area: 1.60 m Error messages Temporary suppression of emergency As you approach the obstacle, the frequency If a an error or fault message appears on the braking of the audible signals will increase. The signal instrument panel in Parking assist, there is a will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: ● When the function is deactivated with the fault. Braking while manoeuvring button that ap- Stop! ››› in Introduction on page 281, pears on the Parking aid screen of the Info- ››› in Introduction on page 281! If the fault doesn't disappear before disconnecting the ignition, it will not be indicated tainment system. If the separation is maintained, the warning next time the parking aid is connected. ● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or volume is reduced after about 2.5 seconds. bonnet are opened. We recommend taking the vehicle to a spe- Parking Aid connection cialised workshop to have the fault repaired. ● Select reverse gear. Towing device Rear parking aid Parking Aid disconnection In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket device from the factory, when the trailer is ● Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster. Description connected, the parking aid will not be activa- ● OR: use the selector lever to select N or D, ted when reverse gear is engaged. The rear parking aid is an optical and audi- or press the parking lock button P. ble assistant that warns of obstacles located behind the vehicle. Setting the indications and audio signals There are sensors integrated in the rear The indications and acoustic signals are set bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you in the Infotainment system: function button

285 Driving

Peripheral view system (Top WARNING fences, posts or thin trees, which could damage the vehicle. View Camera) The smart technology incorporated into the Top View Camera system cannot over- ● The system displays the auxiliary lines come the limits imposed by the laws of and boxes regardless of the vehicle's envi- Introduction physics and it only works within the limits of ronment, no objects are detected. The the system. The greater convenience provi- driver is responsible for determining that Using 4 cameras, the system generates a ded by the Area View system should never the vehicle will fit in the parking space. representation that is shown on the infotain- tempt you to take any risk that may com- ment system display. The cameras are loca- promise safety. If used negligently or invol- ted on the radiator grille, the exterior mirrors untarily, it may cause serious accidents and Area View system and the rear lid. injuries. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. The functions and representations of the Area View system may vary depending on ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit whether or not the vehicle has ParkPilot. visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. WARNING ● Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen. The image from the cameras does not make it possible to calculate the distance to ● Monitor the area around the vehicle at all the obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) pre- times, since the cameras do not capture cisely, so using them could cause serious small children, animals and certain objects accidents and injury. in all situations. ● The camera lenses augment and distort ● The system will probably be unable to Fig. 185 Viewing the top view system: aer- the visual field and the objects on the represent all areas clearly. ial view. screen are seen differently and imprecisely. ● Certain objects may not be shown or may CAUTION There are four different views to choose not be shown very clearly, for example, from: ● The camera images are only two-dimen- posts or thin rails, due to the screen resolu- sional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, ob- A Front camera area tion or if light conditions are insufficient. jects that jut out or holes on the road, for B Right camera area ● The cameras have blind spots in which example, are more difficult to detect or obstacles and people are not registered. may not be seen at all. C Rear camera area ● In certain circumstances, the camera D Left camera area does not capture objects such as beams,

286 Help with parking and manoeuvring

Function buttons Fig. 185: ● There should be no damage to the vehicle connected electrically to a trailer  Exit the current display. in the camera area. If the position or installa- ››› page 291. tion angle of the cameras have been  Adjust the display: bright, contrast and changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision, the Note colour. system should be checked by a specialised To become familiar with the system and its  Depending on the equipment: con- workshop. functions, CUPRA recommends that you necting and disconnecting the ParkPilot practice handling the Area View system in sound. Special characteristics an area where there is not too much traffic The images on the area view system cameras or in a car park. The aerial view is generated by combining are only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of the images from all the cameras  spatial depth, it is difficult or impossible to Fig. 185. The aerial view can be selected ››› make out on-screen any holes there may be by pressing the vehicle in the area. Connecting and disconnecting on the ground, objects jutting out from the Select the corresponding view by pressing ground or parts protruding from other vehi- Connect the reverse assist the different areas Fig. 185 A to D of the cles. ››› ● Select reverse gear. aerial view or the reduced aerial view. Situations in which the objects or other vehi- ● OR: in the infotainment system select  > cles appear to be further away or closer than Conditions necessary for the use of the Assistants > Parking > Park distance they really are: Area View system control. ● The doors and the rear lid must be closed. ● On moving from a horizontal plane to a Disconnect the reverse assist slope. ● The image must be reliable and clear. For ● Drive forwards at over 15 km/h (9 mph) ap- this reason, for example, the camera lens ● On moving from a slope to a horizontal proximately. must be clean. plane. ● The area around the vehicle must be clear- ● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. ly and totally visible. ● If the vehicle approaches protruding ob- Views of the peripheral vision sys- jects. These objects may be outside the ● The area for parking or manoeuvring tem (modes) should be a flat surface. cameras' angle of visibility. ● The vehicle should not be loaded very Depending on the equipment: con- Trailer mode  heavily at the rear. necting and disconnecting the ParkPilot ● The driver must be used to the system. The Area View system conceals, in the rear sound. camera area, all the auxiliary guiding lines Exiting the Area View system screen: » when the factory-fitted towing bracket is 

287 Driving

 Adjust the display: bright, contrast and from above are represented in order to Reverse Assist (Rear View colour. navigate possible obstacles more precisely. Camera) To select the camera you want to use, press the thumbnail on the left side of the screen. Rear camera views (rear view) Operating and safety warnings Once activated it will be highlighted in orange. You can switch between views in the  Angle parking. The area behind the ve- menu bar at the bottom of the screen. The hicle is shown. Auxiliary lines are shown WARNING selected view will be highlighted in orange. to give guidance. ● The reverse assist does not make it possi- Assistance function for hitching a trailer. ble to precisely calculate the distance from The red lines are indicate a distance of ap-  obstacles and nor can it overcome the sys- prox. 40 cm away from the vehicle. On vehicles with a factory-fitted towing tem's own limits, hence its negligent use device, this function can be used to may cause serious accidents and injuries if Aerial views (bird's eye view) move the vehicle close to a tow bar. used without due care. The driver should Main mode: Auxiliary lines are shown in the infotain- be aware of his/her surroundings at all ment system. times to ensure safe driving. The vehicle and its immediate vicinity  ● seen from above are shown. Depending Green lines: distance to the trailer hitch. The camera lens expands and distorts the field of view and displays the objects on the on the equipment, the ParkPilot's path The distance between the lines is ap- screen in a way that is different from reality. may also be displayed. prox. 0.30 m Distance perception is also distorted. Yellow line: pre-calculated direction of ● Front camera views (front view) the trailer hitch depending on how the Due to the screen resolution or light conditions, some items may be blurry or not steering wheel is turned.  Cross traffic. This visualization helps to displayed at all. Take care with thin posts, monitor traffic to the left, front and right  Cross traffic. This visualization helps to fences, railings or trees that might not be of the vehicle and can be used, for ex- monitor traffic to the left, front and right seen on the screen and could damage the ample, when exiting garages or narrow of the vehicle and can be used, for ex- vehicle. exits. ample, when exiting garages or narrow ● The reverse assist has blind spots where it  Angle parking. The area in front of the exits. cannot see people or objects. Monitor the vehicle is shown. Orientation lines are vehicle's surrounding area at all times. shown to give guidance. ● The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Supervise the parking ma- Side camera views (side view) noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding area at all times.  Right and left sides. The areas located directly to the side of the vehicle seen 288 Help with parking and manoeuvring

● Do not be distracted from the traffic by Introduction Disconnect the reverse assist looking at the screen. Drive forward at least 15 km/h (9 mph). A camera installed in the rear lid handle as- ● The images are only two-dimensional. Protruding objects or holes in the road, for sists the driver with reverse parking or manoeuvring page 236 . example, are more difficult to detect or ››› Shown on the display may not be seen at all. The camera image is viewed together with ● Vehicle load modifies the representation orientation lines projected on the Infotain- The system’s functions and representations of the guide lines. The width represented ment system screen. Part of the bumper can may vary depending on the equipment. by the lines decreases with vehicle load. be seen at the bottom, which can be used by The assistant's image view changes when the Pay special attention to the surroundings the driver as a reference point. when the inside of the vehicle of the lug- factory-fitted tow hitch is electronically connected to a trailer ››› page 298 . gage compartment are loaded. Reverse assist modes ● In the following situations, objects or Depending on the equipment, the following other vehicles appear to be further away or Reverse assist functions and symbols modes are available: closer than they actually are. Pay special When the reverse assist is connected, you attention: ● Angle parking: reverse parking perpendic- can make adjustments using the function – If moving from a flat surface to a slope ular to the road. buttons. Some adjustments are equipment- and vice-versa. dependent. ● Assistance function for hitching a trailer: – If the vehicle is heavily loaded. helps to hitch a trailer.  Exit the current display – When the vehicle approaches objects ● Cross traffic: traffic is monitored in a trans- Switch to angle parking page 290 that are not on the ground surface or verse direction.  ››› that protrude from it. These objects may be outside the camera angle when  Switch to the trailer hitching assistance reversing. function Connecting and disconnecting  Switch to cross traffic Note Connect the reverse assist  Adjust the display: brightness, contrast ● It is important to take great care and pay ● Select reverse gear. and colour. special attention if the driver is not familiar Switch to park assist page 281 with the system. ● OR: in the infotainment system select  >  ››› Assistants > Parking > Park distance con- ● The reverse assist reference lines disap- Display/hide the parking aid view » trol. | pear when the rear lid is open.

289 Driving

Guide lines ● Parking space width: vehicle width + Key to the Fig. 186: Green horizontal lines: extension of the vehi- 0.15 m (without counting the mirrors).  Finding a parking space cle. To display a real image, the following require-  Go to the selected parking space Yellow lines: vehicle path depending on the ments must be met:  Centre the vehicle inside the parking steering angle. space ● The luggage compartment rear door is closed. 1 Road Assistance function for hitching a trailer ● The surroundings are on a flat surface. 2 Parking space On vehicles with a factory-fitted towing de- 3 Lateral boundary of the parking space vice, this function can be used to move the ● The vehicle should not be loaded very vehicle close to a tow bar. heavily at the rear. 4 Rear boundary of the parking space

Auxiliary lines are shown in the infotainment Parking system. Parallel parking ● In the infotainment system select  > As- Green lines: distance to the tow hitch. The sistants > Parking > Park distance control distance between the lines is approx. 0.30 m. before passing in front of the selected park- Yellow line: pre-calculated direction of the ing space. trailer hitch, depending on how the steering ● With reverse assist connected and in work- wheel is turned. ing order, press the function button . ● Place the vehicle in front of the parking Cross traffic space ››› Fig. 186 2 . This visualization helps to monitor traffic be- ● Reverse while turning the steering wheel so hind the vehicle and can be used, for exam- that the yellow lines enter the parking space. ple, when exiting garages or narrow exits. The green and yellow lines must match the side boundary lines 3 . ● Stop the vehicle when the red line has Requirements reached the rear boundary 4 .

To park with reverse assist, the following requirements must be met: Fig. 186 Display on the Infotainment sys- ● Do not exceed a speed of approx. 15 km/h tem screen.: parking with reverse assist. (9 mph).

290 Towing bracket device

Problems and solutions Possible solution Towing bracket device ● Temporarily disconnect the system. The system behaves differently than ex- ● Check if one of the causes indicated above pected Trailer mode has occurred. There can be several causes: ● Once the source of the problem has been Introduction ● The camera is dirty ››› page 355 . In addi- eliminated, the system may be reconnected. tion to dirt and snow, camera visibility can be ● If the system still behaves unpredictably, Take into account country-specific regula- reduced by detergent residue or any type of have it checked by a specialised workshop. tions about driving with a trailer and the use coating. of a towing bracket. ● The system requirements must be met The vehicle has been developed primarily for ››› page 290. carrying people, although it can also be used ● The camera is covered with water. to tow a trailer if fitted with the correspond- ● The factory-fitted towing bracket must not ing technical equipment. This additional load be electrically connected to a trailer has an effect on the useful life, fuel con- ››› page 298. sumption and vehicle performance and in ● The vehicle has some type of damage in some cases can reduce the service intervals. the camera area, e.g. due to a parking im- Driving with a trailer requires more force pact. from the vehicle, and thus more concentra- ● The field of view of the camera is blocked tion from the driver. by an accessory, e.g. a bicycle carrier system. In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on ● Changes have been made to the paint in both the vehicle and the trailer. the camera area, or structural modifications have been made to a component such as Maximum vertical load technically permit- the running gear. ted on the coupling device The maximum vertical load technically per- Camera with no visibility, fault message, mitted from the trailer draw bar on the tow- the system disconnects ing bracket's tow ball is 80 kg. ● Clean the camera or remove possible adhesives or accessories from it ››› page 355 . Vehicles with the Start-Stop system ● Check for visible damage. If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing bracket or one that is retrofitted by CUPRA, » 291 Driving

the Start-Stop system operates as normal. the trailer with the maximum authorised WARNING No special characteristics need to be taken drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing into account. bracket, but do not exceed the specified Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or large objects can affect driving limit. If the system does not recognise the trailer properties and even cause an accident. or the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted WARNING ● Always secure the load properly using by CUPRA, the Start-Stop system must be belts or straps that are suitable and in good disconnected by pressing the corresponding Never use the trailer to transport people, condition. button in the lower part of the centre con- since it would put their life in danger and is ● also prohibited. Adapt your speed and driving style at all sole before driving with the trailer, and it times to suit visibility, weather, road and should remain off for the rest of the jour- traffic conditions. ney ››› . WARNING ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity are Undue use of the towing bracket may cause more likely to overturn than those with a Vehicles with driving profile selection injury and accidents. low one. If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use ● Only use the towing bracket if it is in a ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. of the Eco driving profile is not recommen- perfect state of repair and is properly se- ● Take great care when overtaking. ded. You are advised to select another of the cured. available driving profiles before beginning to ● Reduce speed immediately if you notice ● Never modify or repair the towing bracket that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. drive with a trailer. in any way. ● Never drive at more than 80 km/h ● In order to reduce the danger of injury in Trailer weight/drawbar load (50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more the event of rear-end collisions and to than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir- Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists cumstances). This also applies in countries you do not load the trailer up to the maxi- when parking the vehicle, cover or remove where driving at higher speeds is permit- mum permitted trailer weight, you can then the tow hook when you are not using a trail- ted. Take into account the speed limit for climb correspondingly steeper slopes. er. vehicles with trailers in the corresponding ● The maximum trailer weights listed are only Never fit a towing bracket “with weight country, as it could be less than the speed distribution” or “load compensation”. The limit for vehicles without a trailer. applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above vehicle has not been designed for this type sea level. Since higher altitude decreases en- ● Never attempt to “straighten” the towing of towing bracket. The towing bracket gine performance and the ability to climb vehicle and trailer while accelerating. could fail and the trailer could be released slopes, the tow load decreases proportional- from the vehicle. ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com- WARNING bination must be reduced by 10% for every If the towing bracket has been retrofitted 1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate by a non-CUPRA workshop, the Start-Stop 292 Towing bracket device system must be disconnected manually Technical requirements Trailer brakes whenever driving with a trailer. Otherwise If the trailer has its own brake system, please the brake system could be damaged and Vehicles that are factory-mounted with a take the relevant legal requirements into ac- could consequently cause a serious acci- towing device meet all the technical and le- count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys- dent or injury. gal requirements for driving with a trailer tem to the vehicle's brake system. ● Always disconnect the Start-Stop system ››› page 298. manually when using a towing bracket that If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing Tow cable has not been fitted by a CUPRA workshop. bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for Always use a cable between the vehicle and the maximum authorised load of the trailer the trailer ››› page 294 . Note that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and ● Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al- Trailer tail lights ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm the trailer and must be properly secured to the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing The trailer's rear lights should comply with ››› page 95. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could the statutory safety regulations ››› page 294 . cause the alarm to go off. bracket that has been authorised by CUPRA for this vehicle. Always check and take into ● Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly account the towing bracket manufacturer's first 1000 km ››› page 229 . to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not instructions. sure that the trailer's electrical connection is ● CUPRA recommends that, if possible, the correct, have it checked by a specialised tow hook be removed or covered when it is Towing bracket fitted on the bumper workshop. To do so, CUPRA recommends not going to be used. In the event of a rear- end collision, the damage to the vehicle Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any could be greater if the tow hook is fitted. to the area where the bumper is mounted. SEAT dealership. ● Some retrofitted towing brackets cover The towing bracket should not impair the Exterior mirrors the rear towing eye. In these cases, the bumper's function. Do not make modifica- towing eye should not be used for tow- tions or repairs to the exhaust system or the If you cannot see the area behind the trailer starting or for towing other vehicles. For brake system. Make regular checks to ensure with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehi- this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit- that the towing bracket is secure. cle, additional mirrors will have to be instal- ted with a towing bracket, always keep the led in accordance with the regulations of the tow hook in the vehicle when you remove it. Engine cooling system country in question. The exterior mirrors Driving with a trailer increases the load on should be adjusted before you start driving the engine and cooling system. The cooling and must provide a sufficient field of vision at system should have sufficient coolant and be the rear. » prepared for the additional effort involved in driving with a trailer. 293 Driving

WARNING Hitching and connecting a trailer Pin Meaning

If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is 12 Unassigned not the right one, the trailer could become detached from the vehicle and cause seri- 13 Earth for pin 9 ous injury. Power socket for trailer CAUTION The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power ● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor- socket for the connection between the trail- rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic er and the vehicle. With the engine running, system may be damaged. electrical devices on the trailer receive pow- ● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric er from the electrical connection (pin 9 and Fig. 187 Schematic representation: assign- pin 10 of the trailer power socket). current, the vehicle's electronic system ment of the pins of the trailer's electrical may be damaged. socket. If the system detects that a trailer has been ● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- connected, the consumers on the trailer will tem directly to the electrical connections Pin Meaning receive electricity through this connection of the tail lights or any other power sour- (pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live. ces. Only use the connections intended for 1 Left turn signal This powers, for example, the trailer's interior providing electric current to the trailer. 2 Rear fog light lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in a caravan only receive electrical power if the 3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 engine is running (through pin 10). 4 Right turn signal To avoid overloading the electrical system, you cannot connect the ground wires of pin 5 Rear light, right 3, pin 11 or pin 13. 6 Brake lights If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you 7 Rear light, left will need to use an adapter cable. In this case the function corresponding to pin 10 will not 8 Reverse lights be available. 9 Permanent live Tow cable 10 Live charge cable The tow rope must always be securely fixed 11 Earth for pin 10 to the towing vehicle and loose enough so

294 Towing bracket device that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly. Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always ure of the lighting system, and consequent- However, make sure that the cable does not turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the ly can cause accidents and serious injuries. rub on the ground while driving. tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off. ● Never connect the pins of the trailer power socket to each other. Trailer tail lights Trailers with LED tail lights ● Make sure any work on bent pins is car- Always check the trailer's rear lights to en- For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED ried out by a specialised workshop. sure they are working correctly and that they rear lights cannot be connected to the anti- comply with the relevant safety regulations. If theft alarm system. CAUTION you connect the trailer to the factory-moun- When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does ted system, when you turn on the rear fog Do not leave the trailer connected to the not go off when the electrical connection lamp, the fog lamp of the towing vehicle will vehicle when parked; place it on its support with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with turn off to turn on the trailer fog lamp. wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or light-emitting diodes. falls due, for example, to a variation of the Include in the anti-theft alarm load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will WARNING be placed on the towing bracket and the The trailer is included in the anti-theft sys- If the cables are improperly or incorrectly trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer tem if the following conditions are met: connected, it may lead to an excessive can be damaged. amount of current supplied to the trailer, ● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an which can cause abnormalities in the entire anti-theft alarm and towing bracket. Note vehicle electronic system, as well as acci- ● If the trailer is electrically connected to the dents and serious injuries. ● In case of anomalies in the electrical systems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in towing vehicle through the trailer power ● Ensure that any repairs that need to be socket. the anti-theft alarm system, have them in- carried out on the electrical system are spected by a specialised workshop. ● If the electrical systems of the vehicle and carried out by a specialised workshop. ● If the trailer accessories consume energy trailer are in perfect condition and have no ● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- through the power socket to the trailer and faults or damage. tem directly to the electrical connections the engine is turned off, the battery will ● If the vehicle is locked with the key and the of the tail lights or any other power sour- discharge. ces. anti-theft alarm is activated. ● If the vehicle battery is running low, the electrical connection with the trailer will be When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- WARNING automatically cut. gered if the electrical connection with the trailer is cut off. Contact between the pins of the trailer power socket can cause short circuits, overloading of the electrical system or fail-

295 Driving

Trailer loading Gross combination weight of the towing WARNING vehicle and trailer If the maximum permissible axle weight, Technically permissible maximum trailer The gross combination weight is the actual the maximum load technically permissible weight and vertical load on the coupling weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual on the coupling point, the maximum au- device weight of the loaded trailer. thorised vehicle weight or the gross combi- The technically permissible maximum trailer nation weight of the towing vehicle and In some countries trailers are classified into weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow trailer are exceeded, accidents and serious distinct categories. CUPRA recommends ob- . The vertical load on the coupling is ex- injuries may occur. ››› taining information from a specialised work- erted vertically from above on the hook of shop regarding which type of trailer is most ● Never exceed the values indicated! the towing bracket. suitable for your vehicle. ● The actual weight on the front and rear The information on the maximum trailer axles must never exceed the maximum weight and vertical load on the coupling de- Trailer loading permissible axle weight. The weight on the vice contained in the type plate of the towing front and rear axles must never exceed the The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer maximum permissible weight. bracket are experimental values only. The must be balanced. In order to do this, the correct figures for your specific model, load must be as close as possible to the max- which may be lower than these figures, are imum vertical load technically permissible on WARNING given in the vehicle documentation. The in- the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis- A shift in weight could jeopardize the sta- formation in the vehicle documentation tributed between the back and front of the bility and security of the towing vehicle and takes precedence at all times. trailer: trailer, which could lead to accidents and To promote safety while driving, CUPRA rec- serious injuries. ● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy ommends making the most of the maximum ● Always load the trailer correctly. objects are as near to the axle as possible or vertical load technically permissible on the above it. ● Always secure the load properly using coupling device ››› page 291 . An insufficient belts or straps that are suitable and in good vertical load has a negative influence on the ● Secure the trailer load properly. condition. behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer. Tyre pressure The vertical load increases the weight on the rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca- Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac- Driving with a trailer pacity. cordance with the trailer manufacturer's recommendations. Adjusting the headlights When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the The front part of the vehicle may be raised towing vehicle with the maximum allowable when the trailer is connected and the light pressure ››› page 342 . may dazzle the rest of the traffic. 296 Towing bracket device

Specific features of driving with a trailer ● Press the  button once to disconnect the ● Accelerate with particular care and cau- ● If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake electronic parking brake ››› page 266 . tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu- gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre- ● If the vehicle is fitted with a manual trans- vres. vent the jerking that can be caused by the mission, depress the clutch pedal fully. ● Take great care when overtaking. Reduce locking of trailer wheels. ● Engage first gear or set the gear selector speed immediately if you notice that the ● Due to the gross combination weight of switch to the D/S position. trailer is swaying, however slightly. the towing vehicle and trailer, the braking ● Pull out the  button and hold it in that ● Never attempt to “straighten” the towing distance increases. position to immobilise the towing vehicle and vehicle and trailer while accelerating. ● When going down a slope, engage a lower trailer with the electronic parking brake. ● Take into account the speed limit for vehicles with a trailer, as it could be lower gear (with a manual gearbox, or use the au- ● Release the brake pedal. tomatic gearbox's tiptronic mode) to use en- than for vehicles without a trailer. ● Move off slowly. To do this, release the gine braking. Otherwise, the braking system clutch pedal slowly if your vehicle has a man- could overheat and even fail. ual gearbox. ● The trailer weight, as well as the gross Stabilisation of the towing vehicle ● Do not release the  button until the en- combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer combination gine has sufficient power to start driving. and trailer, change the centre of gravity and the properties of the vehicle. The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer WARNING ● If the towing vehicle is empty and the trail- combination is an additional function of the If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may er is loaded, then the load distribution is in- electronic stability control (ESC). lead to loss of control of the vehicle and se- correct. Under these conditions, drive slowly rious injury. If the system detects that the trailer is weav- and with extra caution. ing, it intervenes to reduce the swaying of ● Driving with a trailer and transporting the trailer. heavy or large objects will change the vehi- Hill starts with a trailer cle handling and braking distances. Depending on the slope of the hill and the Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa- ● Always drive cautiously and carefully. tion requirements combination weight of the towing vehicle Brake earlier than usual. and trailer, the vehicle might start rolling ● The vehicle is factory-equipped with a ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all backwards slightly when you first start up. towing bracket or has been retro-fitted with times to suit visibility, weather, road and a compatible towing bracket. For hill-starting with a trailer, do the follow- traffic conditions. Slow down, especially ing: when driving down hills or slopes. ● The ESC and the TCS are switched on. The control lamp  or  is not lit up on the in- ● Press and hold the brake pedal. strument cluster. »

297 Driving

● The trailer is connected to the towing vehi- ● The stability system does not always de- Electrically unlocking trail- cle through the trailer power socket. tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise ● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h these correctly. er hook (approx. 37 mph). ● When driving on surfaces with poor grip, ● The maximum vertical load technically the trailer can even interfere with the sta- Description permissible is not being exceeded on the bility system. coupling device. ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity can ● The trailer has a rigid draw bar. tip over without having previously weaved. ● If a trailer is not attached, but a connec- ● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equip- tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g. ped with a mechanical overrun brake. installation of a bicycle rack with lights), repeated automatic braking may occur in ex- WARNING treme driving conditions. The enhanced safety provided by the electric stability control of the vehicle and trailer should not lead you to take any risks that could compromise your safety. Fig. 188 On the left side of the luggage ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all compartment: button for unlocking the times to suit visibility, weather, road and tow hook. traffic conditions. The towing bracket’s hook is located in the ● Accelerate with caution when the road is bumper. Tow hooks for electrical unlocking slippery. cannot be removed. ● When adjusting any settings, stop accelerating. There should be no person, animal or object in the path of the tow hook ››› . WARNING Unlocking the tow hook and removing it The electric stability control for the vehicle ● Stop the vehicle and connect the electron- and trailer may not correctly detect all driv- ic parking brake page 266 . ing conditions. ››› ● Switch off the engine. ● When the ESC is switched off, the stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al- ● Open the rear lid. so switched off.

298 Towing bracket device

● Pull the ››› Fig. 188 button briefly. The tow tow hook has not been attached properly or ● If the ball has a diameter of less than 49 hook unlocks electrically and automatically is damaged ››› . mm at any one point, do not use the towing turns outwards. The button's control lamp ● If the warning lamp ››› Fig. 188  remains bracket under any circumstances. flashes. on with the rear lid open, the tow hook is ● Finish remove the tow hook by hand until correctly in place both when extracted and CAUTION you feel and hear that it has engaged and the when covered. control lamp on the button stays on. If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure The control light of the lamp switches off ap- or steam devices, do not point the jet di- ● Close the rear lid. proximately 1 minute after closing the read rectly towards the retractable tow hook or ● Hitching and connecting a trailer lid. the trailer power socket, as this may dam- ››› page 294. age the joints or remove the grease neces- WARNING sary for lubrication. Retracting the tow hook Undue use of the towing bracket may cause ● Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic injury and accidents. Note parking brake. ● Only use the tow hook if it is properly en- At extremely low temperatures, the tow ● Switch off the engine. gaged. hook may be impossible to operate. In this case, place the vehicle in a warmer location ● Always ensure that no person, animal or ● Unhook the trailer and interrupt the elec- (for example, a garage). trical connection between it and the vehicle. object is to be found in the path of the tow If you are using an adapter, remove it from hook. the trailer's power socket. ● Never use a tool or instrument while the Fitting a bicycle carrier on the re- ● Open the rear lid. tow hook is moving. ● Never press the Fig. 188 button when tractable towbar ● Pull the Fig. 188 button briefly. The tow ››› ››› there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or hook unlocks electrically. when a carrier system or other accessories The maximum allowed weight of the carrier ● Turn the tow hook under the bumper with are mounted on the tow hook. system, including the load, is 75 kg. The carrier system should not protrude more than your hand until you feel and hear that it en- ● If the tow hook is not attached properly, gages and the control lamp on the button re- do not use it. Instead, go to a specialised 700 mm backwards from the spherical head. mains on continuously. workshop and have the towing bracket Only carrier systems on which up to 3 bikes ● Close the rear lid. checked. can be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicycles must be mounted as close to the vehicle ● If you detect any fault in the electrical as possible (tow hook). » The control lamp  system or in the towing bracket, contact a specialised workshop and ask them to ● If the warning light on the button check it. ››› Fig. 188  flashes, this means that the 299 Driving

WARNING Retrofitting a towing brack- CUPRA recommends that towing brackets be retrofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex- The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bi- et ample, it may very well be necessary to ad- cycle rack mounted on the tow hook can just the cooling system or mount thermal cause accidents and injury. Description protection plates. To do so, CUPRA recom- ● Never exceed the maximum weight or mends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer the limits indicated above. or any SEAT dealership. ● The bicycle rack may not be mounted to If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance the neck of the hook below the ball because, due to the shape of the neck and specifications should always be kept in mind. depending on the rack model, the rack The distance between the centre of the ball could be incorrectly mounted on the vehi- head and the road ››› Fig. 189 C must never cle. be less than that indicated. This also applies ● Always read and take the manufacturer when the vehicle is fully loaded, including assembly instructions into account. the technically permissible maximum vertical load on the coupling device. CAUTION Distance measurements (measurements If the maximum weight and limits indicated can vary depending on the different chassis above are exceeded, the vehicle may suffer combinations) ››› Fig. 189 : considerable damage. A Mounting points on the vehicle ● Never exceed the values indicated! B 65 mm (minimum) C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle) Note D 1,043 mm CUPRA recommends removing, as far as possible, all removable parts of the bicycles E 414 mm before setting off. These parts include, for F 634 mm example, baskets and saddlebags, child G 959 mm seats or batteries. This improves aerodynamics and the centre of gravity of the rack WARNING system. Fig. 189 Limits and attachment points for retrofitting a towing bracket. If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, this may lead to malfunctions in

300 Towing bracket device the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as to accidents and serious injuries. ● Never connect the trailer's electric system to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other unsuitable power sources. Only use suitable connectors to connect the trailer. ● The towing bracket should be retrofitted only at a specialised workshop.

WARNING If the towing bracket is badly fitted or unsuitable, the trailer may separate from the vehicle while driving. This could cause serious accidents and fatal injuries.

Note ● Only use towing brackets that have been approved by CUPRA for the model in question. ● In some versions, the fitting of a conventional towing hook solution is not recommended. Please consult your Technical Service.

301 Battery

Battery ● Never open or perform maintenance or layed leak of toxic gases. The emitted gases repairs on components or parts of the high could also cause a fire. Do not inhale the voltage network, or disconnect them from gases. High-voltage battery this network. ● Never touch the liquids that spill from the ● Never damage, modify or remove the or- high voltage battery and do not touch the ange high voltage cables or disconnect emitted gases, particularly if the battery is Safety instructions them from the high voltage network. damaged. ● Never open, modify or remove the cover ● In the event of a fire, leave the danger Introduction from the high-voltage battery. area and call the fire department. Inform 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles ● Work on the high-voltage system, as well the fire fighters that the vehicle is fitted as on any systems that may be indirectly in- with an electric drive system. WARNING fluenced by it, should only be carried out by ● Always inform the fire fighters and the specialized personnel with the correspond- emergency service that the vehicle is fitted The vehicle’s high-voltage network and the ing qualifications and training. with a high-voltage battery. high-voltage battery are hazardous and can cause burns and other injuries, including ● Work in the immediate vicinity of high- fatal electric shocks. All high voltage cables voltage cables and high-voltage compo- WARNING are identified by the colour orange. nents with tools that are sharp, give off shavings or that have heat sources, such as If works are performed on the high-voltage ● It should always be assumed that the hot air, thermal bonding or welding work, system and on the high-voltage compo- high-voltage battery is fully charged and may only be performed after disconnecting nents in an inappropriate manner, this may that all of its components are live. This may the voltage. The high voltage should only lead to faults in the operation, accidents also be the case when the ignition is switch- be disconnected by specialized personnel and injuries. ed off. with the corresponding qualifications and ● Work on the high-voltage system must ● Never touch the high-voltage cables, the training. only be performed by authorized special- high-voltage battery or its poles, or allow ● All CUPRA guidelines and standards must ized services with the corresponding per- them to come into contact with jewellery or be followed when performing any work on mit. other metal objects, especially if the high- the high-voltage system and the high-volt- voltage cables, the high-voltage battery or age battery. its poles are damaged. CAUTION ● The gases that are emitted or leaked from ● Never take it upon yourself to perform ● If the vehicle suffers an accident or colli- the high-voltage battery may be toxic or any type of work on the high-voltage net- sion with an obstacle, the high-voltage bat- flammable. work, on the high-voltage cables or the tery must be checked by specialized per- high-voltage battery. ● Damage to the vehicle or high voltage sonnel with the corresponding qualifica- battery could cause an immediate or de- tions and training.

302 High-voltage battery

● If the 12-volt vehicle battery has been 1 High voltage can cause serious injury or disconnected, discharged or replaced, even death. Never touch the battery there is a chance that the combustion en- poles with bare fingers, tools, jewellery or gine may not initially turn off automatically other metal objects. after moving off. If this situation lasts for 2 The high-voltage battery contains haz- several days, contact a qualified specialized ardous liquid and solid substances. Emit- workshop. CUPRA recommends visiting a ted gases can cause severe burns and CUPRA partner for this. blindness. Suitable eye protection and protective clothing must always be worn when working on the high voltage bat- High voltage warning lettering tery to prevent battery fluid coming into contact with the skin and eyes. If the bat- 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles Fig. 191 High-voltage battery warning let- tery fluid comes into contact with the tering. skin or eyes, the affected areas should be rinsed with clean running water for at Warning lettering on the vehicle least 15 minutes, and then a doctor The following parts of the vehicle can be should be consulted immediately. identified with the depicted warning lettering 3 The high-voltage battery may burn. The ››› Fig. 190, ››› Fig. 191 : high-voltage battery should never be exposed to fire, sparks or naked flame. The ● Covers and lids behind which live high- high voltage battery must always be han- voltage components are located. dled with care to avoid damage and fluid ● All the high-voltage components, includ- leakages. ing the high-voltage battery. 4 The high-voltage battery should always ● Under the front bonnet. be kept out of the reach of children. The warning lettering ››› Fig. 190  and  5 You will find further information and indicate high electrical voltage. warnings in the usage instructions and workshop documentation. The components of the high voltage system 6 Incorrect handling of the high-voltage can become very hot and should not be Fig. 190 Warning lettering. battery can cause serious injuries or touched Fig. 190 . ››› death. Never disassemble the high volt- ››› Fig. 191 age battery or remove its cover. »

303 Battery

7 Incorrect handling of the high-voltage maintenance instructions are essential for ● If you plan to leave your vehicle stationary battery can cause serious injuries or maintaining the vehicle's value over time. for prolonged periods of time, park with a death. Maintenance work on the high- charge level of at least 30%. This situation Please also observe the applicable CUPRA voltage battery must only be performed occurs, for example, when you leave your warranty conditions for the high-voltage bat- by specialized personnel with the corre- vehicle at the airport before a trip. tery. sponding qualifications and training. ● Do not expose the vehicle to outside tem- Never modify the high-voltage battery. Conservation instructions peratures below -30°C or above 60°C for When the high-voltage battery is open, over 24 hours. ensure it does not come into contact CUPRA recommends the following conser- with water or other liquids. Liquids may vation instructions: CAUTION cause short circuits, electrical shocks ● Only charge the high-voltage battery when and burns. The high-voltage battery must not be used a low charge level is displayed on the instru- as a stationary power supply. This can ment cluster, or when the electric range is cause irreversible damage to the high-volt- low ››› page 77 . age battery. Conservation of the high- ● Do not directly charge the high-voltage voltage battery battery after only a short drive in full electric CAUTION mode. If the vehicle is parked for a long time with Conservation instructions ● As much as possible avoid fully discharging the high-voltage battery discharged, it may the high-voltage battery, such as by leaving no longer be possible to charge the battery 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles the vehicle parked for a prolonged time with or start the vehicle. Irreversible damage a low load level. The charge level must not could be caused to the high voltage battery Reliability and capacity of the high-voltage drop below 20% for long periods of time in the long term. battery ››› . ● Charge the high-voltage battery at regu- In principle, lithium ion batteries are subject ● When the high-voltage battery has been lar intervals. to ageing and wear and tear throughout their fully charged, start driving immediately if useful life due to their physical and chemical possible. characteristics. Correct use of the high-voltage battery makes a considerable contribu- Vehicle parking times tion to keeping it in a reliable state in the long term and to achieving high useful capacity ● If there is a frost, do not park the vehicle and range. Therefore, it is extremely impor- for several hours with a charge level of lower tant to respect the following conservation in- than 40% ››› . structions for the high voltage battery. These

304 High-voltage battery

Charging settings in the in- Departure time settings menu ● Lower battery charge limit (minimum de- Programmed charging (departure times) can sired charge level of the high voltage bat- fotainment system tery): a minimum range can be ensured with be set ››› page 305 . this function. The vehicle charges directly Battery Manager Menu ● Specify the amount of time for which you once it has been connected to a charging want the high-voltage battery to charge and station or electrical socket. The function is 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles the air conditioning to be switched on inside available if a departure time has been activa- The Battery Manager allows you to set or the vehicle. ted ››› page 305 . select departure times for the programmed ● Air conditioning using the high-voltage charging of the high-voltage battery and for Extended stationary air conditioning battery: If the vehicle is not plugged in to an the vehicle’s electric heating and air condi- menu external network and this option is enabled, tioning. ● Set the desired temperature for the sta- the electric range of the vehicle can be sig- tionary air conditioning ››› page 159 . nificantly reduced! Open the Battery Manager menu ● Warm the seats and windscreen for depar- ● Switch the ignition on. ture: select the seats in the Infotainment sys- ● Switch on the infotainment system. tem or switch on windscreen heating. The Departure time settings active functions will be switched on during ● Select Battery Manager from the main 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles stationary air conditioning (either due to an menu. immediate start or departure scheduling) if With programmed charging, the battery It is possible to change the settings for im- considered necessary by the air conditioning charge can be programmed and delayed so mediate charging (the next charging proc- (cold conditions). that the desired battery level is reached at a ess). certain time when the vehicle is connected The air conditioning works both when the to the charging socket. ● Reduce the charging current, e.g. when vehicle is connected to the grid and discon- other major consumers are operating on a nected. If you want to use the high-voltage Viewing the departure times single line of the electrical installation at the battery as the power supply, change the set- ● Select Battery Manager from the Infotain- same time. Charging power is reduced and ting in the Settings menu. ment main menu. charging time is extended. Charging settings menu ● Select  to open the overview of depar- ● Set the desired temperature for the sta- ture times. » tionary air conditioning ››› page 159 . It is possible to configure the general settings for the charging process.

305 Battery

Departure time settings Charging the high-voltage Direct current (DC) or Mode 4 charging is To set the desired departure time, touch the not compatible with this vehicle. corresponding function button or check the battery box . Differential protection Introduction The vehicle is fitted with a direct current ● Departure times: Time, day of the week or 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles leakage (DC leakage) protection device. This set a single or weekly departure time. prevents any DC leaks that may occur during ● Air conditioning: the vehicle interior is Check that the driving mode is deactivated charging from flowing into the home’s elec- heated or cooled at the departure time and that the charging cable and infrastruc- trical installation through the charging cable. ››› page 159. ture are in perfect condition. ● Trough or night-time tariff: a preferred WARNING Charging modes period of time for charging can be set. Charging the battery improperly, failing to Your vehicle has the following possible observe generally applicable safety meas- Activating the departure time charging modes: ures, using unsuitable or damaged electricity sockets and charging cables, charging Activate the departure time by checking the ● Fixed AC (alternating current) charging from an unsuitable electrical installation or box in the departure times overview. station or Wallbox, also known as Mode 3 incorrectly handling the high-voltage bat- charging page 308 : The vehicle can be tery can cause short circuits, electrical dis- Displays ››› charged at maximum power at these sta- charges, explosions, fires, burns, serious in-  Charging activated at a departure time. tions, e.g. at a public charging station or jury and even death.  Air conditioning switched on at a depar- home Wallbox. ● Always follow the steps in the order in ture time. ● Portable charging station or ICCB (In-Ca- which they are shown to avoid the risk of an  The departure time is used regularly. ble Control Box) cable, also known as Mode electrical discharge and serious injury 2 charging or cable ››› page 308 : The Mode caused by the residual energy present in 2 cable is included as standard and is con- the charging accumulator. Never pull on nected to a conventional household electri- the mains connector during charging. cal socket, meaning that the maximum pow- ● Only charge the vehicle from correctly in- er will be limited ››› . You must plan for a stalled power sockets that have been tes- longer charging time, e.g. overnight. ted and are undamaged, and from electrical installations in a perfect state of repair. The home's electrical installation must be Get specialized personnel to periodically verified and in perfect condition. inspect the power sockets and the electrical installation.

306 High-voltage battery

● Only plug in the charging cable to an vice from qualified electrical installation er from a fixed charging station or Wallbox. electrical socket that is protected from wa- professionals. This achieves greater efficiency when com- ter, humidity and other liquids. ● Only use the charging cables supplied pared to charging from an electrical socket. ● Never charge the vehicle in potentially with the vehicle or the charging station ca- ● Check the technical information about explosive atmospheres. The components ble. If the cable needs to be replaced, it is your vehicle’s charging capacity. You can of the charging cable can cause sparks and, recommended to exclusively use CUPRA get more information a specialised CUPRA therefore, may ignite flammable or explo- charging cables. dealer or any SEAT dealership. sive vapours. ● Never make changes or repairs to electri- ● Never use damaged charging connectors cal components, particularly the high volt- or cables. Before each use, check that the age system. Identification of compatible connector and charging cable are not dam- ● Always unplug the charging cable before charging infrastructure aged. starting the vehicle. Place the protective ● Never use the charging cable with an ex- caps and close the cover of the battery 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles tension lead, rolled cable, power strip or charging socket. adapter, e.g. adapter for other countries or timer. Note ● Always protect the connectors to prevent ● water, moisture and other liquids from di- The high-voltage battery can only be rectly getting inside. charged at charging stations that meet the following requirements and regulations: ● For safety reasons, no other work should be performed on the vehicle while it is – IEC 61851 and IEC 62196 (type 2 connector). Fig. 192 Identification of alternating cur- charging. rent (AC) and type 2 connector. ● ● Always end the charging process before Very low or very high temperatures can unplugging the mains connector. Other- noticeably reduce the high voltage bat- wise the charging cable and the electrical tery’s charging power. installation may also be damaged. ● To avoid possible compatibility problems ● Never charge several vehicles simultane- with charging infrastructures, CUPRA rec- ously from electrical sockets of the same ommends the use of cables and home safety circuit. Use a different safety circuit charging stations recommended by the to charge additional vehicles. Always check Volkswagen Group. the maximum current or power of the safe- ● For charging with alternating current, Fig. 193 Identification of direct current ty circuit that is used. If necessary, seek ad- CUPRA recommends charging the high- (DC) and the vehicle's CCS connector » voltage battery at maximum charging pow-

307 Battery

Compatibility between vehicles and charg- AC charging Connecting the charging cable ing infrastructure 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles ● Firstly, connect the charging cable to the The following indicators according to DIN EN electrical socket, charging station or Wall- 17186 report whether the infrastructure's box. Next, fully unwind it. charging connectors are suitable for the ve- ● Charging cable for power sockets: The hicle ››› . protection device performs a self-test ››› page 313. Indicators ››› Fig. 192 ● With the vehicle unlocked, the battery  In the vehicle charging cover opens when it is pressed  At the charging station ››› Fig. 194. Indicators ››› Fig. 193 ● Plug the charging connector into the charging socket. Check that the charging  Voltage up to 500 volts connector is fully plugged in.  Voltage of up to 1000 volts. Fig. 194 Behind the battery charging cover on the front left-hand side: Charging The connector locks automatically. The indicators are located on the vehicle's socket charging socket, on components of the local The LED (charging process display) lamp on Fig. 194 charging infrastructure (charging station, ››› the charging connector lights up 2 . The in- socket) and on the charging cable. The indi- 1 charging socket dicator lamp lights up on the instrument cluster display . cators refer to standardized charging sys- 2 Charging process display tems as per the DIN EN 62196 standard. The battery charger installed in the vehicle Automatic start of the charging process WARNING converts alternating current from the public If programmed charging is not activated, the supply into direct current. Charging the vehicle at unverified electri- charging process starts immediately cal installations can cause serious injury AC Charging Station, Wallbox or mode 2 ca- ››› page 305. The external charging infra- and damage. ble: The vehicle’s high-voltage battery can structure must be active. ● If there is no indicator or if the charging be charged using alternating current (AC) infrastructure is unknown, an electrical in- through the corresponding charging socket During the charging stallation expert should be consulted first. 1 . The charging process display on the charging socket flashes green 2 . The indicator lamp  flashes green on the instrument cluster.

308 High-voltage battery

Interrupt the charging process reached after several charging processes. The charging process can be interrupted: This is for technical reasons and is not a vehicle malfunction. ● Unlock the vehicle. If the vehicle is not used for a long period of ● Press the function button to end the time, the high-voltage battery must be charging process. The charging process discharged at least once every four months. play on the charging socket lights up in white 2 . Note ● Unlock the vehicle to unlock the charging If you leave the charging cable connected connector. after charging, the vehicle's electrical consumers will not drain the high-voltage bat- To restart the charging process just press the tery. function button to start the charging process.

After charging Charging process display Fig. 196 On the inside of the cover of the battery charging socket: sticker with infor- When the high-voltage battery is fully charg- 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles mation on the charging process display. ed, the charging process display on the charging socket lights up green. An LED light on the charging socket Fig. 195 (arrow) shows the status of the ● Unlock the vehicle. ››› charging process. ● Unplug the charging connector from the charging socket within 30 seconds. A sticker on the battery charging cover provides information on the meaning of the ● Disconnect the charging cable from the LEDs ››› Fig. 196 . power supply and replace the protective cap. ● Close the charging cover and make sure charging process displays: you hear it click into place. Green LED ››› Fig. 196 : Fig. 195 Behind the cover of the battery First charge and charging after a long time charging socket: charging process display 1 Always on: Charge completed successfully. If the high-voltage battery is new or has not been charged for a long time, the maximum 2 Turn signals: The high-voltage battery is charge level of the battery can only be charging. »

309 Battery

3 Short flashes: Programmed charging is Off The charging process is not possible or has active. The charging process has not yet ● After unlocking or locking the vehicle, the been paused started. lighting switches off automatically after a An error may be displayed on the instrument while. Yellow LED ››› Fig. 196 : cluster display or on the charging socket’s charging process display. 4 Turn signals: The parking lock P has not Note been enabled. You can try the following to solve the prob- If the charging process display permanently lem before seeking professional assistance: 5 Always on: No electrical network has indicates an error in the power supply or been detected. Arrange an inspection of vehicle’s charging system, you should seek ● Unlocking the charging connector and the power supply and network. Seek pro- professional assistance. plug the charging cable in again. fessional assistance. ● OR: Make sure that the charging settings Red LED ››› Fig. 196 : are as desired: “immediate” or “program- Troubleshooting med”. 6 Turn signals: Error in the charging system. The charging process cannot start 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles ● OR: Check if the charging connector is or has paused. properly plugged in.  Error in the electric drive system Always on: The charging connector has ● OR: Check if a fault is displayed on the The warning lamp lights up red.  You must not been locked. Unplug the charging charging station or, depending on the fea- park the vehicle in a safe place. connector and plug it back in to the tures, on the displays of the mode 2 charging charging socket, making sure it is proper- The corresponding error message is dis- cable. ly inserted. If the problem persists, check played on the instrument cluster display. If the fault cannot be rectified, seek profes- the compatibility of the cable or ask a Fault in the electric drive system. The high sional assistance directly. professional for help. voltage components may be damaged ››› . WARNING Charging socket lighting ● Park the vehicle outdoors as soon as it is High-voltage components, including the In the dark, the charging socket's side light- possible and safe to do so. battery and high-voltage cables, may be ing (white LED) can facilitate orientation in ● Switch off the drive system. live and damaged. The high voltage system the vehicle: ● Seek professional assistance. voltage is dangerous and can cause burns, other injuries and fatal electric shocks. Ignition ● Do not touch the high voltage compo- ● The vehicle has been unlocked. nents! ● OR: The charging connector has been unplugged from the charging socket. 310 High-voltage battery

Emergency release of the charg- Manual release of the charging connector country, e.g. charging connector connec- ing connector The puller for the manual release mecha- tions for power sockets. nism is at the front left of the vehicle interior, 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles CUPRA recommends exclusively using the above the charging socket ››› Fig. 197 . supplied charging cable.

● Disconnect the power supply at the charg- Notes on the charging cable ing station or electrical socket. ● Handle with care. ● Open the bonnet and make sure it is held in place with the prop. ● Unroll and roll fully. ● Pull the puller ››› Fig. 197 . ● Do not twist or bend it over sharp edges. ● Immediately unplug the charging connec- ● Do not crush it or drive the vehicle over it. tor. ● Always unplug it by pulling on the connector. Note ● Children should not use the charging ca- Fig. 197 Between the left wing panel and ● the engine bonnet hinge: Charging con- The manual release mechanism of the ble. charging connector should only be used in nector manual release mechanism puller. ● Keep animals away from the charging ca- the event of a failure. ble. Unlocking the charging connector ● After using the charging connector’s ● After use, store it safely and without twist- manual release mechanism, the charging Prerequisites: socket must be inspected immediately by a ing it. ● The charging connector is plugged in cor- professional. rectly ››› page 308 . Notes on charging connectors and the charging cable protection device ● The vehicle is unlocked. ● Do not touch the charging connector’s ● The charging process has ended or has Charging cable paused ››› page 306 . contacts. ● Protect from strong sunlight (outside tem- The manual release mechanism must be Introduction peratures no higher than 50°C or 122°F). used if these prerequisites are met and it is 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles ● Do not drop them. still impossible to unplug the charging connector. The type of charging cable supplied with the ● Protect from immersion in fluids such as vehicle depends on the delivery volume and rain water. the specific technical specifications of each ● Fit the protective caps after each use. »

311 Battery

Cleaning the charging cable sult in fire damage and damage to the For the sake of the environment charging cable or home electrical installa- ● Clean the surface of the charging cable Charging cables must be disposed of in an tion. with a dry or slightly damp cloth ››› , ››› . environmentally friendly way and should ● Never connect the charging cable to an not be thrown in the household waste. WARNING extension lead, cable reel, power strip or adapter or timer. Items that are not secured, or incorrectly Note secured can cause serious injury during sudden manoeuvres or braking, or in the WARNING The maximum charging capacity of the event of an accident. safety circuit that is used must be observed. The high voltage system voltage is danger- If the charging cable is planned into an ● Store the charging cable securely in the ous and can cause burns, other injuries and electrical socket on the same circuit as oth- luggage compartment. fatal electric shocks. er consumers, the circuit's fuses may trip. ● Use the organizer/protective cover provi- ● Only clean the charging cable when it is ded with the cable for this purpose. unplugged. Charging cable for alternating WARNING CAUTION current (AC) charging stations Using a charging cable that has been dam- The charging cable, as portable electrical 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles aged or tampered with can cause serious equipment, may have to be checked peri- injury and fatal electric shocks. odically. This requires a test adapter. ● Before each use check that the connectors and the charging cable are undam- CAUTION aged, e.g. check for cracks. The charging cable can be damaged if not ● Never use a charging cable that is dam- cleaned properly. aged or has been tampered with. ● Only water should be used for this pur- ● If the charging cable does not work cor- pose, and never additional cleaning prod- rect, get a specialised CUPRA dealer or any ucts. SEAT dealership to look at it. ● Water should be prevented from getting into the contacts. WARNING Fig. 198 Charging cable for alternating current (AC) charging stations. The charging cable for electrical sockets must always be connected directly to an electrical socket. Failure to do so could re-

312 High-voltage battery

The maximum charging current is 16 or 32 Charging cable for power sockets 2 Control lamp of the protection device amps, depending on the vehicle’s features 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles 3 Control lamp of the vehicle and the charging cable that is supplied ››› . 4 Failure warning lamp WARNING Charging cable information Charging the high-voltage battery with an inappropriate charging cable could cause Before using the charging cable, also follow short circuits, serious injuries and fatal the instructions displayed on it and on the electrical shocks. rear of the protective device.

Protection device WARNING The electronic protection device Fig. 200 The charging cable should not be used as ››› ensures that the charging connector does an extension lead. The charging process could be affected. Fig. 199 Charging cable for electrical not receive current until it is plugged in to sockets the vehicle's charging connector.

CAUTION Self-check Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and When the charging cable is plugged into the indications when using the charging sta- electrical socket, the protective device auto- tion. matically performs a self-test. During this check, all warning and indicator lamps turn Note on briefly and go out one after the other. Charging with a 16 A charging cable is not Upon completion, the operational status at possible in some charging stations that that time is displayed. support 32 A. This depends on the features of the charging station. Operating displays Fig. 200 On the charging cable for power ● Before charging the vehicle, find out sockets: Indicator lamps on the protection One or more indicator lamps ››› Fig. 200 1 , about the available charging technology. device. 2 or 3 light up green. »

››› Fig. 200: 1 Indicator lamp of the connector and the power supply.

313 Battery

Display ››› Fig. 200 Meaning starts slowly flashing green. Warning lamp 4 ● Check the instructions located on the back starts slowly flashing red. of the protective devices. The charging cable is plug- ● Seek professional assistance if the fault ged into the mains but has ● Unplug the charging cable and let it cool 1 on persists. not been connected to the down. vehicle. ● If the error occurs again, seek professional Note 1 , 2 on, 3 flashes The high-voltage battery is assistance. slowlya) charging. If there is any other mains connection dur- If charging continues with a lower charging ing the charging process, or if the vehicle is The charging process is current, warning lamp 4 lights up in red in right next to the high voltage cables, charg- 1 , 2 and 3 on complete. The high-voltage addition to the status indicator. The charging ing from an electrical socket is not possible battery has charged. cable must be allowed to cool down for a in some cases. Additional mains connections: a) The available supply voltage depends on each while. The charging current automatically in- country. creases again. ● Connecting a 12 volt battery charger. ● Contact with a work tool connect to the Set the charging current Fault display mains, such as a vehicle lift.

The charging cable limits the charging cur- If the red warning light 4 flashes or turns on rent according to the available power supply. without one of the indicator lamps If the local mains supply does not allow ››› Fig. 200 1 , 2 or 3 also turning on con- charging at the maximum charging current, tinuously on the status indicator, there is a the charging current can be reduced, default. pending on the charging setting features in the infotainment system ››› page 305 . Display ››› Fig. 200 Meaning 1 flashes, 4 on or Failure in the power supply. Temperature control flashing The charging cable temperature control 2 flashes, 4 on or Failure in the protection de- switches on when the charging cable over- flashing vice. heats, such as when it has been stored in a 3 flashes, 4 on or luggage compartment exposed to high tem- Failure in the vehicle. flashing peratures or strong sunlight. When the charging process is interrupted, The charging process pauses or is cancelled. the status indicator that is lit up at the time switches off and one of the indicator lamps 314 Checking and refilling levels

After a few seconds the fuel tank flap will un- ● Hybrid vehicles: Use the  button on the Practical tips lock and remain unlocked for a few minutes. driver’s door to release the tank flap. If you have not refuelled after this time, you ● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the  Checking and refilling must press the button again before refuel- retainer zone. ling. ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left. levels Avoid touching the fuel tank flap lock button ● Place it in the space on the hinge of the Fig. 202 (arrow). The system will interpret ››› open flap ››› Fig. 202 . Refuelling that you have finished and cannot continue refuelling. Press the  button on the driver’s ● Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as door again to continue. the pump’s automatic nozzle cuts off the Purging the fuel tank fuel supply. Do not try to put in more fuel af- 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles. ter the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion chamber in the fuel tank. Refuelling ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as far as it will go. ● Close the lid.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at ››› page 317. The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is given in page 367 . Fig. 201 Driver's door: tank flap release. ›››

Before refuelling the fuel system must be Fig. 202 Fuel tank flap with tank cap at- Hybrid vehicles tached. depressurised ››› in Refuelling on Every 6 months it is necessary to run on pet- page 316. To do this, press the  button on rol until the control lamp  switches off, and The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the the driver’s door. then the tank must be refilled. This is neces- vehicle. An audible sound will be played and a warn- sary to ensure that the system works proper- The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked ing will be displayed on the instrument clus- ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv- and locked automatically using the central ter display. ing with petrol. » locking.

315 Practical tips

WARNING tact with the canister during filling. This essary, request assistance from specialised helps prevent an electrostatic charge personnel. Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se- building up. rious burns and other injuries. – Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the ● When refuelling, turn off the engine and Note luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is turn off the ignition for safety reasons. explosive. Risk of fatal accident! Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective ● The fuel system of PHEV models is pres- device that prevents the insertion of the surized to prevent petrol vapours from es- wrong fuel hose1). It is only possible to re- caping into the atmosphere. CAUTION fuel with Diesel nozzles. ● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or ● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it ● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in should be removed immediately. It could it is very small, it is possible that it will not the vicinity due to the risk of explosion. otherwise damage the paintwork. be able to open the protective device. Be- fore trying to insert the pump nozzle by ● Observe legislation governing the use, ● Never run the tank completely dry. The turning it, try a different pump or request storage and carrying of a spare fuel canister catalytic converter can be damaged. specialist help. in the vehicle. ● When filling the fuel tank after having run ● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can- ● For safety reasons we do not recommend it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel ister, the protective device will not open. carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. engine, the ignition must be switched on One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in In an accident the canister could be dam- for at least 30 seconds before starting the very slowly. aged and could leak. engine. When you then start the engine it may take longer than normal (up to one mi- ● If, in exceptional circumstances, you have nute) to start firing. to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe the following points: – Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis- For the sake of the environment ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle. Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause This could cause an explosion. Always the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm. place the canister on the ground to fill it. Note – Insert the filling nozzle as far as possible into the spare fuel canister. There is no emergency mechanism for the manual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec- – If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in con-

1) Depending on country 316 Checking and refilling levels

Fuel types 2 Diesel according to EN590 standard. The 91 octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power number indicates the maximum per- loss) may be used. 1) centage of Biodiesel in the fuel. “B7” Identification of fuels means a maximum of 7% Biodiesel. Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at least 3 Synthetic diesel according to EN15940 You should use super 95 octane petrol (91 standard. AKI) at least. 4 Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed If super is not available, if necessary, use Natural Gas. normal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- Type of petrol ble.

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or the fuel tank flap. super 95 octane petrol at least The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- We recommend refuelling with super plus 98 Fig. 203 Identification of fuels according verter and must only be run on unleaded octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super to European Union (EU) Directive petrol. The petrol must comply with the 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power 2014/94/ standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels loss). with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled If super is not available, if necessary, use Fuels are identified by different symbols on (E10)2). The types of petrol are differentiated normal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case the pump and on your vehicle's tank flap. by using the octane numbers (RON) or via only use moderate engine speeds and a light The identification serves to prevent confu- the anti-knock index (AKI). sion when choosing the fuel. throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possible. » Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or 1 Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha- normal 91 octane petrol at least nol). The number indicates the percentage of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means, We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc- for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max. tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal

1) Depending on country 2) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in. 317 Practical tips

CAUTION ● In countries in which there is no sulphur- as they can cause severely damage the fuel free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul- system and the engine. ● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g. phur content fuel. E30 - E100 button must not be used. The ● If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not fuel system would be damaged. start the engine under any circumstances. Risk of damaging the fuel system and the ● A single refuelling with leaded fuel or engine! Seek professional assistance. other metal additives entails a permanent Diesel deterioration of the effectiveness of the 3 Valid for: vehicles with diesel engines catalytic converter. ● Only use fuel additives that have been Please note the information on the inside of AdBlue® approved by SEAT. The products that con- the fuel tank flap. tain substances to increase the octane rat- The diesel can thicken at very low tempera- ing or decrease knocking may contain met- Information about AdBlue® tures, thus affecting the start or operation of al additives that damage the engine and the engine. Ask your service station attend- catalytic converter. This type of products AdBlue® consumption depends on your per- must not be used. ant if their diesel is suitable for winter use. sonal driving style, the temperature of the system and the outdoor temperature when ● Do not use fuels shown in the pump as Water in the fuel filter1) containing metals. LRP (lead replacement the vehicle is used. petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is AdBlue® freezes at temperatures of -11 °C metal additives. Risk of engine damage! equipped with a fuel filter with a water sep- (+13°F). The system has heating elements ● High engine speed and full throttle can arator, the instrument panel may display the that guarantee its operation even at low tem- damage the engine when using petrol with following warning:  Water in the fuel peratures. an octane rating lower than the correct filter. If this is the case, take the vehicle to grade for the engine. The AdBlue® tank has a capacity of approx. a specialised workshop so that they can 11 litres. drain the fuel filter. Note When the range is less than 2400 km the CAUTION instrument cluster screen displays a message ● Fuel with an octane rating higher than requesting an AdBlue® refill. the one required by the engine can be ● Never use of FAME (biodiesel that does used. not meet the EN590 standard), petrol, If this message is ignored, the yellow warning heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents lamp will come on when the remaining range is less than 1000 km. . The

1) Depending upon country. 318 Checking and refilling levels indication that in XXX km it will no longer be  It lights up yellow Fill AdBlue® possible to restart the engine will appear on the instrument panel display. The AdBlue reserve is low. Refill AdBlue within the next kilometres (or miles) that If the yellow indicator lamp is ignored, when are indicated ››› page 319 . SEAT recommends con- remaining range of 0 km is displayed, it will tacting a specialised workshop. no longer be possible to restart the engine. The red warning lamp will light up .  and  They light up yellow AdBlue® is a registered trademark of the There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitable German Association of the Automotive In- AdBlue fluid has been used. dustry (VDA) and is also known as AUS32 or Contact a specialised workshop. Have the system DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid). checked there. Fig. 204 AdBlue tank cap. CAUTION Several warning and control lamps should Overfilling with AdBlue® can cause damage light up for a few seconds when the ignition Operations prior to refilling to the tank system. is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few Park the vehicle on a flat surface and turn off seconds. the ignition. If the vehicle is on a slope or on a curb, the level indicator may not detect the Control and warning lamps WARNING refill properly. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- If an AdBlue® warning message is shown on  It lights up red trol and warning lamps on page 84. the instrument cluster display, fill with at The engine cannot be restarted! The AdBlue level is least the minimum required amount (ap- too low. prox. 5 litres). Only after adding this amount Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area then will the system detect that AdBlue® has been top up with the minimum required quantity of AdBlue added and you will be able to start the en- ››› page 319. gine again. The maximum amount that can be refilled is 11 litres.  and  They light up red Fill with a refill bottle The engine cannot be restarted! Fault in the AdBlue system. Only use AdBlue® that complies with the Contact a specialised workshop. Have the system ISO 22241-1 standard. Only use original checked there. containers. »

319 Practical tips

● Open the tank cover ››› Fig. 204 . Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue ● Never pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank! ● Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an- Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re- This could result in engine damage. ti-clockwise direction. duction. ● Do not carry the refill bottle inside the ● Please observe the manufacturer's instruc- vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera- ● Open the tank cap. tions, indicated on the refill bottle. ture changes or damage to the bottle), the ● Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise AdBlue® may damage the vehicle's interior. ● Check the expiry date. ››› Fig. 204. ● Remove the cap of the refill bottle. ● Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the For the sake of the environment ● Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank fill- first time. Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ- er neck vertically and screw the bottle on by ● Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise ment-friendly manner. hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction. until you hear a click. ● Press the refill bottle in the direction of the Note filler neck and hold it in this position. WARNING ● Wait until the contents of the refill bottle Suitable AdBlue® refill bottles can be pur- AdBlue® should only be stored in its origi- chased from SEAT dealerships. have been poured into the AdBlue® tank. Do nal container, which should be tightly not compress or break the bottle! closed and kept in a safe place. ● Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise direction and gently pull it upwards ››› . CAUTION Engine management and ● The AdBlue® tank is full when no more liq- ● When refilling, the nozzle grip should be emissions control system uid comes out of the bottle. aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle ● Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc- will not connect automatically. Introduction tion until it is tightly closed. ● Do not try to add any more additive after the nozzle has stopped for the first time. ● Close the fuel tank flap. WARNING The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue could spill out. ● Due to the high temperatures reached by Operations before driving ● Only use AdBlue® that complies with the the exhaust gas scrubbing system, you ● After refilling the tank, only switch on the ISO 22241-1 standard. Only use original should not park your vehicle near a surface ignition. containers. that can catch fire easily. Fire hazard! ● Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec- ● Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or ad- ● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle onds for the system to detect the fluid load. ditives. Any type of damage caused by such around the area of the exhaust system: Fire hazard! ● Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds a mixture will not be covered by the warran- before starting the engine! ty. 320 Checking and refilling levels

Control lamps  Flashes to the atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating. Fault in the diesel engine management.  It lights up Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a spe- CAUTION cialised workshop. Fault in the emission control system. Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest speci- cause an irregular fuel supply can cause ig- alised workshop to have the engine checked. Note nition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to en- While the control lamps , ,  or  are ter the exhaust system, which could cause  Flashes on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel overheating and damage the catalytic con- consumption may go up and the engine verter. Combustion failures that can damage the catalytic might lose power. converter. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest speci- For the sake of the environment alised workshop to have the engine checked. Even when the emission control system is Catalytic converter working perfectly, there may be a smell of  It lights up sulphur from the gases on occasions. This To maintain the useful life of the catalytic Particulate filter blocked ››› page 321 . depends on the sulphur content of the fuel converter used. This can quite often be avoided by ● Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en- changing to another brand of fuel.  It lights up gines. Fault in the petrol engine management. ● Never run the fuel tank dry. Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a spe- Particulate filter cialised workshop. ● When changing or adding engine oil, do not exceed the necessary amount 3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol or diesel particu-  When the ignition is switched on, the (Electronic page 328, Topping up the engine oil. late filters Power Control) lights up and should go off once the ››› ● engine has started. Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump The particulate filter eliminates most of the leads if necessary ››› page 52 . soot from the exhaust gas system. Under  It lights up If you should notice misfiring, uneven run- normal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. If the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if Diesel engine preheating system. ning or loss of power when the car is moving, short journeys are made continuously), it be- The engine can be started straight away when the lamp have the vehicle inspected by a specialised switches off. workshop. In general, the emissions warning comes blocked with soot and the following  lamp  will light up when any of these symp- indication is displayed to the driver: Par- toms occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel ticulate filter: cleaned while the can enter the exhaust system and escape in- vehicle is moving. See Manual. The » 321 Practical tips

particulate filter needs cleaning (regenera- ● Consider the legal speed limits as well as the particulate filter is not affected. Also tion). the recommended gears. avoid making short trips all the time. ● End the regeneration journey once the Regeneration of the particulate filter (only control warning lamp has gone out. for 2.0l and 2.5l TSI engines) If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutes Requirements for the regeneration journey: Engine compartment of running in regeneration mode, have a the engine is at operating temperature. specialised workshop repair the fault. Working in the engine compart- ● Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h ››› WARNING ment ● Completely remove your foot from the accelerator pedal for a few seconds to let the Always adjust your speed to suit the weath- Always be aware of the danger of injury and vehicle roll with the gear engaged. er conditions, roads, braking distance and scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire traffic if the particulate filter is in its regen- ● Consider the legal speed limits as well as when working in the engine compartment eration phase. Route recommendations the recommended gears. (e.g. when checking and refilling fluids). should never make you disregard each ● Repeat this procedure (accelerate and let country's specific traffic regulations. Always observe the warnings listed below roll) until the control lamp turns off. and follow all general safety precautions.

This procedure involves an autonomous par- CAUTION The vehicle's engine compartment is a po- ticulate filter cleaning process and may take ● When the exhaust system detects that tentially hazardous area ››› . some time. the particulate filter is close to saturation, the self-cleaning function of this system WARNING If the warning lamp does not turn off, go im- recommends optimal driving for this func- mediately to a specialised workshop to repair When work is done in the engine compart- tion. ment, injuries, burns, accidents and even the fault. ● Due to the high temperatures caused by fires can occur. the regeneration of the particulate filter, it Regeneration of the petrol (except the 2.0l ● Turn off the engine, disconnect the igni- is possible that the radiator fan will activate and 2.5l TSI engines) and diesel particulate tion and apply the electronic parking brake. after stopping the engine, even it its oper- If the vehicle has a manual gearbox, place filter ating temperature has not been reached. the lever in neutral; if it has an automatic Requirements for the regeneration journey: ● Noise, smells and high idle speeds can gearbox, activate the parking lock (button the engine is at operating temperature. occur during regeneration. P). Wait for the engine to cool down. ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam ● Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h ● Always use the correct engine oil and the or drips of coolant being released from the (31-75 mph). This increases the temperature correct fuel to make sure the useful life of engine compartment. Wait until no steam and burns the soot in the filter ››› . 322 Checking and refilling levels or coolant can be seen before opening the securing the vehicle and there is a risk of For the sake of the environment bonnet. injury. ● Inspect the ground underneath your ve- ● Keep children away from the engine com- ● If any work has to be performed when the hicle regularly so that any leaks are detec- partment. engine is started or with the engine run- ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oil ● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera- ning, there is an additional, potentially fa- or other fluids in the area where it was tion on the engine compartment, as these tal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such parked, have your vehicle inspected at the may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool- as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, workshop. etc., and from the high-voltage ignition sys- ant). ● Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en- tem. You should also observe the following: ● Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec- vironment. For this reason you should make trical system, particularly at the points – Never touch the electrical wiring of the regular checks on the ground underneath where the jump leads are attached ignition system. your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other ››› page 52. The battery could explode. – Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a specialised workshop. ● If working inside the engine compart- and long hair do not get trapped in ro- ment, remember that, even when the igni- tating engine parts. Danger of death. tion is switched off, the radiator fan may Before starting any work remove jewel- Note start up automatically, and therefore there lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear In right-hand drive vehicles some brake flu- is a risk of injury. tight-fitting clothes. id reservoirs are on the other side of the – Never accelerate with a gear engaged ● Never cover the engine with additional engine compartment ››› Fig. 207 . insulating materials such as a blanket. Risk without taking the necessary precau- of fire! tions. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of ● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant death. expansion tank when the engine is hot. The cooling system is under pressure. ● Observe the following additional warnings if work on the fuel system or the elec- ● Protect face, hands and arms by covering trical system is necessary: the cap with a large, thick rag to protect against escaping coolant and steam. – Always disconnect the battery from the on-board network. ● Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in – Do not smoke. the engine compartment. – Never work near naked flames. ● If you have to work underneath the vehi- – Always keep an approved fire extin- cle, you must use suitable stands addition- guisher immediately available. ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for 323 Practical tips

Opening and closing the bonnet Opening the bonnet If the bonnet does not close, do not press The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- downwards. Open it again and let it fall as cle. mentioned above. Before opening the bonnet, make sure that WARNING the windscreen wiper arms are in place Make sure that the bonnet is properly against the windscreen. closed. If it opens when driving, it can cause ● Open the door and pull the lever under the an accident. dashboard ››› Fig. 205 1 . ● To lift the bonnet, press towards the left on CAUTION the lever located under the bonnet, in the To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the centre ››› Fig. 206 2 . The arrester hooks are windscreen wiper arms, only open it when Fig. 205 Release lever in the driver's foot- released. the windscreen wipers are in place against well area. ● The bonnet can be opened. Release the the windscreen. bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture designed for this in the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet ● Slightly lift the bonnet. ● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support. ● At a height of approximately 20 cm let it fall so it locks.

Fig. 206 Lever under the bonnet.

324 Checking and refilling levels

Checking levels

Fig. 207 Diagram for the location of the various elements.

From time to time, the levels of the different Note fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious The layout of parts may vary depending on the engine. damage to the engine may be caused.

1 Coolant expansion tank ››› page 329 2 Brake fluid reservoir ››› page 331 3 Engine oil filler cap ››› page 328 4 Engine oil level dipstick ››› page 327 5 Battery ››› page 333 6 Windscreen washer reservoir ››› page 332

325 Practical tips

Engine oil The engine comes with a special, multi- CUPRA recommends changing the oil at a grade oil that can be used all year round. specialised workshop. CUPRA recommends a specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- General notes Service. tial for the correct operation of the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or CUPRA recommends the use of engine oils changing oil, use only those oils that comply approved according to the appropriate VW with VW standards. standard. Use of engine oils that do not meet these quality requirements can cause engine For vehicles with an engine oil label damage. If the engine oil has to be topped up, use one CUPRA recommends the use of Original of the oils shown on the label ››› Fig. 208 . SEAT Spare Part engine oils. The label with the prescribed standard is located at the front of the engine compart- Engine oil additives ment Fig. 209 1 . If you use the recom- ››› No type of additive should be mixed with the Fig. 208 In the engine compartment: en- mended engine oil, you can top up the oil as engine oil. The deterioration caused by gine oil label often as necessary. these additives is not covered by the warranty. For vehicles without an engine oil label Contact a specialised workshop or SEAT offi- CAUTION cial service for information about the corre- Take the following into account if you have sponding standard. refilled with an engine oil different to those specified in the aforementioned standards, If the engine oil level is too low or by your SEAT technical service centre: If the recommended engine oil is not availa- ● There is no way of completely avoiding ble, in the event of an emergency you can the danger of causing damage to the en- Fig. 209 In the engine compartment: area change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L gine and particulate filter. where the engine oil label is located of the next oil until the next oil change: ● You can continue driving with the vehicle Key to the ››› Fig. 208 : if the refill was no more than 0.5 l of engine – Petrol engines: VW 504 00, ACEA C3 or oil. Go to a specialised workshop as soon as A Information about the engine oil stand- API SN standard. possible and request an oil change. Other- ard. – Diesel engines: VW 507 00, ACEA C3 or wise, there is a danger of engine damage. B Information about engine oil viscosity. API CJ-4, viscosity 0W-30.

326 Checking and refilling levels

● If you have topped up more than 0.5 l of Warning lamp Checking the engine oil level engine oil, drive with the engine at low load levels and within the medium RPM range as  It lights up red a maximum. Do not drive at more than 80 km/h and do not travel more than 300 km  Do not carry on driving! (approximately). Go to a specialised work- Engine oil pressure too low. shop as soon as possible and request an oil Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level. change. Otherwise, there is a danger of en- If this warning lamp  starts to flash, and is accompa- gine damage. nied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine ● You are responsible for the risk of possi- and check the oil level. If necessary, add more oil ble damage to the vehicle (engine, exhaust ››› page 328. system). If in doubt, do not start the engine If the warning lamp  flashes although the oil level is and request assistance from the technical correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at Fig. 210 Engine oil dipstick. service centre. idle speed! Obtain technical assistance. ● Do not start the engine if you have top- The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of ped up with a fluid other than engine oil.  It lights up yellow the oil. Request assistance from the technical service centre. Danger of engine damage! Check the engine oil level as soon as possible. Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunity to do Checking oil level so ››› page 328 . – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. Note – Briefly run the engine at idle speed until Before a long trip, we recommend finding It flashes yellow  the operating temperature is reached and an engine oil that conforms to the corresponding VW specifications and recom- Fault in the oil level sensor. then stop. Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Until mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, – Wait for about two minutes. the correct engine oil will always be availa- then it is advisable to check the oil level every time you refuel. ble for a top-up if needed. – Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it WARNING in as far as it will go.

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- – Then pull it out once more and check the trol and warning lamps on page 84. oil level ››› Fig. 210 . Top up with engine oil if necessary.

The oil must leave a mark between zones A and C . It can never go above zone A . » 327 Practical tips

● Zone A : do not add oil. Topping up the engine oil The position of the oil filler opening is shown ● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the level in the corresponding engine compartment in that zone. illustration ››› page 325 . ● Zone C : add oil until zone B . Engine oil specification ››› page 326 .

Depending on how you drive and the condi- WARNING tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con- Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil comes into contact with hot engine com- consumption is likely to be higher for the first ponents when topping up. 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a CAUTION journey. Fig. 211 In the engine compartment: En- If the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 210 A , gine oil filler cap. do not start the engine. This could result in WARNING damage to the engine and catalytic con- Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- verter. Contact a specialised workshop. Any work carried out in the engine com- serve the warnings in Working in the partment or on the engine must be carried ››› engine compartment on page 322. out cautiously. For the sake of the environment ● When working in the engine compart- Topping up engine oil The oil level must never be above zone ment, always observe the safety warnings ››› Fig. 210 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in ››› page 322. ● Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening through the crankcase breather and leak ››› Fig. 211. into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys- CAUTION ● Carefully add oil in small quantities (no tem. more than 0.5 l). If the oil level is above area A , do not start the engine. This could result in damage to ● To avoid adding too much oil, whenever Note the engine and catalytic converter. Contact you add a certain amount, wait about 2 mi- Before a long trip, we recommend finding a Technical Service. nutes and recheck the oil level ››› page 327 . an engine oil that conforms to the corre- ● If necessary, add some more oil. sponding VW specifications and recommend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, ● When the oil level reaches at least zone the correct engine oil will always be availa- Fig. 210 B , unscrew the engine oil filler ››› ble for a top-up if needed. cap carefully ››› .

328 Checking and refilling levels

Engine oil change For the sake of the environment increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise antifreeze protection will diminish and this ● We recommend that you change the en- We recommend that you have the engine oil will worsen cooling. gine oil and the filter at a technical service changed by a Technical Service. centre. When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and at least 40 % of WARNING ● Never pour oil down drains or into the ground. the additive G12evo for optimal protection Only change the engine oil yourself if you against corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13 ● Use a suitable container when draining have the specialist knowledge required! (TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G), the used oil. It must be large enough to ● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- hold all the engine oil. G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 serve the warnings ››› page 322 . (green blue) engine coolants decreases pro- ● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil tection again corrosion and should be avoi- may cause burn injuries. ded. ● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, Cooling system WARNING such as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil. Coolant specifications If there is not enough anti-freeze in the ● When removing the oil drain plug with coolant system, the engine may fail leading your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to The engine cooling system is supplied from to serious damage. help prevent oil from running down your the factory with a specially treated mixture of ● Ensure that the percentage of additive is arm. water and at least 40 % of the additive correct for the lowest expected ambient ● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into G12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture temperature in the zone in which the vehi- contact with engine oil. gives the necessary frost protection down to cle is to be used. -25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloy ● ● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be When the outside temperature is very parts of the engine cooling system against stored in a safe place out of the reach of low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi- children. corrosion. It also prevents scaling and con- cle would be immobilised. siderably raises the boiling point of the coolant. CAUTION CAUTION To protect the cooling system, the percent- No additives should be used with engine oil. The original additives should never be age of additive must always be at least 40 %, This could result in engine damage. Any mixed with coolants which are not ap- even in warm climates where anti-freeze damage caused by the use of such additives proved by SEAT. protection is not required. would not be covered by the factory war- ● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not ranty. If for weather reasons further protection is purple but is, for example, brown, this indi- necessary, the proportion of additive may be cates that the G12evo additive has been »

329 Practical tips

mixed with an inadequate coolant. The 2 Coolant expansion tank for the high- coolant must be changed as soon as possi- voltage cooling circuit. Do not continue ble if this is the case! driving if there is a lack of fluid in the expansion tank. Do not top up coolant. Go immediately to a specialised workshop. For the sake of the environment Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any fluids are spilled, Refilling coolant they should be collected and correctly disposed of, with respect to the environment.

Fig. 214 Engine compartment: coolant expansion tank cap. Coolant tank The coolant tank is located in the engine 3 Valid for: hybrid vehicles. compartment ››› page 325 . Top up coolant when the level is below the  (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level Fig. 213 In the engine compartment: – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. marking on coolant expansion tank. – Switch the ignition off.

– Read off the coolant level on coolant expansion tank. When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be between the marks Fig. 212 Engine compartment: Coolant Fig. 213. When the engine is hot, it may tanks ››› be slightly above the upper mark. The vehicle has 2 independent coolant expansion tanks. Topping up coolant – Wait for the engine to cool down. ››› Fig. 212 1 Coolant expansion tank for the combustion engine cooling circuit. 330 Checking and refilling levels

– Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with CAUTION However, if the brake fluid level goes down a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left noticeably in a short time, or drops below ››› . If you run out of coolant in the expansion the  mark, there may be a leak in the brake tank, park the car in a safe place and do not system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning – Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- continue driving. Obtain technical assis- light on the instrument panel display moni- ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you tance. tors the brake fluid level page 82 . could damage the engine. If there is no ››› coolant in the expansion tank, do not con- In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid tinue driving. You should obtain professio- reservoir is on the other side of the engine nal assistance ››› . Brake fluid compartment. – If there is still some coolant in the expan- Changing brake fluid sion tank, top up to the upper mark. Check and refill the brake fluid We recommend that you have the brake fluid – Top up with coolant until the level be- changed by a Technical Service. comes stable.

– Screw the cap back on correctly. WARNING

If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle If the brake fluid level is low or unsuitable/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys- specialised workshop to have the cooling tem may fail or braking power may be re- system examined. duced. WARNING ● Check the brake system and the brake fluid level regularly! ● The cooling system is under pressure. Do ● When the brake fluid is used and brakes not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- Fig. 215 Engine compartment: brake fluid are subjected to extreme braking forces, sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of reservoir cap. bubbles of vapour form in the brake system. burns! These bubbles can significantly reduce ● Store the antifreeze in its original con- The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment ››› page 325 . braking power, notably increasing braking tainer and keep it out of reach of children. distance, and could result in the total fail- ● If working inside the engine compart- ure of the brake system. Checking the brake fluid level ment, remember that, even when the igni- ● Be sure to always use the correct brake tion is switched off, the radiator fan may The brake fluid level must be between the  fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly start up automatically, and therefore there and  markings. meets the VW 501 14 standard. » is a risk of injury.

331 Practical tips

● You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake Windscreen washer reser- ● Check there is enough windscreen water in fluid at a specialised CUPRA service or at a the reservoir. SEAT Official Service. If none is available, voir Plain water is not enough to clean the wind- use only high-quality brake fluid that meets screen and headlights. We recommend that DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA Checking the level of the window Standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4. you always add a product to the windscreen washer tank and refilling it washer fluid. ● The replacement brake fluid must be new. Recommended windscreen wipers ● Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of ● For the hottest seasons we recommend reach of children. Risk of poisoning! summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor- tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank: 1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa- CAUTION ter). Brake fluid should not come into contact ● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass. with the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive. Approximate proportion of the winter mixture, up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concen- For the sake of the environment Fig. 216 In the engine compartment: win- trate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 pro- Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant. dow washer tank cap. portion of mixture in the washer fluid tank. Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a The capacity of the window washer tank can professional to dispose of them. The window washer tank is in the engine compartment ››› page 325 . be found in ››› page 367 . Check the water level in the windscreen CAUTION washer reservoir regularly and top up as re- If the water from the windscreen washer quired. does not contain enough anti-freeze, it The window washer tank contains liquid de- may freeze on the windscreen and rear tergent for the windscreen and rear window. window, reducing forward and rear visibility. ● Open the bonnet  page 322 . ››› ● In winter, ensure the windscreen washer ● The window washer tank is marked with contains enough anti-freeze. the  symbol on the cap. ● In cold conditions, you should not use the windscreen wiper system unless you have

332 Checking and refilling levels warmed the windscreen with the ventila- 12-volt battery  Keep children away from acid and batteries! tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on  Always follow the instruction manual. the windscreen and reduce visibility. General information

CAUTION The battery is located in the engine com- Disconnecting the battery Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other partment ››› page 325 or luggage compart- The battery should only be disconnected in similar additives with the windscreen wash- ment (PHEV hybrid vehicles) ››› page 335 exceptional cases. When the battery is dis- er water. A greasy layer may be formed on and is practically maintenance free. It is connected, some of the vehicle's functions the windscreen which will impair visibility. checked as part of the Inspection Service. are lost. These functions will require reset- Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean ● Use clean water with a window cleaner ting after the battery is reconnected. and have the correct tightening torque, es- recommended by CUPRA. When disconnecting the battery from the pecially in summer and winter. ● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to vehicle on-board network, disconnect first the water in the reservoir. All work on batteries requires specialist the negative cable and then the positive ca- knowledge. Please refer to a specialised CU- ble. PRA Service, SEAT Official Service or a work- CAUTION Deactivate the anti-theft alarm before you shop specialising in batteries: risk of burns or disconnect the battery. Otherwise the alarm ● Do not mix cleaning products recom- exploding battery! mended by CUPRA with other products. will be triggered. This could lead to flocculation and may The battery must not be opened. Never try block the windscreen washer jets. to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth- If the vehicle is not used for long periods erwise explosive gas is released from the ● When topping up service fluids, make ab- The vehicle has a system for monitoring the battery that could cause an explosion. solutely certain that you fill the fluids into current consumption when the engine is left the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu- Battery warning indications unused for long periods of time ››› page 337 . ids could cause serious malfunctions and Some functions, such as the interior lights, engine damage!  Wear eye protection. or the remote door opening, may be tempo- ● Lack of window washer fluid causes the rarily disabled to prevent the battery from  Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro- view through the windscreen to be ob- tective gloves and eye protection. Rinse any running flat. These functions will come back scured. splashes of electrolyte with plenty of water. on as soon as the ignition is switched on and the engine started. »  Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited.  The battery should only be charged in a well- ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!

333 Practical tips

Winter conditions ● Keep children away from acid and batter- CAUTION ies. During the winter, the starting power may be ● Do not expose the battery to direct sun- reduced, and if necessary, the battery ● Before working on the electrical system, light over a long period of time, as the in- should be charged ››› page 336 . you must switch off the engine, the ignition tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the and all electrical devices. The negative ca- battery housing. ble on the battery must be disconnected. WARNING ● If the vehicle is left standing in cold con- When a light bulb is changed, you need on- Always be aware of the danger of injury and ditions for a long period, protect the bat- ly switch off the light. chemical burns as well as the risk of acci- tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be dent or fire when working on the battery ● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by undamaged. and the electrical system: locking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be ● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, triggered. skin and clothing from acid and particles Control lamp containing lead. ● When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle on-board network, disconnect first ● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear The control lamp  lights up when the igni- the negative cable and then the positive protective gloves and eye protection. Do tion is switched on. It should go out when the cable. not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid engine has started running. through the vents. ● Switch off all electrical devices before re- connecting the battery. Reconnect first the Indicator lamps and driver messages on the ● Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on the positive cable and then the negative cable. instrument cluster display or infotainment skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solution, Never reverse the polarity of the connec- system: and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid is tions. This could cause an electrical fire. swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immediately. ● Never charge a frozen battery, or one  Defective alternator which has thawed. This could result in ex- 3 Valid only for: conventional vehicles. ● Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking plosions and chemical burns. Always re- are prohibited. When handling cables and The control lamp lights up RED. place a battery which has frozen. A flat bat- electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks tery can also freeze at temperatures close and electrostatic charge. Never short the The vehicle battery stops charging from the to 0°C (+32°F). battery terminals. High-energy sparks can alternator. You should immediately drive to cause injury. ● Ensure that the vent hose is always con- the nearest specialised workshop. nected to the battery. ● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- You should avoid using electrical equipment leased when the battery is under charge. ● Never use a defective battery. This could that is not absolutely necessary because this The batteries should be charged in a well- cause an explosion. Replace a damaged will drain the battery. ventilated room only. battery immediately.

334 Checking and refilling levels

 Error: the 12 V vehicle battery and the vehicle should be jump started The 12-volt power supply is limited, maybe is not charging. Park safely! ››› page 52 or professional assistance should because the 12 volt battery is discharged or The control lamp lights up RED. be sought. not working at full performance. The 12-volt battery can be charged while driving. Until  Stop driving! Stop the vehicle at the next ● Go to a qualified establishment. the warning disappears, you should drive opportunity and in a safe place. ● Have the electrical system checked. with care. The instrument cluster displays a message due to a DCDC failure (electrical, mechanical  Low level of the 12 V vehicle Error: 12V power supply. Visit the or energy balance). battery. Charge while driving workshop The control lamp lights up YELLOW. There is a fault in the 12-volt power supply: ● Switch the ignition off and seek professional assistance. Starting capacity may be limited. If this driver ● Go to a qualified establishment. message goes out after a certain amount of ● Have the electrical system checked.  Error: 12V power supply. Park time, the vehicle's battery has recharged safely! Check the manual while driving and reached a sufficient level. If the driver message does not go out, take the The control lamp lights up RED. Access to the 12 volt battery vehicle to a specialized workshop.  Stop driving! Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and in a safe place.  Replace the 12V vehicle battery. Go to a workshop There is a serious fault in the 12V power supply. The control lamp lights up YELLOW.

● Go to a qualified establishment. The 12 volt vehicle battery has almost reached the end of its useful life. Visit a pro- ● Have the electrical system checked. fessional and request an inspection and replacement, if necessary, of the 12-volt vehi-  Error: 12 V vehicle battery. En- cle battery ››› page 336 . gine cannot be started. Visit the workshop  Error: The 12V power supply is Fig. 217 Hybrid vehicles (PHEV): location The control lamp lights up YELLOW. currently limited. Drive with cau- of the battery in the luggage compartment » tion. The connection between the on-board network and the 12-volt battery has been inter- The control lamp lights up YELLOW. rupted. If the drive system switches off in this situation, it should not be switched on again 335 Practical tips

Valid for hybrid vehicles (PHEV) Checking the battery electrolyte workshop to have the battery checked The 12-volt vehicle battery is located under level and replaced if necessary. the luggage compartment floor. Black: The battery’s electrolyte level is correct. ● Open the luggage compartment. ● Raise the luggage compartment floor page 137, to gain access to the 12-volt ››› Charging or changing the battery battery cover ››› Fig. 217 . ● A suitable tool must be used to open and If you often drive short distances or if the ve- close the cover. hicle is not driven for long periods, the battery should be checked by a specialised Valid for conventional vehicles workshop between the scheduled services. ● Raise the bonnet ››› in Working in the If the battery has discharged and you have engine compartment on page 322. Fig. 218 Sight glass on the top of the 12 problems starting the vehicle, the battery volt battery (schematic representation). ● Lift the cover that protects the front of the might be damaged. If this happens, we rec- battery page 325 , Fig. 207 . ommend you have the vehicle battery ››› ››› The electrolyte level should be checked reg- checked by a Technical Service where it will ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun- Valid for VZ5 version: The 12-volt vehicle be re-charged or replaced. battery is located under the luggage com- tries and in older batteries. partment floor. To access it, lift up the lug- ● Check the colour display in the "magic eye" Charging the battery gage compartment floor ››› page 137 . on the top of the battery. The vehicle battery should be charged by a ● If there are air bubbles in the window, tap specialised workshop only, as batteries using the window gently until they disperse. special technology have been installed and they must be charged in a controlled envi- The “magic eye” indicator, located on the ronment. top of the battery changes colour, depending on the charge state and electrolyte level Replacing a vehicle battery of the battery. The 12-volt vehicle battery has been de- There are two different colours: signed to suit its location and has specific Yellow or colourless: The battery's electro- safety features. If the battery needs to be re- lyte level is too low. Go to a specialised placed, it is recommended that it be installed by an official CUPRA qualified workshop.

336 Checking and refilling levels

These workshops have the technical docu- that the battery is charged much more effi- Energy management mentation and equipment required to find ciently than on vehicles without a power out the size, technology, and maintenance management system. To maintain this func- and safety requirements of the new battery. tion after replacing the battery, we recom- Optimisation of the starting ca- mend that the replacement battery used is pacity  Always use maintenance-free batteries of the same make and type as the original fit- according to the TL82506 and VW75073 ted battery. To make proper use of the power The power management controls the distri- standards. These standards must be from management function after the battery has bution of electrical energy and thus helps to October 2014 or later. been changed, have the battery coded to ensure that there is always enough power The degassing tube must always be connec- the power management mode at a special- available to start the engine. ted to the hole on the negative pole side and ised workshop. If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys- the hole on the positive pole side must be tem is left parked for a long time, the battery sealed. WARNING will gradually lose its charge because certain The vehicle’s 12V battery must always be re- ● Always use only maintenance free batter- electrical devices, such as the electronic placed by a qualified specialist company, as ies that do not run flat alone and whose gearbox lock continues to draw current even the vehicle’s electronics must be adapted properties, specifications and size corre- when the ignition is off. In some cases there during replacement. In addition, the battery spond to the standard battery. The specifi- may not be enough power available to start parameters for functional safety have been cations are indicated on the battery case. the engine. determined based on the original battery. ● Before starting any work on the batteries, Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent you must read and observe the warnings Only a qualified specialist company has the power management system to control the in General information on page 334. right technology to fit the correct replace- ››› distribution of electrical energy. This signifi- ment battery. cantly improves reliability when starting the The use of unsuitable batteries could inva- For the sake of the environment engine, and also prolongs the useful life of lidate the vehicle registration certificate.  Batteries contain toxic substances such the battery. as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be Start-Stop systems ( page 215 ) are equip- The main functions incorporated in the pow- ››› disposed of appropriately and must not be ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must er management system are battery diagno- disposed of with ordinary household waste. only be replaced with a battery of the same sis, residual current management and dy- specifications. namic power management. Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent Battery diagnosis power management system to control the distribution of electrical energy ››› page 337 . The battery diagnosis function constantly The power management function ensures registers the condition of the battery. »

337 Practical tips

Sensors detect the battery voltage, battery Please remember that the power and use- riod. Some convenience functions, such as current and battery temperature. This ena- ful life of the battery are limited. remote vehicle opening, may not be availa- bles the system to calculate the current pow- ble under certain circumstances. These ● If there is a risk that the vehicle may not er level and charge condition of the battery. functions will be restored when you switch start, the alternator electrical failure or low battery charge level warning lamp will be on the ignition and start the engine. Residual current management shown  ››› page 334 . The residual current management reduces With the engine switched off power consumption while the vehicle is For example, if you listen to the sound sys- parked. It controls the supply of power to the Flat battery tem with the engine switched off the battery various electrical devices while the ignition is will run down. switched off. The system takes the battery Starting ability has first priority. If the energy consumption means there is a diagnosis data into consideration. Short trips, city traffic and low temperatures risk that the engine will not start, a text will Depending on the power level of the battery, all place a heavy load on the battery. In these be displayed in vehicles with a driver infor- switch off the individual electrical devices conditions a large amount of power is con- mation system. one after the other to prevent the battery sumed, but only a small amount is supplied. This driver indicator tells you that you must from losing too much charge and to ensure The situation is also critical if electrical devi- start the engine so that the battery can re- that the engine can be started reliably. ces are in use when the engine is not run- charge. ning. In this case power is consumed when Dynamic power management none is being generated. When the engine is running While the vehicle is moving, this function In these situations you will be aware that the Although the alternator generates electrical distributes the available power to the various power management system is intervening to power, the battery can still become dis- electrical devices and systems according to control the distribution of electrical power. charged while the vehicle is being driven. their requirements. The power management This can occur when a lot of power is being ensures that on-board systems do not con- When the vehicle is parked for long peri- consumed but only a small amount supplied, sume more electrical power than the alter- ods especially if the battery is not fully charged nator can supply, and thus maintains the initially. maximum possible battery power level. If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of several days or weeks, the power manage- To restore the necessary energy balance, the Note ment will gradually shut off the electrical de- system will then temporarily shut off the vices one by one or reduce the amount of electrical devices that are using a lot of pow- ● Neither is the power management system current they are using. This limits the able to overcome the given physical limits. er, or reduce the current they are consum- amount of power consumed and helps to ing. Heating systems in particular use a large ensure reliable starting even after a long pe- amount of electrical power. If you notice, for 338 Wheels instance, that the seat heating or the rear Wheels Low profile tyres window heater is not working, they may have Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger been temporarily switched off or regulated wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height. to a lower heat output. These systems will be Wheels and tyres Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile. available again as soon as sufficient electrical power is available. General notes Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quickly than standard tyres, for instance due You may also notice that the engine runs at a to strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers slightly faster idling speed when necessary. – When driving with new tyres, be especially careful during the first 500 km (300 miles). and kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very im- This is quite normal, and no cause for con- portant ››› page 342 . cern. The increased idling speed allows the – If you have to drive over a kerb or similar alternator to meet the greater power re- obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive quirement and charge the battery at the possible at a right angle to the obstacle. with special care when driving on roads in same time. poor condition. – Check from time to time if the tyres are damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or Visually check your wheels every 3000 km. dents). Remove any foreign objects em- If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im- bedded in the treads. pact or have been damaged, have a special- – Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- ised workshop check whether or not it is placed immediately. necessary to change the tyre.

– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres. Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quickly than standard tyres. – Replace any missing valve caps as soon as possible. Concealed damage – Mark the wheels before taking them off so Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily that they rotate in the same direction when visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the put back. car pulling to one side, this may indicate – When removed, the wheels or tyres should that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark speed immediately if there is any reason to place. suspect that damage may have occurred. In- spect the tyres for damage. If no external damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialised workshop and have the car inspected. » 339 Practical tips

Foreign objects inserted in the tyre Speed symbols the vehicle immediately and check the ● Do not remove foreign bodies if they have The speed rating indicates the maximum tyres. penetrated through the tyre wall! speed permitted for the tyres. ● Never use old tyres or those with an un- ● If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility known history of use. P max. 150 km/h (93 mph) system, where necessary seal the damaged tyre as shown in section ››› page 44 . Use a Q max. 160 km/h (99 mph) specialised workshop for repair or replace- R max. 170 km/h (106 mph) New wheels and tyres ment. To do so, CUPRA recommends going S max. 180 km/h (112 mph) to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced T max. 190 km/h (118 mph) dealership. by a specialised workshop. There they have U max. 200 km/h (124 mph) the required knowledge, the special tools The sealant at the lower part of the tyre H max. 210 km/h (130 mph) and the corresponding spare parts. tread wraps around the foreign body and provisionally seals the tyre. V max. 240 km/h (149 mph) ● Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If Z max. 240 km/h (149 mph) you have installed new tyres, drive the first Tyres with directional tread pattern W max. 270 km/h (168 mph) 500 km carefully and at a moderate speed. An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the Y max. 300 km/h (186 mph) ● All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of direction of rotation on single drive tyres. Al- the same type, size (rolling circumference) ways note the direction of rotation indicated Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” for and, if possible, tread pattern. when mounting the wheel. This makes sure tyres with a maximum authorised speed ● When changing tyres, do not change just that optimal use is made of tyre properties in above 240 km/h (149 mph). one; change at least two on the same axle. terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise ● If you want to equip your vehicle with a and wear. WARNING combination tyres and rims that are different ● New tyres do not have maximum grip to those fitted in the factory, inform your Subsequent fitting of accessories during the first 500 km. Drive particularly specialised workshop before purchasing If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or carefully to avoid possible accidents. them ››› wheel trims, we recommend that you con- ● Never drive with damaged tyres. This may sult with a specialised CUPRA Service or cause an accident. The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for SEAT Official Service centre for advice re- ● If you notice unusual vibrations or if the your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu- garding current technical recommendations. vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity

340 Wheels

1) or COC document ). The vehicle documen- WARNING closed design) increase the likelihood of ice tation varies depending on the country of and snow accumulating on the inside. This ● Use only combinations of tyres and rims, residence. should be taken into account, depending as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved by on the driving situations, as snow or ice ac- If the type of spare wheel is different form CUPRA. Otherwise the vehicle may be cumulated in the wheels can cause vibra- the normal wheels — e.g. in the case of win- damaged, causing an accident. tion in the vehicle when it drives at over 40 ter tyres or particularly wide tyres — the ● For technical reasons it is not possible to km/h. It is advisable to remove ice and spare wheel should only be used temporarily use wheels of other vehicles; in some cases snow from the inside of the wheels using in the event of a puncture, and the vehicle not even wheels from the same vehicle hot water. should be driven with care. Refit the normal model should be used. ● road wheel as soon as possible. If you drive on dirt or gravel tracks, the ● Always ensure that the tyres you have likelihood of stones becoming trapped in- In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 chosen have adequate clearance. When se- side wheel rims with plastic elements in- wheels must be fitted with tyres of the same lecting replacement tyres, do not rely en- creases when driving at high speed or in a brand, type and tread so that the traction tirely on the nominal tyre size marked on sporty manner. If you see that there are system is not damaged by a difference in the the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif- stones trapped between the aluminium fer significantly depending on the manu- number of turns of the wheels. Therefore, in wheel rim and the insert, you can attempt facturer. Lack of clearance can damage the the event of a puncture, only a spare wheel to remove them using pressurised water. tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, endan- with the same perimeter as normal tyres ger road safety. Risk of accident! should be used. For the sake of the environment ● Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in an emergency, and drive with due care. Old tyres must be disposed of according to Manufacturing date the laws in the country concerned. ● The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper- The manufacturing date is also indicated on ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro- the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the hibited use can cause accidents or can Note wheel): damage your vehicle. ● A CUPRA Service Centre should be con- DOT ... 2218 ... ● If decorative hubcaps are subsequently sulted to find out whether wheels or tyres fitted, make sure that they allow enough air it means, for example, that the tyre was man- of different sizes to those originally fitted in to cool the braking system. Risk of acci- ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018. by CUPRA can be fitted, and to find out dent! about the combinations allowed between ● Models with aerodynamic wheel rims the front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle and/or with bolt-on plastic elements (more (axle 2). »

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 341 Practical tips

● Never mount used tyres if you are not ● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car- Driving style sure of their “previous history”. ried by the vehicle ››› Fig. 219 . Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard ● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre save the modified tyre pressure ››› page 346 . wear. Tyre life ● Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration. Wheel balance ● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from time to time. The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, certain circumstances may lead to Tyre pressure imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vibrations in the steering wheel. The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a sticker on the rear of the front left door Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, frame ››› Fig. 219 . as they otherwise cause excessive wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re- also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted duces the useful life of the tyres and ad- or if a tyre is repaired. versely affects vehicle performance and ride. Correct inflation pressures are very impor- Incorrect wheel alignment tant, especially at high speeds. Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex- The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord- cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, vehicle is going to carry the maximum load, you should check wheel alignment at a spe- the tyre pressure should be increased to the Fig. 219 Location of the tyre pressure cialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official sticker. maximum value indicated on the sticker Service. ››› Fig. 219. Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv- WARNING ing habits will increase the useful life of your Do not forget the spare wheel when check- tyres. ing the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres inflated to the highest pressure required for may lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, to ● Check tyre pressure at least once a month, the road wheels. tread separation or even to a blow-out. and also prior to any long trip. In the case of a minimised temporary spare ● The driver is responsible for ensuring that ● The tyre pressure should only be checked wheel (125/70 R18) inflate to a pressure of all of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflated when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre pressure la- to the right pressure. The recommended pressure of warm tyres. bel ››› Fig. 219 . 342 Wheels

tyre pressure is indicated on the label Tread wear indicators "TWI" or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre ››› Fig. 219. mark the position of the wear indicators. ● Check tyre pressures regularly and en- The minimum permitted profile depth1) have sure they are maintained at the pressures been reached when the tyres have worn indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low down to the wear indicators. Replace the could cause overheating, resulting in tread tyres with new ones ››› . detachment or even burst tyres. ● When the tyres are cold, tyre pressure Changing wheels around should be that indicated on the label To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres Fig. 219. ››› the wheels should be changed round from ● Regularly check the cold inflation pres- time to time according to the system sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the Fig. 221. The useful life of all the tyres will Fig. 220 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators. ››› tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they then be about the same time. are cold. ● Regularly check your tyres for damage WARNING and wear. The tyres must be replaced at the latest ● Never exceed the maximum permitted when the tread is worn down to the tread speed or loads specified for the type of tyre wear indicators. Failure to follow this in- fitted on your vehicle. struction could result in an accident. ● Particularly in difficult driving conditions For the sake of the environment such as wet or icy roads. It is important that Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- the tyre tread be as deep as possible and be sumption. approximately the same on the tyres of both the front and the rear axles. Fig. 221 Interchanging tyres. ● The scant driving safety due to insuffi- Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be cient tread depth is particularly evident in found on the base of the original tyre treads, vehicle handling, when there is a risk of ordered at regular intervals and running “aquaplaning” in deep puddles of water » across the tread ››› Fig. 220 . The letters

1) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in. 343 Practical tips

and when driving through corners, and hicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the design of summer tyres (width, rubber com- braking is also adversely affected. tightening torque is too high, the wheel pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow. This applies particularly to vehi- ● The speed has to be adapted accordingly, nuts and threads can be damaged. cles equipped with wide section tyres or otherwise there is a risk of losing control with high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y over the vehicle. CAUTION on the sidewall). See ››› page 49 to find out the recommen- Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap- ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for Wheel nuts steel and alloy rims. proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these tyres are specified in the vehicle's docu- The wheel nuts are matched to the rims. ments (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or 1) When installing different wheels (for instance COC ). The vehicle documentation varies Winter tyres alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is depending on the country of residence. important to use the correct wheel nuts with – Winter tyres must be fitted on all four Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper- the right length and correctly shaped bolt wheels. ties when the tread is worn down to a depth heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se- of 4 mm. curely and that the brake system functions – Only use winter tyres that are approved for correctly. your vehicle. The performance of winter tyres is also severely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easi- – Please note that the maximum permissible still much deeper than 4 mm. ly. speed for winter tyres may be lower than for summer tyres. A code letter indicating the speed limit is A special adapter is required to remove the stamped on all winter tyres ››› page 340 . anti-theft wheel bolts ››› page 47 . – Also note that winter tyres are no longer effective when the tread is worn down. Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds WARNING must have an appropriate sticker attached – After fitting the wheels you must always so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable Wheel nuts should never be greased or check the tyre pressures. When doing so, stickers are available at specialised CUPRA oiled. take into account the correct tyre pres- Services, SEAT Official Service centres and ● Use only wheel nuts which belong to the sures listed on the rear of the front left specialised workshops. Please note the reg- wheel. door frame ››› page 342 . ulations to this effect in your country. ● If the prescribed torque of the wheel nuts In winter road conditions winter tyres will “All-weather” tyres can also be used instead is too low, they could loosen whilst the ve- considerably improve vehicle handling. The of winter tyres.

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 344 Wheels

Using winter tyres with V-rating Snow chains Remove any central wheel trims before fit- Please note that the generally applicable ting snow chains. 240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres Snow chains must only be fitted to the front with the letter V is subject to technical re- wheels, even on vehicles with four-wheel WARNING strictions; the maximum permissible drive. The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted speed for your vehicle may be significantly chains could lead to serious accidents and ● Check that they are correctly seated after lower. The maximum speed limit for these damage. driving for a few yards; correct the position if tyres depends directly on the maximum axle necessary, in accordance with the manufac- ● Always the appropriate snow chains. weights for your car and on the listed weight turer's fitting instructions. ● Observe the fitting instructions provided rating of the tyres being used. by the snow chain manufacturer. ● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph). It is best to contact a specialised CUPRA ● Never exceed the maximum permitted ● If there is a danger of being trapped de- Service or SEAT Official Service to check the speeds when driving with snow chains. spite having fitted the chains, it is best to dis- maximum speed which is permissible for the able the traction control (TCS) in the ESC V-rated tyres fitted on your car on the basis page 272, Connecting and disconnect- CAUTION of this information. ››› ing the ESC and TCS. ● Remove the snow chains to drive on roads without snow. Otherwise they will impair WARNING Snow chains will improve braking ability as vehicle handling, damage the tyres and Exceeding the maximum speed permitted well as traction in winter conditions. wear out very quickly. for the winter tyres fitted on your car can For technical reasons snow chains may only ● Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch- cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con- be used with the following wheel rim/tyre ed if the chains come into direct contact trol of the vehicle – risk of accident. combination. with them. CUPRA recommends the use of coated snow chains. For the sake of the environment Tyres Wheel rim Chains When winter is over, change back to sum- 215/55 R17 7.5Jx17ET40 Max. link 15 mm mer tyres at an appropriate moment. In temperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform- 225/55 R17 7.5Jx17ET40 ance will be improved if summer tyres are used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises 225/50 R18 8x18 ET40 Max. link 9 mm while driving will all be reduced. 245/45 R18 8x18 ET40

245/40 R19 8x19 ET40

Other dimensions do not allow chains

345 Practical tips

Tyre pressure monitor sys- Tyre pressure monitor indicator ● Tyre pressure is insufficient. tem ● The tyre structure is damaged. ● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load. Control lamp ● The wheels on an axle are subject to a heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).  It lights up ● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains. The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is much ● The temporary spare wheel is fitted. lower than the value set by the driver, or the tyre has structural damage. ● The wheel on one axle is changed. In addition, a audible warning sounds and a text message is displayed on the instrument panel screen. There may be a delay in the reaction of the  Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon as Fig. 222 Instrument panel: warning of loss tyre pressure monitoring indicator  or it possible. Check all tyres and pressures. Replace any of tyre pressure. may not indicate anything under certain cir- damaged tyres. cumstances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-cov- The tyre pressure monitoring system com- ered or unpaved roads, or when driving with  Flashes pares the individual speeds of each wheel snow chains). and thus the dynamic radius with the help of System fault the ABS sensors. The control lamp flashes for approximately 1 minute Calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring in- and then lights up permanently. If the rolling circumference of one or more dicator If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the ignition off wheels has changed, the tyre pressure moni- and on again. Re-calibrate the tyre pressure monitor After changing the tyre pressure or replacing toring indicator will indicate this on the in- indicator ››› page 346 . If the fault continues, go to a one or more wheels, the tyre pressure moni- specialised workshop. strument panel through a warning lamp and toring indicator must be recalibrated. Do the a warning to the driver››› Fig. 222 . When only same, for example, when the front and rear Several control and warning lamps light up one specific tyre is affected, its position with- wheels are swapped. for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- in the vehicle will be indicated. ● Switch the ignition on. ed on while the function is verified. They will  Loss of pressure: Check left switch off after a few seconds. tyre pressure! ● Memorise the new inflation pressure in the Infotainment system: function button  >  WARNING Wheel tread change Driving data > Vehicle status ››› page 88 . Observe the safety warnings in Con- ● ››› The wheel diameter changes when: OR: from the instrument cluster's Service trol and warning lamps on page 84. menu ››› page 69 . ● Tyre pressure is changed manually. 346 Wheels

When driving, the system self-calibrates the Note Spare wheel tyre pressure provided by the driver and the wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied ● Driving for the first time with new tyres at a high speed can cause them to slightly ex- speeds the programmed values are collected Location and use of the tempora- pand, which could then produce an air and monitored. ry spare wheel pressure warning. With the wheels under very heavy loads, the ● If excessively low tyre pressure is detec- tyre pressure must be increased to the total ted with the ignition on, an audible warning recommended tyre pressure before calibra- will sound. In the event that there is a fault tion ››› Fig. 219 . in the system, an audible warning will sound. WARNING ● Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of When the tyres are inflated at different time or driving in a sporty style can tempo- pressures or at a pressure that is too low rarily deactivate the TPMS. The control then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a lamp shows a fault, but disappears when loss of control of the vehicle and a serious road conditions or the driving style change. or fatal accident. ● Do not only rely on the tyre pressure ● If the lamp  lights up, reduce speed im- monitoring system. Regularly check your mediately and avoid any sudden turning or tyres to ensure that the tyre pressure is cor- Fig. 223 In the luggage compartment: load braking manoeuvre. Stop when possible, rect and that the tyres are not damaged floor raised. » and check the tyre pressure and status. due to puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents. Remove objects from the ● The tyre pressure monitoring system can tyres only when they have not pierced the only operate correctly if all of the tyres are tyres. inflated to the correct pressure when cold. ● The tyre pressure monitoring indicator ● If a tyre has not been punctured and it does not function when there is a fault in does not have to be changed immediately, the ESC or ABS page 269 . drive to the nearest specialised workshop ››› at a moderate speed and have the tyre checked and inflated to the correct pressure.

347 Practical tips

● Take out the temporary spare wheel. Chains For technical reasons, snow chains must not Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles be used on the temporary spare wheel. with BEATS Audio 10 speakers (with subwoofer) If you have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem- To remove the spare wheel, you must first re- porary spare wheel in place of one of the move the subwoofer. rear wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear ● Vehicles without a variable floor in the lug- wheel that you have removed and replace gage compartment: pull the floor of the lug- the punctured front wheel with this wheel. gage compartment (carpet) upwards to get it out. WARNING Fig. 224 In the luggage compartment: re- ● Vehicles with a variable luggage compart- ● After fitting the temporary spare wheel, move the subwoofer. ment floor: lift and secure the floor luggage check the tyre pressures as soon as possi- compartment as explained in ››› page 137 . ble. Failure to do so may cause an accident. The temporary spare wheel is stored under The tyre pressure is listed on the back of the floor panel in the luggage compartment ● Disconnect the subwoofer ››› Fig. 224 1 the left front door frame ››› Fig. 219 . and is attached by a thumbnut. speaker cable. ● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) The temporary spare wheel has been de- ● Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock- when the temporary spare wheel is fitted signed to be used for short periods of time. wise direction ››› Fig. 224 2 . on the vehicle: risk of accident! Have the tyre checked and replaced as soon ● Remove the subwoofer speaker and the ● Never travel more than 200 km using a as possible at a specialised CUPRA Service, spare wheel. temporary spare wheel. SEAT Official Service or at a specialised ● When re-mounting the spare tyre, place ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking workshop. the subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim and fast cornering: risk of accident! The spare wheel must not be switched for a with care. When doing so, the tip of the ● Never use more than one temporary spare wheel from another vehicle. “FRONT” arrow on the subwoofer should spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci- point forward. dent. Removing the temporary spare wheel ● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ● No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact ● Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove rotate the securing wheel clockwise so that temporary spare wheel rim. the temporary spare wheel ››› page 137 . the subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in place. ● If you are driving using the spare wheel, ● Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise the ACC system could automatically switch ››› Fig. 223.

348 Wheels off during the journey. Switch off the system when starting off.

349 Maintenance

Maintenance Service works ● Make sure that any repairs are carried out In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your special- by a specialised CUPRA dealer, a SEAT ised CUPRA dealer, SEAT dealership or a dealership or a specialised workshop. Service specialised workshop will document the following information: CAUTION Service intervals ● When each one of the services was carried CUPRA cannot be held liable for any dam- out. age to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of lack of availability of spare parts. Service work and the Digital ● Whether a specific repair has been sug- Maintenance Plan gested, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near future. Note Log of services performed (“Digital Main- ● If you have expressed a special request for Regular services on the vehicle not only tenance Plan”) the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will maintain its value, but also its correct oper- Specialised CUPRA dealers, SEAT dealer- write the work order. ation and road safety. For this reason, con- duct the services in accordance with CU- ships or a specialised workshop records ● The components or fluids that were PRA guidelines. Service receipts in a central system. Thanks changed. to this comprehensive documentation of the ● The date of the next service. service history, it is possible to reproduce the services performed any time. CUPRA recom- The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until Set Service or Flexible Service In- mends requesting a Service receipt after ev- the next inspection. This information is tervals ery service carried out containing all the documented in all checks performed. services carried out on the system. Services are classified as oil change service The type and the volume of the service may and inspection. The service interval display Whenever there is a new service the receipt vary from one vehicle to another. A special- on the instrument panel display serves as a is replaced with a current one. ised workshop will be able to provide specific reminder of the next service. The Digital Maintenance Plan is not availa- information on the jobs for your vehicle. ble in some markets. In this case, your spe- Depending on the features, the engine and cialised CUPRA dealer or a SEAT dealer- WARNING the conditions of use of the car, either the Fixed service or the Flexible service will be ship will inform you about the current doc- If the services are insufficient or not per- applied for an oil change service.. umentation of the work. formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic cause an accident and severe injuries.

350 Service

How to know which type of service needs you have to carry out this service, take into If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under to his vehicle account the individual conditions of use and adverse conditions of use, some of the ● Check the tables below: personal driving style. A major component of work must be carried out before the next the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in- service period or even between service in- Oil change servicea) stead of conventional engine oil. tervals. Bear in mind the information about the Conditions of use adverse include: Type of PR No. Service interval specifications of the engine oil according to service the VW standard ››› page 326 . ● The use of fuel with a high sulphur content. Every 5000 km or after QI1 If you do not want to the flexible service 1 yearb) ● Frequent short trips. you can select the fixed service However, a Every 7500 km or after fixed service may affect service costs The ● Letting the engine idle for a long period of QI2 1 yearb) Service Advisor will gladly advise you. time, as in the case of taxis. Fixed ● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust. Every 10000 km or after QI3 1 yearb) Service interval display ● Frequent driving with a trailer (depending At CUPRA, the dates of the services are indi- on equipment). Every 15000 km or after QI4 1 yearb) cated by the service interval display on the ● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a instrument panel ››› page 79 or in the Vehi- lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city). According to the service in- cle settings menu of the infotainment sys- QI6 Flexible ● Using the vehicle mostly in winter. terval display tem ››› page 85 . a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. The service interval display gives information This applies especially for the following b) Whatever happens first. for service dates that involve an engine oil parts (depending on equipment): change or an inspection. When the time for ● Dust and pollen filter Inspection Servicea) the corresponding service comes, additional work required, such as the change of brake ● Air Care allergen filter According to the service interval display fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out. ● Air filter a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. ● Toothed chain ● Particulate filter Particular characteristics of the Flexible Information about the terms of ● Service use Engine oil Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil The Service Advisor of your specialised change service only has to be performed The service intervals and groups are usually workshop will gladly inform you about the » when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when based on normal conditions of use. 351 Maintenance

need of performing service work between ● Your SEAT dealership service to you, offering the possibility of re- normal service intervals, always considering ● Your specialised workshop placing complete sets, such as: light engine, the conditions of use of your vehicle. gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical Due to technical reasons (continuous devel- components, etc. WARNING opment of components) the sets of services These parts are, approved parts, and are the may vary. Your specialised CUPRA dealer, If the services are insufficient or not per- same as the factory parts, which are also ap- any SEAT dealership or a specialised work- formed and if the service intervals are not proved spare parts. observed, the vehicle may be immobilised shop always receives updated information in traffic and cause accidents and severe about any modifications that are made. injuries. Original accessories ● Make sure that any repairs are carried out by a specialised CUPRA dealer, a SEAT Additional service offers We recommend you only use CUPRA Origi- dealership or a specialised workshop. nal Accessories and CUPRA approved acces- Approved spare parts sories for your vehicle. The reliability, safety CAUTION and suitability of these accessories have CUPRA cannot be held liable for any dam- Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con- been inspected specifically for this type of age to the vehicle due to insufficient work ceived for their vehicles and approved by vehicle. CUPRA cannot be held liable for the or of lack of availability of spare parts. SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety. safety and suitability of parts from other These parts correspond exactly to the man- manufacturers. ufacturer's requirements in terms of design, Service sets accuracy of the measurements and materials. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been Mobility Service (Service Sets of services include all the maintenance conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For Mobility) works needed to ensure the safety and the this reason, we always recommend the use smooth running of the vehicle (depending of Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be Since the moment you purchase your CU- on the conditions of use and the features held liable for the safety and suitability of PRA vehicle you will be able to enjoy the of the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, parts from other manufacturers. benefits and coverage of the CUPRA Mobility or operating fluids). Maintenance services Service. are divided into inspection and review serv- For the first two years after the purchase, ices. Consult the details of the jobs required Approved spare parts your new CUPRA vehicle is automatically for your vehicle at: covered by the CUPRA Mobility Service with- Approved spare parts, following the manu- out additional costs. ● Your CUPRA dealer facturer's requirements, are an additional 352 Vehicle maintenance

If you wish to enjoy this service after this pe- Commercial warranty for high Vehicle maintenance riod, you can extend the Mobility Service as voltage batteries for electric and long as you carry out the recommended In- hybrid vehicles spection and Maintenance Services at a spe- Maintenance and cleaning cialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official To supplement the aforementioned warran- Service. ties and guarantees, SEAT Official Services Basic observations If your CUPRA vehicle is immobilised due to a also grant a guarantee for high voltage bat- fault or an accident, our assistance services teries existing in many countries. Regular and careful care helps to maintain will help you keep moving. the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may Consult the details of this guarantee in the become a prerequisite to demand the war- Take into account that the Mobility Service sales contract or contact a SEAT Official ranty in the event of corrosion damage and differs depending on the country where the Service. deficiencies in the paint coat of the body- vehicle was purchased. For further informa- work. tion, ask your specialised CUPRA dealer, any SEAT dealership or visit the CUPRA website Specialised workshops have the necessary in your country. care products. Please follow the instructions for application on the packaging.

WARNING Warranty ● Cleaning products and other materials used for car care can be damaging to your Fault-free operation warranty health if misused. ● Always keep care products in a safe place, Specialised CUPRA Services or SEAT Official out of the reach of children. Danger of poi- Services ensure the perfect condition of new soning! vehicles. Check the purchase agreement or complementary additional documentation For the sake of the environment provided by your Technical Service to see the conditions and the terms of the warran- ● When purchasing car care products, ty. Consult further information in this regard chose products that are compatible with in your specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT the environment. Official Service. ● The waste from car-care products should not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.

353 Maintenance

Washing the vehicle Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To in a direct stream or one that has a rotating avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g. jet for forcing off dirt. not apply too much pressure. remains of insects, bird excrements, tree The water temperature must not exceed Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with resin or anti frost salt adhered to your vehi- 60°C. a neutral cleaning product and a soft micro- cle, the more damage it can cause to the fibre cloth. surface. High temperatures, for instance Automatic car washes strong sunlight, further intensify the dam- Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water age. Spray the vehicle before starting the car and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of wash. water with a leather cloth. Before washing the car, soften the dirt using Make sure that the windows and the panor- plenty of water. WARNING amic sunroof are closed and the windscreen To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in- ● Only wash the vehicle with the ignition bird droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water structions of the car wash tunnel operator, switched off or according to the specifica- and a microfibre cloth. especially if your vehicle has detachable tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk Have the underside of the vehicle washed parts. of accident! ● When cleaning the underbody or the in- after the end of the anti frost salts in winter. Use of car washes without brushes if possi- side of the wheel arches, protect yourself ble. High pressure cleaning equipment from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of cut! When washing the vehicle with a high-pres- Washing by hand ● After cleaning the brakes could act more sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice structions for the equipment. This applies soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean- on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci- particularly to the operating pressure and ing products that do not contain solvents. dent! In this case the brakes should be the distance between the spraying water. Do dried by pressing the brake pedal several not aim the jet directly to the side window Washing vehicles with a matte paint by times. gaskets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun- hand roof; the same applies to tyres, rubber hoses, soundproofing material, sensors or camera To prevent damage to the vehicle when CAUTION lenses. Keep a distance of at least 40 cm. washing it, first remove the thicker dust and ● Before washing the vehicle in an auto- dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and matic car wash, please make sure to retract Do not remove snow and ice with a high- fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner the exterior mirrors to prevent them from pressure cleaner. for matte paint. being damaged. Electric exterior rearview

354 Vehicle maintenance

mirrors must always be folded/deployed have special questions or parts that are not Wheels listed. Take he general considerations into electrically! Problem Solution account in Take special care with... on ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. ››› page 358. Risk of damaging the paint job! Antifreeze salt Water ● Do not use sponges, abrasive household Brake abrasion Acid-free special cleaning prod- sponges or similar to clean insect remains. dust uct Risk of damaging the surface! Cleaning the exterior ● End exhausts Vehicle parts with matte paint: Windscreen wipers – Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of Problem Solution damaging the surface! Problem Solution Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod- – Never select washing programs that in- Dirt Soft cloth with wipers uct is required clude the use of wax. This could damage the appearance of matte paint. Headlights / Tail lights Covers / Trims – Do not put stickers or magnets on parts Problem Solution with matte paint, as removing them Problem Solution may damage the paint. Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if a steel solutiona) cleaning product is required

For the sake of the environment a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum The car should only be washed in special in 1 litre of water in 1 litre of water wash bays. These places are prepared to Sensors / Camera lenses prevent oily water from getting into the Paint public drains. Problem Solution Problem Solution

Sensors: soft cloth with a sol- Check the paint's colour code in vent-free cleaning product Paint flaws an authorised service and re- Cleaning and maintenance in- Dirt Camera lenses: soft cloth with store with a touch-up pencil structions an alcohol-free cleaning product Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

The cleaning and maintenance of individual Hand brush/Anti frost spray with Apply rust remover and then ap- Snow/ice components of the vehicle can be checked no solvents Environmental rust ply hard wax. Go you your speci- in the following tables. The contents should tank alised workshop if you have any be understood merely as a recommenda- queries » tion. Go to your specialised workshop if you 355 Maintenance

Problem Solution Decoration slides Displays/instrument panel

Have your specialised workshop Problem Solution Problem Solution Corrosion take care of this Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal a) The water does not solution display cleaner Maintain with hard wax (at least create droplets on 2 times a year) a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum the clean paint Control panels in 1 litre of water Treat with suitable wax and ap- Problem Solution No shine de- ply paint preservative afterwards spite sober main- if the wax used does not contain Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with tenance/paint Interior cleaning a) preservative ingredients neutral soap solution

Tanks, e.g. insect Windows a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum Immediately soften with water remains, bird drop- in 1 litre of water and remove with a microfibre pings, tree sap, Problem Solution cloth road salt Seat belts Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and Fat-based dirt, e.g. Delete immediately with a neu- then dry with a cloth Problem Solution cosmetic products tral soap solutiona) and a soft a) or sunscreen cloth Covers / Trims Dirt Neutral soap solution , allowed to dry before retracting a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum Problem Solution a) in 1 litre of water Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum Dirt Neutral soap solutiona) in 1 litre of water Carbon fibre parts a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather Problem Solution in 1 litre of water Problem Solution Dirt Clean the same way as painted Plastic parts parts ››› page 354 Particles of dirt Vacuum cleaner Problem Solution stuck to surfaces

Dirt Damp cloth Water-based dirt, Absorbent cloth and neutral e.g. coffee, tea, soap solutiona) Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if possi- blood etc. ble solvent-free plastic cleaner

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

356 Vehicle maintenance

Problem Solution Problem Solution Camera lenses ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove a) Grease-based dirt, Apply a neutral soap solution . Care Apply preservative cream regu- ice or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of e.g. oil, make-up, Absorb the dissolved grease and larly to protect from sunlight. cracking the lens! etc. paint particles drying with an ab- Use a colour preservative if re- sorbent cloth, in case you must quired ● To clean the camera lens, never use abra- treat it with water afterwards sive cleaning products or products with alco- a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum hol. Risk of scratches and cracks! Special dirt, e.g. Special stain remove: dry with an in 1 litre of water pens, nail polish, absorbent cloth, if applicable, dispersion paint, apply neutral soap solution af- Carbon fibre parts Windows shoe cream etc. terwardsa) ● Remove snow and ice from windows and Problem Solution exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum To avoid scratches, the scraper should only in 1 litre of water Dirt Clean like plastic parts be pushed in one direction and not moved to Natural leather and fro. Problem Solution Take special care with... ● Never remove snow or ice from windows and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap Risk of cracks on the windows! solutiona) Headlights/tail lights ● To prevent damage to the heating of the ● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with rear window, do not put stickers over the Water-based dirt, Recent stains: absorbent cloth a dry cloth or sponge. e.g. coffee, tea, Dry stains: stain remover suita- heating elements. blood etc. ble for leather ● Do not use cleaning products that contain alcohol. Risk of cracks! Covers/trims Grease-based dirt, Recent stains: absorbent cloth e.g. oil, make-up, and suitable stain remover for ● Do not use cleaning products or chrome Wheels etc. leather based cleaning agents. Dry stains: grease solvent spray ● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive products. Paint Special dirt, e.g. Stain remover suitable for leath- pens, nail polish, er ● If the protective coating on the paint of the ● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust dispersion paint, rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, before applying wax or care products. Risk of shoe cream etc. scratches, etc., the damage should be re- scratches! paired immediately. ● Do not apply wax or care products if the vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of damaging the paint job! »

357 Maintenance

● The ambient rust deposits must not be re- Fabrics/artificial leather/microfibre prolonged period in the bright sun, it is best moved through friction. Risk of damaging ● Do not treat artificial leather/microfibre to cover the leather. the paint job! with leather cleaning products, solvents, wax ● Remove cosmetic products and sunlight polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar WARNING immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job! products. Do not use water-repellent coatings on the ● If the stain is very hard to remove, take the windscreen. In bad visibility conditions such Displays/instrument panel vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it as humid weather, darkness or when the ● The screens, the instrument panel and the removed there. This will prevent damage. sun is in its lowest point, visibility may be trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk impacted. Risk of accident! Such coatings ● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard of scratches! can also cause the windscreen wiper blades sponges, etc. to clean. to make noise. ● Make sure that the instrument panel is ● Do not turn on seat heating to dry the switched off and cooled down before clean- seats. ing. Note ● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- ● Make sure that no liquid leaks between the ● Remains of insects can be removed much ets or belts can damage the surface. instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam- more easily with previously treated paint. age! ● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage ● Regular car care treatments can prevent the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro deposits of ambient rust. Control panels fasteners are closed. ● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con- Natural leather trol panels. Risk of damage! ● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe Remove the vehicle from traffic Seat belts cream, spot removers or similar products on If you want to leave your vehicle stationary leather. ● Do not remove the seat belts to clean for a long period of time, contact a qualified them. ● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- workshop. They will gladly inform you about ● Seat belts and their components must ets or belts can damage the surface. the necessary measures, such as anti-corro- never be cleaned with chemical products, ● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sion protection, Service and storage. nor should they be allowed to come into sponges, etc. to clean. Also take into account the indications relat- contact with corrosive liquids, solvents or ● Do not turn on seat heating to dry the ing to the vehicle’s battery page 304, sharp objects. Risk of damaging the fabric! ››› seats. Conservation of the high-voltage bat- ● If you find any damage to the belt webbing, ● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight tery,››› page 333, 12-volt battery . belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, for long periods, otherwise it may tend to ask your specialised workshop to replace the lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a belt in question. 358 Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Accessories and modifi- Any retro-fitted equipment which has a dications and/or work performed incorrectly rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is in the vehicle. driven, such as a cruise control system or cations to the vehicle We therefore recommend that all work electronically-controlled suspension, must should be performed by a specialised CUPRA be approved for use in your vehicle and bear Service or a SEAT Official Service using gen- Accessories, spare parts the e mark (the European Union's authorisa- uine CUPRA® parts. and repair work tion symbol). If any additional electrical devices are fit- WARNING Introduction ted which do not serve to control the vehicle Incorrectly performed modifications or itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop other work on your vehicle can lead to mal- Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the  functions and cause accidents. for advice before purchasing accessories sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in and replacement parts. the European Union). Your vehicle is designed to offer a high WARNING Radio telephones and office standard of active and passive safety. For this equipment reason, we recommend that you ask a speci- Accessories, for example telephone holders or cup holders, should never be fitted alised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Serv- Radio transmitters (fixed installation) ice for advice before fitting accessories or on the covers, or within the working range replacement parts. Your Official Service has of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters the latest information from the manufacturer of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci- in the vehicle require prior approval. CUPRA and can recommend accessories and re- dent. generally authorises in-vehicle installations placement parts which are suitable for your of approved types of radio transmitters pro- requirements. They can also answer any vided that: questions you might have regarding official Technical modifications ● The antenna is installed correctly. regulations. Unauthorised modifications to the electron- ● The aerial is installed on the exterior of the We recommend you to use only CUPRA ac- ic components, software, wiring or data vehicle (and shielded cables are used to- cessories and Genuine CUPRA parts®. Spe- transfer in the vehicle may cause malfunc- gether with non-reflective aerial trimming). cialised CUPRA Services or SEAT Official tioning. ● The effective transmitting power does not Services have the necessary experience and exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base. facilities to ensure that the parts are installed You will appreciate that your specialised CU- correctly and professionally. PRA dealer or SEAT dealership cannot be A specialised CUPRA Service, SEAT Official held liable for any damage caused by modifi- Service or specialised workshop will be able »

359 Maintenance

to inform you about options for installing and WARNING operating radio transmitters with a higher transmitting power. Mobile telephones or radio equipment which is operated inside the vehicle without a properly installed external aerial can Mobile radio transmitters create excessive magnetic fields that could Commercial mobile telephones or radio cause a health hazard. equipment might interfere with the electronics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. Note This may be due to: ● The posterior fitting of electric and elec- ● No external aerial. tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its ● External aerial incorrectly installed. licence and could lead to the withdrawal of the vehicle registration document under ● Transmitting power more than 10 W. certain circumstances. You must, therefore, do not operate portable ● Please use the mobile telephone/radio mobile telephones or radio equipment in- operating instructions. side the vehicle without a properly installed external aerial ››› . Please note also that the maximum range of the equipment can only be achieved with an external aerial.

Business equipment Retrofit installation of business or private equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provided the equipment cannot interfere with the driver's immediate control of the vehicle and that any such equipment carries the  mark. Any retrofit equipment that could influence the driver's control of the vehicle must have a type approval for your vehicle and must carry the e mark.

360 Information for the user

These data will provide a better understand- In order to read the EDR data it is necessary Information for the ing of the circumstances of the accident. to access (if legally permitted to do so) the vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter- user Data from the driving assist systems are also face while the vehicle is switched on. recorded. This includes data such as whether the systems were inactive or active and if CUPRA will not have access to EDR data un- Information for the user such action had an impact on the vehicle’s less the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the lessee or hirer) gives their consent. There Information stored by the aforementioned situations, accelerating or may be exceptions to this, depending on le- decelerating the vehicle. gal or contractual provisions. control units Depending on vehicle equipment, this in- Due to legal requirements in safety-related cludes data from systems such as: products, CUPRA may use the EDR data for Storage of accident data (Event field research and in order to improve vehicle Data Recorder) ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system quality. Any data used for the purpo- ● Emergency brake assistance system (Front ses of research will be treated anonymously Your vehicle has an event data recorder Assist). (in other words, no reference will be made to (EDR). ● Park Pilot system the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer). The EDR’s function is to record data in the ● Parking aid system (Park Assist). event of a mild or serious accident. These ● Lane Assist data are used to support the analysis of how Other important informa- different vehicle systems behaved. The EDR data are only recorded in specific The EDR records, over a reduced time range accident situations. No data are recorded in tion (normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv- normal driving conditions. Environmental compatibility ing data and data from the restraint systems, No audio or video data inside or around the such as: vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan- Environmental protection is a top priority in ● How different vehicle systems worked. ces are personal data such as name, age, or the design, choice of materials and manu- gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties ● facture of your new CUPRA. Whether the driver and the occupants (such as criminal proceedings authorities) were wearing their seat belts. may relate the contents of the EDR data to Constructive measures to encourage recy- ● How hard the acceleration or brake pedal other data sources and create a personal cling was pressed. reference in the context of an accident in- ● Joints and connections designed for easy ● Vehicle speed. vestigation. dismantling. »

361 Information for the user

● Modular construction to facilitate disman- ● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- declare that they comply with Directive tling. dues (RDF). 2014/53/EU when legally required. ● Increased use of single-grade materials. ● Improvement in the quality of waste water. The full text of the EU compliance declara- ● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in ● Use of systems for the recovery of residual tion is available online at the following ad- accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, dress: ISO 1629. etc.). www.cupraofficial.com ● The use of water-soluble paints.  Choice of materials ● Use of recycled materials. ● Use of compatible plastics in the same part Recycling of electrical or elec- Addresses of the manufacturers if its components are not easily separated. tronic devices According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all ● Use of recycled materials and/or materials relevant components must include the ad- All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that originating from renewable sources. dress of the manufacturer. are not permanently fitted in the vehicle ● Reduction of volatile components, includ- must be marked with the following symbol: The address of the manufacturers of coming odour, in plastic materials. ponents that, due to their size or nature, ● Use of CFC-free coolants.  cannot include a sticker are listed below, as long as it is legally required: Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions This symbol indicates that EED must not be dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive discarded as home waste but through selec- Central control unit (BCM) 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, tive waste collection. hexavalent chromium. Robert Bosch GmbH/Braunschweig Theodor-Heuss-Strasse 12 Manufacturing methods 38122 - Braunschweig, Germany Information about the EU Phone: 0049 53188890 ● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities. Directive 2014/53/EU Keyless Access system ● Use of plastic film as protection during ve- HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA/Hamm hicle transport. Simplified EU compliance declaration Roemerstr. 66 ● Use of solvent-free adhesives. 59075 - Hamm, Germany ● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- Your vehicle has different radioelectrical de- Phone: 0049 23817980 tems. vices. The manufacturers of these devices

362 Information for the user

Roof antenna Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH Connectivity Box ASK Industries S.p.A Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51 Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH Via dell'Industria n.12/14/16 72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany Märkische Strasse 72 60037 Monte San Vito (AN), Italy Phone: +49 7127 140 15806 Zossen OT Dabendorf, Germany Phone: +3907174521 Website: www.te.com Phone:+49 3377 3160 Website: www.askgroup.it KATHREIN Automotive GmbH Website: www.molex.com Römerring 1 Mitsumi Electronics Europe GmbH Basic infotainment system Siemensstrasse 32 31137 Hildesheim, Germany 63225 Langen, Germany Phone: +498031184-0 Panasonic Automotive Systems Czech Phone: +49 (0) 6103913-0 Website: www.kathrein.com U Panasonicu 266 530 06, Pardubice, Czech Republic Website: www.minebeamitsumi.co.jp Molex CVS Hildesheim GmbH Daimlerring 31 Molex CVS Hildesheim GmbH Optional infotainment system Daimlerring 31 31135 Hildesheim, Germany LG Electronics Mlawa SP 31135 Hildesheim, Germany Phone: +49 3377 3160 LG Electronics 7 Phone: +49 3377 3160 Website: www.molex.com 06 500, Mlawa Website: www.molex.com Navigation antenna Remote control key Antenna amplifiers Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH Digades GmbH Digitales Und Ana/Zittau ASK Industries S.p.A Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51 Äußere Weberstr. 20 Via dell'Industria n.12/14/16 72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany 02763 - Zittau, Germany 60037 Monte San Vito (AN), Italy Phone: +49 7127 140 Phone: 0049 358357750 Phone: +3907174521 Website: www.te.com Website: www.askgroup.it KATHREIN Automotive GmbH Instrument panel Römerring 1 Calearo Antenne S.P.A Analogue SE38x/SE316 31137 Hildesheim, Germany Corso Matteotti, 1 Visteon Electronics Germany GmbH Phone: +498031184-0 20121 Milan, Italy Visteonstr. 4-10 Website: www.kathrein.com Phone: +39 0444 90 13 11 50170 Kerpen, Germany » Website: www.calearo.com

363 Information for the user

Analogue all other models Panasonic Automotive Systems Czech, Rear radar sensors Continental Automotive Spain, S.A. s.r.o. Hella GmbH & Co. KGaA Crta. de Rubí a Ullastrell, nº 12-30 U Panasonicu 266 Rixbecker Straße 75 08191 Rubí (Barcelona - Spain) 530 06, Pardubice, Czech Republic 59552 Lippstadt (Germany)

FPK (digital) Front radar sensors Continental Automotive GmbH Online Connectivity Unit VDO-Strasse 1, MRR for SE38X LG ELECTRONICS INC. 64832 Babenhausen, Germany Robert Bosch GmbH 10, Magokjungang 10-ro, Markwiesenstrasse, 46 Gangseo-gu, Seoul, Republic of Korea Panasonic Automotive Systems Europe 72770 Reutlingen (Kusterdingen) Germany GmbH Robert Bosch Str. 27-29 MRR for Tarraco, Ateca, Ibiza, Arona 63225 Langen, Germany Automotive Distance Control Systems GmbH Peter-Dornier-Strasse, 10 88131, Lindau, Germany

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle) 433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW All CUPRA models

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater) 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 25 mW Formentor

Transmitted-Receiver (independent heating) 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW Formentor

Bluetooth 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm All CUPRA models

364 Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 21 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 21 dBm

WCDMA FDD VIII: 880-915MHz 21 dBm Connection to the external antenna of the car Leon, Formentor, Born LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD3: 1710-1785 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD7: 2500-2570 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD8: 880-915 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

Auxiliary antenna for Car2X 5855-5925 MHz 2 W PIRE Born

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm All CUPRA models

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW All CUPRA models

28.2 dBm Leon, Formentor 76 GHz-77 GHz Radar sensors for assistance systems 35.0 dBm Ateca

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Ateca

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 5 W Ateca, Leon, Formentor, Born

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All CUPRA models »

365 Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

EGSM900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

DCS1800: 1710-1785 MHz 31 dBm

UMTS FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

UMTS FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

UMTS FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 24 dBm

Online Connectivity Unit E-UTRA FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 23.5 dBm All CUPRA models

E-UTRA FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 23.0 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 7: 2500-2570 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 23.0 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 20: 832-862 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 28: 703-748 MHz 23.0 dBm

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements. Hereby, Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH de- Importer for United Kingdom Volkswagen Group United Kingdom Ltd. clares that the radio equipment type LTE- market Yeomans Drive, Blakelands MBC-EU2 is in compliance with Directive Milton Keynes, MK 14 5AN 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declara- The Radio Equipment Regulations 2017 United Kingdom tion of conformity is available at the following internet address: This vehicle has various radio equipment devices installed. http://www.molex.com/doc The following acts as importer of the radio equipment devices for the United Kingdom market within the meaning of The Radio Equipment Regulations 2017:

366 Indications about the technical data

Vehicle identification data Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de- Technical data pend on the equipment/features of each in- Vehicle ID number dividual vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road conditions, traffic conditions, en- Indications about the The vehicle ID number can be found in the vironmental conditions, load or number of following places: technical data passengers. ● One the vehicle's data label. Important information ● In front, under the windscreen. Filling capacities ● To the right in the engine compartment. Introduction Tank level Type plate Vehicles with front-wheel The values indicated in the technical data The type plate is located on the vehicle’s 50 l, 7 l reserve drive: may differ depending on optional equipment right hand door frame. Vehicles for certain or version of the model, as well as in the case export countries do not have a type plate. Vehicles with all-wheel drive 55 l, 8.5 l reserve of special vehicles and equipment for certain Plug-in hybrid vehicles countries. 40 l, 8 l reserve (PHEV) The information in the official vehicle docu- Fuel consumption mentation takes precedence at all times. Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con- Approved consumption values are derived tainer Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci- from measurements performed or super- approx. 3 litres fications section vised by certified EU laboratories, according to the legislation in force at the time (for kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement. more information, see the Publications Of- Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly fice of the European Union on the EUR-Lex High-voltage battery PS used to denote engine power. website: © European Union, http://eur- lex.europa.eu/) and apply to the specified Type and capacity rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed. vehicle characteristics. Plug-in hybrid vehi- Li-ion 12.8 kWh 48V Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque. The values relating to fuel consumption and cles (PHEV)

Cetane number, indication of the diesel CO2 emissions can be found in the docu- CZ combustion power. mentation provided to the purchaser of the vehicle at the time of purchase. Research octane number, indication of RON the knock resistance of petrol. 367 Technical data

Weights

Load on the roof The maximum authorised load on the roof of your vehicle is 75 kg.

Empty weight, total weight, axle loads The empty weight of the vehicle with driver (75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU) 1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment can increase the empty weight, which means that the possible useful load decreases pro- portionally.

Trailer weight The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball head of the towing bracket is 80 kg.

WARNING The values indicated for the maximum permitted weights must not be exceeded. There is a risk of accident and damage!

368 Indications about the technical data

Engine specifications

Petrol engine 1.4 TSI Start-Stop PHEV

TSI engine power in kW (hp) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 110 (150)/5,000-6,000

Electric motor power in kW (hp) at 1/min 85 (116)/2,600-6,500 85 (116)/2,600-6,500

TSI engine + electric motor power in kW (hp) at 1/min 150 (204)/5,000-6,000 180 (245)/5,000-6,000

TSI engine maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,550-3,500 250/1,550-3,500

Electric motor maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 330/0-2,600 330/0-2,600

Maximum torque of TSI engine + electric motor (Nm at 350/0-3,500 400/0-3,500 1/min)

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,395 4/1,395

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox DSG DSG

Top speed (km/h) 205 (VI) 210 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.8 7.0

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,120 2,120 »

369 Technical data

Petrol engines 1.5 TSI Start-Stop 2.0 TSI Start-Stop 2.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 140 (190)/4,200-6,000 140 (190)/4,180-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500 320/1,500-4,100 320/1,500-4,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,498 4/1,984 4/1,984

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual DSG DSG 4Drive DSG

Top speed (km/h) 204 (V) 203 (VI) 220 (V) 218 (V)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.9 8.9 7.1 7.5

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,960 1,980 2,110 2,030

Petrol engines 2.0 TSI Start-Stop 2.0 TSI Start-Stop 2.5 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (hp) at 1/min 180 (245)/5,000-6,500 228 (310)/5,450-6,500 287 (390)/5,700-7,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 370/1,600-4,300 400/2,000-5,450 480/2,250-5,700

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,984 4/1,984 5/2,480

Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight Fuel Super 98 / Super 95 (with a slight power loss) ROZ power loss) ROZ

Gearbox DSG DSG 4Drive DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 238 (V) 250 (V) a)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 6.8 4.9 a)

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,060 2,140 a)

a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

370 Indications about the technical data

Diesel engines 2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop

Power output in kW (hp) at 1/min 110 (150)/3,250-4,200 110 (150)/3,000-4,200

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 340/1,600-3,000 360/1,600-2,750

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 205 (V) 203 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.3 8.6

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,030 2,140

371 Technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 225 Dimensions.

››› Fig. 225 Formentor Formentor 4Drive Formentor PHEV A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 893/874 893/877 893/877

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,679 2,680 2,680

D Length (mm) 4,446 4,450 4,450

E/F Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,583/1,555 1,585/1,559 1,585/1,559

G Width (mm) 1,839 1,839 1,839

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,537 1,528 1,528

Turning radius (m) 11.4 11.4 11.4

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

372 Index

minimum filling capacity ...... 318 Android Auto™ Index specification ...... 319 Disconnecting ...... 181 tank capacity ...... 318 establish connection ...... 180 Numbers and Symbols Additional heating menu ...... 180 12-volt battery see Auxiliary heating ...... 156 requirements ...... 180 assisted start ...... 52 Adjust special characteristics ...... 181 charge level ...... 337 front seats ...... 128 Anti-lock brake system ...... 269 charging ...... 336 headrest ...... 130 Anti-puncture ...... 44, 45 disconnect and connect ...... 80, 333 lights ...... 120 Anti-puncture kit ...... 43, 44 electrolyte level ...... 336 seats ...... 13 check after 10 minutes ...... 46 energy management ...... 337 seat with memory ...... 131 components ...... 45 location ...... 335 time ...... 76 inflating the tyre ...... 45 replacement ...... 336 Adjusting the seat belt ...... 20 sealing the tyre ...... 45 winter operations ...... 333 Airbags ...... 23 Anti-puncture set ...... 44 4Drive ...... 229 activating and deactivating ...... 27 Anti-theft alarm system ...... 101 centre ...... 28 trailer ...... 295 A description ...... 24 Anti-trap function ABS for the head ...... 30 sunroof ...... 114 see Anti-lock brake system ...... 269 for the knees ...... 28 sunshade blind (glass roof) ...... 114 ACC ...... 244 front ...... 26 windows ...... 112 Accessories ...... 359 side ...... 29 Antifreeze ...... 329 Activating CUPRA CONNECT ...... 174 Airbag system ...... 23 Apple CarPlay Adapting the playback volume ...... 170 activation ...... 25 Disconnecting ...... 180 Adaptive Cruise Control ...... 244 control lamp ...... 25 establish connection ...... 179 control and warning lamp ...... 245 deactivation of the front airbag ...... 27 menu ...... 179 malfunction ...... 249 description ...... 24 requirements ...... 179 noise ...... 249 front airbags ...... 25 special characteristics ...... 180 operation ...... 245 how it works ...... 25 Applications (apps) ...... 179 special driving situations ...... 247 Air conditioning ...... 147 Aspects to think about before starting the status display ...... 247 air vents ...... 152 vehicle ...... 12 AdBlue controls ...... 149 Assistance systems control and warning lamps ...... 319 parking ventilation ...... 155 adaptive cruise control ...... 244 information ...... 318 usage instructions ...... 151 assisted parting system (Park Assist) ...... 274 loading ...... 319 Air recirculation ...... 152 Auto Hold function ...... 268 Air vents ...... 152 connecting ...... 81 373 Index

cruise control ...... 236 Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . 115 Belt tightening ...... 21 disconnecting ...... 81 Automatic gearbox ...... 218 Bicycle carrier door opening warning (Exit Assist) ...... 258 control lamp ...... 218 fitting onto the coverable tow hook ...... 299 driver alert system ...... 71 downhill assistant ...... 222 max. load rating ...... 299 driving assist (Travel Assist) ...... 254 driving tips ...... 220 Biodiesel ...... 318 Emergency Assist ...... 256 kick-down ...... 221 Blown bulbs emergency braking (Front Assist) ...... 240 launch-control program ...... 222 change a bulb ...... 61 front radar ...... 233 operating fault ...... 221 Bluetooth® ...... 172 general notes ...... 232 selector lever positions ...... 219 profiles ...... 172 hill descent control (HDC) ...... 225 steering wheel with shift paddles ...... 220 Bonnet ...... 322, 325 Hill Hold Control (HHC) ...... 223 tiptronic ...... 218, 220 opening and closing ...... 324 lane departure warning (Side Assist) ...... 258 towing ...... 55 Brake fluid ...... 331 parking aid Plus ...... 282 Auxiliary heating ...... 156 Brakes ...... 264 peripheral view system (Top View Cam- activate ...... 158 brake fluid ...... 331 era) ...... 286 connecting ...... 156 brake servo ...... 264 PreCrash system ...... 22 disconnecting ...... 156 braking assistant ...... 269 proactive speed adjustment ...... 250 electricity consumers ...... 158 electronic parking brake ...... 266 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 258 programming ...... 158 emergency brake function ...... 267 rear parking aid ...... 285 radio-operated remote control ...... 157 new brake pads ...... 264 road sign detection system messages ...... 73 remote control range ...... 158 Braking assistant ...... 269 safety advice ...... 232 special characteristics ...... 157, 158 Braking system speed limiter ...... 238 usage instructions ...... 158 warning lamp ...... 264 system limits ...... 233 Average fuel consumption ...... 65 Tyre pressure monitor indicator ...... 346 C Tyre pressure monitoring ...... 346 B Camera Assisted start ...... 52 Background lighting ...... 122 cleaning ...... 74 Audible warning Backrest of the rear seat Lane Assist ...... 252 control and warning lamps ...... 82 folding ...... 132 Care lights ...... 114 raise ...... 132 see Cleaning the vehicle ...... 353 unbuckled seat belt ...... 16 Bag hooks ...... 139, 144 Catalytic converter ...... 321 Auto Hold ...... 268 Battery ...... 94 Central armrests ...... 134 Auto Hold Function ...... 268 change on the remote control (independ- Central locking ...... 95 Auto Lock (central locking) ...... 95 ent heating) ...... 157 anti-theft alarm ...... 101 Automatic car wash ...... 354 Battery Manager Menu ...... 305 central locking switch ...... 97 disconnecting the Auto Hold function . . . 268 Before starting the vehicle ...... 12 emergency lock ...... 105 374 Index

remote control key ...... 96 Child seats airbag system ...... 25 selective unlocking system ...... 96 group classification ...... 32 anti-lock brake system ABS ...... 269 settings ...... 96 ISOFIX system ...... 36 audible warning ...... 82 unlock and lock the vehicle (Keyless Ac- safety instructions ...... 33 braking system ...... 264 cess) ...... 98 securing with the seat belt ...... 40 cruise control (GRA) ...... 236 Cetane index (diesel fuel) ...... 318 Top Tether system ...... 36, 38, 39 EDL ...... 269 Change a bulb ...... 61 Cleaning the vehicle electric drive ...... 310 Change the wiper blades ...... 50 high pressure cleaning equipment ...... 354 electromechanical steering ...... 226 Changing a wheel ...... 46 special care ...... 357 electronic parking brake ...... 264 subsequent work ...... 50 vehicle exterior ...... 355 Emergency Assist ...... 257 wheel nuts ...... 47 vehicle interior ...... 356 emissions control ...... 321 Changing parts ...... 359 wash the vehicle ...... 354 engine coolant ...... 78 Charging cable Climate control engine management ...... 321 for charging stations (AC) ...... 312 auxiliary heating ...... 156 engine oil ...... 327 for sockets ...... 313 controls ...... 152 ESC ...... 269, 272 Charging socket ...... 308 setting the temperature ...... 152 fuel reserve ...... 78 Charging the high-voltage battery Clocks gear change ...... 224 charging cable ...... 312 digital ...... 76 hill descent control ...... 225 charging modes ...... 306 set the time ...... 76 Lane Assist ...... 252 charging process display ...... 309 Closing ...... 95 lane departure warning (Side Assist) ...... 259 charging socket ...... 308 bonnet ...... 324 lights ...... 114 emergency unlocking ...... 311 panoramic roof ...... 113 particulate filter ...... 321 programmed charging ...... 305 rear lid ...... 107 press on the brake ...... 244 settings in the infotainment system ...... 305 windows ...... 110 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 259 troubleshooting ...... 310 Clutch (lamp) ...... 223 refuelling ...... 78, 315 Checking levels Coming Home ...... 119 remote control (independent heating) . . . 157 engine compartment ...... 325 Connectivity ...... 172 replacement ...... 218 Check lists WLAN access point ...... 182 seat belt ...... 16 requirements for Android Auto™ ...... 180 Connectivity Box ...... 204 Start-Stop ...... 214 requirements for Apple CarPlay ...... 179 Connectors steering column lock ...... 226 requirements for MirrorLink® ...... 181 faults ...... 145 TCS ...... 269, 272 reverse assist (Rear View) ...... 290 Control and warning lamps ...... 82 tow hook ...... 299 Childproof locks adaptive cruise control ...... 245 Travel Assist ...... 256 electric windows ...... 110 adBlue ...... 319 Tyre pressure monitor system ...... 346 airbags ...... 27 375 Index

Controls and displays Distance control DSG ...... 218 overview ...... 63 see Adaptive Cruise Control ...... 244 Duplicate keys ...... 92 Controls on the steering wheel ...... 91 Door cylinder ...... 104 Dust and pollen filter ...... 147 Convenience close function Door handle ...... 104 Dynamic headlight range control ...... 120 windows ...... 111 Door lock ...... 104 Convenience open function Doors ...... 104 E windows ...... 111 child lock ...... 105 e-Call ...... 42 Cooling ...... 147 Downhill assistance function ...... 222 E-Mode ...... 213 Cooling system Downhill assistant ...... 222 Easy Open check the coolant ...... 330 Drawers ...... 143 special characteristics ...... 109 refilling coolant ...... 330 Drink holder Eco-driving notes ...... 75 Copyright ...... 170 bottle holder ...... 144 EDL Correct sitting position ...... 13 front ...... 144 see Electronic differential lock ...... 269 driver ...... 13 in the rear central armrest ...... 144 Electric Cruise control ...... 236 Drive Profile ...... 226 windows ...... 110 operation ...... 237 Driver Electrical accessories CUPRA CONNECT ...... 173 see Correct sitting position ...... 13 see Power sockets ...... 145 deactivate ...... 176 Driver alert system ...... 71 Electric devices ...... 145 faults ...... 177 Driving Electric windows ...... 110 legal provisions ...... 176 driving on flooded roads ...... 231 Electrolyte ...... 336 Current documentation attached ...... 162 economical ...... 230 Electronic differential lock ...... 269 parking on inclines ...... 273 Electronic engine torque management D park on upward slopes ...... 273 (XDS) ...... 270 Dangers of not using the seat belt ...... 18 safe ...... 12 Electronic immobilizer ...... 104, 210 Data label ...... 367 trips abroad ...... 120, 232 Electronic parking brake ...... 266 Data transfer ...... 173 with trailer ...... 296 automatic connection ...... 267 Deactivating CUPRA CONNECT services . . . 176 Driving Assist (Travel Assist) ...... 254 automatic disconnection ...... 266 Deactivation of the front airbag ...... 27 operation ...... 256 connecting ...... 266 Diesel problems and solutions ...... 256 disconnecting ...... 266 refuelling ...... 318 status display ...... 255 emergency brake function ...... 267 Digital Cockpit ...... 65 Driving data ...... 70 lamp ...... 264 information profiles ...... 65 Driving data indicator ...... 70 Electronic self-locking ...... 269 Disposal Driving mode...... 228 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...... 269 seat belt tensioners ...... 21 Driving on flooded roads ...... 231 Driving profile ...... 228 376 Index

Emergencies ...... 42 Emissions control system specifications ...... 329 anti-puncture kit ...... 44 AdBlue ...... 318 tank ...... 330 changing a wheel ...... 46 catalytic converter ...... 321 temperature indicator ...... 78 changing the battery ...... 336 control lamp ...... 321 warning lamp ...... 78 emergency vehicle towing ...... 55 particulate filter ...... 321 Engine failure hazard warning lights ...... 120 Energy management ...... 337 control lamp ...... 321 jump leads ...... 52 Engine Engine management ...... 320 replace a blown fuse ...... 59 assisted start ...... 52 control lamp ...... 321 vehicle tool kit ...... 43 noise ...... 208 Engine oil Emergency Assist ...... 256 running in ...... 229 change ...... 326, 329 connecting and disconnecting ...... 257 Start-Stop system ...... 215 checking the oil level ...... 327 Troubleshooting ...... 257 start (driver instructions with the mechan- consumption ...... 327 see also Emergency Assist ...... 256 ical contact) ...... 211 dipstick ...... 327 Emergency brake function ...... 267 Engine and ignition inspection service ...... 326 Emergency braking assist system ...... 233 automatic ignition disconnection ...... 207 maintenance frequencies ...... 326 activating and deactivating ...... 243 emergency start ...... 210 refill ...... 328 dodge assist ...... 241 My Beat ...... 207 specifications ...... 326 pedestrian and cyclist recognition ...... 241 preheat the engine ...... 208 Engine oil pressure status display ...... 240 starting the engine ...... 208 control lamp ...... 327 system limitations ...... 242 starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . 208 Engine specifications ...... 369 temporarily deactivating ...... 244 switching off the engine ...... 209 Environment turn assist ...... 242 Engine compartment ...... 322, 325 ecological driving ...... 230 warnings ...... 240 battery ...... 333 environmental compatibility ...... 361 Emergency braking warning ...... 120 brake fluid ...... 331 refuelling ...... 315 Emergency call ...... 42 coolant ...... 329, 330 Environmental tip Emergency call service ...... 42 engine oil ...... 328 refuelling ...... 315 Emergency locking of the front passenger opening and closing ...... 324 Equipment door ...... 105 safety instructions ...... 322 telephone interface ...... 200 Emergency opening window washer tank ...... 332 ESC driver's door ...... 104 Engine coolant ...... 329 electronic stability control (ESC) ...... 269 rear lid ...... 110 check the level ...... 330 multi-collision brake ...... 270 Emergency operation control lamp ...... 78 Sport mode ...... 272 front passenger door ...... 105 G12evo ...... 329 Event Data Recorder ...... 361 G12 plus-plus ...... 329 Exhaust gases ...... 320 G13 ...... 329 377 Index

Exterior lighting Fuel Glove compartment ...... 143 change a bulb ...... 61 diesel ...... 318 Exterior mirrors fuel gauge ...... 78 H driving with a trailer ...... 293 identification ...... 317 Handbrake folding ...... 126 petrol ...... 317 see Electronic parking brake ...... 266 heated ...... 126 refuelling ...... 315 Hangers ...... 144 settings ...... 126 saving ...... 230 Hazard warning lights ...... 120 Exterior view ...... 7, 8 Fuel consumption HDC External antenna ...... 359 inertia disconnection ...... 230 see Hill descent control (HDC)...... 225 external audio sources why does consumption increase? ...... 321 Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 18 adapting the playback volume ...... 170 Fuel gauge ...... 78 Headlights control lamp ...... 78 change a bulb ...... 61 F Fuel tank cap trips abroad ...... 120 Fabrics: clean ...... 356 opening and closing ...... 315 Headrest ...... 130, 131 Factors that have a negative influence on Fuel tank flap Heating ...... 147 safe driving ...... 12 opening and closing ...... 315 HHC Fastening rings ...... 138 Full-LED headlights ...... 61 see Hill Hold Control (HHC) ...... 223 Filling capacities Full Link ...... 178 High-voltage battery ...... 302 AdBlue tank ...... 318 applications ...... 179 care ...... 304 fuel tank ...... 367 settings ...... 179 Warning lettering ...... 303 window washer tank ...... 367 symbols ...... 179 High-voltage battery charging cable ...... 311 window washer water ...... 332 Fuses ...... 58 Hill descent control (HDC). Filling the tank ...... 315 colour coded ...... 58 control lamp ...... 225 Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . 119 fuse box ...... 58, 59 Hill Hold Control (HHC) ...... 223 Four-wheel drive ...... 229 preparations for replacing fuses ...... 59 Horn ...... 63 snow chains ...... 229 recognise blown fuses ...... 59 Hybrid drive towing ...... 55 replace ...... 59 E-Mode ...... 213 winter tyres ...... 229 Hybrid mode ...... 213 Frequency bands ...... 187 G operating modes ...... 213 Front airbags ...... 25 Gear-change recommendation ...... 224 switching on the drive system ...... 211 Front Assist Gearbox DSG system power indicator ...... 77 see Emergency braking assist system . . . . 240 see Automatic gearbox ...... 218 vehicle sound ...... 212 Front passenger front airbag Gear change control lamp ...... 25 manual gearbox ...... 217 Gear indication ...... 224 378 Index

I Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) ...... 183 K WLAN ...... 182 Identification of fuels ...... 317 Keyless Access Infotainment system Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Press & Drive ...... 207 see Infotainment ...... 85 display ...... 69 special characteristics ...... 100 Inspection ...... 326, 350 Identity accreditation ...... 175 starting the engine ...... 208 Inspection reminder ...... 79 Inertia mode ...... 223 unlocking and locking the vehicle ...... 98 Inspection service ...... 326 Information profiles ...... 65 Keys Instrument panel ...... 64 Infotainment ...... 85, 162 assign a key ...... 92 control and warning lamps ...... 82 adapt menus ...... 168 changing the battery ...... 94 digital (Digital Cockpit) ...... 65 Android Auto™ ...... 180 instructions for the driver (mechanical menu structure ...... 69 Apple CarPlay ...... 179 contact) ...... 211 service intervals display ...... 79 before first use ...... 162 pull out the key blade ...... 93 status display ...... 67, 69 connecting and disconnecting ...... 168 remote control ...... 92 use with the multifunction steering wheel . 81 customise ...... 168 spare key ...... 92 Instrument panel display ...... 65, 67 customised menus ...... 168 synchronise ...... 94 Hybrid vehicles ...... 67 drop-down menu ...... 168 unlock and lock ...... 96, 104 Instrument panel lighting ...... 121 executing functions ...... 168 vehicle key ...... 92 Interior mirror function buttons ...... 86 Key switch ...... 27 anti-dazzle ...... 125 initial configuration ...... 87 Kick-down Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system Internet access ...... 183 automatic gearbox ...... 221 activation ...... 103 Media mode ...... 190 Interior view ...... 11 MirrorLink® ...... 181 ISOFIX ...... 36 L navigation ...... 193 ISOFIX system ...... 36 Lane Assist ...... 252 operating ...... 168 control and warning lamp ...... 252 overview and controls ...... 166 J Lane assist Plus...... 260 Radio mode ...... 186 Lane Assist system Jack ...... 43 safety instructions ...... 162 see Lane Assist ...... 252 position points ...... 48 share a WLAN connection ...... 182 Lane departure warning (Side Assist) Jump leads ...... 52 sound settings ...... 169 control lamp ...... 259 Jump start ...... 52 system settings ...... 169 driving situations ...... 260 description ...... 52 telephone interface ...... 200 how it works ...... 259 vehicle information ...... 88 Light indication ...... 260 vehicle settings ...... 89 Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . 222

379 Index

Leaving a parking space with the parking as- Loading the luggage compartment Maintenance frequencies ...... 326 sist system ...... 279 fastening rings ...... 138 Malfunction Leaving Home ...... 119 general advice ...... 134 adaptive cruise control ...... 249 Legal provisions ...... 176 luggage compartment ...... 106, 134 assisted parting system (Park Assist) ...... 274 Levels control ...... 367 positioning the load ...... 134 clutch ...... 223 Licenses ...... 170 positioning the luggage ...... 134 PreCrash system ...... 23 Lift the vehicle ...... 48 roof carrier system ...... 142 replacement ...... 224 Light Assist ...... 117 trailer ...... 296 sunroof ...... 112 Light range control ...... 120 trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . 140 towing device ...... 294 Lights ...... 114 Load on the roof ...... 142 Manual gearbox ...... 217 audible warnings ...... 114 technical data ...... 142 Mats ...... 16 AUTO ...... 115 Lock and unlock ...... 98 Media Mode ...... 190 background lighting ...... 122 in the locking cylinder ...... 104 Memory function ...... 131 change a bulb ...... 61 with the central locking switch...... 97 Microfiber: clean ...... 356 coming home ...... 119 Luggage compartment ...... 106, 134 MirrorLink® control and warning lamps ...... 114 electric opening and closing ...... 107 Disconnecting ...... 181 control lighting ...... 121 emergency unlocking ...... 110 establish connection ...... 181 controlling the lights ...... 114 enlarge ...... 132 menu ...... 181 cornering light ...... 119 features of the electric rear lid ...... 107 requirements ...... 181 daylight ...... 115 luggage compartment lighting ...... 121 settings ...... 179 dipped beam headlights ...... 114 net bag ...... 139 special characteristics ...... 182 fog light ...... 115 opening and closing controlled by sensors Mirrors fog light with cornering light function . . . . . 119 (Easy Open) ...... 109 adjusting the exterior mirrors ...... 126 headlight range control ...... 120 storing the rear shelf ...... 136 anti-dazzle interior ...... 125 instrument lighting ...... 121 variable luggage compartment floor ...... 137 see also Mirrors ...... 125 interior lights ...... 121 Luggage compartment floor ...... 137 Mobile ...... 359 leaving home ...... 119 Luggage compartment shelf Mobile phones ...... 359 main beam headlight lever ...... 116 storing ...... 136 Mobile Signal Amplifier ...... 204 main beam headlights ...... 114 Lumbar support ...... 128 Multi-collision brake ...... 270 motorway light ...... 115 Multifunction display ...... 70 reading lights ...... 121 M Multimedia ...... 186, 206 side lights ...... 114 Main beam assist ...... 117 favourites ...... 191 switch ...... 115 Main beam headlight lever ...... 116 play ...... 191 switching on and off ...... 115 Maintenance select source ...... 191 turn signal lever ...... 116 see Service ...... 350 use streaming services ...... 192 380 Index

My Beat ...... 207 Noise Operation in winter auxiliary heating ...... 158 battery ...... 333 N brakes ...... 264 diesel ...... 318 Navigation ...... 193 ESC ...... 269 salt on the roads ...... 125 decrease the navigation map ...... 194 parking brake ...... 266 snow chains ...... 345 detailed view ...... 199 tyres ...... 340, 344 tyres ...... 344 edit route ...... 198 Number of seats ...... 14 Original accessories ...... 352 enter an address for a guide destination . . 196 Original Spare Parts ...... 352 favourite destinations ...... 197 O Overview (left hand drive) ...... 9 frequent destinations ...... 197 Octane (petrol) ...... 317 Overview (right hand drive) ...... 10 functions ...... 195 Odometer ...... 65 Ownership accreditation ...... 175 function: entering destination ...... 196 partial ...... 68 increase the navigation map ...... 194 total ...... 68 P last destinations ...... 197 Oil change ...... 329 Painting the vehicle learn usage pattern ...... 199 One-touch signalling function ...... 116 care ...... 355 limitations ...... 194 Online services ...... 173 Panoramic roof ...... 113 managing the map ...... 194 Opening ...... 95 see also Sunroof ...... 112 map ...... 194, 197 bonnet ...... 324 Park Assist navigation announcements ...... 193 panoramic roof ...... 113 see the assisted parking system (Park As- offroad mode ...... 197 rear lid ...... 107 sist) ...... 274 Other options ...... 199 tank cap ...... 315 Parking ...... 273 route details ...... 198 windows ...... 110 at an angle with the reverse assist ...... 290 saved data ...... 194, 199 Opening and closing ...... 95 automatic gearbox ...... 220 saved destinations ...... 197 bonnet ...... 324 with the assisted parking system (Park As- save destination ...... 197 by remote control ...... 96 sist) ...... 278 split screen ...... 199 doors ...... 104 Parking aid symbols ...... 195 in the locking cylinder ...... 104 automatic activation ...... 283 use contact details ...... 198 panoramic roof ...... 113 braking during the manoeuvre ...... 284 use the map ...... 197 rear lid ...... 106 fault ...... 284, 285 use the map to enter the destination . . . . . 197 rear lid with electric opening and closing . 107 parking aid plus ...... 282 Net bag tank cap ...... 315 rear parking aid ...... 285 luggage compartment ...... 139 windows ...... 110 see the assisted parking system (Park As- Net for luggage with the central locking switch...... 97 sist) ...... 274 luggage compartment ...... 139 Operating fault automatic gearbox ...... 221 381 Index

sensors and camera: clean ...... 355 Petrol Traffic information (TP) ...... 188 setting the indications and audio sig- additives ...... 317 tune station ...... 187 nals ...... 284, 285 particulate filter ...... 321 Radio-operated remote control surroundings warning ...... 282 refuelling ...... 317 see Keys ...... 92 towing device ...... 285 Places with risk of explosion ...... 201 Radio mode ...... 186 trailer mode ...... 284 Places with special regulations ...... 201 Radio screen: clean ...... 356 visual indication ...... 283 Power meter ...... 77 Radio telephones ...... 359 Parking aid system Power socket Rain sensor ...... 124 see Parking aid ...... 281, 282, 285 faults ...... 145 function control ...... 125 Parking aid system (Park Assist) ...... 274 Power sockets ...... 145 Raise the vehicle ...... 48 angle parking ...... 278 trailer ...... 294 RCTA ...... 261 automatic brake operation ...... 280 Power steering see Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 258 automatic interruption ...... 275 see Steering ...... 225 Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 258, 261 conditions for leaving a parking space . . . . 279 PreCrash system ...... 22 control lamp ...... 259 leaving a parking space (only when parallel Front Assist monitoring system ...... 22 Rear fog light parked) ...... 279 malfunction ...... 23 control lamp ...... 114 malfunction ...... 274 selecting the driving profile ...... 23 Rear lid ...... 106, 110 parallel parking ...... 278 status display ...... 23 see also Luggage compartment ...... 107 parking conditions ...... 278 Preheat the engine ...... 208 Rear mounting stop early ...... 275 Press & Drive towing device ...... 300 Parking distance warning system start button ...... 207 Rear parking aid ...... 285 see Parking aid ...... 281, 282, 285 starting the engine ...... 208 Rear seat Parking ventilation ...... 155 Proactive speed adjustment ...... 250 fold down with the remote unlocking lever . 133 ParkPilot activation ...... 251 Rear Traffic Alert ...... 261 see Parking aid ...... 281, 282, 285 driving ...... 251 Rear View Camera ...... 288 Partial odometer ...... 69 limitations ...... 250 Rear window wiper ...... 123 Particulate filter ...... 321 problems and solutions ...... 251 Refuelling Pedals ...... 14, 16 control lamp ...... 78 Peripheral view system (Top View Camera) . 286 R fuel gauge ...... 78 display ...... 287 Radar sensors ...... 233 opening the fuel tank flap...... 315 menus ...... 287 Radio ...... 186 Releasing the seat belt ...... 19 modes ...... 287 equipment ...... 187 Remote control key special characteristics ...... 287 frequency bands ...... 187 unlock and lock ...... 96 usage instructions ...... 287 preset buttons ...... 187 Remote control (independent heating) . . . . . 157 symbols ...... 187 changing the battery ...... 157 382 Index

Repair work ...... 359 Safe driving ...... 12 heating ...... 153 Requirements for Apple CarPlay ...... 179 Safe security system ...... 101 incorrect positions ...... 14 Reverse assist (Rear View) ...... 288 Safety manual adjustment ...... 128 angle parking ...... 290 child safety ...... 31 memory function ...... 131 check list ...... 290 child seats ...... 31 number of seats ...... 14 cross traffic ...... 290 safe driving ...... 12 removing the headrest ...... 131 hitching a trailer ...... 290 Safety equipment ...... 12 Selective catalytic reduction ...... 318 requirements ...... 290, 291 Safety instructions ...... 162 Selective unlocking system ...... 96 settings ...... 291 central airbag ...... 28 Selector lever (automatic transmission) usage instructions ...... 291 head-protection airbags ...... 30 positions ...... 219 Reverse (automatic gearbox) ...... 219 seat belt tensioners ...... 21 Selling the vehicle ...... 176 Revolution counter ...... 65, 76 side airbags ...... 29 Service Road signs using child seats ...... 33 Digital Maintenance plan ...... 350 shown on the display ...... 73 using seat belts ...... 18 flexible service ...... 350 Road signs detection system ...... 73 Save fuel inspection ...... 350 how it works ...... 73 inertia mode ...... 223 oil change service ...... 350 limited operation ...... 74 Screen proof of Service ...... 350 shown on the display ...... 73 clean ...... 170 services ...... 350 speed warning ...... 74 Seat belts ...... 16 service sets ...... 352 trailer ...... 74 adjusting the seat belt ...... 20 service works ...... 350 windscreen damage ...... 74 adjustment ...... 19 set service intervals ...... 350 Roof carrier ...... 140 control lamp ...... 16 terms of use ...... 351 fix the crossbars ...... 141 protective function ...... 17 Service interval display ...... 69, 351 Roof carrier system ...... 140 purpose ...... 16, 23 Service intervals ...... 79 Roof rack ...... 140 safety instructions ...... 18 Service Menu Rotation direction unfastened ...... 18 identifying letters on engine ...... 69 tyres ...... 50 Seat belt tensioners ...... 21 restart the oil service ...... 69 Running in control lamp ...... 25 restart Trip ...... 69 new brake pads ...... 264 Seat heating ...... 153 service intervals display ...... 69 new engine ...... 229 SEAT Ident ...... 175 time ...... 69 new tyres ...... 339 Seats Service Mobility ...... 352 adjusting the headrests ...... 130 Service notification: consult ...... 80 S backrest of the rear seat ...... 132 Set of vehicle keys ...... 92 S-PIN ...... 175 electric settings ...... 129 Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . 220 Safe ...... 210 fitting the headrest ...... 131 Signal amplifier ...... 204 383 Index

Snow chains ...... 345 Stationary air conditioning ...... 159 multifunction ...... 91 four-wheel drive ...... 229 operation ...... 159 shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . 220 Sound settings ...... 169 programming ...... 160 Steering wheel heating ...... 154 Sound system ...... 171 Status display ...... 69 Storage compartment ...... 142 Spare parts ...... 359 ACT ...... 230 drawers ...... 143 Spare wheel ...... 347 adaptive cruise control ...... 247 glove compartment ...... 143 Special characteristics doors, bonnet and rear lid open ...... 68 glove compartment light ...... 121 Android Auto™ ...... 181 Drive Profile ...... 226 on-board documentation ...... 143 Apple CarPlay ...... 180 ECO ...... 69 on the front passenger side ...... 143 high pressure cleaning equipment ...... 298 Eco-driving notes ...... 75 other object holders ...... 144 MirrorLink® ...... 182 Emergency brake assistance system (Front Storage compartment accessories peripheral view system (Top View Camera) .287 Assist) ...... 240 see Storage ...... 142 towing ...... 53, 56 gear-change recommendation ...... 68 Storage of accident data ...... 361 tow start ...... 53 identifying letters on engine ...... 69 Storing objects ...... 134 trailer mode ...... 297 instrument panel ...... 67 bag hooks ...... 139 Speed limiter ...... 238 odometer ...... 68 fastening rings ...... 138 indication on display ...... 238 outside temperature ...... 68 loading the trailer ...... 296 operating ...... 239 PreCrash system ...... 23 net bag ...... 139 Speed symbol ...... 340 road signs ...... 73 positioning the load ...... 134 Sport Mode ...... 272 selector lever positions ...... 68, 219 positioning the luggage ...... 134 Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer service intervals ...... 79 roof carrier ...... 140 combination ...... 297 speed limiter ...... 238 roof carrier system ...... 140, 142 Start-Stop ...... 215 speed warning ...... 69 trailer ...... 291 Start-Stop system time ...... 76 trailer mode ...... 296 disconnect and connect manually ...... 217 Travel Assist ...... 255 trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . 140 driver indications ...... 214 Tyre pressure monitoring ...... 346 Sun blind ...... 128 how it works ...... 215 warning and information messages ...... 71 Sun protection ...... 128 lamps ...... 214 Steering Sunroof ...... 112 stopping and starting the engine ...... 215 control lamp ...... 226 anti-trap function ...... 114 the engine does not turn off ...... 215 electromechanical steering ...... 225 malfunction ...... 112 the engine starts by itself ...... 215 Steering wheel Sunshade blind Starter button ...... 207 adjust ...... 15 anti-trap function (glass roof) ...... 114 Start the engine by towing ...... 54 controls ...... 91 Switching off special characteristics ...... 53 heating ...... 154 telephone ...... 201 telephone interface ...... 201 384 Index

System settings ...... 169 Top View Camera Trailer ...... 291 see the Peripheral view system (Top View adjusting the headlights ...... 296 T Camera) ...... 286 anti-theft alarm ...... 295 Tail lights Torque connecting ...... 294 change a bulb ...... 61 wheel nuts ...... 49 exterior mirrors ...... 293 TCS Touch screen ...... 166 hitching ...... 294 see Traction control ...... 269 Touch zones ...... 166 LED tail lights ...... 293, 295 Technical data ...... 367 Towable loads loading ...... 296 fuel consumption ...... 367 loading the trailer ...... 296 malfunction ...... 294 load on the roof ...... 142 Tow cable ...... 293, 294 parking aid ...... 284, 285 vehicle dimensions ...... 372 Tow hook power socket ...... 294 vertical load on the tow hitch ...... 291 control lamp ...... 299 retrofitting a towing bracket ...... 300 weights ...... 368 unlocking electrically ...... 298 special characteristics ...... 263 Technical modifications ...... 359 Towing device stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail- Telephone fitting a bicycle carrier ...... 299 er combination ...... 297 contacts ...... 204 fitting later ...... 300 tail lights ...... 293, 295 disconnecting ...... 201 malfunction ...... 294 technical requirements ...... 293 favourites ...... 204 tow hook with electric unlocking ...... 298 towable loads ...... 296 pairing a mobile phone ...... 202 Towing the vehicle ...... 53, 55 towing cable ...... 293, 294 Phone book ...... 204 automatic gearbox ...... 55 trailer mode ...... 296 send messages ...... 203 four-wheel drive ...... 55 unlocking the tow hook electrically ...... 298 speed dial buttons ...... 204 front towline anchorage ...... 56 vertical load on the tow hitch ...... 291, 296 to call ...... 203 rear towline anchorage ...... 57 Trailer mode Telephone interface ...... 200 special characteristics ...... 53, 56 see Trailer ...... 291 places with risk of explosion ...... 201 tow bar ...... 55 Transportation of children ...... 31 Temperature indicator towing cable ...... 55 Trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 140 exterior ...... 68 towing prohibited ...... 55 Travel Assist Time with towing device ...... 55 see Driving Assist (Travel Assist) ...... 254 adjust ...... 69, 76 Traction control ...... 269 Trips abroad Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . 218, 220 Trademarks ...... 170 headlights ...... 120 To change the battery Traffic information (TP) ...... 188 petrol ...... 232 of the vehicle key ...... 94 Traffic programme Turning off the lights ...... 114 Top Tether ...... 36, 38, 39 see Traffic information (TP) ...... 188 Turning on the lights ...... 114 Top Tether System ...... 36, 38, 39 Turn signal lever ...... 116

385 Index

Tyre Mobility System V W see Anti-puncture kit ...... 44 Vanity mirror ...... 128 Warning symbols Tyre pressure ...... 342 Variable luggage compartment floor ...... 137 see Control and warning lamps ...... 82 Tyre pressure monitor system ...... 346 Vehicle Warning triangle ...... 120 Tyre pressure monitor systems data label ...... 367 Warranty ...... 353 Tyre pressure monitor indicator ...... 346 identification data ...... 367 Washing the vehicle Tyre profile ...... 343 identification number ...... 367 conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . 354 Tyre repair kit ...... 43 lending or selling ...... 176 high pressure cleaning equipment ...... 354 see also Anti-puncture kit ...... 44 parking on inclines ...... 273 sensors ...... 274 Tyre repairs ...... 44 parking on upward slopes ...... 273 special characteristics ...... 109 Tyres raise ...... 48 Weights ...... 368 accessories ...... 340 unlocking and locking (Keyless Access) . . . . 98 Wheel balance ...... 342 change ...... 46 vehicle ID number ...... 367 Wheel nuts ...... 47, 344 directional tread pattern ...... 50 Vehicle care anti-theft device ...... 47 foreign objects inserted ...... 340 wiper blade service position ...... 50 caps ...... 47 for winter ...... 344 Vehicle conservation products ...... 353 torque ...... 49 new tyres ...... 340 Vehicle dimensions ...... 372 Wheels speed symbol ...... 340 Vehicle information ...... 88 change ...... 46, 49 tread wear indicators ...... 343 Vehicle location ...... 176 changing ...... 343 tyre pressure ...... 342 Vehicle maintenance ...... 353 changing a wheel ...... 46 useful life ...... 342 Vehicle seats ...... 14 new wheels ...... 340 with directional tread pattern ...... 340 Vehicle settings ...... 89 snow chains ...... 345 Tyre tread depth ...... 343 Vehicle sound ...... 212 spare wheel ...... 347 Tyre wear ...... 343 Vehicle tool kit ...... 43 wheel nuts ...... 344 U Vehicle wallet compartment ...... 143 Wheel spanner ...... 43 Ventilation ...... 147 Wheel trim Unlock and lock ...... 98 Vertical load on the tow hitch ...... 291 remove ...... 47 by remote control ...... 96 loading the trailer ...... 296 Wi-Fi ...... 172 doors ...... 104 voice control ...... 184 Window controls ...... 110 with the central locking switch...... 97 Android Auto™ ...... 181 Windows USB ...... 206 Siri™ (Apple CarPlay™) ...... 180 automatic opening/closing ...... 111 USB port ...... 206 Volume automatic operation ...... 111 set for external audio sources ...... 170 convenience closing ...... 111 convenience opening ...... 111

386 Index

Window washer window washer lever ...... 123 Window washer system ...... 332 Window washer water check ...... 332 filling quantities ...... 332 refill ...... 332 Windscreen washer ...... 123 Windscreen wipers ...... 123 functions ...... 124 lift the blade ...... 50 rain sensor ...... 124 reposition the blade ...... 50 service position ...... 50 special characteristics ...... 123 Winter conditions sunroof ...... 112 trailer ...... 291 Winter tyres ...... 344 four-wheel drive ...... 229 Wiper and rear window wiper blades cleaning ...... 51, 355 replacement ...... 51 service position ...... 50 Wireless Charger ...... 204 Wireless charging ...... 204 WLAN ...... 182 X XDS ...... 270

387 Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys Model: The following items were delivered YES NO with the vehicle: Vehicle Registration: On-board documentation Vehicle identification number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key or vehicle delivery: Correct working order of all keys was checked SEAT Official Service/CUPRA authorised service: Location:

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. Telephone: ❀ © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.06.21 Inglés 5FF012720BH (06.21)

5FF012720BH

CUPRA FORMENTOR Inglés (06.21) OWNER’S MANUAL CUPRA FORMENTOR